Data Guard Broker PDF

Oracle® Data Guard
Broker
18c
E83845-01
February 2018
Oracle Data Guard Broker, 18c
E83845-01
Copyright © 1999, 2018, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Primary Author: Kathy Rich
Contributors: Larry Carpenter, Laurence Clarke, Jeff Detjen, Mahesh Girkar, Nitin Karkhanis, Sadhana
Kyathappala, Chang Kyu Lee, Steve Lee, Jiangbin Luo, Bob McGuirk, Joe Meeks, Darryl Presley, Ashish
Ray, Lawrence To, Di Yang, Zaixian Xie
This software and related documentation are provided under a license agreement containing restrictions on
use and disclosure and are protected by intellectual property laws. Except as expressly permitted in your
license agreement or allowed by law, you may not use, copy, reproduce, translate, broadcast, modify,
license, transmit, distribute, exhibit, perform, publish, or display any part, in any form, or by any means.
Reverse engineering, disassembly, or decompilation of this software, unless required by law for
interoperability, is prohibited.
The information contained herein is subject to change without notice and is not warranted to be error-free. If
you find any errors, please report them to us in writing.
If this is software or related documentation that is delivered to the U.S. Government or anyone licensing it on
behalf of the U.S. Government, then the following notice is applicable:
U.S. GOVERNMENT END USERS: Oracle programs, including any operating system, integrated software,
any programs installed on the hardware, and/or documentation, delivered to U.S. Government end users are
"commercial computer software" pursuant to the applicable Federal Acquisition Regulation and agency-
specific supplemental regulations. As such, use, duplication, disclosure, modification, and adaptation of the
programs, including any operating system, integrated software, any programs installed on the hardware,
and/or documentation, shall be subject to license terms and license restrictions applicable to the programs.
No other rights are granted to the U.S. Government.
This software or hardware is developed for general use in a variety of information management applications.
It is not developed or intended for use in any inherently dangerous applications, including applications that
may create a risk of personal injury. If you use this software or hardware in dangerous applications, then you
shall be responsible to take all appropriate fail-safe, backup, redundancy, and other measures to ensure its
safe use. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates disclaim any liability for any damages caused by use of this
software or hardware in dangerous applications.
Oracle and Java are registered trademarks of Oracle and/or its affiliates. Other names may be trademarks of
their respective owners.
Intel and Intel Xeon are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation. All SPARC trademarks are
used under license and are trademarks or registered trademarks of SPARC International, Inc. AMD, Opteron,
the AMD logo, and the AMD Opteron logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Advanced Micro
Devices. UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group.
This software or hardware and documentation may provide access to or information about content, products,
and services from third parties. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates are not responsible for and expressly
disclaim all warranties of any kind with respect to third-party content, products, and services unless otherwise
set forth in an applicable agreement between you and Oracle. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates will not be
responsible for any loss, costs, or damages incurred due to your access to or use of third-party content,
products, or services, except as set forth in an applicable agreement between you and Oracle.
Contents
Preface
Audience xvii
Documentation Accessibility xvii
Related Documents xvii
Conventions xvii
Changes in This Release for Oracle Data Guard Broker

Changes in Oracle Database Release 18c, Version 18.1 xix
1 Oracle Data Guard Broker Concepts

1.1 Overview of Oracle Data Guard and the Broker 1-1
1.1.1 Oracle Data Guard Configurations and Broker Configurations 1-1
1.1.2 Oracle Data Guard Broker 1-2
1.1.3 Oracle Data Guard Broker and CDBs 1-3
1.1.4 Oracle Data Guard Broker and Oracle Global Data Services 1-4
1.2 Benefits of Oracle Data Guard Broker 1-5
1.3 Oracle Data Guard Broker Components 1-8
1.4 Oracle Data Guard Broker User Interfaces 1-9
1.4.1 Oracle Enterprise Manager Cloud Control 1-9
1.4.2 Oracle Data Guard Command-Line Interface (DGMGRL) 1-10
1.5 Oracle Data Guard Monitor 1-10
1.5.1 Oracle Data Guard Monitor (DMON) Process 1-10
1.5.2 Configuration Management 1-12
1.5.3 Database Property Management 1-12
2 Oracle Data Guard Installation

2.1 Oracle Data Guard Installation 2-1
2.2 Prerequisites 2-2
iii
3 Managing Broker Configurations
3.1 Configuration Support 3-1
3.2 Configuration Properties 3-3
3.3 Setting Up the Broker Configuration Files 3-4
3.3.1 Renaming the Broker Configuration Files 3-4
3.3.2 Managing Broker Configuration Files in an Oracle RAC Environment 3-5
3.3.2.1 Using Cluster File System (CFS) for Configuration Files 3-6
3.3.2.2 Using Oracle ASM Disk Groups for Configuration Files 3-6
3.4 Starting the Data Guard Broker 3-7
3.5 Management Cycle of a Broker Configuration 3-8
3.6 Enable and Disable Operations 3-11
3.7 Configuration Status 3-12
4 Managing the Members of a Broker Configuration

4.1 Managing Broker Configuration Members 4-1
4.2 Managing States of Broker Configuration Members 4-1
4.2.1 Database State Transitions 4-3
4.3 Managing Database Properties 4-5
4.3.1 Monitorable (Read-Only) Properties 4-7
4.3.2 Configurable (Changeable) Properties 4-7
4.3.2.1 Resetting Broker Configurable Properties to Default Values 4-8
4.4 Managing Redo Transport Services 4-9
4.4.1 Setting Up For Redo Transport 4-10
4.4.2 Managing Redo Transport Services for Data Protection Modes 4-10
4.4.3 Advanced Redo Transport Settings 4-11
4.4.4 Turning Redo Transport Services On and Off 4-13
4.4.5 Specifying Locations for Archived Redo Log Files 4-14
4.4.6 Other Redo Transport Settings 4-15
4.4.7 Redo Transport Services in an Oracle RAC Database Environment 4-15
4.4.8 Transport Lag 4-16
4.5 Managing Redo Transport Services for Recovery Appliance 4-17
4.6 Managing Log Apply Services 4-18
4.6.1 Managing Delayed Apply 4-19
4.6.2 Managing Parallel Apply with Redo Apply 4-19
4.6.3 Managing Multi-Instance Redo Apply 4-20
4.6.4 Allocating Resources to SQL Apply 4-21
4.6.5 Managing the DBA_LOGSTDBY_EVENTS Table 4-21
4.6.6 Apply Services in an Oracle RAC Database Environment 4-21
4.6.6.1 Selecting the Apply Instance 4-22
4.6.6.2 Apply Instance Failover 4-23
iv
4.6.7 Apply Lag 4-24
4.7 Managing Data Protection Modes 4-25
4.7.1 Setting the Protection Mode for Your Configuration 4-25
4.7.1.1 Setting the Protection Mode Task 1: Determine Which Data
Protection Mode You Want to Use 4-25
4.7.1.2 Setting the Protection Mode Task 2: Set up standby redo log files 4-27
4.7.1.3 Setting the Protection Mode Task 3: Set the redo transport mode 4-27
4.7.1.4 Setting the Protection Mode Task 4: Using DGMGRL or Cloud
Control 4-28
4.7.2 How the Protection Modes Influence Broker Operations 4-28
4.7.2.1 Upgrading or Downgrading the Current Protection Mode 4-29
4.7.2.2 Switchover Operations 4-29
4.7.2.3 Failover Operations 4-30
4.7.2.4 Disable and Enable Operations 4-30
4.7.2.5 Requirements For Removing a Database from the Configuration 4-31
4.7.2.6 Requirements On Other Operations 4-31
4.8 Managing Far Sync Instances 4-32
4.9 Managing Fast-Start Failover 4-33
4.9.1 Configure Properties to Tune Fast-Start Failover 4-34
4.9.2 Configure Conditions for Fast-start Failover 4-35
4.9.3 Application Initiated Fast-Start Failover 4-36
4.10 Managing Database Conversions 4-36
4.11 Database Status 4-37
4.11.1 Querying Database Status 4-38
4.11.2 Validating a Database Before a Role Change 4-39
4.11.3 Validating the Server Parameter Files Before a Role Change 4-40
4.11.4 Validating the Network Configuration Before a Role Change 4-40
4.11.5 Validating the Static Connect Identifier Before a Role Change 4-40
5 Switchover and Failover Operations

5.1 Overview of Switchover and Failover in a Broker Environment 5-1
5.2 Choosing a Target Standby Database 5-2
5.2.1 Choosing a Target Standby Database for Switchover 5-3
5.2.2 Choosing a Target Standby Database for Failover 5-4
5.3 Switchover 5-4
5.3.1 Before You Perform a Switchover Operation 5-5
5.3.2 Starting a Switchover 5-7
5.3.3 How the Broker Performs a Switchover 5-7
5.4 Manual Failover 5-8
5.4.1 Complete and Immediate Manual Failovers 5-8
5.4.2 Performing a Manual Failover Operation 5-9
v
5.4.2.1 Performing a Manual Failover Task 1: Determine Which of the
Available Standby Databases is the Best Target for the Failover 5-10
5.4.2.2 Performing a Manual Failover Task 2: Start the Failover 5-10
5.4.2.3 Performing a Manual Failover Task 3: Reset the Protection Mode 5-11
5.4.2.4 Performing a Manual Failover Task 4: Re-establish a Disaster-
Recovery Configuration 5-11
5.4.2.5 How the Broker Performs a Complete Failover Operation 5-12
5.4.2.6 How the Broker Performs an Immediate Failover Operation 5-13
5.4.3 Reenabling Disabled Databases After a Role Change 5-14
5.4.3.1 How to Reinstate a Database 5-15
5.4.3.2 How to Re-create and Reenable a Disabled Database 5-16
5.5 Fast-Start Failover 5-16
5.5.1 Prerequisites for Enabling Fast-Start Failover 5-19
5.5.2 Enabling Fast-Start Failover 5-20
5.5.2.1 Enabling Fast-Start Failover Task 1: Determine Which Available
Standby Databases Should Be Targets for the Failover 5-21
5.5.2.2 Enabling Fast-Start Failover Task 2: Specify Target Standby
Databases with the FastStartFailoverTarget Configuration
Property 5-21
5.5.2.3 Enabling Fast-Start Failover Task 3: Determine the Protection
Mode You Want 5-21
5.5.2.4 Enabling Fast-Start Failover Task 4: Set the
FastStartFailoverThreshold Configuration Property 5-22
5.5.2.5 Enabling Fast-Start Failover Task 5: Set Other Properties Related
to Fast-Start Failover (Optional) 5-23
5.5.2.6 Enabling Fast-Start Failover Task 6: Enable Additional Fast-Start
Failover Conditions (Optional) 5-25
5.5.2.7 Enabling Fast-Start Failover Task 7: Using DGMGRL or Cloud
Control 5-25
5.5.2.8 Enabling Fast-Start Failover Task 8: Start the Observer 5-26
5.5.2.9 Enabling Fast-Start Failover Task 9: Verify the Fast-Start Failover
Environment 5-27
5.5.2.10 When Fast-Start Failover Is Enabled and the Observer Is
Running 5-28
5.5.2.11 Restrictions When Fast-Start Failover is Enabled 5-30
5.5.2.12 Shutting Down the Primary Database When Fast-Start Failover
Is Enabled 5-31
5.5.2.13 Performing Manual Role Changes When Fast-Start Failover Is
Enabled 5-31
5.5.3 Directing a Fast-Start Failover From an Application 5-32
5.5.4 Viewing Fast-Start Failover Configuration Statistics and Status 5-33
5.5.4.1 V$DATABASE View 5-35
5.5.4.2 V$FS_FAILOVER_STATS View 5-37
5.5.5 Disabling Fast-Start Failover 5-37
5.5.6 Performance Considerations for Fast-Start Failover 5-40
vi
5.5.7 Managing the Observer 5-41
5.5.7.1 Installing and Starting the Observer 5-42
5.5.7.2 Viewing Information About the Master Observer 5-44
5.5.7.3 Viewing Information About All Observers 5-45
5.5.7.4 What Happens if the Master Observer Fails? 5-46
5.5.7.5 Managing Observer's Connection to the Primary 5-47
5.5.7.6 Stopping the Observer 5-47
5.5.7.7 Moving the Observer to Another Computer 5-49
5.5.7.8 How the Observer Maintains Fast-Start Failover Configuration
Information 5-49
5.5.7.9 Managing Observers for Multiple Configurations 5-49
5.5.7.10 Patching an Environment When the Observer Is Running and
Fast-start Failover Is Enabled 5-53
5.5.8 Reinstating the Former Primary Database in the Broker Configuration 5-53
5.5.8.1 Requirements 5-54
5.5.8.2 Restrictions on Reinstatement 5-54
5.5.8.3 How the Broker Handles a Failed Reinstatement 5-55
5.5.9 Shutting Down Databases In a Fast-Start Failover Environment 5-55
5.6 Database Client Considerations 5-55
5.6.1 Oracle Data Guard Specific FAN and FCF Configuration Requirements 5-56
5.6.1.1 Oracle Net Configuration Requirements 5-56
5.6.1.2 Database Service Configuration Requirements 5-57
5.6.1.3 ONS Configuration Requirements 5-60
5.6.1.4 Application Continuity 5-60
6 Scenarios Using the DGMGRL Command-Line Interface

6.1 Prerequisites for Getting Started 6-1
6.2 Scenario 1: Creating a Configuration 6-2
6.2.1 Creating a Configuration Task 1: Invoke DGMGRL 6-2
6.2.2 Creating a Configuration Task 2: Connect to the Primary Database 6-3
6.2.3 Creating a Configuration Task 3: Clear Existing Remote Redo Transport
Destinations on Standbys and Far Sync Instances To Be Added. 6-3
6.2.4 Creating a Configuration Task 4: Create the Broker Configuration 6-4
6.2.5 Creating a Configuration Task 5: Show the Configuration Information 6-4
6.2.6 Creating a Configuration Task 6: Add a Standby Database to the
Configuration 6-5
6.3 Scenario 2: Setting Database Properties 6-5
6.4 Scenario 3: Enabling the Configuration and Databases 6-7
6.5 Scenario 4: Setting the Configuration Protection Mode 6-8
6.6 Scenario 5: Setting up Maximum Availability Mode with a Far Sync Instance 6-10
6.7 Scenario 6: Enabling Fast-Start Failover and Starting the Observer 6-12
vii
6.8 Scenario 7: Enabling Fast-Start Failover When a Far Sync Instance Is In Use 6-15
6.9 Scenario 8: Performing Routine Management Tasks 6-15
6.9.1 Changing Properties and States 6-15
6.9.1.1 Alter a Database Property 6-15
6.9.1.2 Reset a Property to Its Default Value 6-16
6.9.1.3 Alter the State of a Standby Database 6-16
6.9.1.4 Alter the State of a Primary Database 6-16
6.9.2 Disabling the Configuration and Databases 6-16
6.9.2.1 Disable a Configuration 6-17
6.9.2.2 Disable a Standby Database 6-17
6.9.2.3 Disabling a Far Sync Instance 6-18
6.9.3 Removing the Configuration, a Standby Database, or a Far Sync
Instance 6-19
6.9.3.1 Removing a Standby Database from the Configuration 6-19
6.9.3.2 Removing a Far Sync Instance from the Configuration 6-20
6.9.3.3 Removing a Broker Configuration 6-21
6.10 Scenario 9: Performing a Switchover Operation 6-21
6.10.1 Using the SWITCHOVER Command Task 1: Check the Primary
Database 6-22
6.10.2 Using the SWITCHOVER Command Task 2: Check the Standby
Database That is the Target of the Switchover 6-23
6.10.3 Using the SWITCHOVER Command Task 3: Confirm That the
Database Is Ready for a Role Change 6-24
6.10.4 Using the SWITCHOVER Command Task 4: Issue the Switchover
Command 6-25
6.10.5 Using the SWITCHOVER Command Task 5: Show the Configuration 6-25
6.11 Scenario 10: Performing a Manual Failover Operation 6-26
6.12 Scenario 11: Reinstating a Failed Primary Database 6-28
6.13 Scenario 12: Converting a Physical Standby to a Snapshot Standby 6-29
6.14 Scenario 13: Monitoring a Data Guard Configuration 6-30
6.14.1 Monitoring a Configuration Task 1: Check the Configuration Status 6-30
6.14.2 Monitoring a Configuration Task 2: Check the Database Status 6-31
6.14.3 Monitoring a Configuration Task 3: Check the LogXptStatus
Monitorable Property 6-31
6.14.4 Monitoring a Configuration Task 4: Check the InconsistentProperties
Monitorable Property 6-32
6.14.5 Monitoring a Configuration Task 5: Check the
InconsistentLogXptProps Monitorable Property 6-32
6.15 Scenario 14: Adding a Recovery Appliance to a Broker Configuration 6-33
7 Oracle Data Guard Command-Line Interface Reference

7.1 Starting the Data Guard Command-Line Interface 7-1
viii
7.1.1 DGMGRL Optional Parameters 7-1
7.1.2 DGMGRL Command Format and Parameters 7-3
7.1.3 DGMGRL Command Usage Notes 7-6
7.2 Exiting the Data Guard Command-Line Interface 7-8
7.3 @ (at sign) Command 7-8
7.4 / (slash) Command 7-9
7.5 ADD DATABASE 7-10
7.6 ADD FAR_SYNC 7-11
7.7 ADD RECOVERY_APPLIANCE 7-11
7.8 CONNECT 7-12
7.9 CONVERT DATABASE 7-14
7.10 CREATE CONFIGURATION 7-15
7.11 DISABLE CONFIGURATION 7-17
7.12 DISABLE DATABASE 7-17
7.13 DISABLE FAR_SYNC 7-18
7.14 DISABLE FAST_START FAILOVER 7-18
7.15 DISABLE FAST_START FAILOVER CONDITION 7-19
7.16 DISABLE RECOVERY_APPLIANCE 7-20
7.17 EDIT CONFIGURATION (Property) 7-20
7.18 EDIT CONFIGURATION (Protection Mode) 7-21
7.19 EDIT CONFIGURATION (RENAME) 7-23
7.20 EDIT CONFIGURATION RESET (Property) 7-24
7.21 EDIT DATABASE (Property) 7-24
7.22 EDIT DATABASE (Rename) 7-26
7.23 EDIT DATABASE (State) 7-26
7.24 EDIT DATABASE RESET (Property) 7-27
7.25 EDIT FAR_SYNC 7-28
7.26 EDIT FAR_SYNC RESET (Property) 7-28
7.27 EDIT INSTANCE (AUTO PFILE) 7-29
7.28 EDIT INSTANCE (Property) 7-30
7.29 EDIT INSTANCE RESET (Property) 7-31
7.30 EDIT RECOVERY_APPLIANCE (Property) 7-33
7.31 EDIT RECOVERY_APPLIANCE (Rename) 7-34
7.32 EDIT RECOVERY_APPLIANCE RESET (Property) 7-34
7.33 ENABLE CONFIGURATION 7-35
7.34 ENABLE DATABASE 7-36
7.35 ENABLE FAR_SYNC 7-37
7.36 ENABLE FAST_START FAILOVER 7-37
7.37 ENABLE FAST_START FAILOVER CONDITION 7-39
7.38 ENABLE RECOVERY_APPLIANCE 7-40
7.39 EXIT 7-41
ix
7.40 FAILOVER 7-41
7.41 HELP 7-44
7.42 HOST or ! (exclamation point) 7-45
7.43 MIGRATE PLUGGABLE DATABASE 7-46
7.44 QUIT 7-49
7.45 REINSTATE DATABASE 7-49
7.46 REMOVE CONFIGURATION 7-50
7.47 REMOVE DATABASE 7-51
7.48 REMOVE FAR_SYNC 7-52
7.49 REMOVE INSTANCE 7-53
7.50 REMOVE RECOVERY_APPLIANCE 7-54
7.51 SET ECHO 7-55
7.52 SET MASTEROBSERVER TO 7-55
7.53 SET MASTEROBSERVERHOSTS 7-56
7.54 SET ObserverConfigFile 7-57
7.55 SET TIME 7-57
7.56 SHOW ALL 7-58
7.57 SHOW CONFIGURATION 7-58
7.58 SHOW CONFIGURATION WHEN PRIMARY IS 7-61
7.59 SHOW DATABASE 7-62
7.60 SHOW FAR_SYNC 7-65
7.61 SHOW FAST_START FAILOVER 7-67
7.62 SHOW INSTANCE 7-68
7.63 SHOW OBSERVER 7-70
7.64 SHOW ObserverConfigFile 7-71
7.65 SHOW OBSERVERS 7-72
7.66 SHOW RECOVERY_APPLIANCE 7-73
7.67 SHUTDOWN 7-74
7.68 SPOOL 7-75
7.69 SQL 7-76
7.70 START OBSERVER 7-77
7.71 START OBSERVER IN BACKGROUND 7-79
7.72 START OBSERVING 7-81
7.73 STARTUP 7-81
7.74 STOP OBSERVER 7-83
7.75 STOP OBSERVING 7-84
7.76 SWITCHOVER 7-85
7.77 VALIDATE DATABASE 7-88
7.78 VALIDATE DATABASE DATAFILE 7-93
7.79 VALIDATE DATABASE SPFILE 7-95
7.80 VALIDATE FAR_SYNC 7-96
x
7.81 VALIDATE NETWORK CONFIGURATION 7-98
7.82 VALIDATE STATIC CONNECT IDENTIFIER 7-99
8 Oracle Data Guard Broker Properties

8.1 Configuration Properties 8-1
8.1.1 BystandersFollowRoleChange 8-3
8.1.2 CommunicationTimeout 8-4
8.1.3 ConfigurationWideServiceName 8-4
8.1.4 ExternalDestination1 8-5
8.1.5 ExternalDestination2 8-6
8.1.6 FastStartFailoverAutoReinstate 8-7
8.1.7 FastStartFailoverLagLimit 8-7
8.1.8 FastStartFailoverPmyShutdown 8-8
8.1.9 FastStartFailoverThreshold 8-9
8.1.10 ObserverOverride 8-9
8.1.11 ObserverReconnect 8-10
8.1.12 OperationTimeout 8-10
8.1.13 PreferredObserverHosts 8-11
8.1.14 PrimaryLostWriteAction 8-12
8.1.15 TraceLevel 8-13
8.2 Monitorable (Read-Only) Properties 8-14
8.2.1 InconsistentLogXptProps (Inconsistent Redo Transport Properties) 8-14
8.2.2 InconsistentProperties (Inconsistent Properties) 8-15
8.2.3 LogXptStatus (Redo Transport Status) 8-15
8.2.4 LsbyFailedTxnInfo (Logical Standby Failed Transaction Information) 8-16
8.2.5 LsbyParameters (Logical Standby Parameters) 8-17
8.2.6 RecvQEntries (Receive Queue Entries) 8-17
8.2.7 SendQEntries (Send Queue Entries) 8-18
8.2.8 TopWaitEvents 8-20
8.3 Configurable Properties 8-20
8.3.1 ApplyInstances 8-23
8.3.2 ApplyInstanceTimeout 8-24
8.3.3 ApplyLagThreshold 8-24
8.3.4 ApplyParallel 8-25
8.3.5 ArchiveLagTarget 8-26
8.3.6 Binding 8-26
8.3.7 DataGuardSyncLatency 8-27
8.3.8 DbFileNameConvert 8-28
8.3.9 DelayMins 8-29
8.3.10 DGConnectIdentifier 8-30
xi
8.3.11 Encryption 8-31
8.3.12 FastStartFailoverTarget 8-31
8.3.13 InstanceName 8-32
8.3.14 LogArchiveFormat 8-33
8.3.15 LogArchiveMaxProcesses 8-34
8.3.16 LogArchiveMinSucceedDest 8-34
8.3.17 LogArchiveTrace 8-35
8.3.18 LogFileNameConvert 8-36
8.3.19 LogShipping 8-37
8.3.20 LogXptMode 8-37
8.3.21 LsbyMaxEventsRecorded 8-39
8.3.22 LsbyMaxServers 8-39
8.3.23 LsbyMaxSga 8-40
8.3.24 LsbyPreserveCommitOrder 8-40
8.3.25 LsbyRecordAppliedDdl 8-41
8.3.26 LsbyRecordSkipDdl 8-41
8.3.27 LsbyRecordSkipErrors 8-42
8.3.28 MaxConnections 8-42
8.3.29 MaxFailure 8-43
8.3.30 NetTimeout 8-44
8.3.31 ObserverConnectIdentifier 8-44
8.3.32 OnlineAlternateLocation 8-45
8.3.33 OnlineArchiveLocation 8-46
8.3.34 PreferredApplyInstance 8-46
8.3.35 PreferredObserverHosts 8-47
8.3.36 RedoCompression 8-48
8.3.37 RedoRoutes 8-49
8.3.37.1 Redo Routing Rules 8-49
8.3.38 ReopenSecs 8-52
8.3.39 StandbyAlternateLocation 8-53
8.3.40 StandbyArchiveLocation 8-53
8.3.41 StandbyFileManagement 8-54
8.3.42 StaticConnectIdentifier 8-55
8.3.43 TransportDisconnectedThreshold 8-56
8.3.44 TransportLagThreshold 8-56
9 Troubleshooting Oracle Data Guard

9.1 Sources of Diagnostic Information 9-1
9.2 General Problems and Solutions 9-2
9.2.1 ORA-16596: database not part of the Oracle Data Guard broker
configuration 9-2
xii
9.2.2 Redo Accumulating on the Primary Is Not Sent to Some Standby
Databases 9-2
9.2.3 Many Log Files Are Received on a Standby Database But Not Applied 9-3
9.2.4 The Request Timed Out or Cloud Control Performance Is Sluggish 9-4
9.2.5 The Primary Database is Flashed Back 9-4
9.2.6 Standby Fails to Automatically Start Up Due to Unknown Service
(ORA-12514) 9-5
9.3 Troubleshooting Problems During a Switchover Operation 9-5
9.4 Troubleshooting Problems During a Failover Operation 9-6
9.4.1 Failed Failovers to Physical Standby Databases 9-6
9.4.1.1 Failed Broker Complete Physical Failovers 9-6
9.4.1.2 Failed Broker Immediate Physical Failovers 9-6
9.4.2 Failed Failovers to Logical Standby Databases 9-7
9.5 Troubleshooting Problems with the Observer 9-7
9.5.1 Problems Starting the Observer 9-7
9.5.2 Problems Because the Observer Has Stopped 9-8
9.5.3 Capturing Observer Actions in the Observer Log File 9-9
A Oracle Data Guard Broker Upgrading and Downgrading

A.1 Upgrading from Oracle Database 9i Release 2 (9.2) to Oracle Database 12c A-1
A.2 Upgrading from Oracle Database 10g and Oracle Database 11g to Oracle
Database 12c A-2
A.3 Downgrading from Oracle Database 12c A-4
Glossary
Index
xiii
List of Examples
4-1 Using the SHOW DATABASE VERBOSE Command to Display Properties 4-6
4-2 Using the RedoRoutes Property for Real-Time Cascading 4-11
4-3 Using the RedoRoutes Property for Remote Alternate Destinations 4-12
4-4 Turn Off Redo Transport Services to All Standby Databases 4-14
4-5 Turn Off Redo Transport Services to a Specific Standby Database 4-14
4-6 Setting Up Redo Transport From a Physical Standby To a Recovery Appliance 4-17
5-1 Sample Observer Configuration File 5-52
6-1 Connecting to the Primary Database on the Local System 6-3
6-2 Connecting to the Primary Database on a Remote System 6-3
7-1 Connecting to a Database Instance on a Local System 7-7
7-2 Connecting to a Database Instance on a Remote System 7-7
7-3 Connecting Using the AS Option 7-8
xiv
List of Figures
1-1 Oracle Data Guard Broker 1-8
1-2 Databases With Broker (DMON) Processes 1-11
3-1 Oracle Data Guard Broker Configuration 3-3
3-2 Broker Configuration Setup in a CFS Area 3-6
3-3 Broker Configuration Setup with Oracle ASM 3-7
3-4 Life Cycle of a Broker Configuration and Its Databases 3-8
5-1 Relationship of Primary and Standby Databases and the Observer 5-19
5-2 The Observer in the Fast-Start Failover Environment 5-41
xv
List of Tables
1-1 Configuration Management With and Without the Broker 1-2
4-1 Database States and Descriptions 4-2
4-2 Oracle Data Guard Protection Modes and Requirements 4-27
5-1 FS_FAILOVER_STATUS Column of the V$DATABASE View 5-35
5-2 FS_FAILOVER_OBSERVER_PRESENT Column of the V$DATABASE View 5-45
7-1 Summary of DGMGRL Commands 7-3
7-2 Examples of Health Conditions 7-39
8-1 Configurable Properties 8-21
xvi
Preface
This document provides information about Oracle Data Guard broker, a management
and monitoring interface that helps you configure, monitor, and control an Oracle Data
Guard broker configuration.
Audience
Oracle Data Guard Broker is intended for database administrators (DBAs) and system
administrators who want to use the Oracle Data Guard broker to automate many of the
tasks involved in configuring and monitoring an Oracle Data Guard configuration.
The information presented in this book assumes that you are already familiar with
Oracle Data Guard, Oracle Enterprise Manager Cloud Control (Cloud Control), Oracle
Real Application Clusters (Oracle RAC), and the network services provided by Oracle
Net Services.
Documentation Accessibility
For information about Oracle's commitment to accessibility, visit the Oracle
Accessibility Program website at http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?
ctx=acc&id=docacc.
Access to Oracle Support

Oracle customers that have purchased support have access to electronic support
through My Oracle Support. For information, visit http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/
lookup?ctx=acc&id=info or visit http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=acc&id=trs
if you are hearing impaired.
Related Documents
Refer to the following documentation for more information about Oracle Data Guard:
• Oracle Data Guard Concepts and Administration.
• Oracle release notes specific to your operating system.
• Oracle installation guide specific to your operating system.
• For more information about managing Oracle Data Guard through the Cloud
Control graphical user interface (GUI), see the Cloud Control online Help.
Conventions
The following text conventions are used in this document:
xvii
Preface
Convention Meaning
boldface Boldface type indicates graphical user interface elements associated
with an action, or terms defined in text or the glossary.
italic Italic type indicates book titles, emphasis, or placeholder variables for
which you supply particular values.
monospace Monospace type indicates commands within a paragraph, URLs, code
in examples, text that appears on the screen, or text that you enter.
xviii
Changes in This Release for Oracle Data
Guard Broker
This preface lists changes in Oracle Data Guard Broker.
Changes in Oracle Database Release 18c, Version 18.1

These are the changes in Oracle Data Guard Broker User’s Guide for Changes in
Oracle Database Release 18c, Version 18.1.
• This release provides several new commands:
– VALIDATE DATABASE SPFILE performs a comparison of server parameter file
(SPFILE) entries between the primary database and a specified standby
database. See VALIDATE DATABASE SPFILE.
– VALIDATE NETWORK CONFIGURATION performs network connectivity checks
between members of a broker configuration. See VALIDATE NETWORK
CONFIGURATION.
– VALIDATE STATIC CONNECT IDENTIFIER validates the static connect identifier of a
database. See VALIDATE STATIC CONNECT IDENTIFIER.
– SET ECHO controls whether or not to echo commands that are issued either at
the command-line prompt or from a DGMGRL script. See SET ECHO.
– SHOW ALL (DGMGRL CLI properties) shows the values of DGMGRL CLI
properties. See SHOW ALL.
• The AlternateLocation configurable property is renamed to
StandbyAlternateLocation and has new valid values. See
StandbyAlternateLocation.
• The StandbyArchiveLocation configurable property has new valid values. See
StandbyArchiveLocation.
• The new OnlineArchiveLocation configurable property specifies the online redo log
archive location for primary, logical, and snapshot standby databases. See
OnlineArchiveLocation.
• The new OnlineAlternateLocation configurable property specifies an alternate
online redo log archive location for primary, logical, and snapshot standby
databases when the location specified by the OnlineArchiveLocation configurable
property fails. See OnlineAlternateLocation.
• The V$DATAGUARD_PROCESS view, introduced in Oracle Database 12c Release 2
(12.2.0.1), now shows broker processes. See Oracle Data Guard Monitor (DMON)
Process.
xix
1
Oracle Data Guard Broker Concepts
Learn about Oracle Data Guard broker, its architecture and components, and how it
automates the creation, control, and monitoring of an Oracle Data Guard configuration.
• Overview of Oracle Data Guard and the Broker
• Benefits of Oracle Data Guard Broker
• Oracle Data Guard Broker Components
• Oracle Data Guard Broker User Interfaces
• Oracle Data Guard Monitor
See Oracle Data Guard Concepts and Administration for the definition of an Oracle
Data Guard configuration and for complete information about Oracle Data Guard
concepts and terminology.
1.1 Overview of Oracle Data Guard and the Broker

Oracle Data Guard ensures high availability, data protection, and disaster recovery for
enterprise data. Oracle Data Guard provides a comprehensive set of services that
create, maintain, manage, and monitor one or more standby databases to enable
production Oracle databases to survive disasters and data corruptions.Oracle Data
Guard maintains these standby databases as transactionally consistent copies of the
primary database. If the primary database becomes unavailable because of a planned
or an unplanned outage, Oracle Data Guard enables you to switch any standby
database to the production role, thus minimizing the downtime associated with the
outage. Oracle Data Guard can be used with traditional backup, recovery, and cluster
techniques, as well as with the Flashback Database feature to provide a high level of
data protection and data availability.
Oracle Data Guard and Oracle RAC One Node

As of Oracle Database 11g Release 2 (11.2.0.2), Oracle Data Guard and Oracle Data
Guard broker are fully integrated with Oracle Real Application Clusters One Node
(Oracle RAC One Node).
1.1.1 Oracle Data Guard Configurations and Broker Configurations

An Oracle Data Guard configuration consists of one primary database and a
combination of standby databases, far sync instances, and Zero Data Loss Recovery
Appliances that receive redo directly from the primary database. The members of an
Oracle Data Guard configuration are connected by Oracle Net and may be dispersed
geographically. There are no restrictions on where the members are located as long
as they can communicate with each other.
The Oracle Data Guard broker logically groups these members into a broker
configuration that allows the broker to manage and monitor them together as an
integrated unit. You can manage a broker configuration using either Oracle Enterprise
1-1
Chapter 1
Overview of Oracle Data Guard and the Broker
Manager Cloud Control (Cloud Control) or the Oracle Data Guard command-line
interface.
1.1.2 Oracle Data Guard Broker

The Oracle Data Guard broker is a distributed management framework that automates
and centralizes the creation, maintenance, and monitoring of Oracle Data Guard
configurations.
The following list describes some of the operations the broker automates and
simplifies:
• Creating Oracle Data Guard configurations that include one primary database,
standbys (physical, logical, snapshot, and far sync), Zero Data Loss Recovery
Appliances, and redo transport services and log apply services. The databases
can be Oracle Real Application Clusters (Oracle RAC) databases.
• Adding standbys (physical, logical, snapshot, far sync, Oracle RAC or non-Oracle
RAC) and Zero Data Loss Recovery Appliances to an existing Data Guard
configuration.
• Managing the protection mode for the configuration.
• Invoking switchover or failover with a single command to initiate and control
complex role changes across all databases in the configuration.
• Configuring failover to occur automatically upon loss of the primary database,
increasing availability without manual intervention.
• Monitoring the status of the entire configuration, capturing diagnostic information,
reporting statistics such as the Redo Apply rate and the redo generation rate, and
detecting problems quickly with centralized monitoring, testing, and performance
tools.
• Assessing whether a database is ready to become a primary. (See "VALIDATE
DATABASE").
• Assessing whether the network is properly configured between databases. (See
VALIDATE NETWORK CONFIGURATION.)
You can perform all management operations locally or remotely through the broker's
easy-to-use interfaces: the Oracle Data Guard management pages in Cloud Control,
and the Oracle Data Guard command-line interface called DGMGRL.
These interfaces simplify the configuration and management of an Oracle Data Guard
configuration. The following table provides a comparison of configuration management
using the broker's interfaces and using SQL*Plus.
Table 1-1 Configuration Management With and Without the Broker
Tasks With the Broker Without the Broker

General Provides primary database, standby database, You must manage the primary database,
and far sync instance management as one standby databases, and far sync instances
unified configuration. separately.
1-2
Chapter 1
Table 1-1 (Cont.) Configuration Management With and Without the Broker
Tasks With the Broker Without the Broker

Standby Provides Cloud Control wizards that automate You must manually (using RMAN or other tools,
Database and simplify the steps required to create a such as DBCA):
Creation configuration with an Oracle database on each • Create the standby.
site, including creating the standby control file, • Copy the database files to the standby
online redo log files, datafiles, and server database system.
parameter files.
• Create a control file on the standby
database system.
• Create server parameter or initialization
parameter files on the standby database
system.
Configuration Enables you to configure and manage multiple You must manually connect to multiple locations
and databases from a single location and in order to:
Management automatically unifies all of the databases in the • Set up redo transport services and log apply
broker configuration. services on each database in the
configuration.
• Manage the primary database and standby
databases individually.
Control • Automatically sets up redo transport You must manually:
services and log apply services. Simplifies • Use multiple SQL statements to manage the
management of these services, especially database.
in an Oracle RAC environment. • Coordinate sequences of multiple
• Simplifies switchovers, failovers, commands across multiple database sites to
reinstatements, and conversions to and execute switchover and failover operations.
from a snapshot standby database, • Coordinate sequences of multiple
allowing you to invoke them through a commands to manage services and
single command. instances during role transitions.
• Automates failover by allowing the broker
to determine if failover is necessary and to
initiate failover to a specified target
standby database, with no need for DBA
intervention and with either no loss of data
or with a configurable amount of data loss.
• Integrates role changes with Oracle
Clusterware.
• Manageable and monitorable through
Cloud Control
• Integrates with Oracle Global Data
Services, providing support for role-
specific global services.
Monitoring • Provides continuous monitoring of the You must manually:
configuration health, database health, and • Monitor the status and runtime parameters
other runtime parameters. using fixed views on each database—there
• Provides a unified updated status and is no unified view of status for all of the
detailed reports. databases in the configuration.
• Provides integration with Cloud Control • Provide a custom method for monitoring
events. Cloud Control events.
1.1.3 Oracle Data Guard Broker and CDBs

Oracle Data Guard broker supports multitenant container databases (CDBs) within a
broker configuration.
1-3
Chapter 1
Keep the following in mind:

• When the primary database is a CDB, all standby databases in the broker
configuration must also be CDBs.
• When a broker configuration is made up of CDBs, all broker actions execute at the
root level and not at the individual pluggable database (PDB) level.
• To administer a multitenant environment you must have the CDB_DBA role.
• After a role change, the broker opens all active instances of the new primary. The
broker also opens all active instances of a snapshot standby, a logical standby
and the first instance of a physical standby (if the former physical standby was
open for read).
• The broker also opens all PDBs on all instances it opens.
See Also:
• Oracle Database Concepts for more information about CDBs
1.1.4 Oracle Data Guard Broker and Oracle Global Data Services
To manage broker configurations that support Oracle Global Data Services (GDS),
you use both the broker command-line interface, DGMGRL, and the GDS command
line interface,GDSCTL. Broker configurations are added to GDS pools (logical
groupings of GDS databases which span across GDS regions).
Managing Broker Configurations in a GDS Pool

To add a broker configuration to a GDS pool, use the GDS command-line interface,
GDSCTL. A broker configuration can only be added to an empty pool. A broker
configuration cannot span multiple pools.
To delete a broker configuration that is in a pool, you must first remove it from the pool
by using the GDSCTL REMOVE BROKERCONFIG ... command. Otherwise an error is
returned.
Only entire broker configurations are added and removed using GDSCTL; to add and
remove individual databases to/from a broker configuration, use the broker command-
line interface, DGMGRL.
Managing Individual Configuration Databases When They Are Part of a GDS

Pool
If a GDS pool already contains a broker configuration, then only databases that belong
to that configuration can be added to the pool. The only way to add or remove
individual databases to or from a broker configuration in a pool is to use the broker
command-line interface, DGMGRL.
When a database is added to a broker configuration, that database is automatically
also added to the GDS pool to which the configuration belongs.
When a database is removed from a broker configuration, it is automatically removed
from the GDS pool to which the configuration belongs.
1-4
Chapter 1
Benefits of Oracle Data Guard Broker
The broker interacts with GDS and notifies it of any role or configuration changes to
ensure that the appropriate database services are active and that the appropriate FAN
events are published after a role change.
See Also:
• Oracle Database Global Data Services Concepts and Administration Guide

for more information about GDS.
1.2 Benefits of Oracle Data Guard Broker

The broker's interfaces improve usability and centralize management and monitoring
of an Oracle Data Guard configuration.
Available as a feature of the Enterprise Edition and Personal Edition of the Oracle
database, the broker is also integrated with the Oracle database and Cloud Control.
These broker attributes result in the following benefits:
Disaster protection:
By automating many of the manual tasks required to configure and monitor an Oracle
Data Guard configuration, the broker enhances the high availability, data protection,
and disaster protection capabilities that are inherent in Oracle Data Guard. Access is
possible through a client to any system in the Oracle Data Guard configuration,
eliminating any single point of failure. If the primary database fails, the broker
automates the process for any one of the standby databases to replace the primary
database and take over production processing. The database availability that Oracle
Data Guard provides makes it easier to protect your data.
Higher availability and scalability with Oracle Real Application Clusters (Oracle
RAC) Databases:
While Oracle Data Guard broker enhances disaster protection by maintaining
transactionally consistent copies of the primary database, Oracle Data Guard,
configured with Oracle high availability solutions such as Oracle Real Application
Clusters (Oracle RAC) databases, further enhances the availability and scalability of
any given copy of that database. The intrasite high availability of an Oracle RAC
database complements the intersite protection that is provided by Oracle Data Guard
broker.
Consider that you have a cluster system hosting a primary Oracle RAC database
comprised of multiple instances sharing access to that database. Further consider that
an unplanned failure has occurred. From an Oracle Data Guard broker perspective,
the primary database remains available as long as at least one instance of the
clustered database continues to be available for transporting redo data to the standby
databases. Oracle Clusterware manages the availability of instances of an Oracle
RAC database. It works to rapidly recover failed instances to keep the primary
database available. If Oracle Clusterware is unable to recover a failed instance, the
broker continues to run automatically with one less instance. If the last instance of the
primary database fails, the broker provides a way to fail over to a specified standby
database. If the last instance of the primary database fails, and fast-start failover is
1-5
Chapter 1
enabled, the broker can continue to provide high availability by automatically failing
over to a pre-determined standby database.
The broker is integrated with Oracle Clusterware so that database role changes occur
smoothly and seamlessly. This is especially apparent in the case of a planned role
switchover (for example, when a physical standby database is directed to take over
the primary role while the former primary database assumes the role of standby). The
broker and Oracle Clusterware work together to temporarily suspend service
availability on the primary database, accomplish the actual role change for both
databases during which Oracle Clusterware works with the broker to properly restart
the instances as necessary on the old primary database, and then start services
defined on the new primary database. The broker manages the underlying Oracle
Data Guard configuration and its database roles while Oracle Clusterware manages
service availability that depends upon those roles. Applications that rely on Oracle
Clusterware for managing service availability will see only a temporary suspension of
service as the role change occurs in the Oracle Data Guard configuration.
Note that while Oracle Clusterware helps to maintain the availability of the individual
instances of an Oracle RAC database, the broker coordinates actions that maintain
one or more physical or logical copies of the database across multiple geographically
dispersed locations to provide disaster protection. Together, the broker and Oracle
Clusterware provide a strong foundation for Oracle's high-availability architecture.
See Also:
Oracle Real Application Clusters Administration and Deployment Guide for
information about Oracle Clusterware
Support for Oracle RAC One Node:

As of Oracle Database 11g Release 2 (11.2.0.2), Oracle Data Guard and Oracle Data
Guard broker are fully integrated with Oracle Real Application Clusters One Node
(Oracle RAC One Node). This support provides a higher level of availability at the local
site by leveraging many of the Oracle Clusterware benefits just noted for Oracle RAC
configurations.
Automated creation of an Oracle Data Guard configuration:

The broker helps you to logically define and create an Oracle Data Guard
configuration. The broker automatically communicates between the members of an
Oracle Data Guard configuration using Oracle Net Services. The members can be
local or remote, connected by a LAN or geographically dispersed over a WAN.
Cloud Control provides a wizard that automates the complex tasks involved in creating
a broker configuration, including:
• Adding an existing standby database, or a new standby database created from
existing backups taken through Cloud Control
• Configuring the standby control file, server parameter file, and datafiles
• Initializing communication with the standbys
• Creating standby redo log files
• Enabling Flashback Database if you plan to use fast-start failover
1-6
Chapter 1
Although DGMGRL cannot automatically create a new standby, you can use
DGMGRL commands to configure and monitor an existing standby, including those
created using Cloud Control.
Easy configuration of additional standbys:

After you create an Oracle Data Guard configuration, you can add new or existing
standbys to each Oracle Data Guard configuration. Cloud Control provides an Add
Standby Database wizard to guide you through the process of adding more databases.
Simplified, centralized, and extended management:

You can issue commands to manage many aspects of the broker configuration. These
include:
• Simplify the management of all components of the configuration, including the
primary database, standbys, Zero Data Loss Recovery Appliances, redo transport
services, and log apply services.
• Coordinate database state transitions and update database properties
dynamically, with the broker recording the changes in a broker configuration file
that includes information about all the databases in the configuration. The broker
propagates the changes to all databases in the configuration and their server
parameter files.
• Simplify the control of the configuration protection modes (to maximize protection,
to maximize availability, or to maximize performance).
• Invoke the Cloud Control verify operation to ensure that redo transport services
and log apply services are configured and functioning properly.
Simplified switchover and failover operations:

The broker simplifies switchovers and failovers by allowing you to invoke them using a
single key click in Cloud Control or a single command at the DGMGRL command-line
interface (referred to in this documentation as manual failover). For lights-out
administration, you can enable fast-start failover to allow the broker to determine if a
failover is necessary and to initiate the failover to a pre-specified target standby
automatically, with no need for DBA intervention. Fast-start failover can be configured
to occur with no data loss or with a configurable amount of data loss.
Fast-start failover allows you to increase availability with less need for manual
intervention, thereby reducing management costs. Manual failover gives you control
over exactly when a failover occurs and to which target standby. Regardless of the
method you choose, the broker coordinates the role transition on all databases in the
configuration. Once failover is complete, the broker publishes a Fast Application
Notification (FAN) event to notify applications that the new primary is available.
Note that you can use the DBMS_DG PL/SQL package to enable an application to initiate
a fast-start failover when it encounters specific conditions. See Application Initiated
Fast-Start Failover for more information.
Only one command is required to initiate complex role changes for switchover or
failover operations across all databases in the configuration. The broker automates
switchover and failover to a specified standby database in the broker configuration.
Cloud Control enables you to select a new primary database from a set of viable
standby databases (enabled and running, with normal status). The DGMGRL
SWITCHOVER and FAILOVER commands only require you to specify the target standby
1-7
Chapter 1
Oracle Data Guard Broker Components
database before automatically initiating and completing the many steps in switchover
or failover operations across the multiple databases in the configuration.
Built-in monitoring and alert and control mechanisms:

The broker provides built-in validation that monitors the health of all of the databases
in the configuration. While connected to any database in the configuration, you can
capture diagnostic information and detect obvious and subtle problems quickly with
centralized monitoring, testing, and performance tools. Both Cloud Control and
DGMGRL retrieve a complete configuration view of the progress of redo transport
services on the primary database and the progress of Redo Apply or SQL Apply on the
standby database.
The ability to monitor local and remote databases and respond to events is
significantly enhanced by the broker's health check mechanism and tight integration
with the Cloud Control event management system.
Transparent to application:
Use of the broker is possible for any database because the broker works transparently
with applications; no application code changes are required to accommodate a
configuration that you manage with the broker.
1.3 Oracle Data Guard Broker Components

These are the components that make up Oracle Data Guard broker.
• Oracle Enterprise Manager Cloud Control
• Oracle Data Guard Command-Line Interface (DGMGRL)
• Oracle Data Guard Monitor
Cloud Control and the Oracle Data Guard command-line interface (DGMGRL) are the
broker client interfaces that help you define and manage a configuration consisting of
a collection of primary and standby databases. DGMGRL also includes commands to
create observer processes, which facilitate fast-start failover.
The Oracle Data Guard monitor is the broker server-side component that is integrated
with the Oracle database. The Oracle Data Guard monitor is composed of several
processes, including the DMON process, and broker configuration files that allow you
to control the databases of that configuration, modify their behavior at runtime, monitor
the overall health of the configuration, and provide notification of other operational
characteristics.
Figure 1-1 shows these components of the broker.
Figure 1-1 Oracle Data Guard Broker
Oracle Enterprise Manager
Data Guard Command-Line Interface (DGMGRL)

Oracle Client Side
Data Guard
Broker Server Side
DMON Process
Data Guard
Monitor
Configuration File
1-8
Chapter 1
Oracle Data Guard Broker User Interfaces
1.4 Oracle Data Guard Broker User Interfaces

You can use either of the broker's user interfaces to create a broker configuration and
to control and monitor the configuration.
The following sections describe the broker's user interfaces:
• Oracle Enterprise Manager Cloud Control
• Oracle Data Guard Command-Line Interface (DGMGRL)
1.4.1 Oracle Enterprise Manager Cloud Control

Oracle Enterprise Manager Cloud Control (Cloud Control) works with the Oracle Data
Guard monitor to automate and simplify the management of an Oracle Data Guard
configuration.
With Cloud Control, the complex operations of creating and managing standby
databases are simplified through Oracle Data Guard management pages and wizards,
including:
• An Add Standby Database wizard that helps you to create a broker configuration,
if one does not already exist, having a primary database and a local or remote
standby database. The wizard can create a physical, snapshot, or logical standby
database or import an existing physical, snapshot, or logical (Oracle RAC or non-
Oracle RAC) standby database. If the wizard creates a physical, snapshot, or
logical standby database, the wizard also automates the creation of the standby
control file, server parameter file, online and standby redo log files, and the
standby datafiles.
• A switchover operation that helps you switch roles between the primary database
and a standby database.
• A failover operation that changes one of the standby databases to the role of a
primary database.
• Performance tools and graphs that help you monitor and tune redo transport
services and log apply services.
• Property pages that allow you to set database properties on any database and, if
applicable, the settings are immediately propagated to all other databases and
server parameter files in the configuration.
• Event reporting through e-mail.
In addition, it makes all Oracle Net Services configuration changes necessary to
support redo transport services and log apply services.
See Also:
My Oracle Support note 787461.1 at http://support.oracle.com for information
about which versions of Cloud Control are required to manage the full set of
Oracle Data Guard features in various Oracle Database releases
1-9
Chapter 1
Oracle Data Guard Monitor
1.4.2 Oracle Data Guard Command-Line Interface (DGMGRL)

The Oracle Data Guard command-line interface (DGMGRL) enables you to control
and monitor an Oracle Data Guard configuration from the DGMGRL prompt or within
scripts.
You can perform most of the activities required to manage and monitor the databases
in the configuration using DGMGRL commands.
DGMGRL also includes commands to create observer processes that continuously
monitor the primary and target standby databases and evaluate whether failover is
necessary, and then initiate a fast-start failover when conditions warrant.
See Also:
Oracle Data Guard Command-Line Interface Reference for complete reference
information for the Oracle Data Guard command-line interface.
1.5 Oracle Data Guard Monitor

The configuration, control, and monitoring functions of the broker are implemented by
server-side software and configuration files that are maintained for each database that
the broker manages.
The software is called the Oracle Data Guard monitor. The following topics describe
how the Oracle Data Guard monitor interacts with the Oracle database and with
remote Oracle Data Guard monitors to manage the broker configuration.
1.5.1 Oracle Data Guard Monitor (DMON) Process

The Oracle Data Guard monitor process (DMON) is an Oracle background process
that runs on every database instance that is managed by the broker.
When you start the Oracle Data Guard broker, a DMON process is created.
See Also:
Starting the Data Guard Broker for information on starting the broker
Whether you use Cloud Control or DGMGRL to manage a database, the DMON
process is the server-side component that interacts with the local database and the
DMON processes of the other databases to perform the requested function. The
DMON process is also responsible for monitoring the health of the broker configuration
and for ensuring that every database has a consistent description of the configuration.
Figure 1-2 shows the broker's DMON process as one of several background
processes that constitute an instance of the Oracle database. Each database instance
shown in the figure has its own DMON process.
1-10
Chapter 1
Figure 1-2 Databases With Broker (DMON) Processes
User
User User User User Processes
Oracle Database Instance
Oracle
Background
Data Processes
Process System Database Log
Archiver
Recoverer Guard Writer Writer
(RECO) Monitor Monitor Monitor (ARC0)
(PMON) (SMON) (DBW0) (LGWR)
(DMON)
Primary Database
Standby Database
System Data Database Log

Recoverer Process Guard Archiver
Monitor Monitor Writer Writer
(RECO) Monitor (ARC0)
(PMON) (SMON) (DBW0) (LGWR)
(DMON) Oracle
Background
Processes
Oracle Database Instance
User
User User User User Processes
The zigzag arrow in the center of Figure 1-2 represents the two-way Oracle Net
Services communication channel that exists between the DMON processes of two
databases in the same broker configuration.
This two-way communication channel is used to pass requests between databases
and to monitor the health of all of the databases in the broker configuration.
Monitoring Data Guard Broker Processes

Use the V$DATAGUARD_PROCESS view to monitor the status of broker processes, as well as
other Data Guard processes. This view contains a row showing information for the
broker DMON process. The following are the columns and values shown for the
DMON process (other columns in the view are generally not relevant to the broker):
• NAME — DMON
• ROLE — broker monitor
1-11
Chapter 1
• PID — operating system process identifier of the process
• PROC_TIME — timestamp of when the process was started or registered for inclusion
in the view
See Also:
• Oracle Database Reference for more information about the

V$DATAGUARD_PROCESS view
1.5.2 Configuration Management

The broker's DMON process persistently maintains information about all members of
the broker configuration in a binary configuration file.
A copy of the configuration file is maintained by the DMON process for each of the
databases that belong to the broker configuration. If it is an Oracle RAC database,
each database's copy of the file is shared by all instances of the database.
This configuration file contains information that describes the states and properties of
the databases in the configuration. For example, the file records the databases that
are part of the configuration, the roles and properties of each of the databases, and
the state of each database in the configuration.
The configuration data is managed transparently by the DMON process to ensure that
the configuration information is kept consistent across all of the databases. The broker
uses the data in the configuration file to configure and start the databases, control
each database's behavior, and provide information to DGMGRL and Cloud Control.
See Also:
Managing Database Properties for more information
Whenever you add databases to a broker configuration, or make a change to an

existing database's properties, each DMON process records the new information in its
copy of the configuration file.
1.5.3 Database Property Management

The broker uses various properties associated with each database to control the
database's behavior.
The properties are recorded in the configuration file. Many database properties are
used to control database initialization parameters related to the Oracle Data Guard
environment.
To ensure that the broker can update the values of parameters in both the database
itself and in the configuration file, you must use a server parameter file to control static
and dynamic initialization parameters. The use of a server parameter file gives the
broker a mechanism that allows it to reconcile property values selected by the
1-12
Chapter 1
database administrator (DBA) when using the broker with any related initialization
parameter values recorded in the server parameter file.
When you set values for database properties in the broker configuration, the broker
records the change in the configuration file and propagates the change to all of the
databases in the Oracle Data Guard configuration.
Note:
The broker supports both the default and nondefault server parameter file
filenames. If you use a nondefault server parameter filename, the initialization
parameter file must include the complete filename and location of the server
parameter file. If this is an Oracle RAC database, there must be one nondefault
server parameter file for all instances.
See Also:
Configurable (Changeable) Properties for more information
1-13
2
Oracle Data Guard Installation
For all databases that you want to add to a broker configuration, you must complete
installation and configuration tasks.
• Oracle Data Guard Installation
• Prerequisites
See Also:
Oracle Data Guard Broker Upgrading and Downgrading for help with
upgrading to a new release in an Oracle Data Guard broker configuration
2.1 Oracle Data Guard Installation

Oracle Data Guard is included with the Enterprise Edition and Personal Edition of the
Oracle database software.
You can manage an Oracle Data Guard configuration by using either SQL*Plus, the
Oracle Data Guard broker's command-line interface (DGMGRL), or a compatible
version of Oracle Enterprise Manager Cloud Control (Cloud Control).
Install the Oracle Enterprise Edition or Personal Edition database software on each
location you expect to include in broker configurations. You must install a compatible
version of Cloud Control if you want to use the graphical user interface for Oracle Data
Guard.
In addition, to use fast-start failover you must install DGMGRL and run the observer
software. Oracle recommends running observers on computer systems that are
separate from the primary and standby systems. To install DGMGRL on an observer
computer, use one of the methods described in the following list:
• Install the complete Oracle Client Administrator by choosing the Administrator
option from Oracle Universal Installer.
This installation includes DGMGRL but it does not include the Cloud Control
agent. This allows you to manage observer processes using DGMGRL
commands, but not Cloud Control. (The Cloud Control agent can be installed
separately.)
• Install the full Oracle Database Enterprise Edition or Personal Edition software kit
This installation includes DGMGRL and the Cloud Control agent, allowing you to
manage observer processes using Cloud Control or DGMGRL commands.
2-1
Chapter 2
Prerequisites
Note:
An observer can be run from any platform that supports it, and that platform
can be different from the platform of the primary or target standby
database.
2.2 Prerequisites
These are the conditions that must be met before you can use the broker.
• The primary and standby databases must be using the same version of Oracle
Database and each can be installed in either a single-instance or multi-instance
environment. The database must be licensed for Oracle Enterprise Edition or
Personal Edition.
• You must use a server parameter file (SPFILE) to ensure the broker can
persistently reconcile values between broker properties and any related
initialization parameter values. See Configurable (Changeable) Properties for
more information.
If any of the databases in the configuration is an Oracle RAC database, you must
configure the server parameter file (SPFILE) appropriately for use in an Oracle
RAC environment.
See Also:
Oracle Real Application Clusters Administration and Deployment Guide for
information about initialization files in an Oracle RAC
• The value of the DG_BROKER_START initialization parameter must be set to TRUE. See
Starting the Data Guard Broker for more information. (Cloud Control sets this
parameter automatically.)
• If any of the databases in the configuration is an Oracle RAC database, you must
set up the DG_BROKER_CONFIG_FILEn initialization parameters for that database such
that they point to the same shared files for all instances of that database. The
shared files could be files on a cluster file system, if available, or stored using
Oracle Automatic Storage Management (Oracle ASM).
See Also:
Configuration file information in Configuration Management. Also, see
Setting Up the Broker Configuration Files for details about setting up the
broker configuration file.
• Network configuration files must be set up on the primary database and on the
standby database if you configure an existing standby database into the broker
configuration. Cloud Control can assist you in creating the configuration files when
creating a standby database.
2-2
Chapter 2
Prerequisites
See Also:
Oracle Database Net Services Administrator's Guide for more information
about network configuration files
• In a broker configuration, you use the DGConnectIdentifer property to specify a

connect identifier for each database. The connect identifier for a database must:
– Allow all other databases in the configuration to reach it.
– Allow all instances of an Oracle RAC database to be reached.
– Specify a service that all instances dynamically register with the listeners so
that connect-time failover on an Oracle RAC database is possible.
Caution:
The service should NOT be one that is defined and managed by Oracle
Clusterware.
– Have failover attributes set to allow the primary database's Redo Transport
Services to continue shipping redo data to an Oracle RAC standby database,
even if the receiving instance of that standby database has failed.
See Also:
Oracle Database Net Services Administrator's Guide for more information
about connect identifiers
• To enable DGMGRL to restart instances during the course of broker operations, a

static service must be registered with the local listener of each instance. A static
service registration is also required to enable the observer to restart instances as
part of automatic reinstatement of the old primary database after a fast-start
failover has occurred. A static service needs to be defined and registered only if
Oracle Clusterware or Oracle Restart is not being used.
By default, the broker assumes a static service name of
db_unique_name_DGMGRL.db_domain and expects the listener has been started with
the following content in the listener.ora file:
LISTENER = (DESCRIPTION =
(ADDRESS_LIST=(ADDRESS=(PROTOCOL=tcp)(HOST=host_name)
(PORT=port_num))))
SID_LIST_LISTENER=(SID_LIST=(SID_DESC=(SID_NAME=sid_name)
(GLOBAL_DBNAME=db_unique_name_DGMGRL.db_domain)
(ORACLE_HOME=oracle_home)
(ENVS="TNS_ADMIN=oracle_home/network/admin")))
Alternatively, you can use a different static service name. If you do, be sure to
modify the StaticConnectIdentifier instance-specific property to reflect the static
service that has been registered.
To ensure that the connect identifier has been set up correctly, use the VALIDATE
STATIC CONNECT IDENTIFIER command.
2-3
Chapter 2
Prerequisites
See Also:
– See Oracle Database Net Services Administrator's Guide for more

information about configuring static services
– See the My Oracle Support Note 1387859.1 at http://
support.oracle.com for additional information about using static services
and the StaticConnectIdentifier configurable property
– VALIDATE STATIC CONNECT IDENTIFIER
• The primary database must be opened in ARCHIVELOG mode.

• You must set the COMPATIBLE initialization parameter to 11.2 or higher for both the
primary and standby databases. However, if you want to take advantage of Oracle
Database 12c Release 2 (12.2) new features, then set the COMPATIBLE parameter to
12.2 on all databases within the Oracle Data Guard configuration.
For the broker to work, the COMPATIBLE initialization parameter must be set to the
same value on both the primary and standby databases. If the values differ, redo
transport services may be unable to transmit redo data from the primary database
to the standby databases.
• Select and configure a redo transport authentication method, as described in
Oracle Data Guard Concepts and Administration.
• As of Oracle Database 12c Release 1 (12.1), for all databases to be added to a
broker configuration, any LOG_ARCHIVE_DEST_n parameters that have the SERVICE
attribute set, but not the NOREGISTER attribute, must be cleared.
See Also:
• Starting the Data Guard Broker for more information about preparing and
starting Oracle Data Guard broker
2-4
3
Managing Broker Configurations
Use Oracle Data Guard broker to manage and monitor the configuration. The broker
uses Oracle Enterprise Manager to report health and other operational characteristics.
• Configuration Support
• Configuration Properties
• Setting Up the Broker Configuration Files
• Starting the Data Guard Broker
• Management Cycle of a Broker Configuration
• Enable and Disable Operations
• Configuration Status
3.1 Configuration Support

Oracle Data Guard broker enables you to create a broker configuration consisting of
up to 253 members, including one primary database and a combination of standby
databases, far sync instances, and Zero Data Loss Recovery Appliances.
The broker controls the members of the configuration, monitors the health of the
configuration, and reports health and other operational characteristics through the
Oracle Enterprise Management notification mechanisms if you are using Oracle
Enterprise Manager Cloud Control, or through SHOW commands if you are using
DGMGRL.
A supported Oracle Data Guard configuration contains the following components:
• A primary database (Oracle RAC or non-Oracle RAC)
• A combination of standby databases, far sync instances, and recovery appliances
that receive redo directly from the primary database.
• Oracle Net Services network configuration that defines a connection between the
databases
• Standby (archived redo log files) destination parameters and configuration
properties
• Redo transport services that transmit the redo data from the primary database to
the standbys and far sync instances
• Log apply services that apply redo data to the standby databases from the
archived redo log files or standby redo log files
The Oracle Data Guard log apply services update standby databases with redo data
that is transmitted automatically from the primary database by redo transport services.
The archived redo log files and standby redo log files contain all of the database
changes except for unrecoverable or unlogged changes.
3-1
Chapter 3
Configuration Support
• On physical standby databases, Redo Apply applies the redo data to keep the
standby consistent with the primary database.
• On logical standby databases, SQL Apply applies the redo data to keep the
standby consistent with the primary database.
• On snapshot standby databases, the redo data is received but not applied until the
snapshot standby database is converted back to a physical standby database.
• On far sync instances, the redo data is received and then forwarded to a physical
standby database. A far sync instance does not have data files and does not apply
any of the redo data it has received.
The broker's Oracle Data Guard monitor (DMON) process configures and maintains
the broker configuration as a group of objects that you can manage and monitor as a
single unit. Thus, when you enter a command that affects multiple databases, the
DMON process:
• Carries out your request on the primary database
• Coordinates with the DMON process for each of the other databases, as required
for your request
• Updates the configuration file on the local system
• Communicates with the DMON process for each of the other databases to update
their copies of the configuration file
Through the DMON process, you can configure, monitor, and control the databases
and the configuration together as a unit. If you disable the configuration, broker
management of all of the databases in the configuration is also disabled. If you later
enable the configuration, broker management is enabled for each database in the
configuration.
Figure 3-1 shows a broker configuration with a primary database and physical standby
database.
On the primary database, the figure shows the redo transport services in addition to
the following main components: the primary database, DMON, the online redo log
files, and the archived redo log files. The figure also shows standby redo log files in
outline form on the primary side; the standby redo logs are outlined to indicate they are
currently inactive but have been configured in preparation for a switchover or failover
to the standby role. The physical standby database includes the following components:
a standby database, log apply services, DMON, archived redo log files, and standby
redo log files. The online redo log files on the physical standby database are outlined
to indicate they are currently inactive but have been configured in preparation for a
switchover or failover to the primary role.
See Also:
Oracle Data Guard Concepts and Administration for more information about
standby databases
3-2
Chapter 3
Configuration Properties
Figure 3-1 Oracle Data Guard Broker Configuration
Oracle Enterprise Manager

or Oracle Data Guard
Command-Line Interface
Data Guard Configuration
Primary Standby
Standby Redo Online Redo
Log Files Log Files
Primary Standby
Database Database
Data Data Log

Guard Guard Apply
Monitor Monitor Services
Online Redo Oracle Standby Redo
Log Files Net Log Files
Archived
Redo
Log Files
Archived
Log Redo
Transport Log Files
Services
Oracle
Net
Configuration-Wide Service Names

The broker publishes a service, using the same name, on each configuration member.
The default name of this configuration-wide service is primarydbname_CFG, where a
suffix of _CFG is appended to the value of the DB_UNIQUE_NAME initialization parameter of
the primary database at the time the configuration is created. To change the name of
the configuration-wide service, use the ConfigurationWideServiceName property. See
ConfigurationWideServiceName.
3.2 Configuration Properties

Configuration properties control the behavior of a broker configuration.
You can view and dynamically update the values of these properties using either
DGMGRL or Cloud Control. However, some properties can only be updated through
DGMGRL.
A configuration property has configuration-wide scope; meaning that the value you set
for the property applies uniformly to each database in the configuration.
3-3
Chapter 3
Setting Up the Broker Configuration Files
See Also:
Oracle Data Guard Broker Properties for complete descriptions of all broker
configuration properties
3.3 Setting Up the Broker Configuration Files

When the broker is started for the first time, configuration files are automatically
created and named using a default path name and filename that is operating-system
specific.
Two copies of the configuration file are maintained for each database so as to always
have a record of the last known valid state of the configuration. You can override the
default path name and filename by setting the following initialization parameters for
that database:
DG_BROKER_CONFIG_FILE1
Note the following restrictions when setting the DG_BROKER_CONFIG_FILE1 and

DG_BROKER_CONFIG_FILE2 initialization parameters:
• These parameters can only be set or changed when the Oracle Data Guard broker
is not running (DG_BROKER_START=FALSE).
• These parameters must specify an Oracle ASM, Oracle OCFS, or NFS that is
shared for all Oracle RAC instances.
• When an upgrade is performed using the PL/SQL package, DBMS_ROLLING, the
DG_BROKER_CONFIG_FILEn parameters must specify a location outside of Oracle
home. (The default location is the dbs directory in Oracle home.)
The Oracle Data Guard broker works with databases that use either Oracle managed
or user managed datafiles. These datafiles can reside on a file system or an Oracle
ASM disk group. The following section contains these topics:
• Renaming the Broker Configuration Files
• Managing Broker Configuration Files in an Oracle RAC Environment
3.3.1 Renaming the Broker Configuration Files

You can change the names of the broker configuration files by issuing the ALTER SYSTEM
SQL statement.
However, you cannot alter these parameters when the broker's DMON process is
running. To change the names of configuration files for a given database, perform the
following steps:
1. Disable the broker configuration using the DGMGRL DISABLE command. See
Enable and Disable Operations.
2. Stop the Oracle Data Guard broker DMON process using the following SQL
statement:
SQL> ALTER SYSTEM SET DG_BROKER_START=FALSE;
3-4
Chapter 3
3. Change the configuration filenames for the database:

SQL> ALTER SYSTEM SET DG_BROKER_CONFIG_FILE1=filespec1;
SQL> ALTER SYSTEM SET DG_BROKER_CONFIG_FILE2=filespec2;
Note:
If the broker is managing an Oracle RAC database, the value of
DG_BROKER_CONFIG_FILE1 and the value of DG_BROKER_CONFIG_FILE2 for each of
the instances must point to the same set of physical files.
4. The method of moving the files depends upon where they currently reside and
where you want to move them to:
• If the files reside on an operating system file system, use operating system
commands to move the files to their new location.
• If the old or new location is an Oracle ASM disk group, use the
DBMS_FILE_TRANSFER.COPY_FILE function to transfer the files to their new location.
5. Restart the Oracle Data Guard broker DMON process, as follows:

SQL> ALTER SYSTEM SET DG_BROKER_START=TRUE;
6. Enable the broker configuration using the DGMGRL ENABLE command or the
Enable operation in the Oracle Data Guard management pages of Cloud Control.
Note:
As of Release 11.2, the files can reside on disks having any supported sector
size (physical block size) up to and including 4KB sectors. Configuration files
that were generated by a release prior to 11.2 are restricted to reside only on
disks having the same sector size as was used at the time the files were first
created. These files must first be upgraded to Release 11.2 before they can be
moved to a location having a different sector size, or are otherwise expected to
reside across a mixture of sector sizes in a given broker configuration. See
Upgrading from Oracle Database 10g and Oracle Database 11g to Oracle
Database 12c for more information.
3.3.2 Managing Broker Configuration Files in an Oracle RAC

Environment
In an Oracle RAC environment, all instances of a database must reference the same
set of configuration files.
This means that if the broker is managing an Oracle RAC database, then the value of
DG_BROKER_CONFIG_FILE1 and the value of DG_BROKER_CONFIG_FILE2 for each of the
instances must point to the same set of physical files. The configuration files can be
deployed using one of the following methods:
• Using Cluster File System (CFS) for Configuration Files
• Using Oracle ASM Disk Groups for Configuration Files
3-5
Chapter 3
3.3.2.1 Using Cluster File System (CFS) for Configuration Files

The broker configuration files can reside on a cluster file system (CFS).
If they do, then , the DG_BROKER_CONFIG_FILEn parameters on all of the instances must
be set to these files including the path to the CFS area. Figure 3-2 shows the set up
for the broker configuration files on CFS. In this scenario, the parameters and value for
all instances would be:
DG_BROKER_CONFIG_FILE1=$ORACLE_BASE/admin/db_unique_name/dr1db_unique_name.dat
DG_BROKER_CONFIG_FILE2=$ORACLE_BASE/admin/db_unique_name/dr2db_unique_name.dat
Figure 3-2 Broker Configuration Setup in a CFS Area
Oracle
RAC Database
CFS area:
$ORACLE_BASE/admin/db_unique_name/
Instance
"inst1" DG_BROKER_CONFIG_FILE1 dr1db_unique_name.dat
Instance
"inst2" DG_BROKER_CONFIG_FILE1
Instance
dr2db_unique_name.dat
3.3.2.2 Using Oracle ASM Disk Groups for Configuration Files

The broker's configuration files can also reside on an Oracle ASM disk group.
Figure 3-3 shows the setup for the broker configuration files on Oracle ASM devices.
In this scenario, the parameters and values would be specified, as follows:
ALTER SYSTEM SET DG_BROKER_CONFIG_FILE1 = '+DG/DIRECTORY/DR1.DAT' SCOPE=BOTH;
ALTER SYSTEM SET DG_BROKER_CONFIG_FILE2 = '+DG/DIRECTORY/DR2.DAT' SCOPE=BOTH;
3-6
Chapter 3
Starting the Data Guard Broker
Figure 3-3 Broker Configuration Setup with Oracle ASM
Oracle
RAC Database
Instance
"inst1" DG_BROKER_CONFIG_FILE1 +DG/North_Sales/dr1.dat
Instance
Instance
+DG/North_Sales/dr2.dat
Because the configuration files must be explicitly named by the user, these
configuration files are not Oracle Managed Files (OMF).To create the broker's
configuration files on an Oracle ASM disk group, set the DG_BROKER_CONFIG_FILE1 and
DG_BROKER_CONFIG_FILE2 initialization parameters to a string value that includes the
name of an existing Oracle ASM disk group, an existing directory in that disk group,
and the name of the configuration file itself.
3.4 Starting the Data Guard Broker

After setting up the configuration files, the DG_BROKER_START initialization parameter must
be set to TRUE for each database to start the DMON processes.
By default, the DG_BROKER_START initialization parameter is set to FALSE. However, you

can set the value in the following ways:
• If you are using Cloud Control, it automatically sets the DG_BROKER_START
initialization parameter to TRUE for new standby databases that it creates.
• If you are using DGMGRL, you must explicitly set the DG_BROKER_START initialization
parameter to TRUE; otherwise, the broker will not start. You can set the
DG_BROKER_START initialization parameter with the following SQL statement:
System altered.
SQL> SHOW PARAMETER DG_BROKER_START
NAME TYPE VALUE

------------------------------------
dg_broker_start boolean TRUE
Whether you use Cloud Control or DGMGRL, set the value of the DG_BROKER_START
initialization parameter to TRUE in the server parameter file on each primary and
3-7
Chapter 3
Management Cycle of a Broker Configuration
standby database. Doing so ensures that Oracle Data Guard broker will start
automatically the next time you start any instance of the database.
Note:
If the initialization parameter DG_BROKER_START=TRUE, then archivelog mode is
automatically enabled at the database level if a SQL STARTUP MOUNT or ALTER
DATABASE MOUNT statement is executed against a primary database.
3.5 Management Cycle of a Broker Configuration

This figure shows the life cycle of a broker configuration and the accompanying text
explains each phase of the cycle.
Figure 3-4 Life Cycle of a Broker Configuration and Its Databases
Create the
Configuration
Enable the
Configuration
Make State, Role, Update

or Protection Mode Database
Changes Properties
Monitor and
Tune the
Configuration
Create the Broker Configuration

When using Cloud Control, the Add Standby Database wizard can either add an
existing (Oracle RAC or non-Oracle RAC) standby database into the configuration or
create a new (Oracle RAC or non-Oracle RAC) standby database and add it to the
configuration. The standby database can be a physical, logical, or snapshot database.
When using DGMGRL, the primary database and a standby database must already
exist. You construct the standby database from backups of the primary database
control files and datafiles, and then prepare it for recovery.
3-8
Chapter 3
Enable the Broker Configuration

An Oracle Data Guard configuration must be enabled to be managed or monitored by
the broker. Conversely, you disable a configuration if you no longer want to manage it
with the broker. When you disable a configuration, broker management of all of its
databases is also disabled.
Note:
You can enable or disable the configuration using DGMGRL. You cannot
disable the configuration using Cloud Control. You can enable the configuration
using Cloud Control in the event that it was previously disabled using
DGMGRL.
A broker configuration, when first created using Cloud Control, is automatically

enabled as soon as the Add Standby Database wizard completes.
A broker configuration, when first created using DGMGRL, is in a disabled condition.
This means its constituent databases are not yet under active control of the broker.
When you finish configuring the databases into a broker configuration with DGMGRL,
you must enable the configuration to allow the broker to manage the configuration.
You can enable:
• The entire configuration, including all of its databases
• An individual standby database
You can easily disable a database if a problem occurs such that it cannot function
properly in a broker configuration. Note that you cannot disable the primary database.
You must disable the entire configuration to disable the primary database.
You may also want to disable a configuration temporarily, and then change some
properties in the broker configuration without affecting the actual database properties.
The changed properties will take effect when the configuration is enabled again for
management by the broker.
Make Role Changes Within the Broker Configuration, As Needed

At any time, you can issue a single command to change the roles of the databases in
the configuration. If some event renders the primary database unusable, you can fail
over one of the standby databases to become the new primary database.
If Flashback Database was enabled on the former primary database, then after failover
has completed, you can reinstate the former primary database as a standby database
for the new primary database.
In addition, planned downtime for maintenance can be reduced because you can
quickly switch over production processing from the current primary database to a
standby database, and then switch back again after the planned maintenance.
3-9
Chapter 3
See Also:
Switchover and Failover Operations for more information about role changes
Convert to Snapshot Standby Database

At any time, you can issue a single command to convert a physical standby database
to a snapshot standby database. The snapshot standby database is a fully updatable
database that receives redo data generated from the primary database, but does not
apply it.
Once you are done using the snapshot standby database, you can again issue a
single command to convert it to a physical standby database. After the conversion to a
physical standby has completed, Redo Apply services will start (assuming the state is
APPLY-ON) and apply all of the accumulated redo data.
Make State Changes to the Databases, As Needed

When you enable a configuration for the first time, the broker, by default, starts redo
transport services on the primary and starts log apply services on the standby (except
for a snapshot standby).
At any time, you can issue a single command through Cloud Control or DGMGRL to
change the state of the database. For example, you could bring the primary database
into the TRANSPORT-OFF state to temporarily stop sending redo data to the standby
databases. Then, to resume sending redo data to the standbys, you could bring the
primary database into the TRANSPORT-ON state.
See Also:
Managing the Members of a Broker Configuration for more information about
database state changes
Update Database Properties, As Needed

The broker enables you to set database properties, some of which correspond to
database initialization parameters. You can change these properties to dynamically
control such things as redo transport, standby file management, log apply, and to
support the overall configuration protection mode. The broker records the changes in
the broker configuration file for each database in the Oracle Data Guard configuration
and propagates the changes to the related initialization parameters in the server
parameter files, if needed.
See Also:
Managing the Members of a Broker Configuration and Oracle Data Guard
Broker Properties for complete information about database properties
3-10
Chapter 3
Enable and Disable Operations
Set Data Protection Modes, As Needed

The broker enables you to set the data protection mode for the configuration. You can
configure the protection mode to maximize data protection, maximize availability, or
maximize performance.
See Also:
Managing Data Protection Modes for information about managing data
protection modes
Monitor the Configuration

You can check the health of the configuration, display and update the properties of the
databases, and set Cloud Control events.
Cloud Control also provides a dynamic performance page that automatically and
dynamically refreshes chart data and status at specified intervals. The performance
chart shows a graphical summary of how far behind and how much redo data is being
generated and applied.
3.6 Enable and Disable Operations

When you enable or disable a database in the broker configuration, you are effectively
enabling or disabling the ability of the broker to manage and monitor the specified
database.
The enable and disable operations are defined only for databases that are in a broker
configuration; you cannot perform these broker operations on databases that are not
part of the broker configuration.
However, disabling a broker configuration does not affect current services and
operations in the actual Oracle Data Guard configuration. For example, when you
disable a broker configuration, redo transport services and log apply services in the
Oracle Data Guard configuration continue to function unchanged, but you can no
longer manage them through the broker interfaces.
In addition, disabling a database does not remove or delete it from the broker
configuration file. You can still change the properties of a disabled database and later
reenable your ability to manage with the broker using the DGMGRL ENABLE
CONFIGURATION or ENABLE DATABASE commands, or the Enable option in the Oracle Data
Guard management pages of Cloud Control.
Note:
If you disable broker management of a standby database in the broker
configuration, that standby database cannot be used by the broker as a failover
target in the event of loss of the primary database.
3-11
Chapter 3
Configuration Status
Disabling broker management of the configuration may be useful to do even though

you are removing the broker's ability to monitor and control the databases. For
example, it may be advantageous to disable a configuration temporarily in order to
change one or more properties in the broker configuration all at the same time. When
you change properties in a disabled configuration, it does not affect the actual
database properties underneath because the changes are not applied to the running
database until you reenable the configuration. For example, you might want to change
the overall configuration protection mode and the redo transport services properties on
a disabled configuration so that all changes are applied to the configuration at the
same time upon the next enable operation.
See Also:
How the Protection Modes Influence Broker Operations
3.7 Configuration Status

A configuration status reveals the overall health of the configuration.
Status of the configuration is acquired from the status of all of its databases.
The following list describes the possible status modes for a configuration:
• Success
The configuration, including all of the databases configured in it, is operating as
specified by the user without any warnings or errors.
• Warning
One or more of the databases in the configuration are not operating as specified
by the user. To obtain more information, use the DGMGRL SHOW DATABASE <db-
unique-name> command or the Cloud Control display to locate each database and
examine its status to reveal the source of the problem.
• Error
One or more of the databases in the configuration failed or may no longer be
operating as specified by the user. To obtain more information, use the DGMGRL
SHOW DATABASE <db-unique-name> command or the Cloud Control display to locate
each database and examine its status to reveal the source of the problem.
• Unknown/Disabled
Broker management of the configuration is disabled and the broker is not
monitoring the status of the databases in the configuration.
• ROLLING DATABASE MAINTENANCE IN PROGRESS
An operation performed using the PL/SQL DBMS_ROLLING package is in progress.
3-12
4
Managing the Members of a Broker
Configuration
Learn how to manage broker configuration members, and monitor the state of each
member of the configuration.
• Managing Broker Configuration Members
• Managing States of Broker Configuration Members
• Managing Database Properties
• Managing Redo Transport Services
• Managing Redo Transport Services for Recovery Appliance
• Managing Log Apply Services
• Managing Data Protection Modes
• Managing Far Sync Instances
• Managing Fast-Start Failover
• Managing Database Conversions
• Database Status
4.1 Managing Broker Configuration Members

The broker uses information in its configuration file to manage and monitor the state of
each member of the configuration.
The broker distinguishes between different types of members in a broker configuration.
Each type of member has a set of states and properties that are appropriate for that
type of member.
4.2 Managing States of Broker Configuration Members

The members of a configuration can be in various states which, in an enabled
configuration, determine the behavior of Oracle Data Guard.
The following table describes the various states.
Snapshot standby databases are not listed in this table because they do not have
states; they only receive redo data.
Far sync instances are also not included in this table because they do not have states;
they only receive redo and forward it to a standby database.
Zero Data Loss Recovery Appliances are not included in this table because they do
not have states.
4-1
Chapter 4
Managing States of Broker Configuration Members
Table 4-1 Database States and Descriptions
Database Role State Name Description

Primary TRANSPORT-ON Redo transport services are set up to transmit
redo data to the standby databases or far sync
instances when the primary database is open
for read/write access.
If this is an Oracle RAC database, all instances
open in read/write mode will have redo
transport services running.
This is the default state for a primary database
when it is enabled for the first time.
Primary TRANSPORT-OFF Redo transport services are stopped on the
primary database.
If this is an Oracle RAC database, redo
transport services are not running on any
instances.
Physical standby APPLY-ON Redo Apply is started on a physical standby
database.
If the standby database is an Oracle RAC
database, the broker starts Redo Apply on
exactly one standby instance, called the apply
instance. If this instance fails, the broker
automatically chooses another instance that is
either mounted or open read-only. This new
instance then becomes the apply instance.
As of Oracle Database 12c Release 2
(12.2.0.1), Redo Apply can be set up to run on
each active running physical standby instance.
If a database has already been set up to run
Redo Apply on multiple instances, then you can
use the Data Guard broker property
ApplyInstances to restrict the number of
instances that are involved in Redo Apply on
an Oracle RAC physical standby database.
APPLY-ON is the default state for a physical
standby database when it is enabled for the
first time.
If a license for the Oracle Active Data Guard
option has been purchased, a physical standby
database can be open while Redo Apply is
active. This capability is known as real-time
query. See Oracle Data Guard Concepts and
Administration for more details.
Physical standby APPLY-OFF Redo Apply is stopped.
If this is an Oracle RAC database, there is no
instance running Apply Services until you
change the database state to APPLY-ON.
4-2
Chapter 4
Table 4-1 (Cont.) Database States and Descriptions
Database Role State Name Description

Logical standby APPLY-ON SQL Apply is started on the logical standby
database when it is opened and the logical
standby database guard is on.
If this is an Oracle RAC database, SQL Apply
is running on one instance, the apply instance.
If this instance fails, the broker automatically
chooses another open instance. This new
instance becomes the apply instance.
This is the default state for a logical standby
database when it is enabled for the first time.
Logical standby APPLY-OFF SQL Apply is stopped. The logical standby
database guard is on.
If this is an Oracle RAC database, there is no
instance running SQL Apply until you change
the state to APPLY-ON.
4.2.1 Database State Transitions

You can use the DGMGRL EDIT DATABASE command to explicitly change the state of a
database.
For example, the EDIT DATABASE command in the following example changes the state
of the North_Sales database to TRANSPORT-OFF.
DGMGRL> EDIT DATABASE 'North_Sales' SET STATE='TRANSPORT-OFF';
Succeeded.
The following sections describe in more detail the possible state transitions for primary
and standby databases.
Primary Database State Transitions

When transitioning the primary database to the TRANSPORT-ON state, the broker sets up
redo transport services using the redo transport-related properties of the configuration
members and the RedoRoutes property at the primary database. Redo transport
services setup is done by setting the LOG_ARCHIVE_DEST_n and LOG_ARCHIVE_DEST_STATE_n
initialization parameters on the primary database, and the LOG_ARCHIVE_CONFIG
initialization parameter on all databases (primary or standby) and far sync instances. If
necessary, the broker also sets up the data protection mode of the database to match
the protection mode recorded in the broker configuration file. Finally, if the database is
open, the broker switches a log for each thread to initiate redo transport services.
When transitioning the primary database to the TRANSPORT-OFF state, the broker turns
off redo transport services to all broker-managed standbys by resetting the
LOG_ARCHIVE_DEST_STATE_n initialization parameter. Transmission of redo data to all
broker-managed standbys is stopped. Log files continue to be archived at the primary
database.
If the primary database is an Oracle RAC database, the broker configures redo
transport services on all primary instances with the exact same settings.
4-3
Chapter 4
Physical Standby Database State Transitions

When transitioning a physical standby database to the APPLY-ON state, the broker starts
Redo Apply with options specified by the Redo Apply-related properties. If the standby
is an Oracle RAC database, then the broker starts Redo Apply on one standby
instance, called the apply instance.
As of Oracle Database 12c Release 2 (12.2.0.1), Redo Apply can be set up to run on
multiple active running physical standby instances. (This feature requires the standby
database to have a license for the Oracle Active Data Guard option.) If a database has
already been set up to run Redo Apply on multiple instances, then you can use the
Data Guard broker property ApplyInstances to restrict the number of instances that are
involved in Redo Apply on an Oracle RAC physical standby database.
If a license for the Oracle Active Data Guard option has been purchased, a physical
standby database can be open while Redo Apply is active. This capability is known as
real-time query. See Oracle Data Guard Concepts and Administration for more details.
The apply instance must be open before starting Redo Apply if any other instance is
open.
When transitioning to the APPLY-OFF state, the broker stops Redo Apply.
Note:
If you perform online database relocation with Oracle RAC One Node on a
physical standby, then the new instance is started in the same mode as the
currently running instance. Therefore, if the database is mounted on the original
instance, then the database will be mounted on the new instance. Likewise, if
the database is open on the original instance, then the database will be open
on the new instance. This may result in the new instance starting in a mode
that does not match the start option recorded with Oracle Clusterware for the
database.
Logical Standby Database State Transitions

When transitioning a logical standby database to the APPLY-ON state, the broker will
wait until the database is open, and then enable the database guard to prevent
modifications to tables in the logical standby database, and start SQL Apply with
options specified by the log apply-related properties. If the logical standby database is
an Oracle RAC database, the broker starts SQL Apply on one standby instance, the
apply instance.
When transitioning to the APPLY-OFF state, the broker stops SQL Apply.
4-4
Chapter 4
Managing Database Properties
See Also:
• Managing Log Apply Services for information about managing SQL Apply
• Managing Redo Transport Services for more details on managing redo
transport services and a list of redo transport-related properties
• Oracle Data Guard Concepts and Administration for information about the
database guard
• Oracle Data Guard Command-Line Interface Reference for complete
information about the EDIT DATABASE command.
4.3 Managing Database Properties

There are two types of database properties: monitorable and configurable.
Both monitorable and configurable properties can be further divided into properties
having database-wide scope or instance-specific scope.
• Monitorable property values can be viewed only when the associated database is
enabled.
Monitorable properties allow you to view run-time information related to databases,
but you cannot change the values of these properties.
• Configurable property values can be viewed and dynamically updated.
Configurable properties affect the operation or configuration of the broker. You can
change the value of these properties using DGMGRL or Cloud Control. You can
edit properties whether the configuration and its members are enabled or disabled.
However, if a configuration member is disabled, then the new property value does
not take effect until you enable the configuration or member, as appropriate.
See Also:
Oracle Data Guard Broker Properties for a detailed list of all database
properties
To see these properties, you can use the DGMGRL SHOW command or Edit Properties
page in Cloud Control. Example 4-1 uses the SHOW DATABASE VERBOSE command to
display information about the North_Sales database.
See Also:
Oracle Data Guard Command-Line Interface Reference for complete
information about the DGMGRL command-line interface
4-5
Chapter 4
Example 4-1 Using the SHOW DATABASE VERBOSE Command to Display

Properties
SHOW DATABASE VERBOSE 'North_Sales';
Database - North_Sales
Role: PRIMARY
Intended State: TRANSPORT-ON
Instance(s):
c0
Properties:
DGConnectIdentifier = 'North_Sales.example.com'
ObserverConnectIdentifier = ''
LogXptMode = 'ASYNC'
RedoRoutes = ''
DelayMins = '0'
Binding = 'optional'
MaxFailure = '0'
MaxConnections = '1'
ReopenSecs = '300'
NetTimeout = '30'
RedoCompression = 'DISABLE'
LogShipping = 'ON'
PreferredApplyInstance = ''
ApplyInstanceTimeout = '0'
ApplyLagThreshold = '0'
TransportLagThreshold = '0'
TransportDisconnectedThreshold = '0'
ApplyParallel = 'AUTO'
ApplyInstances = '0'
StandbyFileManagement = 'AUTO'
ArchiveLagTarget = '0'
LogArchiveMaxProcesses = '5'
LogArchiveMinSucceedDest = '1'
DataGuardSyncLatency = '0'
DbFileNameConvert = 'dbs/cdb2_, dbs/cdb1_, dbs/bt, dbs/t, dbs/
cdb4_, dbs/cdb1_, dbs/dt, dbs/t'
LogFileNameConvert = 'dbs/cdb2_, dbs/cdb1_, dbs/bt, dbs/t, dbs/
FastStartFailoverTarget = ''
InconsistentProperties = '(monitor)'
InconsistentLogXptProps = '(monitor)'
SendQEntries = '(monitor)'
LogXptStatus = '(monitor)'
RecvQEntries = '(monitor)'
PreferredObserverHosts = ''
StaticConnectIdentifier = '(DESCRIPTION=(ADDRESS=(PROTOCOL=tcp)
(HOST=North_Sales.example.com)(PORT=2840))
(CONNECT_DATA=(SERVICE_NAME=North_Sales_DGMGRL.example.com)
(INSTANCE_NAME=north_sales1)(SERVER=DEDICATED)))'
StandbyArchiveLocation = 'USE_DB_RECOVERY_FILE_DEST'
StandbyAlternateLocation = ''
LogArchiveTrace = 255
LogArchiveFormat = 'db1r_%d_%t_%s_%R.arc'
TopWaitEvents = '(monitor)'
Log file locations:

Alert log : /dev/oracle/log/diag/rdbms/North_Sales/north1/trace/
alert_north1.log
4-6
Chapter 4
Data Guard Broker log : /dev/oracle/log/diag/rdbms/North_Sales/north1/trace/

drcnorth1.log
Database Status:
SUCCESS
4.3.1 Monitorable (Read-Only) Properties

Monitorable properties allow you to view information related to a configuration
member, but you cannot change the property values.
Monitorable properties can be very helpful when you are trying to diagnose problems
in the broker configuration. For example, you can view the InconsistentLogXptProps
monitorable property to determine where there is a discrepancy in redo transport
services properties between the broker configuration file and the actual value currently
used by the database.
You can list all monitorable properties using the DGMGRL SHOW DATABASE VERBOSE
command. Use the SHOW DATABASE command to obtain more details about a particular
property. For example, the following shows the InconsistentLogXptProps property:
DGMGRL> SHOW DATABASE 'North_Sales' 'InconsistentLogXptProps';
INCONSISTENT LOG TRANSPORT PROPERTIES
INSTANCE_NAME STANDBY_NAME PROPERTY_NAME MEMORY_VALUE BROKER_VALUE

south_sales1 South_Sales ReopenSecs 600 300
Cloud Control displays the information obtained from these properties on the Edit
Properties page.
4.3.2 Configurable (Changeable) Properties

Configurable properties affect the operation or configuration of a database or far sync
instance.
When you use DGMGRL or Cloud Control to create a primary database and import
existing standby databases and far sync instances into a new broker configuration, the
property values are initially imported from the database or far sync instance settings.
You can update many property values when a configuration member is either disabled
or enabled. When a new member is added into the configuration, the broker connects
to that member and imports initial values for the member's properties from the current
member settings. For example:
DGMGRL> SHOW DATABASE 'North_Sales' 'ArchiveLagTarget';
DGMGRL> EDIT DATABASE 'North_Sales' SET PROPERTY 'ArchiveLagTarget'=1200;

Property "ArchiveLagTarget" updated
DGMGRL> SHOW DATABASE 'North_Sales' 'ArchiveLagTarget';

When the configuration is enabled, the broker keeps member property values in the
broker configuration file consistent with the values being used by the member. For
those that are related to initialization parameter properties, the broker maintains
4-7
Chapter 4
consistency among the value in the broker configuration file, the current value, and the
initialization parameter value in the server parameter file, as follows:
• For dynamic parameters, the broker keeps the value of the parameter consistent
in the system global area (SGA) for the instance, in the broker configuration file,
and in the server parameter file.
• For static parameters and properties, the parameter value in the system global
area (SGA) for the instances may temporarily differ from what is in the broker
configuration file and in the server parameter file. Typically, the in-memory value
becomes the same as the server parameter file value and the broker configuration
file value the next time the instance is stopped and restarted.
Even when the configuration is disabled, you can update property values through the
broker. The broker retains the property settings (without validating the values) and
updates the initialization parameters in the server parameter file and the settings in
memory the next time you enable the broker configuration.
Note:
Even though you can change a property value when the configuration is
disabled, the change does not take effect on the configuration member unless
the configuration is enabled. Also note that some property values can only be
changed in the disabled state.
4.3.2.1 Resetting Broker Configurable Properties to Default Values

Most broker configurable properties have a default value, but you can specify a
different value to override it.
In releases prior to Oracle Database 12c Release 1 (12.1), once you changed a
default value the broker considered it to be a user-supplied value even if you later set
the property back to its former default value.
As of Oracle Database 12c Release 1 (12.1), the broker recognizes when a default
value has been restored for a property and no longer considers it a user-supplied
value. This is expedient in upgrade scenarios because if a default value for a property
changes between releases, then the new default value is automatically put into effect
after an upgrade is complete. Values that are considered user-supplied are not
automatically upgraded.
You do not need to know the actual default value in order to reset it. You can reset a
default value at the configuration, configuration member, or instance level.
4-8
Chapter 4
Managing Redo Transport Services
See Also:
• "EDIT CONFIGURATION RESET (Property)"

• "EDIT DATABASE RESET (Property)"
• "EDIT INSTANCE RESET (Property)"
• "EDIT FAR_SYNC RESET (Property)"
• EDIT RECOVERY_APPLIANCE RESET (Property)
4.4 Managing Redo Transport Services

To manage redo transport services, you specify configurable properties on each
configuration member.
The properties you specify are as follows::
• DGConnectIdentifier
• StandbyAlternateLocation
• Binding
• Encryption (This property can be set only on a Recovery Appliance)
• LogShipping
• LogXptMode
• MaxConnections
• MaxFailure
• NetTimeout
• RedoCompression
• RedoRoutes
• ReopenSecs
• StandbyArchiveLocation
You can use these properties to specify how the broker configures redo transport
services for the standby database. The actual redo transport setup, such as setting the
LOG_ARCHIVE_DEST_n initialization parameter, is carried out by the broker on the primary
database (except for the StandbyArchiveLocation property). If changing the property
requires that you change the LOG_ARCHIVE_DEST_n initialization parameter attributes, the
broker forces a log switch on each thread so that the new setting is adopted
immediately by the primary database.
You should also preset these properties on the primary database in preparation for it
to be switched over to a standby database.
4-9
Chapter 4
4.4.1 Setting Up For Redo Transport

Redo data is transported to a standby database using Oracle Net.
An Oracle Net service name is specified with the SERVICE attribute of the
LOG_ARCHIVE_DEST_n initialization parameter and is used to transmit redo data to the
standby database. The Oracle Net service name is translated into a connect descriptor
that contains the information necessary for connecting to the standby database.
The SERVICE attribute can be set or changed by using the DGConnectIdentifier
database property. The DGConnectIdentifier property is set when a database is first
added to the configuration. Its initial value is the connect identifier that is specified in
the optional CONNECT IDENTIFIER IS clause of the ADD DATABASE command.
The DGConnectIdentifier property value is also used to set up the FAL_SERVER

initialization parameter. If the DGConnectIdentifier property for any database is
changed, the SERVICE attribute of the corresponding LOG_ARCHIVE_DEST_n initialization
parameter will also be changed. In addition, the FAL_SERVER initialization parameter will
also be updated on every enabled standby database in the configuration.
4.4.2 Managing Redo Transport Services for Data Protection Modes

As a part of the overall configuration protection mode, you must ensure that redo
transport services are also properly set up for the data protection mode that you
choose.
Managing Data Protection Modes describes how the broker handles data protection
modes.
You use the LogXptMode or RedoRoutes database properties to set the SYNC, ASYNC, or
FASTSYNC mode for redo transport services.
The following redo transport modes are supported:
SYNC
Configures redo transport services for this standby database using the SYNC and AFFIRM
attributes of the LOG_ARCHIVE_DEST_n initialization parameter. This mode, along with
standby redo log files, is required for configurations operating in either maximum
protection mode or maximum availability mode. This redo transport service enables
the highest grade of data protection to the primary database, but also can incur a
higher performance impact.
ASYNC
Configures redo transport services for this standby database using the ASYNC and
NOAFFIRM attributes of the LOG_ARCHIVE_DEST_n initialization parameter. This mode, along
with standby redo log files, enables a moderate grade of protection to the primary
database, and lower performance impact.
FASTSYNC
Configures redo transport services for this standby database using the SYNC and
NOAFFIRM attributes of the LOG_ARCHIVE_DEST_n initialization parameter. This mode is only
available in maximum availability protection mode.
4-10
Chapter 4
4.4.3 Advanced Redo Transport Settings

You can use the RedoRoutes property to override the default behavior in which a
primary database sends its redo to every possible redo transport destination in the
configuration.
An example of redo transport topology other than the default would be one in which a
physical standby or a far sync instance forwards redo received from the primary
database to one or more destinations, or one in which the redo transport mode used
for a given destination is dependent on which database is in the primary role.
See Also:
• RedoRoutes for information about redo routing rules when you use the
RedoRoutes property
Example 4-2 Using the RedoRoutes Property for Real-Time Cascading

Consider a configuration that has a primary database (North_Sales) and two physical
standby databases (Local_Sales and Remote_Sales). The Local_Sales database is
located in the same data center as the primary for high availability purposes. The
Remote_Sales database is located in a remote data center for disaster recovery
purposes. Instead of the primary having to ship its redo to both databases, it is
possible to use the RedoRoutes property to configure real-time cascading, in which the
local physical standby database forwards redo from North_Sales to the remote physical
standby database, Remote_Sales. To accomplish this, the RedoRoutes property must be
set as follows:
• On the North_Sales database, the RedoRoutes property must specify that if
North_Sales is in the primary role, then it should ship redo to the Local_Sales
database using synchronous transport mode. This rule prevents the primary from
shipping redo data directly to the Remote_Sales database.
• On the Local_Sales database, the RedoRoutes property must specify that if
North_Sales is in the primary role, then Local_Sales should forward redo it receives
from North_Sales on to Remote_Sales.
DGMGRL> EDIT DATABASE 'North_Sales' SET PROPERTY 'RedoRoutes' = '(LOCAL :
Local_Sales SYNC)';
DGMGRL> EDIT DATABASE 'Local_Sales' SET PROPERTY 'RedoRoutes' = '(North_Sales :
Remote_Sales ASYNC)';
To see the runtime RedoRoutes configuration, use the SHOW CONFIGURATION command. For
example:
DGMGRL> SHOW CONFIGURATION;
Configuration - Sales_Configuration
Protection Mode: MaxAvailability

Members:
North_Sales - Primary database
Local_Sales - Physical standby database
Remote_Sales - Physical standby database (receiving current redo)
4-11
Chapter 4
Fast-Start Failover: DISABLED
Configuration Status:
SUCCESS
Note that the ASYNC redo transport attribute was explicitly specified in the redo route
rule for the Remote_Sales destination to enable real-time cascading of redo to that
destination. (Real-time cascading requires a license for the Oracle Active Data Guard
option.)
To disable real-time cascading of redo, do not specify the ASYNC redo transport
attribute. For example:
Remote_Sales)';
Example 4-3 Using the RedoRoutes Property for Remote Alternate

Destinations
The RedoRoutes property can also be used to set up a remote alternate destination so
that a terminal member can still receive redo data even if the member from which it
was receiving the redo data fails. Using the previous example, it would be possible to
have the primary database, North_Sales, send redo data directly to Remote_Sales if the
Local_Sales standby database failed. It is also possible, using the PRIORITY attribute, to
set it up so that once the Local_Sales failure has been resolved it can resume shipping
redo to Remote_Sales.
( Local_Sales ASYNC PRIORITY=1, Remote_Sales ASYNC PRIORITY=2 ))';
Property "RedoRoutes" updated

Remote_Sales ASYNC)';
Property "RedoRoutes" updated
Protection Mode: MaxPerformance

Members:
Remote_Sales - Physical standby database
SUCCESS
To see the full RedoRoutes configuration, use the SHOW CONFIGURATION VERBOSE command.
For example:
DGMGRL> SHOW CONFIGURATION VERBOSE;

Members:
4-12
Chapter 4

Remote_Sales - Physical standby database
Remote_Sales - Physical standby database (alternate of Local_Sales)
Properties:
FastStartFailoverThreshold = '180'
OperationTimeout = '30'
TraceLevel = 'USER'
FastStartFailoverLagLimit = '300'
CommunicationTimeout = '180'
ObserverReconnect = '0'
FastStartFailoverAutoReinstate = 'TRUE'
FastStartFailoverPmyShutdown = 'TRUE'
BystandersFollowRoleChange = 'ALL'
ObserverOverride = 'FALSE'
ExternalDestination1 = ''
PrimaryLostWriteAction = 'CONTINUE'
ConfigurationWideServiceName = 'c0_CFG'
SUCCESS
4.4.4 Turning Redo Transport Services On and Off

You turn redo transport services on and off by setting the state of the primary
database.
Setting the primary database state to TRANSPORT-ON starts redo transport services at the
primary database, and setting the primary database state to TRANSPORT-OFF stops redo
transport services at the primary database.
Note:
Oracle does not recommend turning off redo transport services to all standby
databases. This increases the risk of data loss if the primary database fails.
Turn redo transport services on and off to an individual standby database using the
LogShipping database property on the standby database. The LogShipping property
accepts values ON and OFF. If you set the LogShipping property to OFF for a standby
database, redo transport services to this standby database are turned off, while redo
transport services to other databases are not affected. You can set LogShipping to ON to
turn back on redo transport services to the standby database.
The relationship between setting the primary database state and setting the
LogShipping property is as follows:
• If the primary database state is set to TRANSPORT-OFF, redo transport services to all
the standby databases are stopped regardless of the LogShipping property values
of the individual standby databases.
• If the primary database state is set to TRANSPORT-ON, redo transport services to each
standby database are determined by the LogShipping property of that database.
4-13
Chapter 4
Example 4-4 and Example 4-5 show how to turn off redo transport services in two
different scenarios.
Example 4-4 Turn Off Redo Transport Services to All Standby Databases
DGMGRL> EDIT DATABASE 'North_Sales' SET STATE='TRANSPORT-OFF';
DGMGRL> SHOW DATABASE 'North_Sales';
Role: PRIMARY
Intended State: TRANSPORT-OFF
Instance(s):
north_sales1
Database Status:
SUCCESS
Example 4-5 Turn Off Redo Transport Services to a Specific Standby Database
DGMGRL> EDIT DATABASE 'South_Sales' SET PROPERTY 'LogShipping'='OFF';
Property "LogShipping" updated
DGMGRL> SHOW DATABASE 'South_Sales' 'LogShipping';

LogShipping = 'OFF'
4.4.5 Specifying Locations for Archived Redo Log Files

You can use broker configurable properties to set up locations to store both archived
standby redo log files and archived online redo log files.
For standby redo log files, use the StandbyArchiveLocation and
StandbyAlternateLocation on a standby database.
For online redo log files, use the OnlineArchiveLocation and OnlineAlternateLocation
properties on a primary, logical, or snapshot standby database.
The StandbyArchiveLocation property specifies a location to store archived redo log
files. The broker uses the location to store only archived redo log files received from
the primary database. For archived redo log files generated locally when the database
is either the primary database or a logical standby database, you need to specify the
OnlineArchiveLocation property. The broker allows the value of the
StandbyArchiveLocation and OnlineArchiveLocation properties to be the same as the
location you set up for locally generated logs, in which case the broker sets up the
VALID_FOR attribute of the destination appropriately so that it can be used for both the
archived redo log files received from the primary database and archived redo log files
generated locally.
You can also set up an alternate location to store archived redo log files by using the
StandbyAlternateLocation and OnlineAlternateLocation properties. The alternate
locations specified by these properties are where the archived redo log files are stored
if the original archive location (specified by StandbyArchiveLocation or
OnlineArchivelocation) fails. The broker sets up the alternate location properly using
the ALTERNATE attribute of the LOG_ARCHIVE_DEST_n initialization parameter.
4-14
Chapter 4
Note:
You can use the database recovery area to store archived redo log files on the
standby. In such a case, the value of the StandbyArchiveLocation and
OnlineArchiveLocation properties can be set to USE_DB_RECOVERY_FILE_DEST.
If you are not using a database recovery area, then on a logical standby
database Oracle recommends that the OnlineArchiveLocation property be
different from the value of the StandbyArchiveLocation property.
4.4.6 Other Redo Transport Settings

You can use database properties to tune the performance of redo transport services
and to set up redo transport services failure policies.
The properties used are: Binding, MaxFailure, MaxConnections, NetTimeout,
RedoCompression, and ReopenSecs . These properties correspond to attributes on the
LOG_ARCHIVE_DEST_n initialization parameter.
See Also:
Oracle Data Guard Broker Properties for complete information about these
database properties
4.4.7 Redo Transport Services in an Oracle RAC Database

Environment
If the primary database is an Oracle RAC database, the broker ensures that redo
transport services are set up identically on each of the primary database instances.
Each instance has the same remote destinations, and for each remote destination, all
instances are set up the same in terms of redo transport service, performance related
settings, and so on. If an instance has different settings, the broker raises a health
check warning on that particular instance
Settings relative to redo transport services are saved in the broker configuration file as
properties. When you update a redo transport-related property on a standby database,
the corresponding change is also made automatically by the broker to the
LOG_ARCHIVE_DEST_n initialization parameter on all of the primary database instances. If
a new instance comes up on the primary database, the broker sets up redo transport
services for the new instance using the redo transport-related properties of all the
configuration members currently being managed by the broker. After the new instance
is opened for activity, all archived redo log files generated on this instance begin to
transmit to members of the configuration.
4-15
Chapter 4
See also:
Oracle Data Guard Concepts and Administration for additional information
about the LOG_ARCHIVE_DEST_n initialization parameter
4.4.8 Transport Lag

Transport lag is a measure of the degree to which the transport of redo to a standby
database or far sync instance lags behind the generation of redo on the primary
database.
If there are one or more redo gaps on a standby database or far sync instance, then
the transport lag is calculated as if no redo has been received after the beginning of
the earliest redo gap.
Both Cloud Control and the DGMGRL client display the redo transport lag for each
managed standby or far sync instance. Cloud Control displays the transport lag on the
Oracle Data Guard home page. The DGMGRL client displays the transport lag in the
SHOW DATABASE output. There is no transport lag displayed for a primary database. For
example:
DGMGRL> show database 'South_Sales';
Database - South_Sales
Role: PHYSICAL STANDBY

Intended State: APPLY-ON
Transport Lag: 0 seconds (computed 0 seconds ago)
Apply Lag: 0 seconds (computed 0 seconds ago)
Apply Rate: 255.00 KByte/s
Real Time Query: OFF
Instance(s):
south_sales1
Database Status:
SUCCESS
The transport lag can help you identify any problems that may exist with the redo
transport services.
You can set the TransportLagThreshold database configurable property to generate a
health check warning when the transport of redo data to a standby database or far
sync instance lags behind the generation of redo data on the primary database.
The following command sets the TransportLagThreshold property to 15 seconds:
DGMGRL> EDIT DATABASE 'South_Sales' SET PROPERTY 'TransportLagThreshold'=15;
Property TransportLagThreshold updated
Additionally, you can set the TransportDisconnectedThreshold database configurable

property to generate a health check warning if a standby or far sync instance finds that
it has not had any redo transport-related communication with the primary database.
The property has a default value of 30 seconds.
The following command sets the TransportDisconnectedThreshold property to 15
seconds:
4-16
Chapter 4
Managing Redo Transport Services for Recovery Appliance
DGMGRL> EDIT DATABASE 'South_Sales' SET PROPERTY 'TransportDisconnectedThreshold'=15;

Property TransportDisconnectedThreshold updated
4.5 Managing Redo Transport Services for Recovery

Appliance
Redo transport services for a Zero Data Loss Recovery Appliance (Recovery
Appliance) are managed in the same way as for a standby database.
You can use the broker to manage redo transport services to a Recovery Appliance
from any member in the configuration. For example, to add a Recovery Appliance to a
broker configuration and then enable it, you would take the following steps:
1. Add the Recovery Appliance to the broker configuration.
DGMGRL> ADD RECOVERY_APPLIANCE EnterpriseRecoveryAppliance AS CONNECT IDENTIFIER
IS
EnterpriseRecoveryAppliance.example.com;
Oracle Recovery Appliance "EnterpriseRecoveryAppliance" added
DGMGRL> SHOW RECOVERY_APPLIANCE 'EnterpriseRecoveryAppliance';

Oracle Recovery Server - EnterpriseRecoveryAppliance
Transport Lag: 0 seconds
Redo Source: North_Sales
Oracle Recovery Appliance Status:

DISABLED
2. Enable the Recovery Appliance.
DGMGRL> ENABLE RECOVERY_APPLIANCE 'EnterpriseRecoveryAppliance';


SUCCESS
3. Set a transport lag threshold.
Set the TransportLagThreshold database configurable property to generate a health
check warning when the transport of redo data to the Recovery Appliance lags
behind the generation of redo data on the source database. This step is optional,
but if you do not specify a transport lag threshold, then the default value of 0
seconds is used and no warning is generated if a transport lag exists.
The following command sets the TransportLagThreshold property to 15 seconds:
DGMGRL> EDIT RECOVERY_APPLIANCE 'EnterpriseRecoveryAppliance'
SET PROPERTY 'TransportLagThreshold'=15;
Property TransportLagThreshold updated
Example 4-6 Setting Up Redo Transport From a Physical Standby To a
Recovery Appliance
Consider a configuration that has a primary database (North_Sales) a physical standby
database (South_Sales), and a Recovery Appliance (EnterpriseRecoveryAppliance).
Instead of the primary having to ship its redo to both the standby and the Recovery
4-17
Chapter 4
Managing Log Apply Services
Appliance, you can set up the RedoRoutes property so that the primary sends redo only
to the physical standby, and the physical standby then forwards that redo to the
Recovery Appliance. To accomplish this, the RedoRoutes property must be set as
follows:
• On the North_Sales database, the RedoRoutes property must specify that if
North_Sales is in the primary role, then it should ship redo to the South_Sales
database using synchronous transport mode. This rule prevents the primary from
shipping redo data directly to the Recovery Appliance,
EnterpriseRecoveryAppliance.
• On the South_Sales database, the RedoRoutes property must specify that if

North_Sales is in the primary role, then South_Sales should forward redo it receives
from North_Sales on to EnterpriseRecoveryAppliance.
South_Sales SYNC)';
DGMGRL> EDIT DATABASE 'South_Sales' SET PROPERTY 'RedoRoutes' = '(North_Sales :
EnterpriseRecoveryAppliance ASYNC)';
Note that the ASYNC redo transport attribute was explicitly specified in the redo route
rule for the EnterpriseRecoveryAppliance destination to enable real-time cascading of
redo to that destination.
Once a Recovery Appliance has been added to a broker configuration, it can receive
redo from either the primary database or a standby database. Example 4-6 shows how
to set up a Recovery Appliance to receive redo from a physical standby database.
See Also:
• Managing Redo Transport Services for information about managing redo

transport services
4.6 Managing Log Apply Services

You can manage Redo Apply and SQL Apply on physical and logical standby
databases by using database properties related to log apply.
The database properties related to log apply are as follows:
• Properties common to Redo Apply and SQL Apply
– ApplyInstanceTimeout
– DelayMins
– PreferredApplyInstance
• Properties specific to Redo Apply

– ApplyParallel
– ApplyInstances
• Properties specific to SQL Apply

– LsbyMaxEventsRecorded
4-18
Chapter 4
– LsbyPreserveCommitOrder
– LsbyRecordSkipErrors
– LsbyRecordSkipDdl
– LsbyRecordAppliedDdl
– LsbyMaxSga
– LsbyMaxServers
There are some properties related to SQL Apply that, if changed, may require a
restart of SQL Apply if the current database state is APPLY-ON. See the information
in Oracle Data Guard Broker Properties about properties related to SQL Apply, to
determine which ones require SQL Apply to be restarted.
If the current database state is APPLY-OFF, the property changes will take effect the
next time the database state is changed to APPLY-ON.
4.6.1 Managing Delayed Apply

You can set up Apply Services so that the application of redo to the standby database
is delayed.
This allows the standby database to lag behind the primary database, and if a user
error (for example, dropping a table) occurs during this window of time, the standby
database will still contain the correct data that can be transmitted back to the primary
database to repair the data.
By default, no delay is configured and the redo data is applied on a standby database
as soon as possible. If the standby database has standby redo logs configured, the
broker will enable real-time apply. When Redo Apply and SQL Apply apply redo in real
time, the redo data is recovered directly from the standby redo log files as they are
being filled. This means that the standby database does not have to wait for the log
files to be archived before applying redo data from the archived redo log files. This
minimizes the transactional lag between the primary and the standby.
Use the DelayMins database property to specify the number of minutes that log apply
services must wait before applying redo data to the standby database. Note that only
log apply services on the standby database are delayed. Redo transport services on
the primary database are not delayed, thus the primary database data is still well
protected by the standby database.
Caution:
Because the broker automatically enables real-time apply on standby
databases, Oracle recommends that you configure all databases to use
Flashback Database.
4.6.2 Managing Parallel Apply with Redo Apply

For Redo Apply, you can configure whether multiple parallel processes are used to
apply redo data received from the primary database by using the ApplyParallel
database property.
4-19
Chapter 4
Parallelism is enabled by default, which means Redo Apply automatically chooses the
optimal number of parallel processes based on the number of CPUs in the system.
(This is equivalent to setting the ApplyParallel property to AUTO.) You can disable
parallelism by setting the ApplyParallel property to NO.
Note:
Parallel Redo Apply is different from multi-instance Redo Apply. Parallel Redo
Apply means that there are multiple Redo Apply slaves per instance; this value
is set using the broker ApplyParallel property. Multi-instance Redo Apply
means that there are multiple instances running Redo Apply; this value is set
with the broker ApplyInstances property. The two properties can be used
together to control the Redo Apply slaves on each instance on which apply is
running in multi-instance apply. The number of parallel slaves specified by the
ApplyParallel property will be the same on each instance in a multi-instance
apply configuration.
See Also:
ApplyParallel
ApplyInstances
4.6.3 Managing Multi-Instance Redo Apply

For Redo Apply in an Oracle RAC database, you can configure the number of
instances that can be engaged in recovery by means of the ApplyInstances property
value.
By default, only one instance is involved in recovery activity. However, the
ApplyInstances property can be set to indicate a specific number of instances or the
value ALL, to indicate all instances. When recovery is started, it checks to see if
enough instances as configured are available to start recovery on. If not, then broker
delays starting recovery for one minute to allow other instances to start up and then
starts recovery.
During periodic health checks, broker checks to see if more instances have started
that could potentially be engaged in recovery. If so, then broker stops and restarts
recovery to engage the additional instances.
Changing the value of the ApplyInstances property value results in recovery being
restarted with the new values.
All instances must be in the same state (open or mounted) to be able to engage that
instance in recovery.
4-20
Chapter 4
4.6.4 Allocating Resources to SQL Apply

You can control how much SGA memory is available for SQL Apply by setting the
LsbyMaxSga database property.
To control the number of parallel query servers used by SQL Apply, you can use the
LsbyMaxServers database property.
You can control the trade off between SQL Apply performance and the commit order
of transactions. The LsbyPreserveCommitOrder database property controls whether
transactions are committed on the logical standby database in the exact same order in
which they were committed on the primary database. Preserving commit order may
affect performance.
See Also:
• LsbyMaxSga
• LsbyMaxServers
4.6.5 Managing the DBA_LOGSTDBY_EVENTS Table

The DBA_LOGSTDBY_EVENTS table records important events that affect SQL Apply.
Because every logical standby database might have a different interest in the set of
events to be recorded in this table, Oracle Data Guard provides a means to control the
event recording. From the Oracle Data Guard broker, you can use the LsbyRecord*
database properties (for example, LsbyRecordSkipDdl or LsbyRecordSkipErrors) to
control recording of a particular set of events. The value of these properties are either
TRUE or FALSE, indicating the turning on or off of the event recording.
4.6.6 Apply Services in an Oracle RAC Database Environment

When a standby database is an Oracle RAC database, SQL Apply and Redo Apply
make use of an apply instance.
SQL Apply can run on only one instance of an Oracle RAC database at any time. This
instance is called the apply instance.
Redo Apply can run on all instances of an Oracle RAC database at the same time, but
only one of the instances is the apply coordinator and that is the instance that the
broker considers to be the apply instance. This feature requires that the ApplyInstances
database configurable property (valid only on physical standby databases) be set to a
non-zero value. See ApplyInstances.
If the apply instance fails, then the broker automatically restarts SQL Apply, or the
Redo Apply coordinator, as appropriate, on a different instance. This is called apply
instance failover (see Apply Instance Failover).
4-21
Chapter 4
4.6.6.1 Selecting the Apply Instance

If you have no preference which instance is to be the apply instance in an Oracle RAC
standby database, the broker randomly picks an apply instance. If you want to select a
particular instance as the apply instance, there are two methods to do so.
Note:
The information in this section is not applicable to snapshot standby databases
or far sync instances.
• The first method is to set the value of the PreferredApplyInstance database

property to the name of the instance (see the InstanceName property) you want to
be the apply instance. The broker starts log apply services on that instance if no
apply instance is yet selected in the Oracle RAC standby database. This could be
the case before you enable the standby database for the first time, or if the apply
instance just failed and the broker is about to do an apply instance failover, or if
the Oracle RAC database is currently the primary and you want to specify its apply
instance in preparation for a switchover. Once the apply instance is selected and,
as long as the apply instance is still running, the broker disregards the value of the
PreferredApplyInstance property even if you change it.
• The second method is to change the apply instance when the apply instance is
already selected and is running. To change the apply instance, issue the
DGMGRL SET STATE command to set the standby database state to APPLY-ON, with
a specific apply instance argument. The SET STATE command will update the
PreferredApplyInstance property to the new apply instance value, and then move
log apply services to the new instance. For example, use DGMGRL SHOW command
to show the available instances for the standby database, then issue the EDIT
DATABASE command to move log apply services to the new instance:
DGMGRL> SHOW DATABASE 'South_Sales'

Transport Lag: 0 seconds (computed 1 second ago)
Apply Lag: 0 seconds (computed 1 second ago)
Instance(s):
south_sales1 (apply instance)
south_sales2
Database Status:
SUCCESS
DGMGRL> EDIT DATABASE 'South_Sales' SET STATE='APPLY-ON' WITH APPLY

INSTANCE='south_sales2';
Succeeded.
DGMGRL> SHOW DATABASE 'South_Sales' 'PreferredApplyInstance';

PreferredApplyInstance = 'south_sales2'
4-22
Chapter 4
DGMGRL> SHOW DATABASE 'South_Sales'

Instance(s):
south_sales1
south_sales2 (apply instance)
Database Status:
SUCCESS
Ensure that the new apply instance is running when the command is issued.
Otherwise, the apply instance remains the same.
Once the apply instance is selected, the broker keeps apply instance information in the
broker configuration file so that even if the standby database is shut down and
restarted, the broker still selects the same instance to start log apply services. The
apply instance remains unchanged until changed by the user or it fails for any reason
and the broker decides to do an apply instance failover.
4.6.6.2 Apply Instance Failover

To tolerate a failure of the apply instance, the broker leverages the availability of the
Oracle RAC standby database by automatically failing over log apply services to a
different standby instance.
The apply instance failover capability provided by the broker enhances data protection.
To set up apply instance failover, set the ApplyInstanceTimeout database property to
specify the time period that the broker will wait after detecting an apply instance failure
and before initiating an apply instance failover. To select an appropriate timeout value,
you need to consider:
• If there is another mechanism in the cluster (such as Oracle Clusterware) that will
try to recover the failed apply instance.
• How long your business can tolerate not applying redo data on the standby
database.
• The overhead associated with moving the log apply services to a different
instance. The overhead may include retransmitting, from the primary database, all
log files accumulated on the failed apply instance that have not been applied if
those log files are not saved in a shared file system that can be accessed from
other standby instances.
The broker default value of the ApplyInstanceTimeout property is 0 seconds, indicating
that apply instance failover should occur immediately upon detection of the failure of
the current apply instance.
After the broker initiates an apply instance failover, the broker selects a new apply
instance according to the following rule: if the PreferredApplyInstance property
indicates an instance that is currently running, select it as the new apply instance;
otherwise pick a random instance that is currently running to be the new apply
instance.
4-23
Chapter 4
In addition, if the physical standby database was operating in real-time query mode
when the apply instance failed, then after Oracle recovery cleanup is completed, the
broker opens any instances that had been automatically closed. If the failed apply
instance was the only instance open, then the instance chosen as the new apply
instance is opened before starting apply services so that real-time query is once again
in effect.
See Also:
• Oracle Data Guard Concepts and Administration for more information

about real-time query mode
• The My Oracle Support note 1357597.1 at http://support.oracle.com for
additional information about apply instance failures in an Oracle Active
Data Guard Oracle RAC standby
4.6.7 Apply Lag

Apply lag is a measure of the degree to which the data in a standby database or far
sync instance lags behind the data in the primary database, due to delays in
propagating and applying the redo.
Both Cloud Control and the DGMGRL client display the apply lag for each managed
standby database and far sync instance. Cloud Control displays the apply lag on the
Oracle Data Guard home page. The DGMGRL client displays the apply lag in the SHOW
DATABASE output. There is no apply lag displayed for a primary database. For example:
DGMGRL> SHOW DATABASE 'South_Sales';


Instance(s):
south_sales1
Database Status:
SUCCESS
The apply lag can help you identify any problems that may exist with both the redo
transport services and the log apply services.
You can set the ApplyLagThreshold database configurable property to generate a health
check warning when a standby database or far sync instance lags behind the data in
the primary database.
The following command sets the ApplyLagThreshold property to 15 seconds:
DGMGRL> EDIT DATABASE 'South_Sales' SET PROPERTY 'ApplyLagThreshold'=15;
Property ApplyLagThreshold updated
4-24
Chapter 4
Managing Data Protection Modes
4.7 Managing Data Protection Modes

You can use the broker to set up a configuration having any of the different data
protection modes.
The available modes of data protection are: maximum protection, maximum
availability, and maximum performance.
This section contains the following topics to help you configure the proper protection
for your configuration:
• Setting the Protection Mode for Your Configuration
• How the Protection Modes Influence Broker Operations
4.7.1 Setting the Protection Mode for Your Configuration

These are the steps for setting the protection mode for your configuration.
• Setting the Protection Mode Task 1: Determine Which Data Protection Mode You
Want to Use
• Setting the Protection Mode Task 2: Set up standby redo log files
• Setting the Protection Mode Task 3: Set the redo transport mode
• Setting the Protection Mode Task 4: Using DGMGRL or Cloud Control
4.7.1.1 Setting the Protection Mode Task 1: Determine Which Data Protection
Mode You Want to Use
Each data protection mode provides a different balance of data protection, data
availability, and database performance.
To select the data protection mode that meets the needs of your business, carefully
consider your data protection requirements and the performance expectations of your
users.
Note:
Maximum protection mode cannot be used in the following situations:
• If the only standby database in a configuration is a snapshot standby
• If a far sync instance is the only configuration member receiving redo in
synchronous mode from the primary database
Maximum Availability
This protection mode provides the highest level of data protection that is possible
without compromising the availability of a primary database. Transactions do not
commit until all redo data needed to recover those transactions has been written to the
online redo log and to the standby redo log on at least one synchronized standby
database. If the primary database cannot write its redo stream to at least one
4-25
Chapter 4
synchronized standby database, it operates as if it were in maximum performance

mode to preserve primary database availability until it is again able to write its redo
stream to a synchronized standby database.
This mode ensures that no data loss will occur if the primary database fails, but only if
a second fault does not prevent a complete set of redo data from being sent from the
primary database to at least one standby database.
You can enable fast-start failover if the protection mode is maximum availability.
Maximum Performance
This protection mode provides the highest level of data protection that is possible
without affecting the performance of a primary database. This is accomplished by
allowing transactions to commit as soon as all redo data generated by those
transactions has been written to the online log. Redo data is also written to one or
more standby databases, but this is done asynchronously with respect to transaction
commitment, so primary database performance is unaffected by delays in writing redo
data to the standby database(s).
This protection mode offers slightly less data protection than maximum availability
mode and has minimal impact on primary database performance.
This is the default protection mode.
You can enable fast-start failover if the protection mode is maximum performance.
Maximum Protection
This protection mode ensures that no data loss will occur if the primary database fails.
To provide this level of protection, the redo data needed to recover a transaction must
be written to both the online redo log and to the standby redo log on at least one
synchronized standby database before the transaction commits. To ensure that data
loss cannot occur, the primary database will shut down, rather than continue
processing transactions, if it cannot write its redo stream to at least one synchronized
standby database.
Transactions on the primary are considered protected as soon as Oracle Data Guard
has written the redo data to persistent storage in a standby redo log file. Once that is
done, acknowledgment is quickly made back to the primary database so that it can
proceed to the next transaction. This minimizes the impact of synchronous transport
on primary database throughput and response time. To fully benefit from complete
Oracle Data Guard validation at the standby database, be sure to operate in real-time
apply mode so that redo changes are applied to the standby database as fast as they
are received. Oracle Data Guard signals any corruptions that are detected so that
immediate corrective action can be taken.
Because this data protection mode prioritizes data protection over primary database
availability, Oracle recommends that a minimum of two standby databases be used to
protect a primary database that runs in maximum protection mode to prevent a single
standby database failure from causing the primary database to shut down. If only one
standby database is supporting maximum protection mode, Oracle Data Guard broker
will disallow the shutdown of the apply instance. This prevents the primary database
from shutting down.
You can enable fast-start failover if the protection mode is maximum protection.
4-26
Chapter 4
See Also:
• Fast-Start Failover for information on fast-start failover

• Oracle Data Guard Concepts and Administration for complete information
about data protection modes
4.7.1.2 Setting the Protection Mode Task 2: Set up standby redo log files
You must add standby redo log files on all standby databases, regardless of the
protection mode you are using.
Also, Oracle requires that you add standby redo log files on the primary database in
preparation for a future switchover or failover. Standby redo log files are required on
the primary database if you want to enable fast-start failover.
Cloud Control automatically prompts you to select one or more standby databases in
the configuration and sets up standby redo log (SRL) files on them and on the primary
database in preparation for a future role change.
See Also:
If you are using the DGMGRL command-line interface, follow the instructions in
Oracle Data Guard Concepts and Administration to configure standby redo log
files.
4.7.1.3 Setting the Protection Mode Task 3: Set the redo transport mode
If the data protection mode requires that you change the redo transport mode used by
any of the standby databases, then either change the LogXptMode database property on
each standby database, or set the RedoRoutes property on the primary database or on
the far sync instance that is directly connected to the standby database.
See Managing Redo Transport Services for more information about setting the redo
transport service. Table 4-2 shows the protection modes and the corresponding redo
transport service.
Cloud Control automatically specifies the correct redo transport service on the primary
database in preparation for a future switchover.
Table 4-2 Oracle Data Guard Protection Modes and Requirements
Protection Mode Redo Transport Standby Redo Log Usable with Fast-Start
Files Needed? Failover?
MAXPROTECTION SYNC Yes Yes
MAXAVAILABILITY SYNC, FASTSYNC Yes Yes1
MAXPERFORMANCE ASYNC Yes Yes
4-27
Chapter 4
1 Because FASTSYNC transport mode uses the NOAFFIRM attribute of the LOG_ARCHIVE_DEST_n
parameter, data loss is possible. This means that a fast-start failover cannot be initiated when FASTSYNC
is used and the standby is missing redo data.
4.7.1.4 Setting the Protection Mode Task 4: Using DGMGRL or Cloud Control
These steps describe how to set the protection mode using DGMGRL commands or
Cloud Control.
With DGMGRL:
1. Use the EDIT DATABASE (property) command and specify the standby database
whose redo transport service should be changed to correspond to the protection
mode you plan to set. For example, if you plan to set the overall Oracle Data
Guard configuration to operate in maximum availability mode, you must use the
EDIT DATABASE command to set the SYNC mode for redo transport services. For
example:
DGMGRL> EDIT DATABASE 'South_Sales' SET PROPERTY LogXptMode='SYNC';
Do this also for the primary database or another standby database in the
configuration to ensure that it can support the chosen protection mode after a
switchover.
You could also use the RedoRoutes property, as follows:
EDIT DATABASE 'North_Sales' SET PROPERTY RedoRoutes = '(LOCAL : South_Sales
SYNC)';
2. Use the EDIT CONFIGURATION SET PROTECTION MODE AS protection-mode command to
set the overall configuration protection mode. For example:
DGMGRL> EDIT CONFIGURATION SET PROTECTION MODE AS MAXAVAILABILITY;
See Scenario 4: Setting the Configuration Protection Mode for a DGMGRL scenario
showing how to set the protection mode.
With Cloud Control:
1. On the Oracle Data Guard overview page, click the link to the right of the
Protection Mode label.
2. Select Maximum Protection, Maximum Availability, or Maximum Performance and
click Continue.
3. If prompted, log in to the database with SYSDG or SYSDBA privileges and click Login.
4. Select one or more standby databases to support the protection mode that you
selected. If standby redo log files are needed, verify the names of the log files.
Click OK.
5. On the Confirmation page, click Yes.
The broker does not allow the protection mode to be directly upgraded from maximum
performance mode to maximum protection mode. You must first change from
maximum performance to maximum availability, and then to maximum protection.
4.7.2 How the Protection Modes Influence Broker Operations

These topics describe how an Oracle Data Guard configuration's protection mode and
redo transport services can affect operations such as switchovers, failovers, and
disabling or enabling the configuration.
4-28
Chapter 4
This section This section contains the following sections:

• Upgrading or Downgrading the Current Protection Mode
• Switchover Operations
• Failover Operations
• Disable and Enable Operations
• Requirements For Removing a Database from the Configuration
• Requirements On Other Operations
4.7.2.1 Upgrading or Downgrading the Current Protection Mode

No restart is necessary when you upgrade the current Oracle Data Guard protection
mode to maximum availability or when you downgrade the current Oracle Data Guard
protection mode. Follow these recommendations when upgrading or downgrading the
Oracle Data Guard protection mode:
• When upgrading the protection mode, upgrade the redo transport service before
you upgrade the overall protection mode. At the time when you change the
protection mode or reset the redo transport service of a standby database, the
broker verifies that there is at least one standby database in the configuration that
can support the desired grade of protection. If not, then the broker does not
change the protection mode and returns an error.
• When downgrading the protection mode, downgrade the protection mode first and
then change the redo transport service (if necessary). The broker will disallow a
change of the redo transport service if doing so invalidates the current overall
protection mode.
If you upgrade the protection mode from the maximum performance mode, the broker
ensures that there is at least one standby database that receives redo via the SYNC
transport, either directly or through a far sync instance. Additionally, for upgrades to
maximum protection mode, the broker ensures there are no gaps in the redo data on
the standby database. If there are no standby databases in the configuration that meet
these requirements, the request to upgrade the protection mode is rejected with an
error.
The protection mode cannot be changed if fast-start failover is enabled. An exception
to this is that a downgrade to maximum availability mode is allowed when fast-start
failover has been enabled in maximum protection mode.
4.7.2.2 Switchover Operations

A switchover does not change the overall Oracle Data Guard protection mode. The
protection mode remains the same as it was before the switchover.
This requires that there be a standby database that is properly configured to support
the current protection mode once the switchover completes. This can be either another
standby database in the configuration or the current primary database that will become
a standby database after the switchover completes.
Before you perform a switchover, if necessary you can add standby redo log files and
set the redo transport properties on the current primary database, or on another
standby database in the configuration, to the transport mode that is required to support
the Oracle Data Guard protection mode. Then, when the switchover begins:
4-29
Chapter 4
• The broker verifies the presence of standby redo log files and the redo transport
service setting on each standby database and on the current primary database.
• The broker verifies there are no gaps in the redo data present on the target
standby database.
If the verification is successful, the switchover continues; otherwise, the switchover
fails, and the database roles and the broker configuration files remain unchanged.
WARNING:
• If the target of the switchover is a physical standby database, then the

broker shuts down and restarts the primary database.
See Also:
Switchover for more information about switchovers
4.7.2.3 Failover Operations

After you perform a manual failover, the Oracle Data Guard protection mode is
downgraded to maximum performance mode if the protection mode was at maximum
protection. You can upgrade the protection mode later, if necessary. If the protection
mode was at maximum availability or maximum performance, it remains unchanged.
The redo transport services of the standby databases remain unchanged.
If fast-start failover occurs, the broker preserves the protection mode that was in effect
just prior to the fast-start failover. If the protection mode was maximum protection, then
the configuration protection mode is preserved, but the new primary database is set to
maximum availability to allow the instance to open. When a standby becomes
available that supports maximum protection mode (either because the old primary
database was reinstated or due to the presence of another standby in the
configuration), the database protection mode is elevated to match the configuration
protection mode of maximum protection.
See Also:
Manual Failover and Fast-Start Failover for more information about manual
failover and fast-start failover, respectively
4.7.2.4 Disable and Enable Operations

When you disable broker management of a standby database, the broker checks to
see if the overall protection mode can still be satisfied by any of the remaining standby
databases. If not, the broker rejects the disable operation. Otherwise, the broker
allows the disable operation to proceed as long as fast-start failover is not enabled. If it
is enabled, the broker allows the disable operation to proceed only if the standby
database is not the target standby database for fast-start failovers.
4-30
Chapter 4
WARNING:
As long as fast-start failover is not enabled, you can disable the entire configuration
regardless of the protection mode. You cannot disable the configuration if fast-start
failover is enabled. See Restrictions When Fast-Start Failover is Enabled for more
information.
When enabling broker management of the entire configuration, the broker first checks
to see if the protection mode will be satisfied by the redo transport settings of the
standby databases that will be enabled. If not, the enable operation fails and the
configuration remains disabled. Otherwise, the enable operation successfully enables
the configuration, and the broker enables the database using the settings saved in the
4.7.2.5 Requirements For Removing a Database from the Configuration

When removing a standby database from the broker configuration, the broker checks
to see if the protection mode will still be satisfied. The operation fails if:
• Removing the database compromises the protection mode
• Fast-start failover is enabled and you try to remove the standby database that is
the target of the fast-start failover
• The configuration member to be removed has its RedoRoutes configurable property
set to a non-null value
You can remove the configuration at any time, unless fast-start failover is enabled.
4.7.2.6 Requirements On Other Operations

Some operations that take place in a broker configuration, especially operations
related to redo transport services, can affect the overall protection mode. These
operations include:
• Stopping redo transport services on the primary database
• Stopping redo transport services to individual standby databases
• Downgrading the redo transport mode from SYNC to ASYNC to the only standby
database that supports a configuration operating in maximum availability mode or
maximum protection mode
Before any of these operations can proceed, the broker checks to see if the protection
mode will be supported by the redo transport service settings on the standby
databases after the operation completes. If not, the broker fails the operation and
returns an error.
4-31
Chapter 4
Managing Far Sync Instances
4.8 Managing Far Sync Instances

An Oracle Data Guard far sync instance is a redo transport destination that accepts
redo from a primary database and forwards that redo to one or more redo destinations
in the configuration.
It is similar to a physical standby database in that it has a control file, receives redo
into Standby Redo Log files (SRLs), and archives those SRLs to local Archived Redo
Logs (ARLs). But unlike a standby database, a far sync instance does not have data
files, cannot be opened, and cannot apply received redo. These limitations yield the
benefit of using fewer disk and processing resources. More importantly, a far sync
instance provides the ability to failover to a terminal database with no data loss if it
receives redo data using synchronous transport mode and the configuration protection
mode is set to maximum availability.
The following example shows how to add a far sync instance to a broker configuration.
DGMGRL> ADD FAR_SYNC FS1 AS CONNECT IDENTIFIER IS FS1.example.com;
Far Sync FS1 added
DGMGRL> ENABLE FAR_SYNC FS1;
Enabled.
Configuration - DRSolution

Members:
FS1 - Far Sync
South_Sales - Physical standby database

SUCCESS
After a far sync instance has been added to the configuration, set up redo transport to
support maximum availability and then upgrade the protection mode:
DGMGRL> EDIT DATABASE 'North_Sales' SET PROPERTY 'RedoRoutes' = '(LOCAL : FS1 SYNC)';
DGMGRL> EDIT FAR_SYNC 'FS1' SET PROPERTY 'RedoRoutes' = '(North_Sales : South_Sales
ASYNC)';
DGMGRL> EDIT CONFIGURATION SET PROTECTION MODE AS MaxAvailability;

Members:
FS1 - Far Sync

SUCCESS
To ensure that maximum availability protection mode can be maintained when

South_Sales is the primary database, after a switchover or a failover, add a second far
4-32
Chapter 4
Managing Fast-Start Failover
sync instance to the configuration so that South_Sales can send redo in synchronous
mode which in turn will send redo to the new terminal database, North_Sales, after the
role transition.
The following example shows how to add a second far sync instance to the broker
configuration:
DGMGRL> ADD FAR_SYNC FS2 AS CONNECT IDENTIFIER IS FS2.example.com;
Far Sync FS2 added
DGMGRL> EDIT FAR_SYNC 'FS2' SET PROPERTY 'RedoRoutes' = '(South_Sales : North_Sales
ASYNC)';
DGMGRL> ENABLE FAR_SYNC FS2;
Enabled.
DGMGRL> EDIT DATABASE 'South_Sales' SET PROPERTY 'RedoRoutes' = '(LOCAL : FS2 SYNC)';

Members:
FS1 - Far Sync
FS2 - Far Sync (inactive)

SUCCESS
If a far sync instance is monitored for availability by Oracle Clusterware (for example,
in an Oracle Restart, Oracle Real Application Clusters (Oracle RAC), or Oracle RAC
One Node installation), then use the SRVCTL utility to specify a default open mode of
mount. You can use a command such as the following:
srvctl modify database -d <db_unique_name> -startoption MOUNT
See Also:

about creating a far sync instance and redo transport
4.9 Managing Fast-Start Failover

You can enable fast-start failover to allow the broker to determine if a failover is
necessary and to initiate a failover to a standby database from a list of one or more
pre-specified target standby databases.
The failover can be set up for either no data loss or a configurable amount of data
loss. In addition, you can specify under which conditions or errors you want a failover
to be initiated. Oracle also provides the DBMS_DG PL/SQL package to allow an
application to request a fast-start failover.
You use broker configuration properties to control the behavior of fast-start failover.
You can also use Cloud Control or the DGMGRL ENABLE FAST_START FAILOVER
4-33
Chapter 4
CONDITION and DISABLE FAST_START FAILOVER CONDITION commands to specify conditions

for which a fast-start failover should occur.
4.9.1 Configure Properties to Tune Fast-Start Failover

You can set various properties to tune how fast-start failover behaves.
The configurable properties for fast-start failover include:
• FastStartFailoverThreshold
Set the FastStartFailoverThreshold configuration property to specify the number of

seconds you want the observer and target standby database to wait (after
detecting the primary database is unavailable) before initiating a failover. See
Enabling Fast-Start Failover for more information and an example.
• FastStartFailoverPmyShutdown
The FastStartFailoverPmyShutdown configuration property controls whether the

primary database will shut down if redo generation has been stalled
(FS_FAILOVER_STATUS column of V$DATABASE contains a value of STALLED) and the
primary database has lost connectivity with the observer and target standby
database for longer than the number of seconds specified by the
FastStartFailoverThreshold configuration property. The default value for
FastStartFailoverPmyShutdown is TRUE.
Note:
The primary database is always shut down if a user configurable fast-start
failover condition is detected or if an application initiated a fast-start failover
by calling the DBMS_DG.INITIATE_FS_FAILOVER function.
• FastStartFailoverLagLimit
The fast-start failover feature can be configured on databases operating in

maximum performance mode. Destinations that receive redo in ASYNC mode will be
acceptable fast-start failover target standby databases, and these destinations can
lag the primary in terms of redo received and applied. A configurable time-based
limit can be specified through the FastStartFailoverLagLimit configuration
property. If the standby database's applied redo point is within this many seconds
of the primary's redo generation point, a fast-start failover will be allowed. If its
applied point lags beyond this limit, a fast-start failover is not allowed. The
FastStartFailoverLagLimit configuration property is not used if fast-start failover is
enabled when the configuration is operating in maximum availability mode or
maximum protection mode. An ASYNC destination is only a valid fast-start failover
target in a configuration operating in maximum performance mode. If you want to
change protection mode or change the destination to sync, you must first disable
fast-start failover. Likewise, changing the protection mode from MAXAVAILABILITY to
MAXPERFORMANCE will require first disabling fast-start failover and changing the redo
transport mode used to send redo to the primary and target standby to ASYNC.
Reinstatement of an old primary will be possible after a fast-start failover to an
ASYNC target standby. If the observer rediscovers the old primary, it will
automatically reinstate the old primary and any redo generated within the specified
lag will be lost.
4-34
Chapter 4
See Also:
Oracle Data Guard Broker Properties for more information
• FastStartFailoverAutoReinstate
The FastStartFailoverAutoReinstate configuration property controls whether the

former primary database is automatically reinstated if a fast-start failover occurred
because the primary database crashed or was stalled for longer than
FastStartFailoverThreshold seconds. The default value for
FastStartFailoverAutoReinstate is TRUE.
If you want to perform diagnostic or repair work after failover has completed, you
can avoid an automatic reinstatement by setting the
FastStartFailoverAutoReinstate configuration property to FALSE.
Note:
The former primary database is never automatically reinstated if a fast-start
failover occurred because a user configurable fast-start failover condition
was detected or because an application initiated a fast-start failover by
calling the DBMS_DG.INITIATE_FS_FAILOVER function.
• FastStartFailoverTarget
The FastStartFailoverTarget configuration property specifies the DB_UNIQUE_NAME

values of the databases that are eligible to be targets of a fast-start failover when
this database is the primary database.
• ObserverReconnect
The ObserverReconnect configuration property specifies how often the observer

establishes a new connection to the primary database. When this property is set to
the default value of 0, it prevents the observer from periodically establishing a new
connection with the primary database. While this eliminates the processing
overhead associated with periodically establishing a new observer connection to
the primary database, it also prevents the observer from detecting that it is not
possible to create new connections to the primary database. Oracle recommends
that this property be set to a value that is small enough to allow timely detection of
faults at the primary database, but large enough to limit the overhead associated
with periodic observer connections to an acceptable level.
• ObserverOverride
The ObserverOverride configuration property, when set to TRUE, allows an automatic

failover to occur when the observer has lost connectivity to the primary, even if the
standby has a healthy connection to the primary.
4.9.2 Configure Conditions for Fast-start Failover

By default, a fast-start failover is done when neither the observer nor the standby can
reach the primary after the configured time threshold (FastStartFailoverThreshold) has
passed.
4-35
Chapter 4
Managing Database Conversions
There are also other conditions under which you might want a fast-start failover to
occur.
The configurable conditions fall into two classes: those detected through the database
health-check mechanism and those detected through errors raised by the Oracle
server (such as ORA errors). When a specified condition occurs, the observer will
initiate a fast-start failover without waiting for FastStartFailoverThreshold to expire,
assuming the standby is in a valid state to accept a failover.
Each condition may be enabled or disabled individually. The Oracle Data Guard
configuration persists all user specified configurable fast-start failover conditions in the
The observer will detect when the primary database has signaled any of the enabled
health-check conditions and will immediately initiate a fast-start failover, assuming the
standby is in a valid fast-start failover state (observed and either synchronized or
within lag limits) to accept a failover.
For specified Oracle ORA-Error conditions, the primary database will notify the
observer if the error is signaled and the observer will immediately initiate a fast-start
failover, assuming the standby is in a valid fast-start failover state (observed and either
synchronized or within lag limits) to accept a failover.
Note:
The primary database will shut down and the observer will not attempt to
automatically reinstate the former primary database.
See Also:
• Cloud Control online help

• ENABLE FAST_START FAILOVER CONDITION
• DISABLE FAST_START FAILOVER CONDITION
4.9.3 Application Initiated Fast-Start Failover

You can use the DBMS_DG PL/SQL package to allow an application to direct a fast-start
failover when it encounters specific conditions.
See "Directing a Fast-Start Failover From an Application".
4.10 Managing Database Conversions

You can use the DGMGRL CONVERT DATABASE command to convert a physical standby
database to a snapshot standby database.
A snapshot standby database is a fully updatable standby database.
4-36
Chapter 4
Database Status
Like a physical or logical standby database, a snapshot standby database receives

and archives redo data from a primary database. However, unlike a physical or logical
standby database, a snapshot standby database does not apply the redo data that it
receives. The redo data received by a snapshot standby database is not applied until
the snapshot standby is converted back into a physical standby database, after first
discarding any local updates made to the snapshot standby database.
To convert a physical standby database to a snapshot standby database you must
have Flashback Database enabled. The following example shows how to convert a
physical standby database to a snapshot standby database:
DGMGRL> CONVERT DATABASE 'South_Sales' TO SNAPSHOT STANDBY;
When you are ready to convert the snapshot back into a physical standby, use the
DGMGRL CONVERT DATABASE command as follows:
DGMGRL> CONVERT DATABASE 'South_Sales' TO PHYSICAL STANDBY;
4.11 Database Status

In general, the broker checks the health of a database by verifying that the actual
database state and settings match those described in the broker configuration file.
This is done by checking if any component of the Oracle Data Guard configuration is
functioning incorrectly (for example, if redo transport services have an error), and by
checking if other required database settings are correctly set (for example, if the server
parameter files are available and if the ARCHIVELOG mode is turned on). The following is
a detailed list of what is being checked by the broker on a primary database and a
standby database.
On a primary database, the health check determines whether the following conditions
are met:
• Database is in the state specified by the user, as recorded in the broker
configuration file
• Database is in the correct data protection mode
• Database is using a server parameter file
• Database is in the ARCHIVELOG mode
• Database guard is turned off
• Supplemental logging is turned on when there is a logical standby database in the
configuration
• Redo transport services do not have any errors
• Database settings match those specified by the broker configurable properties
• Redo transport settings match those specified by the redo transport-related
properties of the standby databases
• Current data protection level is consistent with configured data protection mode
• Primary database is able to resolve all gaps for all standby databases
On a standby database, the health check determines whether the following conditions
are met:
4-37
Chapter 4
Database Status
• Database is in the state specified by the user, as recorded in the broker

configuration file
• Database is using a server parameter file
• Database settings match those specified by the broker configurable properties
• Database guard is turned on when the database is a logical standby database
• Primary and target standby databases are synchronized or within lag limits if fast-
start failover is enabled
4.11.1 Querying Database Status

Certain monitorable properties can be used to query the database status.
The following properties are directly accessed through the DGMGRL command-line
interface:
• LogXptStatus
• InconsistentProperties
• InconsistentLogXptProps
Note:
Cloud Control rearranges the values of these properties for presentation in
the GUI.
You can use the SHOW DATABASE <db_unique_name> command to get a brief description of
the database (name, role, and so on), database status, and information about any
health check problems. For example, the output of the following SHOW DATABASE
command shows two problems: some redo transport services errors and an
inconsistent redo transport-related property
Role: PRIMARY
Intended State: TRANSPORT-OFF
Instance(s):
north_sales1
Error: ORA-16737: the redo transport service for standby
database "South_Sales" has an error
north_sales2
Error: ORA-16737: the redo transport service for standby
database "South_Sales" has an error
Warning: ORA-16715: redo transport-related property
ReopenSecs of standby "South_Sales" is inconsistent
Database Status:
ERROR
To further check the details about the database status, you can use the following
monitorable properties:
• LogXptStatus — lists all log transport errors detected on all instances of the primary
database.
4-38
Chapter 4
Database Status
• InconsistentProperties — lists all properties that have inconsistent values

between the broker configuration file and the database settings.
• InconsistentLogXptProps — lists all redo transport-related properties of standby
databases that have inconsistent values between the broker configuration file and
the redo transport settings.
Issue the following SHOW DATABASE commands to obtain further details about the
problems.
DGMGRL> SHOW DATABASE 'North_Sales' 'LogXptStatus';
LOG TRANSPORT STATUS
PRIMARY_INSTANCE_NAME STANDBY_DATABASE_NAME STATUS
north_sales1 South_Sales ORA-12541: TNS:no listener

north_sales2 South_Sales ReopenSecs 600 300
See Also:
Oracle Data Guard Broker Properties for detailed information about database
properties
4.11.2 Validating a Database Before a Role Change

You can use the VALIDATE DATABASE command to perform a comprehensive set of
database checks prior to performing a role change.
The command checks the following items:
• Whether there is missing redo data on a standby database
• Whether flashback is enabled
• The number of temporary tablespace files configured
• Whether an online data file move is in progress
• Whether online redo logs are cleared for a physical standby database
• Whether standby redo logs are cleared for a primary database
• The online log file configuration
• The standby log file configuration
• Apply-related property settings
• Transport-related property settings
• Whether there are any errors in the Automatic Diagnostic Repository (for example,
control file corruptions, system data file problems, user data file problems)
4-39
Chapter 4
Database Status
See Also:
• "VALIDATE DATABASE" for a description of the command and for

examples that show command output for various scenarios
4.11.3 Validating the Server Parameter Files Before a Role Change

Use the VALIDATE DATABASE SPFILE command to compare the contents of the server
parameter file (SPFILE) between the primary and standby database.
Comparing the primary to the standby lets you determine whether there are any
missing parameters in either database’s SPFILE, or whether the entries contain
different values.
See Also:
• VALIDATE DATABASE SPFILE for a description of the command and for

examples that show command output
4.11.4 Validating the Network Configuration Before a Role Change

Use the VALIDATE NETWORK CONFIGURATION command to perform network connectivity
checks between members of a configuration.
Performing a network connectivity check identifies potential network configuration
problems before a role change is attempted.
See Also:
• Validating the Network Configuration Before a Role Change
4.11.5 Validating the Static Connect Identifier Before a Role Change

A single-instance database on which Oracle Restart is not configured must have a
static service registered with the listener so that the DGMGRL CLI can automatically
start the instance when necessary (for example, for the new standby after a
switchover).
The broker sets up a default value for the StaticConnectIdentifier property that uses
that static service (assuming the default value of db_unique_name_DGMGRL is used for the
static service name). This connect identifier is used for instance restart.
Use the VALIDATE STATIC CONNECT IDENTIFIER command to confirm that the connect
identifier specified by the StaticConnectIdentifier property can be used to restart an
instance. The command does not restart the database, but rather checks that the
service specified in the connect identifier is registered with the listener.
4-40
Chapter 4
Database Status
See Also:
• VALIDATE STATIC CONNECT IDENTIFIER for a description of the

command and for examples that show command output
4-41
5
Switchover and Failover Operations
Learn how to use Oracle Data Guard broker to manage databases during switchover
and failover.
• Overview of Switchover and Failover in a Broker Environment
• Choosing a Target Standby Database
• Switchover
• Manual Failover
• Fast-Start Failover
• Database Client Considerations
5.1 Overview of Switchover and Failover in a Broker

Environment
Oracle Data Guard helps you change the role of databases between primary and
standby using either a switchover or failover operation.
• A switchover is a role reversal between the primary database and one of its
standby databases. A switchover guarantees no data loss and is typically done for
planned maintenance of the primary system. During a switchover, the primary
database transitions to a standby role, and the standby database transitions to the
primary role.
• A failover is a role transition in which one of the standby databases is transitioned
to the primary role after the primary database (all instances in the case of an
Oracle RAC database) fails or has become unreachable. A failover may or may
not result in data loss depending on the protection mode in effect at the time of the
failover.
The broker simplifies switchovers and failovers by allowing you to invoke them using a
single key click in Oracle Enterprise Manager Cloud Control (Cloud Control) or a single
command in the DGMGRL command-line interface (referred to in this documentation
as manual failover). As part of managing the switchover, the broker automatically does
the following:
• Sets up redo transport from the new primary to the other members of the
configuration
• Starts Redo Apply on the new standby
• Ensures the other standbys in the broker configuration are viable to the new
primary
• Integrates with Oracle Clusterware and Oracle Global Data Services (GDS) to
ensure that the proper services are started after a role change
When fast-start failover is enabled, the broker determines if a failover is necessary and
initiates the failover to the specified target standby database automatically, with no
5-1
Chapter 5
Choosing a Target Standby Database
need for manual intervention. The reduced need for manual intervention can increase
availability without increasing management costs. Manual failover gives you control
over exactly when a failover occurs and to which target standby database. Regardless
of the method you choose, the broker coordinates the role transition on all databases
in the configuration.
Note:
Neither a switchover nor a failover is possible to a far sync instance.
5.2 Choosing a Target Standby Database

When you select a standby database to be the next primary database after a
switchover or a failover, there are several factors to consider.
You need to consider all of the options at the time you are building your Oracle Data
Guard configuration, including factors such as the characteristics of physical standbys
versus logical standbys versus snapshot standbys, the network latency to your
standby database sites, the computing capabilities at a future primary database site,
and so on.
Note:
A snapshot standby cannot be the target of a switchover or fast-start failover
operation. You can, however, perform a manual failover to a snapshot standby.
A far sync instance is not a database and therefore cannot be the target of a
role transition.
For switchovers, understanding all of the factors can simplify the choice of which
standby database to consider as your new primary database. In disaster situations
where a failover is necessary, you may be more limited as to which standby database
is the best one to pick up the failed primary database's activities. Choosing a Target
Standby Database for Switchover and Choosing a Target Standby Database for
Failover provide guidelines to help you choose a target standby database.
Note:
For fast-start failover, you must pre-select at least one target standby database.
You can also pre-select multiple targets if you want to; the selection does not
have to be reciprocal.
Determining a Database's Readiness to Change Roles

To help you select an appropriate switchover or failover target, use the following
DGMGRL commands which perform checks on the database to determine its
readiness to complete a role change.
5-2
Chapter 5
Choosing a Target Standby Database
• VALIDATE DATABASE
• VALIDATE NETWORK CONFIGURATION
• VALIDATE DATABASE SPFILE
• VALIDATE STATIC CONNECT IDENTIFIER
See Also:
• "Scenario 9: Performing a Switchover Operation" for an example of using

the VALIDATE DATABASE command to show a database's readiness to
complete a role switchover
• "Scenario 10: Performing a Manual Failover Operation" for an example of
using the VALIDATE DATABASE command to show a database's readiness to
complete a role failover
5.2.1 Choosing a Target Standby Database for Switchover

When performing a switchover in a configuration whose standby databases are all of
the same type (all physical or all logical standby databases), choose the standby
database that has the least amount of unapplied redo.
By choosing the standby database with the least amount of unapplied redo, you can
minimize the overall time it takes to complete the switchover operation. For example:
• Using DGMGRL, you can do this by examining the Apply Lag row of the SHOW
DATABASE output for each standby database in the configuration.
• Using Cloud Control, you can view the value of the ApplyLag column for each
standby database in the Standby Databases section of the Oracle Data Guard
Overview page.
If the configuration contains both physical and logical standby databases, consider
choosing a physical standby database (that has the least amount of unapplied redo) to
be the target standby database. A switchover to a physical standby database is
preferable because all databases in the configuration will be available as standby
databases to the new primary database after the switchover operation completes.
Whereas a switchover to a logical standby database will invalidate and disable all of
the physical and snapshot standby databases in the configuration. You will then need
to re-create the physical standby databases from a copy of the new primary database
before you can reenable them. Alternatively, if you intend to switch back to the original
primary relatively soon, then you may re-enable the disabled standby databases after
the switch back.
You cannot perform a switchover to a snapshot standby database unless you first
convert it back to a physical standby database.
5-3
Chapter 5
Switchover
Note:
If the Oracle Data Guard configuration is operating in maximum protection
mode, the broker does not allow a switchover to occur to a logical standby
database. The configuration must be operating in either maximum availability
mode or maximum performance mode in order to be able to switch over to a
logical standby database.
5.2.2 Choosing a Target Standby Database for Failover

When performing a failover in a configuration whose standbys are all of the same type,
choose the standby database that has the smallest transport lag.
Choosing the standby database with the smallest transport lag can minimize the
amount of data loss and in some cases, incur no data loss at all.
If the configuration contains physical, snapshot, and logical standby databases,
consider choosing a physical standby database as the target standby database. A
failover to a physical standby database is preferable because it is likely that all standby
databases in the configuration will still be available as standby databases to the new
primary database after the failover operation completes.
You may failover to a snapshot standby database. However failing over to a snapshot
standby database will require more time because the broker must first convert it back
to a physical standby database. After the conversion, the broker will start Redo Apply
to apply accumulated redo data, before failing the database over to the primary role.
Because the broker performs the failover after converting the snapshot standby
database to a physical standby database, it is likely that all standby databases in the
configuration will still be available as standby databases to the new primary database
after the failover operation completes.
A failover to a logical standby database requires that all physical and snapshot
standby databases be re-created from a copy of the new primary database after the
failover completes. In addition, a logical standby database may contain only a subset
of the data present in the primary database. (For example, if the DBMS_LOGSTDBY.SKIP
procedure was used to specify which database operations done on the primary
database will not be applied to the logical standby database.)
However, there may be exceptions to the recommendation to choose a physical
standby database as the target standby database. For example, if all your physical
standbys are also unavailable, then failing over to a logical standby is your only
choice.
5.3 Switchover
A switchover is a role reversal between the primary database and one of its standby
databases.
A switchover guarantees no data loss and is typically done for planned maintenance of
the primary system. During a switchover, the primary database transitions to a standby
role, and the standby database transitions to the primary role.
Whenever possible, you should switch over to a physical standby database:
5-4
Chapter 5
Switchover
• If the switchover transitions a physical standby database to the primary role, then:
– The original primary database will be switched to a physical standby role.
– Other members of the configuration will receive redo from the designated redo
source based on the new primary.
– The original primary database will be restarted as a part of the switchover
operation. Note that the new primary database does not need to be restarted.
Standby databases not involved in the switchover (known as bystander
standby databases) continue operating in the state they were in before the
switchover occurred and will automatically begin applying redo data received
from the new primary database.
• If the switchover transitions a logical standby database to the primary role, then:
– The original primary database will be switched to a logical standby role.
– Neither the primary database nor the logical standby database needs to be
restarted after the switchover completes.
Other logical standby bystander databases in the broker configuration will
remain viable after the switchover. All physical and snapshot standby
databases will be disabled and must be re-created from a copy of the new
primary database after a switchover to a logical standby database.
Switchover to a logical standby database is disallowed when the configuration is
operating in maximum protection mode.
WARNING:
Switching over to a logical standby database results in the snapshot and
physical standby databases in the broker configuration being disabled by
the broker, making these databases no longer viable as standby
databases. Reenabling Disabled Databases After a Role Change describes
how to restore their viability as standby databases.
If you intend to switch back to the original primary database relatively soon,
you may allow the physical and snapshot standbys to remain disabled.
Once you have completed the switchover back to the original primary, you
may then reenable the physical and snapshot standby databases since
they are still viable standbys for the original primary database.
5.3.1 Before You Perform a Switchover Operation

These are some points to consider before you begin a switchover.
• When you start a switchover, the broker verifies that at least one standby
database, including the primary database that is about to be transitioned to the
standby role, is configured to support the overall protection mode (maximum
protection, maximum availability, or maximum performance) after the switchover is
completed.
• Prepare the primary database in advance for its possible future role as a standby
database in the context of the overall protection mode (see Managing Data
Protection Modes). Such preparation includes:
– Ensuring that standby redo log files are configured on the primary database.
5-5
Chapter 5
Switchover
– Presetting database properties related to redo transport services, such as

LogXptMode, NetTimeout, StandbyArchiveLocation, StandbyAlternateLocation, and
RedoRoutes. For more details about managing redo transport services using
database properties, see Managing Redo Transport Services.
– Reset database properties related to Redo Apply services, such as DelayMins.
Any apply delay must be removed before beginning a switchover. The broker
will not allow a switchover to a standby that has an apply delay configured
(DelayMins property is set to a non-zero value). For more details about
managing Redo Apply services using properties, see Managing Log Apply
Services.
– For each temporary table, verifying that temporary files associated with that
table on the primary database also exist on the standby database.
Note that the broker does not use the properties to set up redo transport services
and Redo Apply services until you actually switch over the primary database to the
standby role. Thus, the validity of the values of these properties is not verified until
after the switchover. Once you set these properties, their values persist through
role changes during switchover and failover.
• If fast-start failover is enabled, then a switchover can be performed only to the pre-
specified target standby database and only if the standby database is
synchronized with the primary database or is within the configured lag limit, for the
max availability and max performance modes respectively. For information about
enabling fast-start failover, see Enabling Fast-Start Failover.
• You can use the SHOW CONFIGURATION WHEN PRIMARY IS command to show the redo
transport configuration (based on each member's setting of the RedoRoutes
property) that would be in effect if the specified database were the primary
database. You can use this information to identify ahead of time any redo transport
configurations that would be incorrect after a role change, including any standbys
that will not receive redo because the RedoRoutes property was not configured
correctly.
After a switchover completes, the broker preserves the overall Oracle Data Guard
protection mode as part of the switchover process by keeping the protection mode at
the same protection level (maximum protection, maximum availability, or maximum
performance) it was at before the switchover. Apply services on all other bystander
standby databases automatically begin applying redo data received from the new
primary database.
If there are physical or snapshot standby databases in the configuration and the
switchover occurs to a logical standby database, you need to re-create those
databases from a copy of the new primary database and then reenable those
databases, as described in Reenabling Disabled Databases After a Role Change.
Note:
In an Oracle Data Guard configuration, the SRVCTL -startoption and -role are
updated after switchover to reflect the current open mode and database role on
the new primary and standby databases. See "Database Service Configuration
Requirements" for additional information about how the broker interacts with
Oracle Restart.
5-6
Chapter 5
Switchover
5.3.2 Starting a Switchover

When a switchover is started, the primary and standby databases that are involved
should have as small a redo lag as possible.
The act of switching roles should be a well-planned activity. Oracle Data Guard
Concepts and Administration provides information about setting up the databases in
preparation of a switchover.
To start a switchover using Cloud Control, select the standby database that you want
to change to the primary role and click Switchover. When using DGMGRL, you need
to issue the SWITCHOVER command, specifying the name of the standby database that
you want to change into the primary role.
The broker controls the rest of the switchover.
5.3.3 How the Broker Performs a Switchover

These are the actions the broker performs after you start a switchover.
1. Verifies that the primary and the target standby databases are in the following
states:
a. The primary database is enabled and is in the TRANSPORT-ON state.
b. The target standby database is enabled and is in the APPLY-ON state.
The broker allows the switchover to proceed as long as there are no errors for the
primary database and the standby database that you selected to participate in the
switchover operation. Errors occurring for any other configuration members will not
impede the switchover.
2. Switches roles between the primary and standby databases.
The broker first converts the original primary database to run in the standby role. If
any errors occur during either conversion, the broker stops the switchover. See
Troubleshooting Problems During a Switchover Operation for more information.
3. Updates the broker configuration file to record the change in roles.
This allows the appropriate Data Guard services, such as redo transport or redo
apply, to be started when the database is restarted later for any reason.
4. Restarts the new standby (former primary) database if the switchover occurs to a
physical standby database, and Redo Apply begins applying redo data from the
new primary database. If this is an Oracle RAC physical standby database
managed by Oracle Clusterware, then the broker directs Oracle Clusterware to
restart the new standby database.
5. The new primary database is opened in read/write mode and redo transport
services are started.
If the former physical standby database was running with real-time query enabled,
the new physical standby database will run with real-time query enabled.
The broker verifies the state and status of the databases to ensure that the switchover
transitioned the databases to their new role correctly. Bystander standby databases
that are not disabled by the broker after the switchover will continue operating in the
state they were in before the switchover. SQL Apply on all other bystander standby
5-7
Chapter 5
Manual Failover
databases automatically begin applying redo data received from the new primary
database.
In the rare event that a switchover operation fails and you are left with no primary
database, retry the switchover command. You can switch back to the original primary
and then either retry the switchover to the original target standby, or choose another
standby in the configuration to switch over to.
5.4 Manual Failover

In a manual failover, you convert a standby database to a primary database because
the original primary database failed and there is no possibility of recovering the
primary database in a timely manner.
There may or may not be data loss depending upon whether your primary and target
standby databases were synchronized at the time of the primary database failure. The
word manual is used to contrast this type of failover with a fast-start failover (described
in Fast-Start Failover).
Note:
You can perform a manual failover even if fast-start failover is enabled. See
Performing Manual Role Changes When Fast-Start Failover Is Enabled for
more information.
The following sections describe how to perform manual failovers:

• Complete and Immediate Manual Failovers
• Performing a Manual Failover Operation
• Reenabling Disabled Databases After a Role Change
5.4.1 Complete and Immediate Manual Failovers

You can use Cloud Control or DGMGRL, to perform either a complete (recommended)
or an immediate failover.
• A complete failover is the recommended and default failover option. It

automatically recovers the maximum amount of redo data for the protection mode
the configuration is operating in. A complete failover also attempts to avoid
disabling any standby databases that were not the target of the failover, so that
they may continue serving as standby databases to the new primary database.
Whether or not standby databases that were not the target of failover (bystander
standby databases) are disabled depends upon how much redo data they have
applied relative to the failover target and the standby type of the failover target:
– If the failover target is a physical or snapshot standby database, the original
primary database must be reinstated or re-created in order to be a standby
database for the new primary database. In addition, some standby databases
may be disabled by the broker during the failover if the broker detects that they
have applied redo beyond where the new primary database had applied. Any
standby database that was disabled by the broker must be reinstated or re-
5-8
Chapter 5
Manual Failover
created, as described in Reenabling Disabled Databases After a Role Change,

before it can be a standby database for the new primary database.
Note that if failover was performed on a snapshot standby database, the old
primary must be either reinstated or re-created as a physical standby
database.
– If the failover target is a logical standby database, the original primary
database and all physical and snapshot standby databases in the
configuration will be disabled. The primary database can be reinstated if it had
flashback database enabled. The physical and snapshot standby databases
will have to be re-created from a copy of the new primary database. See
Reenabling Disabled Databases After a Role Change for more information.
If the primary database can be mounted, it may be possible to flush any unsent
redo data from the primary database to the target standby database using the
ALTER SYSTEM FLUSH REDO SQL statement. If this operation is successful, a zero data
loss failover may be possible even if the primary database is not in a zero data
loss protection mode. See Oracle Data Guard Concepts and Administration for
more information on using the ALTER SYSTEM FLUSH REDO statement.
During a complete failover, the broker performs the failover steps described in
How the Broker Performs a Complete Failover Operation.
• An immediate failover is the fastest type of failover. However, no additional data is
applied on the standby database once you invoke the failover. Another
consequence of immediate failover is that all other databases in the configuration
are disabled and must be reinstated or re-created before they can serve as
standby databases for the new primary database. Reenabling Disabled Databases
After a Role Change describes how to do this. During an immediate failover, the
broker performs the failover steps described in How the Broker Performs an
Immediate Failover Operation.
Note:
Always try to perform a complete failover first unless redo apply has
stopped at the failover target due to an ORA-752 or ORA-600 [3020] error. If
one of these errors has occurred, follow the guidelines in "Resolving
ORA-752 or ORA-600 [3020] During Standby Recovery" in My Oracle
Support Note 1265884.1 before proceeding. This support note is available
at http://support.oracle.com.
An immediate failover should only be performed when a complete failover
is unsuccessful or in the error cases just noted. A complete failover can
occur without any data loss, depending on the destination attributes of redo
transport services, but an immediate failover usually results in some data
loss.
5.4.2 Performing a Manual Failover Operation

Before beginning a failover, first determine that there is no possibility of recovering the
primary database in a timely manner, and ensure that the primary database is shut
down.
5-9
Chapter 5
Manual Failover
The steps in this section describe the tasks involved to perform a manual failover.
Depending on the failover and the types of standby databases involved, some of the
databases may need to be reinstated or re-created.
• Performing a Manual Failover Task 1: Determine Which of the Available Standby
Databases is the Best Target for the Failover
• Performing a Manual Failover Task 2: Start the Failover
• Performing a Manual Failover Task 3: Reset the Protection Mode
• Performing a Manual Failover Task 4: Re-establish a Disaster-Recovery
Configuration
5.4.2.1 Performing a Manual Failover Task 1: Determine Which of the Available

Standby Databases is the Best Target for the Failover
These are the guidelines for choosing a target standby database.
See Choosing a Target Standby Database.
5.4.2.2 Performing a Manual Failover Task 2: Start the Failover

Use Cloud Control or DGMGRL to perform either a complete (recommended) or an
immediate failover.
Manual Failover Using Cloud Control:
On the Oracle Data Guard Overview page in Cloud Control, select the standby
database that you want to change to the primary role and click Failover. Then, on the
Failover Confirmation page, click Yes to invoke the default Complete failover option.
Manual Failover Using DGMGRL:
Connect to the target standby database and issue the FAILOVER command to perform a
failover, specifying the name of the standby database that you want to become the
primary database:
DGMGRL> FAILOVER TO database-name;
Specify the optional IMMEDIATE clause to perform an immediate failover if any of the
following conditions are true:
• An ORA-752 error has occurred at the standby database
• An ORA-600 [3020] error has occurred at the standby database and Oracle support
has determined that it was caused by a lost write at the primary database
• A complete failover is not possible
DGMGRL> FAILOVER TO database-name IMMEDIATE;
See Also:
• FAILOVER
5-10
Chapter 5
Manual Failover
If you are performing a complete failover, then all accumulated redo data is applied
before the database role is changed to primary. If you are performing an immediate
failover, then the database role is changed to primary without applying any
accumulated redo data.
If the target is a snapshot standby database, the broker first converts the database to
a physical standby database.
No instances are shutdown on the target standby database when doing a failover.
5.4.2.3 Performing a Manual Failover Task 3: Reset the Protection Mode

This list describes how the overall Oracle Data Guard protection mode is handled after
a manual failover (complete or immediate).
• If the protection mode was at maximum protection, it is reset to maximum
performance. You can upgrade the protection mode later, if necessary, as
described in Setting the Protection Mode for Your Configuration.
• If the protection mode was at maximum availability or maximum performance, it
remains unchanged.
Note:
If you perform a manual failover when fast-start failover is enabled:
• The failover can only be performed to the current target standby database.
• The broker preserves the protection mode that was in effect prior to the
failover.
5.4.2.4 Performing a Manual Failover Task 4: Re-establish a Disaster-Recovery

Configuration
To maintain a viable disaster-recovery solution in the event of another disaster, you
may need to perform additional steps.
See Reenabling Disabled Databases After a Role Change
• Reinstate the original primary database to act as a standby database in the new
configuration.
Caution:
Do not attempt to reinstate the old primary database if an ORA-752 or
ORA-600 [3020] error has occurred at the failover target. Instead, the old
primary database must be re-created as a standby from a backup of the
new primary using the procedure described in How to Re-create and
Reenable a Disabled Database.
• Reinstate or re-create standby databases in the configuration that were disabled

by the broker.
5-11
Chapter 5
Manual Failover
After a complete failover finishes, any bystander standby database that is not
viable as a standby for the new primary database will be disabled by the broker.
This can happen for either of the following reasons:
– A bystander standby database has applied more redo data than the new
primary database itself had applied when it was a standby database. The
standby database must be re-created or reinstated before it can serve as a
standby for the new primary database.
– The failover was to a logical standby database. The broker disables all of the
physical and snapshot standby databases in the configuration. They must be
re-created before they can serve as standby to the new primary database.
5.4.2.5 How the Broker Performs a Complete Failover Operation

These are the actions the broker performs after you start a complete failover.
1. Verifies that the target standby database is enabled. If the database is not
enabled, you will not be able to perform a failover to this database.
2. Waits for the target standby database to finish applying any unapplied redo data
before stopping Redo Apply (if the target is a physical standby database) or SQL
Apply (if the target is a logical standby database).
If the target is a snapshot standby database, the broker first converts the database
back to a physical standby and then starts Redo Apply to apply all the
accumulated redo before completing the failover and opening the database as a
primary database.
3. Transitions the target standby database into the primary database role, as follows:
a. Changes the role of the database from standby to primary.
b. Opens the new primary database in read/write mode.
c. Determines whether or not any standby databases that did not participate in
the failover operation have applied redo data beyond the new primary
database, and thus need to be disabled.
If a bystander standby database is not disabled by the broker during this
failover, it will remain in the state it was in before the failover. For example, if a
physical standby database was in the APPLY-OFF state, it will remain in the
APPLY-OFF state.
By default, the broker always determines whether bystander standby

databases will be viable standby databases for the new primary when
performing a complete failover. If you want the broker to skip this viability
check of bystander standby databases during a complete failover, thus
decreasing the overall failover time, set the BystandersFollowRoleChange
configuration property to NONE.
When this property is set to NONE, the broker will disable all bystander standby
databases without checking whether they have applied more redo data than
the new primary database. You will have to reinstate or re-create (see
Reenabling Disabled Databases After a Role Change) the standby databases
after failover has completed. The SHOW CONFIGURATION command will show you
which databases can be reinstated and which databases must be re-created.
Use the SHOW CONFIGURATION BystandersFollowRoleChange command to see the
value of this property. The default value is ALL.
5-12
Chapter 5
Manual Failover
This property also affects whether the broker skips viability checks of
bystander standby databases when a fast-start failover occurs.
d. Starts redo transport services to begin transmitting redo data to all bystander
standby databases that were not disabled.
Note:
Bystander standby databases may be disabled by the broker during the
failover, and they must be reinstated or re-created before they can
serve as standby databases to the new primary database. Oracle
recommends configuring Flashback Database on every database so
that if failover occurs to a physical standby database, you can more
easily reinstate any disabled standby databases. If failover occurs to a
logical standby database, all physical and snapshot standby databases
will be disabled by the broker. In this case, Flashback Database cannot
be used to reinstate databases. They must be re-created from a copy
of the new primary database. Logical standby databases that are
disabled during failover can be reinstated.
4. If the failover target database is an Oracle RAC physical or snapshot standby

database, the broker directs Oracle Clusterware to restart all instances that may
have been shut down prior to the failover.
The broker allows the failover to proceed as long as there are no errors for the standby
database that you selected to participate in the failover. Errors occurring for any other
configuration members will not impede the switchover. If you initiated a complete
failover and it fails, you might need to use immediate failover.
Complete Failovers in Configurations Using Far Sync Instances

It is possible to manually perform a completer failover to a standby database that
receives redo data from a far sync instance. To failover, connect to the standby
database and use the DGMGRL FAILOVER TO db-unique-name command. Any unsent
redo data residing on the far sync instance is transmitted to the target physical standby
prior to converting the physical standby into a primary database.
Complete Failovers in Configurations Using Cascaded Standbys

In a complete failover, it is also possible to failover to a standby database (terminal
standby) that gets redo from another standby database (cascader). In such a case, no
attempt is made to transmit any unsent redo from the cascader to the terminal
standby.
5.4.2.6 How the Broker Performs an Immediate Failover Operation

To start an immediate failover, use the DGMGRL FAILOVER TO database-name IMMEDIATE
command.
Once an immediate failover is started, the broker:
1. Verifies that the target standby database is enabled. If the standby database is not
enabled for management by the broker, then the failover cannot occur.
2. Stops Redo Apply or SQL Apply on the standby database immediately, without
waiting until all available redo data has been applied. This may result in data loss.
5-13
Chapter 5
Manual Failover
3. Transitions the target standby database into the primary role, opens the new
primary database in read/write mode, and starts redo transport services.
After an immediate failover completes, all the standby databases in the
configuration, regardless of their type, are disabled. They may be reinstated if
Flashback Database is enabled on those databases. Otherwise, they must be re-
created from a copy of the new primary database.
The broker allows a complete failover to proceed as long as there are no errors
present on the standby database that you selected to participate in the failover.
The broker allows an immediate failover to proceed even if there are errors present on
the standby database that you selected to participate in the failover.
Immediate Failovers in Configurations Using Far Sync Instances

It is possible to manually perform an immediate failover to a standby database that
receives redo data from a far sync instance. In this case, no attempt is made to
transmit any unsent redo from the far sync instance to the target physical standby prior
to converting the physical standby into a primary database.
Immediate Failovers in Configurations Using Cascaded Standbys

In an immediate failover, it is also possible to failover to a standby database (terminal
standby) that gets redo from another standby database (cascader). In such a case, no
attempt is made to transmit any unsent redo from the cascader to the terminal
standby.
5.4.3 Reenabling Disabled Databases After a Role Change

To restore your original disaster-recovery solution after switchover to a logical standby
database or after failover to any standby database, you may need to perform
additional steps.
Databases that have been disabled after a role transition are not removed from the
broker configuration, but they are no longer managed by the broker.
To reenable broker management of these databases, you must reinstate or re-create
the databases using one of the following procedures:
• If a database can be reinstated, the database will show the following status:
ORA-16661: the standby database needs to be reinstated
Reinstate the database using the DGMGRL REINSTATE DATABASE command or the
reinstate option in Cloud Control, as described in How to Reinstate a Database.
The broker automatically reenables the database as part of reinstating it.
• If a database must be re-created from a copy of the new primary database, it will
have the following status:
ORA-16795: the standby database needs to be re-created
Re-create the standby database from a copy of the primary database and then
reenable it, as described in How to Re-create and Reenable a Disabled Database.
5-14
Chapter 5
Manual Failover
Note:
Any database that was disabled while multiple role changes were performed
cannot be reinstated. You must re-create the database manually from a copy of
the current primary database and then reenable the database in the broker
configuration.
Whether you reinstate or re-create a database depends on whether you performed a

switchover or failover, on the type of standby database that was the target of the
operation, and on whether or not there are sufficient flashback logs. Note that role
changes to logical standby databases always result in physical standby database
bystanders being disabled. They cannot be reinstated. They must be re-created from a
copy of the new primary database.
The following sections describe how to reinstate or reenable a database.
5.4.3.1 How to Reinstate a Database

You can use the broker's reinstate capability to make a failed primary database a
viable standby database for the new primary.
This can be done regardless of whether the failover was done to a physical, logical, or
snapshot standby database.
You can also reinstate bystander standby databases that were disabled during a
failover operation.
Databases that can be reinstated will have the following status value:
For the REINSTATE command to succeed, Flashback Database must have been enabled
on the database prior to the failover and there must be sufficient flashback logs on that
database. In addition, the database to be reinstated and the new primary database
must have network connectivity.
To reinstate a database:
1. Restart the database to the mounted state
2. Connect to the new primary database
3. Use Cloud Control or DGMGRL to reinstate the database
The broker reinstates a failed primary database as a standby database of the same
type (physical or logical standby database) as the old standby database. The only
exception to this is failovers to snapshot standby databases. In such cases, the failed
primary database is reinstated as a physical standby database.
The broker reinstates bystander standby databases that were disabled during a
failover as standby databases to the new primary database.
Reinstatement Using Cloud Control
On the Oracle Data Guard Overview page, click Database must be reinstated. This
brings up the General Properties page that provides a Reinstate button. After you
click the Reinstate button, Cloud Control begins reinstating the database.
5-15
Chapter 5
Fast-Start Failover
When the process is complete, the database will be enabled as a standby database to
the new primary database, and Cloud Control displays the Oracle Data Guard
Overview page.
Reinstatement Using DGMGRL
Issue the following command while connected to any database in the broker
configuration, except the database that is to be reinstated:
DGMGRL> REINSTATE DATABASE db_unique_name;
The newly reinstated standby database will begin serving as a standby database to
the new primary database. If reinstatement of a database fails, its status changes to
ORA-16795: the standby database needs to be re-created. You must then re-create it
from a copy of the new primary database and reenable it as described in How to Re-
create and Reenable a Disabled Database.
5.4.3.2 How to Re-create and Reenable a Disabled Database

If you re-create the old primary database, it must be created as the standby type of the
old standby database.
For example, if the old standby was a physical or snapshot standby, then the old
primary must be re-created as a physical standby.
After the database has been re-created, enable broker management of the re-created
standby database by using the DGMGRL ENABLE DATABASE command.
If you performed a failover or switchover that requires you to re-create the failed
primary database or standby databases that were disabled during the role transition,
then follow the procedures in the Oracle Data Guard Concepts and Administration
chapter, "Creating a Physical Standby Database" and also the Oracle Data Guard
Concepts and Administration chapter, "Creating a Logical Standby Database."
5.5 Fast-Start Failover

Fast-start failover allows the broker to automatically fail over to a previously chosen
standby database in the event of loss of the primary database.
Fast-start failover quickly and reliably fails over the target standby database to the
primary database role, without requiring you to perform any manual steps to invoke the
failover. Fast-start failover can be used only in a broker configuration and can be
configured only through DGMGRL or Cloud Control.
If the primary database has multiple standby databases, then you can specify multiple
fast-start failover targets, using the FastStartFailoverTarget property. The targets are
referred to as candidate targets. The broker selects a target based on the order in
which they are specified on the FaststartFailoverTarget property. If the designated
fast-start failover target develops a problem and cannot be the target of a failover, then
the broker automatically changes the fast-start failover target to one of the other
candidate targets.
You can use any protection mode with fast-start failover. The maximum protection and
maximum availability modes provide an automatic failover environment guaranteed to
lose no data. Maximum performance mode provides an automatic failover environment
guaranteed to lose no more than the amount of data (in seconds) specified by the
FastStartFailoverLagLimit configuration property. This property indicates the
5-16
Chapter 5
Fast-Start Failover
maximum amount of data loss that is permissible in order for an automatic failover to
occur. It is only used when fast-start failover is enabled and the configuration is
operating in maximum performance mode.
Once fast-start failover is enabled, the broker will ensure that fast-start failover is only
possible when the configured data loss guarantee can be upheld. If the configured
data loss guarantee cannot be upheld, redo generation on the primary database will
be stalled. In maximum availability and maximum performance modes, to avoid a
prolonged stall, either the observer or target standby database may allow the primary
database to continue redo generation after first recording that a fast-start failover
cannot happen.
In maximum availability mode, the ability to automatically failover is restored once the
target standby database has received all missing redo data. In maximum performance
mode, the ability to automatically failover is restored once the target standby
database's redo applied point is no longer lagging the primary database's redo
generation point by more than the value specified by the FastStartFailoverLagLimit
configuration property. In maximum protection mode, the ability to automatically
failover is always possible because the broker does not allow the primary database to
commit transactions until it has regained connectivity with target standby. Therefore,
the target standby never falls behind the primary (as it might in maximum availability
and maximum performance modes).
The following table summarizes which standby types are supported in which protection
modes when fast-start failover is enabled. (Snapshot standbys are not included in the
table because they are not supported as fast-start failover targets.)
Protection Physical Logical Far Sync Instances Supported to

Mode Standbys Standbys Send Redo?
Supported? Supported?
Maximum Yes No No
Protection
Maximum Yes Yes Yes
Availability
Maximum Yes Yes No
Performance
As shown in the table, fast-start failover can be enabled in maximum availability mode
when the fast-start failover target is a logical or physical standby database that
receives redo data from a far sync instance. This lets you take advantage of the
broker's automatic failover feature in configurations set up for zero data loss protection
at any distance. See Scenario 7: Enabling Fast-Start Failover When a Far Sync
Instance Is In Use for an example of how to set this up.
The topics in the following sections describe how to enable fast-start failover and
observer sites that monitor the fast-start failover environment. Observers are separate
OCI client-side components that run on a different computer from the primary and
standby databases and monitor the availability of the primary database. Observers are
described in more detail in Managing the Observer.
Once an observer is started, no further user interaction is required. If both the observer
and designated standby database lose connectivity with the primary database for
longer than the number of seconds specified by the FastStartFailoverThreshold
configuration property, the observer will initiate a fast-start failover to the standby
database. In addition, the primary database will shut down if it perceives a loss of
connectivity for a period longer than FastStartFailoverThreshold seconds, if the
5-17
Chapter 5
Fast-Start Failover
FastStartFailoverPmyShutdown configuration property is set to TRUE. After the failover

completes, the former primary database is automatically reinstated as a standby
database when a connection to it is reestablished, if the
FastStartFailoverAutoReinstate configuration property is set to TRUE.
Note:
When a fast-start failover occurs because either a user configurable fast-start
failover condition is detected or an application initiates a fast-start failover by
calling the DBMS_DG.INITIATE_FS_FAILOVER function, the former primary database
is always shut down and never automatically reinstated. This is true regardless
of the settings for the FastStartFailoverPmyShutdown and
FastStartFailoverAutoReinstate configuration properties. See Enabling Fast-
Start Failover for more information.
Figure 5-1 shows the relationships between the primary database, target standby
database, and observer during fast-start failover:
• Before Fast-Start Failover: Oracle Data Guard is operating in a steady state, with
the primary database transmitting redo data to the target standby database and
the observer monitoring the state of the entire configuration.
• FastStart Failover Ensues: Disaster strikes the primary database and its network
connections to both the observer and the target standby database are lost. Upon
detecting the break in communication, the observer attempts to reestablish a
connection with the primary database for the amount of time defined by the
FastStartFailoverThreshold property before initiating a fast-start failover. If the
observer is unable to regain a connection to the primary database within the
specified time, and the target standby database is ready for fast-start failover, then
fast-start failover ensues.
• After Fast-Start Failover: The fast-start failover has completed and the target
standby database is running in the primary database role. After the former primary
database has been repaired, the observer reestablishes its connection to that
database and reinstates it as a new standby database. The new primary database
starts transmitting redo data to the new standby database.
5-18
Chapter 5
Fast-Start Failover
Figure 5-1 Relationship of Primary and Standby Databases and the Observer
Before Fast-Start Failover Fast-Start Failover Ensues After Fast-Start Failover
Observer Observer Observer
Database Database Database Database Database Database
Oracle Oracle Oracle Oracle

Instance Instance Instance Instance
Primary Standby Standby Primary
Database Database Database Database
The following sections describe these topics:

• Prerequisites for Enabling Fast-Start Failover
• Enabling Fast-Start Failover
• Viewing Fast-Start Failover Configuration Statistics and Status
• Disabling Fast-Start Failover
• Performance Considerations for Fast-Start Failover
• Managing the Observer
• Reinstating the Former Primary Database in the Broker Configuration
• Shutting Down Databases In a Fast-Start Failover Environment
5.5.1 Prerequisites for Enabling Fast-Start Failover

There are prerequisites that must be met before the broker allows you to enable fast-
start failover.
The prerequisites are as follows:
• Configure the protection mode. See Setting the Protection Mode for Your
Configuration.
• The selected standby database that will be the fast-start failover target must
receive redo directly from the primary database.
• Ensure that the standby database you choose to be the target of fast-start failover
has its LogXptMode property set as follows, depending on the protection mode:
5-19
Chapter 5
Fast-Start Failover
– Maximum protection — SYNC

– Maximum availability — SYNC or FASTSYNC
– Maximum performance — ASYNC
The current primary database must have its LogXptMode property set accordingly
and must have standby redo logs configured. Alternatively, use the RedoRoutes
property to configure the redo transport mode for the target standby and the
database currently in the primary role.
• To use a far sync instance with fast-start failover, the far sync instance transport
mode must be set to either SYNC or FASTSYNC and the target standby database
transport mode must be set to ASYNC. A far-sync instance cannot be used in
maximum protection mode or maximum performance mode.
• Install the DGMGRL command-line interface on the observer computer as
described in Oracle Data Guard Installation.
• Configure the TNSNAMES.ORA file on the observer system so that the observer is able
to connect to the primary database and to the pre-selected target standby
database.
• If you are not using Oracle Clusterware or Oracle Restart, then you must create
static service names so that the observer can automatically restart a database as
part of reinstatement. See Prerequisites for more information.
• Use the VALIDATE STATIC CONNECT IDENTIFIER command to ensure the static
services have been configured correctly.
5.5.2 Enabling Fast-Start Failover

You can enable fast-start failover from any site while connected to any database in the
Enabling fast-start failover does not trigger a failover. Instead, it allows an observer
that is monitoring the configuration to initiate a fast-start failover should database
conditions warrant a failover. (If there are other conditions, unique to an application,
that would warrant a fast-start failover then the application can be set up to call the
DBMS_DG.INITIATE_FS_FAILOVER function and start a fast-start failover immediately should
any of those conditions occur. See Directing a Fast-Start Failover From an Application)
Enabling fast-start failover and starting an observer process involves the following
tasks. These tasks assume that you are connected as SYS or SYSDG and that a primary
and standby database are already set up in a broker configuration.
• Enabling Fast-Start Failover Task 1: Determine Which of the Available Standby
Databases is the Best Target for the Failover
• Enabling Fast-Start Failover Task 2: Specify Target Standbys with the
FastStartFailoverTarget Configuration Property
• Enabling Fast-Start Failover Task 3: Determine the Protection Mode You Want
• Enabling Fast-Start Failover Task 4: Set the FastStartFailoverThreshold
Configuration Property
• Enabling Fast-Start Failover Task 5: Set Other Properties Related to Fast-Start
Failover (Optional)
• Enabling Fast-Start Failover Task 6: Enable Additional Fast-Start Failover
Conditions (Optional)
5-20
Chapter 5
Fast-Start Failover
• Enabling Fast-Start Failover Task 7: Using DGMGRL or Cloud Control

• Enabling Fast-Start Failover Task 8: Start the Observer
• Enabling Fast-Start Failover Task 9: Verify the Fast-Start Failover Environment
5.5.2.1 Enabling Fast-Start Failover Task 1: Determine Which Available

Standby Databases Should Be Targets for the Failover
You must determine which available standby databases should be targets for failover.
Follow the guidelines described in Choosing a Target Standby Database.
5.5.2.2 Enabling Fast-Start Failover Task 2: Specify Target Standby Databases

with the FastStartFailoverTarget Configuration Property
Use the FastStartFailoverTarget configuration property on the current primary
database to specify one or more fast-start failover targets.
The broker selects a target standby based on the order they are specified in the
property.
• If there is only one standby database in the configuration, you can skip this step
and continue with Task 3.
• If there is more than one standby database in the configuration, you must explicitly
set the FastStartFailoverTarget property on the primary database to name one or
more candidate target standby databases. When enabling fast-start failover, the
broker verifies that the property indicates an existing standby. (Note that the target
standby cannot be a far-sync instance. However the target can receive redo from
a far sync instance.)
Note:
To change the FastStartFailoverTarget property to point to a different
standby database, disable fast-start failover, set the
FastStartFailoverTarget property, and reenable fast-start failover.
See FastStartFailoverTarget for more information about this property.
5.5.2.3 Enabling Fast-Start Failover Task 3: Determine the Protection Mode

You Want
If you cannot tolerate any loss of data, then ensure that the configuration protection
mode is set to maximum availability or maximum protection.
In maximum availability mode, set the LogXptMode database property for both the
primary and target standby databases to SYNC or FASTSYNC. In maximum protection
mode, set the LogXptMode database property to SYNC (note that in maximum protection
mode, a far sync instance cannot be used to ship redo to a standby). The following is
an example of setting the LogXptMode property:
5-21
Chapter 5
Fast-Start Failover
DGMGRL> EDIT DATABASE 'North_Sales' SET PROPERTY LogXptMode=SYNC;

DGMGRL> EDIT DATABASE 'South_Sales' SET PROPERTY LogXptMode=SYNC;
Alternatively, use the RedoRoutes property to set the redo transport mode for the target
standby and database that is currently in the primary role. Then set the configuration
protection mode to maximum availability.
If you are more concerned about the performance of the primary database than a
minimal loss of data, consider enabling fast-start failover when the configuration
protection mode is set to maximum performance. In this mode you will need to
consider how much data loss is acceptable in terms of seconds and set the
FastStartFailoverLagLimit configuration property accordingly. This property specifies
the amount of data, in seconds, that the target standby database can lag behind the
primary database in terms of redo applied. If the standby database's redo applied point
is within that many seconds of the primary database's redo generation point, a fast-
start failover will be allowed. The FastStartFailoverLagLimit configuration property is
only used by the broker when enabling fast-start failover for configurations operating in
maximum performance mode. The default value is 30 seconds and the lowest possible
value is 5 seconds.
In addition to setting the configuration protection mode to maximum performance, you
will also need to ensure that the LogXptMode database property for both the primary and
target standby database is set to ASYNC. For example:
DGMGRL> EDIT DATABASE 'North_Sales' SET PROPERTY LogXptMode=ASYNC;
DGMGRL> EDIT DATABASE 'South_Sales' SET PROPERTY LogXptMode=ASYNC;
DGMGRL> EDIT CONFIGURATION SET PROTECTION MODE AS MaxPerformance;
DGMGRL> EDIT CONFIGURATION SET PROPERTY FastStartFailoverLagLimit=45;
5.5.2.4 Enabling Fast-Start Failover Task 4: Set the FastStartFailoverThreshold

Configuration Property
Fast-start failover occurs if both the observer and the target standby database lose
connection to the primary database for the period of time specified by the
FastStartFailoverThreshold configuration property.
Set the FastStartFailoverThreshold property to specify the number of seconds you

want the observer and target standby database to wait (after detecting the primary
database is unavailable) before initiating a failover. For example:
DGMGRL> EDIT CONFIGURATION SET PROPERTY FastStartFailoverThreshold = 45;
The default value for the FastStartFailoverThreshold property is 30 seconds and the
lowest possible value is 6 seconds. If you have an Oracle RAC primary database,
consider specifying a higher value to minimize the possibility of a false failover in the
event of an instance failure.
The time interval starts when the observer first loses its connection to the primary
database. If the observer is unable to regain a connection to the primary database
within the specified time, then the observer begins a fast-start failover provided the
standby database is ready to fail over. Although the default value of 30 seconds is
typically adequate for detecting outages and failures on most configurations, you can
adjust failover sensitivity with this property to decrease the probability of false failovers
in a temporarily unstable environment.
5-22
Chapter 5
Fast-Start Failover
If the FastStartFailoverPmyShutdown configuration property is set to TRUE, the primary

database will shut down after FastStartFailoverThreshold seconds has elapsed if redo
generation has been stalled and the primary database is unable to reestablish
connectivity with either the observer or target standby database.
Note that the FastStartFailoverThreshold property can be changed even when fast-
start failover is enabled.
See Also:
FastStartFailoverThreshold for reference information about the
FastStartFailoverThreshold property
5.5.2.5 Enabling Fast-Start Failover Task 5: Set Other Properties Related to

Fast-Start Failover (Optional)
This table describes the optional database properties that you can set.
Property Name Description Default

Value
FastStartFailoverPmyShutdown This configuration property causes the TRUE
primary database to shut down if fast-start
failover is enabled and
V$DATABASE.FS_FAILOVER_STATUS indicates
the primary has been STALLED for longer
than FastStartFailoverThreshold
seconds. A value of TRUE helps to ensure
that an isolated primary database cannot
satisfy user queries.
This property cannot be used to prevent the
primary database from shutting down if a
fast-start failover occurred because a user
configuration condition was detected or was
requested by an application by calling the
DBMS_DG.INITIATE_FS_FAILOVER function.
FastStartFailoverLagLimit This configuration property establishes an 30 seconds
acceptable limit, in seconds, that the
standby is allowed to fall behind the primary
in terms of redo applied, beyond which a
fast-start failover will not be allowed. The
lowest possible value is 5 seconds.
This property is used when fast-start
failover is enabled and the configuration is
5-23
Chapter 5
Fast-Start Failover
Property Name Description Default

Value
FastStartFailoverAutoReinstate This configuration property causes the TRUE
former primary database to be
automatically reinstated if a fast-start
failover was initiated because the primary
database was either isolated or had
crashed. To prevent automatic
reinstatement of the former primary
database in these cases, set this
configuration property to FALSE. The broker
never automatically reinstates the former
primary database if a fast-start failover was
initiated because a user configuration
condition was detected or was requested
by an application calling the
DBMS_DG.INITIATE_FS_FAILOVER function.
ObserverConnectIdentifier This database property is used to specify Observer
how the observer should connect to and uses the
monitor the primary and standby database. value of the
Set this property for the primary and target DGConnectId
standby database if you want the observer entifier
to use a different connect identifier than property to
that used to ship redo data (that is, the connect to
connect identifier specified by the and monitor
DGConnectIdentifier property). the primary
and target
standby
databases.
ObserverOverride The ObserverOverride configuration FALSE
property, when set to TRUE, allows an
automatic failover to occur when the
observer has lost connectivity to the
primary, even if the standby has a healthy
connection to the primary.
ObserverReconnect The ObserverReconnect configuration 0 (zero)
property specifies how often the observer
establishes a new connection to the
primary database. When this property is set
to the default value of 0, it prevents the
observer from periodically establishing a
new connection with the primary database.
While this eliminates the processing
overhead associated with periodically
establishing a new observer connection to
the primary database, it also prevents the
observer from detecting that it is not
possible to create new connections to the
primary database. Oracle recommends that
this property be set to a value that is small
enough to allow timely detection of faults at
the primary database, but large enough to
limit the overhead associated with periodic
observer connections to an acceptable
level.
5-24
Chapter 5
Fast-Start Failover
5.5.2.6 Enabling Fast-Start Failover Task 6: Enable Additional Fast-Start

Failover Conditions (Optional)
By default, a fast-start failover is done when both the observer and the standby cannot
reach the primary after the configured time threshold (FastStartFailoverThreshold) has
passed.
You can optionally indicate the database health conditions that should cause fast-start
failover to occur. These conditions are described in the following table:
Health Condition Description Enabled by

Default
Datafile Write Errors If fast-start failover is enabled and the Datafile Write Yes
Errors condition is specified, then a fast-start failover is
initiated if write errors are encountered in any data files,
including temp files, system data files, and undo files.
Corrupted Dictionary Dictionary corruption of a critical database. Currently, Yes
this state can be detected only when the database is
open
Corrupted Controlfile Controlfile is permanently damaged because of a disk Yes
failure.
Inaccessible Logfile LGWR is unable to write to any member of the log No
group because on an I/O error
Stuck Archiver Archiver is unable to archive a redo log because the No
device is full or unavailable.
In Oracle RAC configurations, the Inaccessible Logfile and Stuck Archiver health
conditions may only be applicable to a single instance. Careful consideration should
be given before enabling fast-start failover for either of these conditions because doing
so will supersede availability options provided by Oracle Clusterware.
You can specify particular conditions for which a fast-start failover should occur using
either Cloud Control or the DGMGRL ENABLE FAST_START FAILOVER CONDITION and
DISABLE FAST_START FAILOVER CONDITION commands.
5.5.2.7 Enabling Fast-Start Failover Task 7: Using DGMGRL or Cloud Control

Use the Cloud Control Fast-Start Failover wizard or the DGMGRL ENABLE FAST_START
FAILOVER command to enable fast-start failover.
To enable fast-start failover, both the primary and target standby databases must be
running and have connectivity, and satisfy all of the prerequisite conditions listed in
Prerequisites for Enabling Fast-Start Failover.
Note:
The Cloud Control Fast-Start Failover wizard does not currently support
specification of multiple targets. If you want to specify multiple targets, then you
must use the DGMGRL utility.
Enable Fast-Start Failover Using Cloud Control
5-25
Chapter 5
Fast-Start Failover
To enable fast-start failover in Cloud Control, use the Fast-Start Failover wizard. On
the Oracle Data Guard Overview page next to the Fast-Start Failover status field, click
Disabled to invoke the Fast-Start Failover page. Then, on the Fast-Start Failover
Change Mode page, click Enabled. Cloud Control will start the observer. Then, on the
Fast-Start Failover Configure page, select the standby database that should be the
target of a failover. See Choosing a Target Standby Database for helpful advice. This
page will not allow you to alter the protection mode. Rather, fast-start failover will be
enabled in accordance with the current protection mode. If the currently configured
mode is maximum protection, Cloud Control will downgrade the mode to maximum
availability.
Enable Fast-Start Failover Using DGMGRL
To enable fast-start failover with DGMGRL, issue the ENABLE FAST_START FAILOVER
command while connected to any database in the broker configuration, including on
the observer computer. For example:
DGMGRL> ENABLE FAST_START FAILOVER;
Enabled.
See Also:
• ENABLE FAST_START FAILOVER

• Scenario 6: Enabling Fast-Start Failover and Starting the Observer
Note:
Administration at the target standby site should be as comprehensive as that at
the primary site because the standby database may assume the primary role
without prior notice. Staff support, hardware and software, security (both
software and site), network connections, and bandwidth should be equivalent at
both sites.
5.5.2.8 Enabling Fast-Start Failover Task 8: Start the Observer

The primary database must be running in order to start the observer.
You can start the observer before or after you enable fast-start failover. If fast-start
failover is already enabled, the observer immediately begins monitoring the status and
connections to the primary and target standby databases. If fast-start failover is not
already enabled, the observer waits until fast-start failover gets enabled and then
begins monitoring.
Starting the Observer Using Cloud Control
If the Cloud Control agent is installed on the observer computer, it automatically starts
the observer when you enable fast-start failover through Cloud Control. If the agent is
not present, you must start the observer manually using the following instructions for
the DGMGRL command-line interface.
Starting the Observer Using DGMGRL
5-26
Chapter 5
Fast-Start Failover
To start the observer with DGMGRL, issue the following command on the observer
computer:
DGMGRL> START OBSERVER;
The observer is a continuously executing process that is created when the START
OBSERVER command is issued. Thus, the command-line prompt on the observer
computer does not return until you issue the STOP OBSERVER command from another
DGMGRL session. To issue commands and interact with the broker configuration, you
must connect through another DGMGRL client session.
There can be up to three observers for a single Data Guard configuration. One is the
master observer and the others are backup observers.
Starting the Observer as a Background Process Using DGMGRL
To start an observer as a background process, use the DGMGRL command START
OBSERVER IN BACKGROUND. If this command is submitted successfully, the command-line
prompt on the observer computer is returned to you so that you can continue to issue
commands and interact with the broker configuration. This is the preferred method for
starting an observer.
• See Installing and Starting the Observer.
• See Managing the Observer
• See the START OBSERVER command for more information about starting the
observer as a foreground process.
• See START OBSERVER IN BACKGROUND for more information about starting
the observer as a background process.
5.5.2.9 Enabling Fast-Start Failover Task 9: Verify the Fast-Start Failover

Environment
To verify the readiness of the fast-start failover configuration, issue the DGMGRL SHOW
CONFIGURATION VERBOSE command or the SHOW FAST_START FAILOVER command on the
primary database.
For example:
DGMGRL> SHOW FAST_START FAILOVER;
Fast-Start Failover: ENABLED

Threshold: 60 seconds
Target: South_Sales
Observer: observer.example.com
Lag Limit: 30 seconds (not in use)
Shutdown Primary: TRUE
Auto-reinstate: TRUE
Observer Reconnect: (none)
Observer Override: FALSE
Configurable Failover Conditions

Health Conditions:
Corrupted Controlfile YES
Corrupted Dictionary YES
Inaccessible Logfile NO
Stuck Archiver NO
Datafile Write Errors YES
5-27
Chapter 5
Fast-Start Failover
Oracle Error Conditions:

(none)
The following sections provide more information about the fast-start failover
environment:
• When Fast-Start Failover Is Enabled and the Observer Is Running
• Restrictions When Fast-Start Failover is Enabled
• Shutting Down the Primary Database When Fast-Start Failover Is Enabled
• Performing Manual Role Changes When Fast-Start Failover Is Enabled
5.5.2.10 When Fast-Start Failover Is Enabled and the Observer Is Running

After fast-start failover is enabled and up to three observers are started, one observer
is nominated as the master observer that continuously monitors the environment to
ensure the primary database is available.
This section lists the steps the master observer takes to determine if a fast-start
failover is needed and then to perform one, if necessary.
1. Monitor the environment to ensure the primary database is available.
The master observer waits the number of seconds specified by the
FastStartFailoverThreshold configuration property before attempting a fast-start
failover when the primary database has crashed or has lost connectivity with the
observer, as in the following situations:
• The primary database loses its connections with both the observer and target
standby database
• Instance failures
If a single-instance primary database (either Oracle RAC or non-Oracle RAC),
or if all instances of an Oracle RAC primary database fail, the observer
attempts a fast-start failover.
• Shutdown abort
If a single-instance primary database (either Oracle RAC or non-Oracle RAC),
or if all instances of an Oracle RAC primary database are shut down with the
ABORT option, the observer attempts a fast-start failover. Fast-start failover will
not be attempted for the other types of database shutdown (NORMAL, IMMEDIATE,
TRANSACTIONAL).
The master observer never waits for the threshold to expire to perform a fast-start
failover in the following situations:
• User-configurable condition
If the master observer determines that any of the user-configurable conditions
has been detected, then it attempts a fast-start failover.
• Application calls to DBMS_DG.INITIATE_FS_FAILOVER
If an application has called this function and it has received a status of SUCCESS,
then the master observer attempts a fast-start failover.
2. Reconnect within the time specified by the FastStartFailoverThreshold property.
5-28
Chapter 5
Fast-Start Failover
If the master observer detects an availability problem with the primary database,
then it typically attempts to reconnect to the primary database within the time
specified by the FastStartFailoverThreshold configuration property. The
FastStartFailoverThreshold time interval starts when the observer first detects
there might be a failure with the primary database.
The time interval specified by the FastStartFailoverThreshold property is ignored if
the master observer detects that a user-configurable condition has occurred or if a
fast-start failover has been requested by the DBMS_DG.INITIATE_FS_FAILOVER
function.
If the primary database is an Oracle Real Application Clusters (Oracle RAC)
database, the master observer will attempt to connect to one of the remaining
primary instances. Fast-start failover will not occur unless all instances comprising
the Oracle RAC primary database are perceived to have failed. The master
observer uses the value specified by either the DGConnectIdentifier or
ObserverConnectIdentifier database properties to connect to the primary and fast-
start failover target standby databases. The value specified for either of these
properties should allow the master observer to connect to any instance of an
Oracle RAC database.
3. Verify the target standby database is ready for failover.
If fast-start failover is initiated, the master observer verifies the target standby
database is ready to fail over to the primary database role.
Fast-start failover cannot occur if:
• Fast-start failover is no longer enabled
• The master observer cannot connect to the target standby database
See Also:
What Happens if the Observer Fails? if the observer is not running
• The master observer and the target standby database are inconsistent with
regard to the current state of the broker configuration
• The master observer is not running
• If the protection mode is maximum availability or maximum protection and the
target standby database was not synchronized with the primary database at
the time the primary database failed
• If the protection mode is maximum performance and the apply point of the
target standby database lags the redo generation point of the primary
database by more than the amount specified by the FastStartFailoverLagLimit
configuration property at the time the primary database failed
• The target standby database has contact with the primary database. However,
failover is attempted if the ObserverOverride configuration property is set to
TRUE.
• The FS_FAILOVER_STATUS column in the V$DATABASE view for the target standby
database displays a reason why fast-start failover cannot occur
• A manual failover is already in progress. See Manual Failover for complete
information about manual failovers.
5-29
Chapter 5
Fast-Start Failover
• The primary database was shut down without using the ABORT option
4. Initiate a fast-start failover.
If the target standby database is ready for failover, then the master observer
immediately directs the target standby database to fail over to the primary
database role. If failover is not possible for some reason, then the master observer
will continue checking whether the standby database is ready to fail over. But it will
also continue trying to reconnect to the primary database indefinitely. If it
reconnects to the primary database before the standby agrees to fail over, then
the master observer will stop attempting to initiate a fast-start failover.
5. Reinstate the former primary database as a new standby database.
After the fast-start failover completes successfully, the master observer will
attempt to reinstate the former primary database as a new standby database when
a connection to the former primary database is reestablished, and the
FastStartFailoverAutoReinstate configuration property is set to TRUE. If the
FastStartFailoverPmyShutdown configuration property is set to TRUE, then the former
primary database will have been automatically shut down and must be manually
restarted before the master observer can attempt to reinstate it.
Note that these properties only affect whether primary shutdown and automatic
reinstatement are performed if a fast-start failover occurs because the primary
crashed or was isolated from the observer and target standby database.
See Also:
Reinstating the Former Primary Database in the Broker Configuration for
more information about reinstatement
5.5.2.11 Restrictions When Fast-Start Failover is Enabled

This list describes restrictions when fast-start failover is enabled.
• Change:
– The configuration protection mode
– The redo transport mode used to send redo to the target standby database or
the database currently in the primary role
– The FastStartFailoverTarget configuration property on the primary unless the
new property value contains the current fast-start failover target.
– The RedoRoutes property on the primary if the new value would result in the
primary not being able to ship redo to the current fast-start failover target
standby. (It is permissible to change the RedoRoutes property on all standby
databases including target standby databases.)
– The RedoRoutes property on a far sync instance if it is being used to receive
redo from the primary database and ship redo to the target standby database
• Disable or delete:
– The broker configuration
– The standby database that is the target of fast-start failover
5-30
Chapter 5
Fast-Start Failover
– A far sync instance if it is being used to receive redo from the primary
database and ship redo to the target standby database
• Perform a manual failover:
– Unless the conditions listed in Performing Manual Role Changes When Fast-
Start Failover Is Enabled have been met
– To a standby database that is not configured as the fast-start failover target
To determine if the configuration is ready for fast-start failover to occur, issue
the DGMGRL SHOW DATABASE <target-standby-database> command, or query
the V$DATABASE view on either the primary or target standby databases. The
column value for V$DATABASE.FS_FAILOVER_STATUS will be SYNCHRONIZED in a
configuration operating in maximum availability mode, and it will be TARGET
UNDER LAG LIMIT in a configuration operating in maximum performance mode
when ready to fast-start failover. The FS_FAILOVER_OBSERVER_PRESENT column
displays YES for the target standby database.
• Perform a switchover to a standby database that is not configured as the fast-start
failover target
• Perform a switchover to the target standby database in a configuration operating in
maximum availability mode, unless the standby database is synchronized with the
primary database
• Perform a switchover to the target standby database in a configuration operating in
maximum performance mode, unless the standby database is within the lag limit of
the primary database
• Attempt to open the primary database, or the following error may be returned:
ORA-16649: possible failover to another database prevents this database from
being opened
This error may return if the fast-start failover validity check fails or does not
complete in under two minutes.
• Use the SQL ALTER DATABASE MOVE DATAFILE command to rename or relocate an
online data file on a physical standby that is a fast-start failover target if the
standby is mounted, but not open.
5.5.2.12 Shutting Down the Primary Database When Fast-Start Failover Is

Enabled
Fast-start failover will not be triggered if the primary or standby database is shut down
normally.
A normal shutdown uses SHUTDOWN NORMAL, SHUTDOWN IMMEDIATE, or SHUTDOWN
TRANSACTIONAL. A normal shutdown prevents a fast-start failover until the primary
database and standby database are connected and communicating again.
5.5.2.13 Performing Manual Role Changes When Fast-Start Failover Is

Enabled
If fast-start failover is enabled you can still perform a switchover or a manual failover
as long as certain conditions are met.
The conditions are as follows:
5-31
Chapter 5
Fast-Start Failover
• The role change is directed to the same standby database that was specified for
the FastStartFailoverTarget database property on the primary database.
• The target standby database is synchronized with the primary database if it is a
configuration operating in maximum availability or maximum protection mode, or
the target standby database is within the lag limit if it is a configuration operating in
maximum performance mode.
• For manual failover, the observer is started and communicating with the target
standby database. You must ensure that the primary database is shut down prior
to performing a manual failover.
Note:
You can disable fast-start failover if necessary, by using the FORCE option. See
Disabling Fast-Start Failover.
See Also:
Switchover and Manual Failover for more information about switchovers and
manual failovers, respectively
5.5.3 Directing a Fast-Start Failover From an Application

You can customize fast-start failover setup for a specific application by using the
DBMS_DG PL/SQL package.
When a serious condition uniquely known to an application is detected, the application

can call the DBMS_DG.INITIATE_FS_FAILOVER function to initiate an immediate fast-start
failover. This function can be called from a connection to either the primary or any
standby in the configuration. The database on which the procedure is called notifies
the observer. The observer immediately initiates a fast-start failover, as long as the
failover target database is in a valid fast-start failover state ("observed" and either
"synchronized" or "within lag") to accept a failover. Once the observer has initiated a
fast-start failover, the primary database shuts down automatically. The observer does
not attempt to reinstate the former primary database.
If the configuration is not failable, the DBMS_DG.INITIATE_FS_FAILOVER function returns an
ORA error number (it does not signal an exception) informing the caller that a fast-start
failover could not be performed.
Note:
An application should use caution when calling the
DBMS_DG.INITIATE_FS_FAILOVER function because the observer will initiate
failover, if at all possible.
5-32
Chapter 5
Fast-Start Failover
See Also:
Oracle Database PL/SQL Packages and Types Reference for more information
about the DBMS_DG package
5.5.4 Viewing Fast-Start Failover Configuration Statistics and Status

To verify the observer is started and the configuration is ready for fast-start failover,
you can issue the DGMGRL SHOW DATABASE <target-standby-database> command.
Alternatively, you can query the V$DATABASE view on the target standby database.
You can also query the V$FS_FAILOVER_STATS view to display statistics about fast-start
failover occurring on the system.
The rest of this section provides examples of using DGMGRL SHOW commands to
display fast-start failover information and includes sections describing the following
views:
• V$DATABASE View
• V$FS_FAILOVER_STATS View
Example 1: SHOW FAST_START FAILOVER

The DGMGRL SHOW FAST-START FAILOVER command displays all the fast-start failover
related information. For example:

Target: South_Sales

Health Conditions:
Stuck Archiver NO

(none)
Example 2: SHOW CONFIGURATION VERBOSE

The following example shows the fast-start failover information for the DRSolution
configuration:
5-33
Chapter 5
Fast-Start Failover

Members:
South_Sales - (*) Physical standby database
(*) Fast-Start Failover target
Properties:
TraceLevel = 'USER'
ConfigurationWideServiceName = 'North_Sales_CFG'
Target: South_Sales
SUCCESS
Example 3: SHOW OBSERVER

The following SHOW OBSERVER command displays information about multiple observers in
the DRSolution broker configuration.
DGMGRL> SHOW OBSERVER;
Primary: North_Sales
Active Target Standby: South_Sales
Observer "ob2" - Master
Host Name: observer2.example.com

Last Ping to Primary: 1 second ago
Last Ping to Target: 2 seconds ago
Observer "ob1" - Backup

5-34
Chapter 5
Fast-Start Failover

Last Ping to Primary: 4 seconds ago
5.5.4.1 V$DATABASE View

You can query the V$DATABASE view to verify that the observer is started and the
configuration is ready for fast-start failover.
When querying the V$DATABASE view, pay special attention to the following:
• The FS_FAILOVER_STATUS column, which can contain the values described in

Table 5-1. Note that if the V$DATABASE.FS_FAILOVER_STATUS column has a value of
DISABLED, then any values returned for the remaining columns related to fast-start
failover (V$DATABASE.FS_FAILOVER_*) become irrelevant.
• The FS_FAILOVER_OBSERVER_PRESENT column, which indicates whether the observer is
running and actively pinging the database.
Table 5-1 FS_FAILOVER_STATUS Column of the V$DATABASE View
Column Value Description Fast-Start Failover ...

BYSTANDER Fast-start failover is enabled, but this standby Is enabled
database is not the target of the fast-start
failover. The database cannot provide fast-
start failover status information.
DISABLED Fast-start failover is disabled. Is not possible
LOADING Displays only on a logical standby database Is not possible
DICTIONARY that has not yet completed loading a copy of
the primary database's data dictionary.
PRIMARY Displays only on the target standby database Is not possible
UNOBSERVED when it is SYNCHRONIZED with or is TARGET
UNDER LAG LIMIT of the primary database,
has connectivity to the observer, but the
primary database does not have a
connection to the observer.
REINSTATE FAILED Reinstatement of the failed primary database Has completed
as a new standby database failed. See
Sources of Diagnostic Information for details
about the broker's drc* log files.
REINSTATE The failed primary database requires Has completed
REQUIRED reinstatement as a new standby database to
the new primary. The observer automatically
starts the reinstatement process. REINSTATE
REQUIRED is present only after fast-start
failover has occurred and shows on both the
new primary database and the database
undergoing reinstatement. This is cleared on
both when the reinstatement has been
completed.
5-35
Chapter 5
Fast-Start Failover
Table 5-1 (Cont.) FS_FAILOVER_STATUS Column of the V$DATABASE View

STALLED Displays on the primary database after loss Is possible
of connectivity to the target standby database
and the change to the UNSYNCHRONIZED state
(maximum availability mode) or to the TARGET
OVER LAG LIMIT state (maximum
performance mode) cannot be confirmed by
either the target standby database or the
observer. Note that the value of the
FastStartFailoverPmyShutdown
configuration property must be FALSE for the
primary to stall indefinitely under these
conditions. With a value of TRUE for this
property, the primary will shut down after
being stalled for the number of seconds
specified by the
FastStartFailoverThreshold property.
It shuts down or stalls because it is likely a
failover has occurred.
Note: this state also occurs on the primary
during startup when fast-start failover is
possible and neither the target standby
database nor the observer are present to
confirm it is okay to continue opening the
database.
TARGET OVER LAG Displays if the standby database's redo Is not possible
LIMIT applied point lags the primary database's
redo generation point by more than the
number of seconds specified by the
FastStartFailoverLagLimit configuration
property and the configuration is operating in
TARGET UNDER LAG Displays if the standby database's redo Is possible
LIMIT applied point does not lag the primary
database's redo generation point by more
than the number of seconds specified by the
FastStartFailoverLagLimit configuration
property and the configuration is operating in
SUSPENDED Displays only on the target standby database Is not possible
when either the primary or target standby
database was shut down in a controlled
fashion (using the NORMAL, IMMEDIATE, or
TRANSACTIONAL, options, but not the ABORT
option). Fast-start failover is inhibited in this
case. SUSPENDED is cleared when connectivity
with the primary database is restored.
SYNCHRONIZED Displays when the primary and target Is possible if the target
standby databases are synchronized and the standby database displays
configuration is operating in maximum SYNCHRONIZED and the
availability mode. FS_FAILOVER_OBSERVER_PRE
SENT column displays YES
5-36
Chapter 5
Fast-Start Failover
Table 5-1 (Cont.) FS_FAILOVER_STATUS Column of the V$DATABASE View

UNSYNCHRONIZED Displays when the target standby database Is not possible
does not have all of the primary database
redo data and the configuration is operating
in maximum availability mode.
5.5.4.2 V$FS_FAILOVER_STATS View

You can query the V$FS_FAILOVER_STATS view on the primary database to display
statistics about fast-start failovers that have occurred on the system.
It can be useful to perform such queries because fast-start failovers are fully
automated and can occur at any time. Some of the statistics that can be monitored are
as follows:
• LAST_FAILOVER_TIME that shows the timestamp of last fast-start failover
• LAST_FAILOVER_REASON that shows the reason for the last fast-start failover
The following is an example of querying the V$FS_FAILOVER_STATS view:

SQL> SELECT LAST_FAILOVER_TIME, LAST_FAILOVER_REASON FROM V$FS_FAILOVER_STATS;
LAST_FAILOVER_TIME
--------------------
LAST_FAILOVER_REASON
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------
02/13/2007 16:53:10
Primary Disconnected
5.5.5 Disabling Fast-Start Failover

Disabling fast-start failover prevents the observer from initiating a failover to the target
standby database.
If fast-start failover is disabled, then manual failover may still be possible. See Manual
Failover for information about manual failover.
Note:
Disabling fast-start failover does not stop the observer. To stop the observer,
see Stopping the Observer.
To disable fast-start failover, use the Fast-Start Failover wizard in Cloud Control or the
DGMGRL DISABLE FAST_START FAILOVER [FORCE] command. The FORCE option disables
fast-start failover on the database to which you are connected even when errors occur.
Whether or not you need the FORCE option depends mostly on if the primary and target
standby database have network connectivity:
5-37
Chapter 5
Fast-Start Failover
• If the primary and target standby database have network connectivity, and the
database to which you are connected has network connectivity with the primary
database, the FORCE option has no effect. Simply use DISABLE FAST_START FAILOVER.
This method will disable fast-start failover on all databases in the broker
configuration.
If errors occur during the disable operation, the broker returns an error message
and stops the disable operation.
• If the primary and target standby databases do not have network connectivity or if
the database to which you are connected does not have network connectivity with
the primary database, consider using DISABLE FAST_START FAILOVER with the FORCE
option.
The broker may not be able to disable fast-start failover on all databases in the
broker configuration when you issue the DISABLE FAST_START FAILOVER FORCE
command. As a result, there is no guarantee that the observer will not perform a
fast-start failover to the target standby database if the observer determines that
conditions warrant a failover. The following list indicates the extent to which fast-
start failover is disabled in the broker configuration when the DISABLE FAST_START
FAILOVER FORCE command is issued on the primary database, target standby
database, and a standby database that is not the fast-start failover target.
If you issue this command on:
– The target standby database when it does not have connectivity with the
primary database, fast-start failover is disabled only on the target standby
database. In this case, the observer cannot perform a fast-start failover even if
conditions warrant a failover. Disabling fast-start failover with the FORCE option
when connected to the target standby database guarantees that fast-start
failover will not occur.
When the primary database and the target standby database regain network
connectivity, the broker will disable fast-start failover for the entire broker
configuration.
– The primary database, it attempts to disable fast-start failover on as many
databases in the configuration with which it has a network connection. If the
primary database does not have connectivity with the target standby database,
fast-start failover remains enabled on the target standby database and the
observer may still attempt a fast-start failover if conditions warrant a failover.
Caution:
This action may result in two databases in the configuration
simultaneously assuming the primary database role should fast-start
failover occur. For this reason, you should first issue this command on
the target standby database.
– Another standby database that does not have connectivity with the primary
database, fast-start failover is disabled for this database. Because fast-start
failover was not disabled on the target standby database, the observer may
still attempt a fast-start failover to the target standby database should
conditions warrant a failover.
5-38
Chapter 5
Fast-Start Failover
When the primary database and the (non-target) standby database regain
network connectivity, the broker will propagate its current fast-start failover
setting (ENABLED or DISABLED) to the non-target standby.
Caution:
When you are experiencing network disconnections and you issue the
DISABLE FAST_START FAILOVER FORCE command on the primary database
or a standby database that does not have connectivity with the primary
database, fast-start failover may not be disabled for all databases in
the broker configuration. As a result the observer may still initiate fast-
start failover to the target standby database, if conditions warrant a
failover. This may result in two databases in the configuration
simultaneously assuming the primary database role.
Conditions Requiring the FORCE Option

Disabling fast-start failover without the FORCE option can succeed only if the database
on which the command is issued has a network connection with the primary database
and if the primary database and target standby database have a network connection.
This is the recommended method for disabling fast-start failover.
However, there may be situations in which you must disable fast-start failover when
the primary database and the target standby database do not have a network
connection, or the database on which you issued the disable fast-start failover
command does not have a network connection to the primary database. In cases
where there is a lost network connection, be aware that the observer may attempt a
fast-start failover to the target standby database if conditions warrant a failover.The
FORCE option may be the preferred method for disabling fast-start failover when:
• A network outage isolates the primary database from the observer and the target
standby database before conditions exist that warrant a failover.
In this case, the primary database stalls and prevents any further transactions
from committing because a fast-start failover may have occurred while it was
isolated. If you expect the network to be disconnected for a long time and you
need to make the primary database available, first confirm that a fast-start failover
has not occurred to the target standby database. Then, disable fast-start failover
with the FORCE option on the primary database.If possible, confirm that fast-start
failover has not occurred to the target standby database prior to disabling fast-start
failover with the FORCE option on the primary database.
Caution:
This action may result in two databases in the configuration simultaneously
assuming the primary database role. This can be avoided by first disabling
fast-start failover with the FORCE option on the target standby.
• You want to conduct a manual failover to any standby database in the

configuration (for example, because a failure occurred on the primary database at
a time when the primary and target standby database were not ready to failover).
5-39
Chapter 5
Fast-Start Failover
In this case fast-start failover cannot occur because the databases are not ready
to failover. You cannot perform a manual failover to the target standby database
for the same reason. To proceed, you must first disable fast-start failover using the
FORCE option, and then perform a manual failover.
Caution:
This action will result in loss of data and the possibility of two databases in
the configuration simultaneously assuming the primary database role. This
can be avoided by first disabling fast-start failover with the FORCE option on
the target standby.
• A fast-start failover to the target standby database fails.

If the failover fails for any reason, it could leave the target standby database
inoperable, regardless of whether the target standby database is ready to failover.
If there is another standby database that is available for failover, you can perform
a manual failover to that standby database after you first disable fast-start failover
using the FORCE option on that standby database.
• You want to prevent fast-start failover from occurring because the primary
database will resume service soon.
In this case, disable fast-start failover using the FORCE option on the target standby
database. Once the primary database regains connectivity with the target standby
database, fast-start failover will be disabled for all the databases in the
configuration.
Disabling Fast-Start Failover Using Cloud Control
Click Disable in the Fast-Start Failover wizard. Then, click Continue to proceed to the
next page. See the Cloud Control online help for more information.
Disabling Fast-Start Failover Using DGMGRL
Issue the DISABLE FAST_START FAILOVER command or the DISABLE FAST_START FAILOVER
FORCE command. See the "DISABLE FAST_START FAILOVER" command in Oracle
Data Guard Command-Line Interface Reference for more information.
5.5.6 Performance Considerations for Fast-Start Failover

This list contains some recommendations to obtain better performance when using
fast-start failover.
• The failover time is dependent upon whether the target standby database
(physical or logical standby database) has applied all of the redo data it has
received from the primary database.
• Enabling fast-start failover in a configuration operating in maximum performance
mode provides better overall performance on the primary database because redo
data is sent asynchronously to the target standby database. Note that this does
not guarantee no data will be lost.
• Fast-start failover is faster when you take steps to optimize recovery so that the
application of redo data to the standby database is kept up to date with the primary
database's rate of redo application. To optimize the log apply rate:
5-40
Chapter 5
Fast-Start Failover
– Do not configure the DelayMins database property to delay applying archived

redo log files to the standby database (see Managing Log Apply Services for
more information).
– See Oracle Data Guard Concepts and Administration for information about
tuning the log apply rate for a physical standby database.
– See the Oracle Maximum Availability Architecture white papers at:
http://www.oracle.com/goto/maa
• When setting the FastStartFailoverLagLimit configuration property, consider these

tradeoffs between performance and potential data-loss:
– A low lag limit will minimize data loss but may impact the performance of the
primary database.
– A high lag limit may lead to more data loss but may lessen the performance
impact of the primary database.
5.5.7 Managing the Observer

An observer process is integrated in the DGMGRL client-side component of the broker
and typically runs on a different computer from the primary or standby databases and
from the computer where you manage the broker configuration.
There can be up to three observers for a single Data Guard configuration. Observers
continuously monitor the fast-start failover environment to ensure the primary
database is available (described in When Fast-Start Failover Is Enabled and the
Observer Is Running). The observer's main purpose is to enhance high availability and
lights out computing by reducing the human intervention required by the manual
failover process that can add minutes or hours to downtime.
You can manage observers through either the Oracle Data Guard Overview pages in
Cloud Control or using DGMGRL commands. Figure 5-2 shows the observer
monitoring a fast-start failover configuration.
Figure 5-2 The Observer in the Fast-Start Failover Environment
Observer Oracle Enterprise Manager

and or
Optional DGMGRL Command-Line
Observers
Oracle Oracle Oracle

Instance Instance Instance
Primary Standby Standby
Database Database Database
The following sections provide information about managing observers:
5-41
Chapter 5
Fast-Start Failover
• Installing and Starting the Observer

• Viewing Information About the Observer
• What Happens if the Observer Fails?
• Stopping the Observer
• Moving the Observer to Another Computer
• How the Observer Maintains Fast-Start Failover Configuration Information
• Patching an Environment When the Observer Is Running and Fast-start Failover Is
Enabled
5.5.7.1 Installing and Starting the Observer

Observers should be installed and run on a computer system that is separate from the
primary and standby systems.
Installing and starting an observer is an integral part of using fast-start failover and is
described in detail in the following sections:
• Oracle Data Guard Installation explains that you can either install only the Oracle
Client Administrator or you can install the complete Oracle Database Enterprise
Edition or Personal Edition on the observer system.
• Enabling Fast-Start Failover describes how to start observers as a part of the step-
by-step process to enable fast-start failover. Examples of starting observers using
DGMGRL are included in Scenario 6: Enabling Fast-Start Failover and Starting the
Observer.
To start an observer, you must be able to log in to DGMGRL with an account that has
the SYSDG or SYSDBA privilege. An observer is an OCI client that connects to the primary
and target standby databases using the same SYS credentials you used when you
connected to the Oracle Data Guard configuration with DGMGRL.
See Also:
• The My Oracle Support note 1625597.1 at http://support.oracle.com for

information about compatibility requirements between the observer and
DGMGRL
Starting Multiple Observers on a Data Guard Broker Configuration
Note:
Oracle Enterprise Manager Cloud Control (Cloud Control) does not support
multiple observers.
You can register up to three observers to monitor a single Data Guard broker
configuration. Each observer is identified by a name that you supply when you issue
the START OBSERVER command. The following conditions apply when multiple observers
are registered for one configuration:
5-42
Chapter 5
Fast-Start Failover
• When fast-start failover is enabled, one of the observers is the master observer.
The remaining observers are called backup observers. When fast-start failover is
disabled, no observer is called the master observer; all observers have the same
functionality.
• No two observers on the same Data Guard Broker configuration can have the
same name.
• If no name is specified for the observer then a default observer name, the host
name of machine where the START OBSERVER command is issued, is used.
• An observer name is case-insensitive.
• The string "NONAME" cannot be used as an observer name.
• Each observer has its own log file. The log file name is specified with the LOGFILE
IS option of the START OBSERVER command. If the specified log file is not accessible,
or the LOGFILE IS option is not used, then the observer output is sent to standard
output.
• Except for testing purposes, it is not recommended that you start more than one
observer on the same host for a Data Guard broker configuration.
• The command SHOW FAST_START FAILOVER shows a list of registered observers and
indicates which one is the master.
• The command SHOW OBSERVER provides detailed information about registered
observers.
The Master Observer and Backup Observers
Note:
The master observer works in the same manner that a single observer worked
prior to the advent of multiple observers in Oracle Database 12c Release 2
(12.2.0.1).
The observer does not need to coordinate fast-start failover when fast-start failover is
disabled, so the primary and target standby do not nominate a master observer until
fast-start failover is enabled. When fast-start failover is enabled, the primary and
standby randomly choose one of the registered observers to be the master. If there
are no registered observers when fast-start failover is enabled, then the first observer
started is designated as the master observer, and all others started later are backup
observers. Only the master observer can coordinate fast-start failover with Data Guard
broker. All other registered observers are considered to be backup observers.
Manually Changing the Master Observer

If necessary, you can use the SET MASTEROBSERVER TO Observer-Name command to
change which observer is the master. For example:
DGMGRL> SET MASTEROBSERVER TO boston-obsever;
Succeeded.
When this command is issued, the actual switch does not happen until the next time
the primary contacts the target standby, usually within three seconds if fast-start
failover is enabled. You can issue a SHOW OBSERVER command to confirm that the switch
took place. For more information, see SET MASTEROBSERVER TO.
5-43
Chapter 5
Fast-Start Failover
Starting Observers as Background Processes

To run an observer as a background process, use the DGMGRL command START
OBSERVER IN BACKGROUND. You must provide a connect identifier, through which one or
more databases in a specific broker configuration can be reached. The following is an
example of starting an observer as a background process:
DGMGRL> START OBSERVER IN BACKGROUND
FILE IS /net/sales/dat/oracle/broker/fsfo.dat
LOGFILE IS /net/sales/dat/oracle/broker/observer.log
CONNECT IDENTIFIER IS sales_p
Submitted command "START OBSERVER" using connect identifier "sales_p"
DGMGRL>
The START OBSERVER IN BACKGROUND command uses Oracle wallet to obtain credentials
to log into the database server and register observers. Even if you have successfully
connected to a database server in the broker configuration using the CONNECT
command, this command ignores the existing connection and uses the credentials
stored in Oracle wallet. For more information, see START OBSERVER IN
BACKGROUND.
Starting Multiple Observers On a Single Host

If you want to use one Oracle home to start multiple observers, with each observer
monitoring a different fast-start failover configuration, use the FILE qualifier to specify a
unique observer configuration file location for each configuration to be monitored. If
you want to capture any logging generated by the observer, use the LOGFILE IS option
on the START OBSERVER command, and ensure that the file name is unique. For
example:
% dgmgrl
DGMGRL> CONNECT /@primary1;
DGMGRL> START OBSERVER FILE IS '/u01/oracle/dbs/config1.dat'
LOGFILE IS '/u01/oracle/log/config1.log'
% dgmgrl
DGMGRL> CONNECT /@primary2;
DGMGRL> START OBSERVER FILE IS '/u01/oracle/dbs/config2.dat'
LOGFILE IS '/u01/oracle/log/config2.log'
Note:
The DGMGRL -logfile option is deprecated as of Oracle Database 12c
Release 2 (12.2.0.1). It is supported for backward compatibility only. Instead,
the log file should now be specified using the LOGFILE IS clause on the START
OBSERVER command.
5.5.7.2 Viewing Information About the Master Observer

You can find information about the master observer by querying the V$DATABASE view.
• FS_FAILOVER_OBSERVER_HOST shows the name of the computer on which the master

observer is running
5-44
Chapter 5
Fast-Start Failover
• FS_FAILOVER_OBSERVER_PRESENT shows whether or not the master observer is

connected to the local database
The Column Value in the following table is consistent across instances in an Oracle
Real Applications Clusters (Oracle RAC) environment. That is, if the observer is
connected to any instance in the Oracle RAC, all instances will show a value of YES.
Table 5-2 FS_FAILOVER_OBSERVER_PRESENT Column of the V$DATABASE

View
Column Value Description

YES The master observer is currently connected to the local database
NO The master observer is not connected to the local database
For example, to determine if fast-start failover can occur, the FS_FAILOVER_STATUS

column displays either SYNCHRONIZED or TARGET UNDER LAG LIMIT and the
FS_FAILOVER_OBSERVER_PRESENT column displays YES for the target standby database. For
example:
Database FS_FAILOVER_STATUS Protection Mode FS_FAILOVER_OBSERVER_PRE

SENT
Primary SYNCHRONIZED Maximum YES
Availability
Standby SYNCHRONIZED Maximum YES
Availability
Primary TARGET UNDER LAG LIMIT Maximum YES
Performance
Standby TARGET UNDER LAG LIMIT Maximum YES
Performance
In the following example, assume the network between the primary database and the
observer has failed. In this case, the FS_FAILOVER_STATUS and
FS_FAILOVER_OBSERVER_PRESENT columns will appear as shown in the following table and
fast-start failover will not occur:
Database FS_FAILOVER_STATUS FS_FAILOVER_OBSERVER_PRESENT

Primary SYNCHRONIZED NO
Standby PRIMARY UNOBSERVED YES
See Also:
• Oracle Database Reference for more information about the V$DATABASE

view.
5.5.7.3 Viewing Information About All Observers

You can find detailed information about all observers, including master observers and
backup observers, in the V$FS_FAILOVER_OBSERVERS view.
5-45
Chapter 5
Fast-Start Failover
For each observer, the V$FS_FAILOVER_OBSERVERS view provides the observer name,
host, whether it is the master observer, when it became the master observer, and
whether it is currently connected to the primary and target standby databases.
See Also:
• Oracle Database Reference for more information about the

V$FS_FAILOVER_OBSERVERS view.
5.5.7.4 What Happens if the Master Observer Fails?

The behavior of the broker if the master observer fails depends on whether the broker
configuration has one observer or multiple observers.
If there is only one observer, then it is considered to be the master observer. If there
are multiple observers, then only one of them is the master observer.
Broker Configuration Has Only One Registered Observer

When the configuration has only one registered observer, if the primary and target
standby databases stay connected but the connection to the observer is lost, then the
broker reports that the configuration is not observed. The configuration and database
status report that the observer is not running and return one of the following status
messages:
ORA-16658: unobserved fast-start failover configuration
ORA-16820: fast-start failover observer is no longer observing this database
While the configuration is in the unobserved state, fast-start failover cannot happen.
Therefore, the primary database can continue processing transactions, even if the
target standby database fails. The configuration status returns the SUCCESS status after
the observer reestablishes its connection to the primary database, which then notifies
the target standby database.
See Also:
Viewing Fast-Start Failover Configuration Statistics and Status
Broker Configuration Has Multiple Registered Observers

When the configuration has more than one registered observer, if the primary and
target standby databases stay connected but the connection to the master observer is
lost, then the broker tries to nominate a backup observer as the new master observer.
This nomination is noted in the observer log file and in the broker log file (drc*.log).
Additionally, the new master observer is identified in the output shown for the SHOW
FAST_START FAILOVER and SHOW OBSERVER commands.
5-46
Chapter 5
Fast-Start Failover
Note:
During the period when a new master observer is being identified, a fast-start
failover cannot occur until the new master observer is selected and observing
the configuration.
If the primary or target standby databases lose connections to all backup observers,
then the broker does not try to nominate a backup observer as the new master
observer, and the broker reports that the configuration is not observed. The
configuration and database status report the same error messages as are returned
when there is only one registered observer.
5.5.7.5 Managing Observer's Connection to the Primary

The ObserverOverride and ObserverReconnect properties allow you additional control
over the connection to the primary.
When the observer loses its connection to the primary database for a period of time
greater than that specified by the FastStartFailoverThreshold property, it attempts a
failover to the standby database. However, if the standby has had contact from the
primary within the period of time specified by the FastStartFailoverThreshold property,
the standby prevents the failover attempt.
To override this behavior and allow a fast-start failover to occur if the observer is
unable to contact the primary for more than FastStartFailoverThreshold seconds, set
the ObserverOverride property to TRUE. For example:
DGMGRL> EDIT CONFIGURATION SET PROPERTY ObserverOverride=TRUE;
Ordinarily the observer connects once to the primary and does not attempt to
reconnect unless the connection has failed. However, if you want the observer to
reconnect to the primary database periodically as a means of testing the health of the
network connection to the primary, then use the ObserverReconnect configuration
property. This specifies how often the observer establishes a new connection to the
primary database. In the following example, ObserverReconnect is set to 30 seconds.
This results in the observer establishing a new connection to the primary database
every 30 seconds.
DGMGRL> EDIT CONFIGURATION SET PROPERTY ObserverReconnect=30;
5.5.7.6 Stopping the Observer

You can manually stop a specific observer or all observers.
Before stopping an observer, note the following:
• The observer does not stop immediately when you issue the STOP OBSERVER
command. After the broker receives the STOP OBSERVER request, the request is
passed to the observer the next time the observer contacts the broker, and the
observer then stops itself.
• Stopping the observer does not disable fast-start failover. However, fast-start
failover cannot occur when the target standby database is in an unobserved state.
• To stop the observer when fast-start failover is disabled, the primary database
must be running.
5-47
Chapter 5
Fast-Start Failover
• To stop the observer when fast-start failover is enabled, the primary database and
target standby database must be connected and communicating with each other. If
they are isolated from each other, then you must first disable fast-start failover by
using the FORCE option, and then stop the observer. (See Disabling Fast-Start
Failover for important considerations when using the FORCE option.)
Stopping All Observers

You can specify STOP OBSERVER ALL to stop all observers registered in a broker
configuration.
Stopping a Specific Observer When There are Multiple Observers

To stop a specific observer when there are multiple registered observers running,
issue the following command:
DGMGRL> STOP OBSERVER observer_name;
You can log into DGMGRL from any machine to stop an observer. For instance, you
could log into the system running observer1 to stop observer2.
In an environment where there are multiple observers configured, stopping the master
observer is not allowed unless it is the last running observer. To stop an observer
currently designated as the master observer, first issue the SET MASTEROBSERVER
command to designate a different observer as master observer. Then the STOP
OBSERVER command can be issued successfully on the former master observer.
Stopping the Observer When There is Only One Observer

If there is only one registered observer, then it works in the same manner that a single
observer worked prior to the advent of multiple observers in Oracle Database 12c
Release 2 (12.2.0.1). To stop it, you can do either of the following:
• Using Cloud Control
Choose the Stop Observer option on the first page of the fast-start failover wizard
and click Continue at the bottom of the page. See the Cloud Control online help
for more information.
• Using DGMGRL
Issue the following command:
DGMGRL> STOP OBSERVER;
If there is more than one registered observer, then this command returns an error;
a name is required if there is more than one observer.
Note:
See the STOP OBSERVER command for more information.
5-48
Chapter 5
Fast-Start Failover
5.5.7.7 Moving the Observer to Another Computer

An observer can be moved from one computer to another through a process of
stopping it on one system and and re-starting it on another.
To move the observer to another computer:
1. Stop the observer from any computer system in the broker configuration, as
described in Stopping the Observer.
2. Start the observer on the new computer system, as described in Step 8 of
Enabling Fast-Start Failover.
There is no need to disable fast-start failover when you move the observer.
5.5.7.8 How the Observer Maintains Fast-Start Failover Configuration

Information
The observer persistently maintains information about the fast-start failover
configuration in a binary file created in the working directory where you started the
observer.
By default, the observer creates this file in the current working directory when it is
started and names the file fsfo.dat. This file contains connect identifiers to both the
primary and the target standby databases.
Ensure this file cannot be read by unauthorized users.
Once the observer is started, you cannot change the file's name and location.
However, you can change the name or the location of the file if you start the observer
using the DGMGRL START OBSERVER command and include the FILE IS qualifier. See
the START OBSERVER command for more information.
Note:
If the observer is stopped abnormally (for example, by typing CTRL/C), restart it
and reference the existing fsfo.dat file with the FILE IS qualifier.
5.5.7.9 Managing Observers for Multiple Configurations

DGMGRL can be used to manage multiple observers in a group of broker
configurations.
You can start, stop, and show observers for a group of configurations. You can also
switch the master observer hosts for a group of configurations to one specific host.
The group of broker configurations to be managed is declared in the observer
configuration file. The default group is all the configurations defined in the observer
configuration file. If you do not want to use the default, you can define a specific group.
The observer configuration file is a text file and the syntax to define observers and
groups is similar to that used in the listener.ora or tnsnames.ora files. It has two parts
in the following order:
5-49
Chapter 5
Fast-Start Failover
1. Configuration declaration — this section is mandatory. It must appear as the first

part of an observer configuration file.
2. Group definition — this section is optional. If provided, then each group needs to
have at least one broker configuration declared in the second part.
Syntax for Mandatory Configuration Declaration

The syntax for the configuration declaration is:
BROKER_CONFIGS = (
(configuration1-definition)
(configuration2-definition)
...
(configuration-n-definition)
)
The definition for each broker configuration is:

CONFIG= (NAME =configuration-name)
(CONNECT_ID =connect-identifier)
(CONFIG_HOME =config-home-location)
)
Note the following:

• The configuration-name can be different from the name defined in the metadata of
the Data Guard Broker configuration. (This is useful because the name defined in
the metadata may contain whitespace and international characters, which the
observer configuration file does not allow.)
• The connect-identifier is a TNS alias defined in tnsnames.ora through which all
instances of all databases in this Data Guard broker configuration can be reached.
• Config-home-location specifies a location for the observer log file and FSFO.dat file.
• Duplicate configuration names in configuration definitions are not allowed.
Syntax for Optional Group Definition

The syntax for the optional definition of a broker configuration group is:
CONFIG_GROUPS = (
(group1-definition)
(group2-definition)
...
(group-n-definition)
)
The definition of each group is:

GROUP =(NAME=group-name)
(CONFIG_LIST=
(NAME=configuration1-name)
(NAME=configuration2-name)
...
(NAME=configuration-n-name)
)
Note the following:
5-50
Chapter 5
Fast-Start Failover
• The group definition section is optional. If groups are not defined, you can still
operate on all configurations defined in the file as a whole.
• The word ALL cannot be used as a group name because it is a reserved keyword.
• Duplicate group names are not allowed.
• Each group that you define must have at least one broker configuration.
• Any broker configuration name that is referred to must exist in the configuration
declaration section.
• A broker configuration can belong to multiple groups.
Specifying the Observer Configuration File

When you execute commands that affect multiple observers, if you have not specified
a name and location for the observer configuration file, then broker searches the
current working directory for a file named observer.ora. The command fails if the file
does not exist.
However, you do have the option of specifying a name and location for the observer
configuration file. To do this, use the SET ObserverConfigFile and SHOW
ObserverConfigFile commands. These commands can be issued from the DGMGRL
command line, but it is not necessary to log on prior to using them.
• SET ObserverConfigFile — used to specify a customized observer configuration
file. ObserverConfigFile is a DGMGRL session runtime property. You must specify
it every time you start a new DGMGRL client.
• SHOW ObserverConfigFile — used to check the runtime property ObserverConfigFile.
If you have not used the SET ObserverConfigFile command after starting the
current DGMGRL client, then the result will always be:
ObserverConfigFile=observer.ora.
Commands For Managing Observers on Multiple Configurations

The commands that can be executed for a group of configurations (as declared in an
observer configuration file) are as follows.
• START OBSERVING [cfg_group_name] — starts a new observer for each broker
configuration in the specified group. If the group name is not provided, then a new
observer is started for each broker configuration defined in observer.ora.
• STOP OBSERVING [cfg_group_name] — stops LOCAL observers running on this host
(where this DGMGRL is running) for all broker configurations in a specified group
• SHOW OBSERVERS [FOR fg_group_name ] — shows information about observers for
all configurations in the specified group. The information shown by this command
is the same as that shown by a SHOW OBSERVER command on each individual
configuration. If a group name is not specified, then SHOW OBSERVERS alone is also a
valid command. It behaves similarly to START OBSERVING and STOP OBSERVING to
operate on all the configurations defined in the observer configuration file.
• SET MASTEROBSERVER TO — allows you to manually change the observer
configuration file.
5-51
Chapter 5
Fast-Start Failover
See Also:
• Oracle Data Guard Command-Line Interface Reference for more

information about these broker commands.
Credentials Required for Access to Broker Configurations

You must use the Oracle wallet to store the credentials for all broker configurations to
be managed. Data Guard broker does not manage or store credentials. It uses the
connect identifier specified in the observer configuration file to locate the credentials
for a broker configuration from the Oracle wallet. If the credentials cannot be obtained,
then the attempted command fails (but only for the broker configuration whose
credentials have not been obtained).
Example 5-1 Sample Observer Configuration File
The following is a sample observer configuration file:
# is the comment sign in this file
BROKER_CONFIGS = (
#Broker configuration 'SALES'; the connect ID is 'SALES_P'
(CONFIG = (NAME=SALES)
(CONNECT_ID=SALES_P)
(CONFIG_HOME= ORACLE_HOME/LOG/))
#Broker configuration 'HR'; the connect ID is 'HR_P'
(CONFIG = (NAME=HR)
(CONNECT_ID=HR_P)
(CONFIG_HOME= ORACLE_HOME/LOG/))
#Broker configuration 'CUSTOMER'; The connect ID is 'CUSTOMER_P'
(CONFIG = (NAME =CUSTOMER)
(CONNECT_ID=CUSTOMER_P)
(CONFIG_HOME= ORACLE_HOME/LOG1/))
)
# The portion 'CONFIG_GROUP' lists definitions of
# all broker configuration groups
CONFIG_GROUPS= (
# Configuration 'GRP_A' includes 'SALES' and 'HR'
(GROUP = (NAME=GRP_A)
(CONFIG_LIST=
(NAME=SALES)
(NAME=HR)))
# Configuration 'GRP_B' includes 'SALES' and 'CUSTOMER'
(GROUP = (NAME=GRP_B)
(CONFIG_LIST=
(NAME=SALES)
(NAME=CUSTOMER)))
)
Since the broker configuration SALES consists of three databases, Boston, Chicago, and
Dallas, with a CONNECT_ID of SALES_P, the SALES_P connect identifier must be defined
such that it can reach any instance of any database within the configuration. The new
ConfigurationWideServiceName configuration property can be used to simplify setting up
this connect identifier. Data Guard broker publishes this service on each instance as it
comes up and broker management of the instance is initialized:
SALES_P = (DESCRIPTION =
(ADDRESS_LIST =
5-52
Chapter 5
Fast-Start Failover
(ADDRESS=(PROTOCOL=TCP)(HOST=boston-cluster)(PORT = 1521))
(ADDRESS=(PROTOCOL=TCP)(HOST=chicago-cluster)(PORT = 1521))
(ADDRESS=(PROTOCOL=TCP)(HOST=dallas-cluster)(PORT = 1521)))
(CONNECT_DATA=(SERVER=DEDICATED)
(SERVICE_NAME=cfgSvc.us.example.com)))
5.5.7.10 Patching an Environment When the Observer Is Running and Fast-

start Failover Is Enabled
To patch an environment where the Observer is running and fast-start failover is
enabled, follow these steps prior to applying the patch.
1. Stop the observer using the DGMGRL STOP OBSERVER command. If multiple
observers have been started for the configuration, then be sure to specify the
name of the observer whose environment is to be patched (STOP OBSERVER
observer-name). The primary and target standby must have connectivity for the
STOP OBSERVER command to complete successfully.
2. Disable fast-start failover using the DGMGRL DISABLE FAST_START FAILOVER

command. Note the primary and target standby must have connectivity for this
command to complete successfully.
Note:
It is not necessary to disable fast-start failover if there are only backup
observers, but no master observer, running in the environment to be
patched.
After the patch has been successfully applied to all databases, take the following steps
to enable fast-start failover and start the observer.
1. Enable fast-start failover using the DGMGRL ENABLE FAST_START FAILOVER
command. The primary and target standby must have connectivity for this
command to complete successfully.
2. Start the observer using the DGMGRL START OBSERVER command. If the
configuration has multiple observers, then be sure to specify the name of the
observer whose environment has just been patched (START OBSERVER observer-
name).
5.5.8 Reinstating the Former Primary Database in the Broker

Configuration
Reinstatement restores high availability to the broker configuration so that, in the
event of a failure of the new primary database, another fast-start failover can occur.
If a fast-start failover was initiated because the primary database had crashed or lost
connectivity with the master observer and target standby database, then the master
observer automatically attempts to reinstate the former primary database as a standby
database, if the FastStartFailoverAutoReinstate configuration property is set to TRUE.
The reinstated database acts as the fast-start failover target for the new primary
database, making a subsequent fast-start failover possible. The new standby database
is a viable target of a failover when it begins receiving redo data received from the new
primary database.
5-53
Chapter 5
Fast-Start Failover
To allow the master observer to automatically reinstate the former primary database,
the database must be started and mounted. It will not be allowed to open in any event
if fast-start failover is enabled. The broker reinstates the database as a standby
database of the same type as the former standby database of the new primary
database.
If the former primary database cannot be reinstated automatically, you can manually
reinstate it using either the DGMGRL REINSTATE command or Cloud Control. Step-by-
step instructions for manual reinstatement are described in Reenabling Disabled
Databases After a Role Change.
5.5.8.1 Requirements
Reinstatement is supported only after failover in a broker configuration. It also requires
Flashback Database to be enabled on both the primary and target standby databases.
Prerequisites for Enabling Fast-Start Failover provides complete information about all
of the fast-start failover and reinstatement requirements.
5.5.8.2 Restrictions on Reinstatement

This list describes conditions in which the broker cannot automatically reinstate the
former primary database.
• A fast-start failover occurred because a user-configurable condition was detected
or was requested by an application by calling the DBMS_DG.INITIATE_FS_FAILOVER
function.
• FastStartFailoverAutoReinstate is set to FALSE
• Another failover or switchover occurred after the fast-start failover completed but
before the former primary database restarted
• Fast-start failover was disabled
• The master observer cannot connect to the former primary database
• The former primary database cannot connect to the new primary database
• The former primary database and the new primary database are not configured in
the same fast-start failover environment
• The former primary database was disabled because of a manual failover when
fast-start failover was disabled
Note:
Standby databases that are disabled during switchover, manual failover, or
fast-start failover will not be automatically reinstated.
If automatic reinstatement fails, the broker will log errors and the former primary
database will remain in the mounted state. At this point, you can either:
• Disable fast-start failover (described in Disabling Fast-Start Failover) and attempt
to open the former primary database
• Manually reinstate the former primary database, as described in Reenabling
Disabled Databases After a Role Change
5-54
Chapter 5
Database Client Considerations
5.5.8.3 How the Broker Handles a Failed Reinstatement

If a failure occurs once a reinstatement operation (automatic or manual) is underway,
the broker logs the appropriate information in the broker configuration files and broker
log files.
The former primary database is disabled. Most in-progress failures cannot be restarted
(for example, archived redo log file corruption on the primary database). You must
manually re-create the database as a standby database and then reenable it.
See Also:
How to Re-create and Reenable a Disabled Database
5.5.9 Shutting Down Databases In a Fast-Start Failover Environment

If necessary, you can shut down the primary or target standby database in a fast-start
failover environment.
Perform the following steps:
1. Stop the observer and wait for the REGISTERED column of all rows in the
V$FS_FAILOVER_OBSERVERS fixed view to contain the value NO for both the primary and
target standby databases. This ensures that a fast-start failover will not occur while
you are shutting down the primary database.
2. Shut down the primary database and the target standby database using either
DGMGRL SHUTDOWN command or the SQL*Plus SHUTDOWN statement.
When restarting the databases, you may restart them in any order. When both
databases have been restarted, you may restart the observer.
Bystander standby databases can be shut down at any time in any order without
impacting fast-start failover.
5.6 Database Client Considerations

Event notification and database connection failover support is available to database
clients connected to local database services when a broker-managed failover occurs.
For information about event notification and database connection failover support for
global services, see the Oracle Database Global Data Services Concepts and
Administration Guide.
After a failover, the broker publishes Fast Application Notification (FAN) events. These
FAN events can be used in the following ways:
• Applications can use FAN without programmatic changes if they use one of these
Oracle integrated database clients: Oracle Database JDBC, Oracle Database
Oracle Call Interface (OCI), Oracle Data Provider for .NET ( ODP.NET), or
Universal Connection Pool for Java. These clients can be configured for Fast
Connection Failover (FCF) to automatically connect to a new primary database
after a failover.
5-55
Chapter 5
• JAVA applications can use FAN programmatically by using the JDBC FAN
application programming interface to subscribe to FAN events and to execute
event handling actions upon the receipt of an event.
• FAN server-side callouts can be configured on the database tier.
FAN events are published using Oracle Notification Services (ONS) for all Oracle
integrated database clients in Oracle Database 12c and later. In previous releases,
OCI and ODP.NET clients receive FAN notifications via Oracle Advanced Queuing
(AQ).
Note:
A single-instance database must be registered with Oracle Restart in order to
publish FAN events via ONS.
See Also:
• Oracle Real Application Clusters Administration and Deployment Guide for

more information about configuring FAN, FCF, and ONS on an Oracle Real
Application Clusters (Oracle RAC) database
5.6.1 Oracle Data Guard Specific FAN and FCF Configuration

Requirements
There are configuration requirements that must be met in order to publish and properly
handle FAN events generated as the result of a broker-managed failover.
These requirements are supplemental to those described in the documents previously
referenced and in the following client-specific guides:
• Oracle Database JDBC Developer's Guide
• Oracle Call Interface Programmer's Guide
• Oracle Data Provider for .NET Developer's Guide for Microsoft Windows
5.6.1.1 Oracle Net Configuration Requirements

For Fast Connection Failover (FCF) to occur, a client must be able to locate the new
primary database after a failover.
This section describes how to configure an Oracle Net connect descriptor that meets
this requirement.
The connect descriptor can be configured in one of two ways:
1. Configure the connect descriptor for connect-time failover. Add the primary
database and each standby database to the address list. Set the CONNECT_TIMEOUT
parameter to a small value to minimize the delay experienced if a network address
is not available. Increase the value of this parameter if resource contention causes
connection timeouts to occur during normal operation.
5-56
Chapter 5
For example:
sales =
(DESCRIPTION=
(FAILOVER=ON)
(CONNECT_TIMEOUT=5)
(ADDRESS_LIST=
(ADDRESS=(HOST=boston-scan)(PORT=1521))
(ADDRESS=(HOST=dallas-scan)(PORT=1521)))
(CONNECT_DATA=(SERVICE_NAME=sales)))
2. Configure the connect descriptor with a single network name that is registered with
a global naming service such as DNS or LDAP. Create a trigger based on the
DB_ROLE_CHANGE system event that changes the network address associated with
the network name to the network address of the new primary database after a
failover.
See Also:
• Oracle Database PL/SQL Language Reference for more information

about the DB_ROLE_CHANGE system event
The connect descriptor must contain the SERVICE_NAME parameter in either case.
5.6.1.2 Database Service Configuration Requirements

Database services can be configured to be active in specific database roles on Oracle
RAC databases and on single-instance databases managed by Oracle Restart.
The broker interacts with Oracle Clusterware or Oracle Restart to ensure that the
appropriate database services are active and that the appropriate FAN events are
published after a role change.
FAN events are always published through ONS. However, the event notifying a
failover is only published for database services that have been configured to be active
while the database is in the primary role on the new primary database.
Services that must be active in any given database role (primary, physical standby,
logical standby, or snapshot standby) must be configured with the Server Control utility
(SRVCTL) explicitly on each database where the service must be active.
In the following example commands, a service named PAYROLL is configured to be
active in the PRIMARY role on the primary database NORTH. The service is then configured
to be active in the PRIMARY role on the standby database SOUTH, so that it will be active
on that database after a role transition. In these sample commands, the ellipse (...)
signifies any other add service options you wish to supply.
5-57
Chapter 5
Note:
The examples shown in this section do not necessarily show the specific
attributes you might need to use in your own environment. The required
attributes vary depending on your configuration (including whether your
environment is Oracle RAC-based or single-instance). Refer to the appropriate
Oracle RAC or Oracle Restart documentation for further information.
On primary database NORTH, execute the following:

srvctl add service –db NORTH –service PAYROLL –role PRIMARY ...
On standby database SOUTH, execute the following:

srvctl add service –db SOUTH –service PAYROLL –role PRIMARY ...
Services that are to be active while the database is in the physical standby role must
also be created and started on the current primary database regardless of whether the
service will be started on that database or not. This is to ensure that the service
definition gets propagated to the physical standby database via the redo stream and
thus allows for the service to be started on the physical standby database. The service
can be started on the physical standby only after the redo generated by starting the
service has been applied. It is important that all SRVCTL add service options be
identical on all the databases so that the services behave the same way before and
after a role change.
If all the databases do not have the same values, SRVCTL attempts to override the
values, which will fail on the physical standby database because it is open read-only.
In the following example, a service named sales is configured to be active in the
PHYSICAL_STANDBY role on the primary database NORTH. It is then started and stopped on
the primary database. It could optionally also be removed from the primary database if
there is no intention to ever run this service on the current primary database. It is then
configured to be active in the PHYSICAL_STANDBY role on the physical standby database
SOUTH.
Execute the following on primary database NORTH:

srvctl add service -db NORTH -service SALES -role PHYSICAL_STANDBY ...
srvctl start service –db NORTH –service SALES
srvctl stop service –db NORTH –service SALES
Execute the following on the physical standby database SOUTH:

srvctl add service -db SOUTH -service SALES -role PHYSICAL_STANDBY ...
If the broker now performs a switchover or failover, it automatically starts the SALES
service on the correct database, based on the database's role.
The previous examples dealt with setting up only one service on a database. The
following example shows you how to set up more than one service on a database and
how using the broker ensures that the correct service starts on the correct database.
5-58
Chapter 5
Suppose you have a primary database, BOSTON, and a standby database, CHICAGO.
Issue the following SRVCTL commands so that both databases in the Data Guard
configuration know about the two potential services for each database:
On BOSTON
srvctl add service -db BOSTON -service SALESRW -role PRIMARY -y AUTOMATIC
srvctl add service -db BOSTON -service SALESRO -role PHYSICAL_STANDBY -policy
AUTOMATIC
On CHICAGO:
srvctl add service -db CHICAGO -s SALESRW -role PRIMARY -y AUTOMATIC
srvctl add service -db CHICAGO -s SALESRO -role PHYSICAL_STANDBY -policy AUTOMATIC
To start things up initially, you must manually start the services on the right node. You
must also start and stop the SALESRO service on the primary so that it can be started on
the standby. Issue the following SRVCTL commands:
On BOSTON:
srvctl start service -db BOSTON -service SALESRW
srvctl start service -db BOSTON -service SALESRO
srvctl stop service -db BOSTON -service SALESRO
On CHICAGO:
srvctl start service -db CHICAGO -service SALESRO
Now the correct services are running on the correct databases.

If the broker performs a switchover or failover, then it starts the service SALESRW or
SALESRO based on the current role of the database. So SALESRW will start on CHICAGO
(which is now the primary) and SALESRO will start on BOSTON (which is now the physical
standby). The same thing happens if a shutdown and startup of either database occurs
- the service that is started is the one that matches the role of the database being
started.
Be aware that if you issue the following manual commands on either of those
databases, then both the SALESRO and SALESRW services would be started on the
databases regardless of what you may have earlier specified with the SRVCTL -role
qualifier. This is because the -role qualifier is taken into account only by Data Guard
broker, and at database startup.
On BOSTON:
srvctl start service -db CHICAGO
On CHICAGO:
srvctl start service -db BOSTON
The SRVCTL utility does not automatically take the database role into account, so any
time you start a service manually, you must specify the name(s) of the service you
want started.
5-59
Chapter 5
Note:
If the service has been configured to start automatically (-policy AUTOMATIC),
then the service will automatically start only after a database role change.
Note:
In an Oracle Data Guard configuration, the SRVCTL -startoption for a standby
database is always set to OPEN after a switchover.
See Also:
• For Oracle RAC databases, see Oracle Real Application Clusters

Administration and Deployment Guide for more information about
configuring database services with the SRVCTL utility
5.6.1.3 ONS Configuration Requirements

If client-side ONS configuration is used, the client-side ONS configuration file must
specify the hostname and port of the ONS daemon(s) of the primary database and
each standby database.
If the client uses remote ONS subscription, the client must specify the hostname and
port of the ONS daemon(s) of the primary database and each standby database.
5.6.1.4 Application Continuity

Application Continuity is an Oracle Database feature that enables rapid and
nondisruptive replays of requests against the database after a recoverable error that
made the database session unavailable.
Application Continuity is supported for Oracle Data Guard switchovers to physical
standby databases. It is also supported for fast-start failover to physical standbys in
maximum availability data protection mode. Note that primary and standby databases
must be licensed for Oracle RAC or Oracle Active Data Guard in order to use
Application Continuity.
See Also:
• Oracle Real Application Clusters Administration and Deployment Guide for

information about Application Continuity
5-60
6
Scenarios Using the DGMGRL Command-
Line Interface
Use these scenarios to help you understand what you need to do to start creating,
managing, and using an Oracle Data Guard broker configuration.
Read the information about prerequisites for getting started using the Oracle Data
Guard command-line interface (DGMGRL), so that you can prepare your instances.
Then read the scenarios to understand how you can use DGMGRL to create, manage,
and monitor a broker configuration.
• Prerequisites for Getting Started
• Scenario 1: Creating a Configuration
• Scenario 2: Setting Database Properties
• Scenario 3: Enabling the Configuration and Databases
• Scenario 4: Setting the Configuration Protection Mode
• Scenario 5: Setting up Maximum Availability Mode with a Far Sync Instance
• Scenario 6: Enabling Fast-Start Failover and Starting the Observer
• Scenario 7: Enabling Fast-Start Failover When a Far Sync Instance Is In Use
• Scenario 8: Performing Routine Management Tasks
• Scenario 9: Performing a Switchover Operation
• Scenario 10: Performing a Manual Failover Operation
• Scenario 11: Reinstating a Failed Primary Database
• Scenario 12: Converting a Physical Standby to a Snapshot Standby
• Scenario 13: Monitoring a Data Guard Configuration
• Scenario 14: Adding a Recovery Appliance to a Broker Configuration
6.1 Prerequisites for Getting Started

One of the prerequisites for using DGMGRL is that a primary database and any
standby databases must already exist.
The DG_BROKER_START initialization parameter must be set to TRUE for all databases in the
configuration. You must use a server parameter file with the broker.
Convert the initialization parameter files (PFILE) on both primary and standby
databases into server parameter files (SPFILE), if necessary. Use the following
SQL*Plus command:
CREATE SPFILE='spfilename' FROM PFILE='pfilename';
If an instance was not started with a server parameter file, then you must shut down
the instance and restart it using the server parameter file.
6-1
Chapter 6
Scenario 1: Creating a Configuration
After starting the Oracle instance, set the DG_BROKER_START=TRUE initialization parameter
using the SQL ALTER SYSTEM statement. The parameter value will be saved in the
server parameter file. The next time you start the Oracle instance, the broker is started
automatically, and you do not need to issue the SQL ALTER SYSTEM statement again.
The following assumptions are made in these scenarios:

• TCP/IP is used to connect to primary and standby databases.
• The standby database has been created from backups of the primary database
control files and datafiles as described in the Oracle Data Guard Concepts and
Administration.
• The scenarios assume the following broker configuration:
– The configuration name is DRSolution.
– The database unique name (DB_UNIQUE_NAME) of the primary database is
North_Sales.
– The database unique name (DB_UNIQUE_NAME) of the remote standby database

is South_Sales.
– The protection mode is maximum performance mode.
– There are standby redo log files configured for both the primary and standby
database. The transport mode for both databases is ASYNC.
– The standby database is a physical standby database.
6.2 Scenario 1: Creating a Configuration

These examples create a broker configuration named DRSolution that includes a
primary and standby database named North_Sales and South_Sales.
To create a configuration and add one physical standby database, perform the
following tasks:
• Creating a Configuration Task 1: Invoke DGMGRL
• Creating a Configuration Task 2: Connect to the Primary Database
• Creating a Configuration Task 3: Clear Existing Remote Redo Transport
Destinations
• Creating a Configuration Task 4: Create the Broker Configuration
• Creating a Configuration Task 5: Show the Configuration Information
• Creating a Configuration Task 6: Add a Standby Database to the Configuration
6.2.1 Creating a Configuration Task 1: Invoke DGMGRL

To start DGMGRL, enter dgmgrl at the command-line prompt on a system where
Oracle Data Guard is installed.
$ dgmgrl
The DGMGRL prompt is displayed:

DGMGRL>
6-2
Chapter 6
6.2.2 Creating a Configuration Task 2: Connect to the Primary

Database
Before you specify any command (other than the HELP, EXIT, or QUIT), you must first
connect to the primary database using the DGMGRL CONNECT command.
The account from which you connect to the database (SYS in this example) must have
SYSDG or SYSDBA privileges on the primary and standby databases.
Note:
If no AS clause is specified on the CONNECT command, the connection is made as
SYSDBA.
The following examples show two variations of the CONNECT command. Example 6-1
shows how to connect to the default database on the local system, and Example 6-2
includes the Oracle Net Services connect identifier (North_Sales.example.com) to make
a connection to a database located on a remote system. In both examples, you are
prompted for a password.
Example 6-1 Connecting to the Primary Database on the Local System
DGMGRL> CONNECT sysdg;
Password: password
Connected to "North_Sales"
Connected as SYSDG.
Example 6-2 Connecting to the Primary Database on a Remote System

DGMGRL> CONNECT sysdg@North_Sales.example.com;
Password: password
Connected as SYSDG.
6.2.3 Creating a Configuration Task 3: Clear Existing Remote Redo

Transport Destinations on Standbys and Far Sync Instances To Be
Added.
You must clear any remote redo transport destinations on standby databases and far
sync instances before those standbys and far syncs can be added to a configuration.
If the remote redo transport destinations are not cleared, then the following error
message is returned when you attempt to create the configuration:
ORA-16698: LOG_ARCHIVE_DEST_n parameter set for object to be added
Failed.
To clear LOG_ARCHIVE_DEST_n settings, use the ALTER SYSTEM SET LOG_ARCHIVE_DEST_n=" "
SQL*Plus command.
6-3
Chapter 6
Remote redo transport destinations on the primary (whether they have the REGISTER or
NOREGISTER attribute) can be left as is.
6.2.4 Creating a Configuration Task 4: Create the Broker Configuration

A broker configuration is initially created with just a primary database.
In this case, the primary is called North_Sales. In a later command, you will add the
standby database, South_Sales.
Note:
The names for the primary and standby databases must match their database
unique names. Fetch these from their DB_UNIQUE_NAME initialization parameter as
follows:
SQL> SHOW PARAMETER DB_UNIQUE_NAME;
Use the CREATE CONFIGURATION command to create the DRSolution configuration and
define the primary database, North_Sales:
DGMGRL> CREATE CONFIGURATION 'DRSolution' AS
> PRIMARY DATABASE IS 'North_Sales'
> CONNECT IDENTIFIER IS North_Sales.example.com;
DGMGRL returns the following information:

Configuration "DRSolution" created with primary database "North_Sales"
The name North_Sales is the value of this database's DB_UNIQUE_NAME initialization

parameter.
6.2.5 Creating a Configuration Task 5: Show the Configuration

Information
Use the SHOW CONFIGURATION command to display a brief summary of the configuration.


Members:
DISABLED
6-4
Chapter 6
Scenario 2: Setting Database Properties
6.2.6 Creating a Configuration Task 6: Add a Standby Database to the

Configuration
To add a standby database to the DRSolution configuration, use the ADD DATABASE
command.
The following command defines South_Sales as a standby database, which is the
standby database associated with the primary database called North_Sales:
DGMGRL> ADD DATABASE 'South_Sales' AS
> CONNECT IDENTIFIER IS South_Sales.example.com;

Database "South_Sales" added
The name South_Sales is the value of the database's DB_UNIQUE_NAME initialization

parameter.
Use the SHOW CONFIGURATION command to verify that the South_Sales database was
added to the DRSolution configuration:


Members:
DISABLED
DGMGRL>
6.3 Scenario 2: Setting Database Properties

After you create the configuration with DGMGRL, you can set database properties at
any time.
For example, the following statements set the LogArchiveFormat and
StandbyArchiveLocation database properties for the South_Sales standby database:
DGMGRL> EDIT DATABASE 'South_Sales' SET PROPERTY 'LogArchiveFormat'='log_%t_%s_%r_%d.arc';

Property "LogArchiveFormat" updated.
DGMGRL> EDIT DATABASE 'South_Sales' SET PROPERTY 'StandbyArchiveLocation'='/archfs/arch/';

Property "StandbyArchiveLocation" updated.
Use the SHOW DATABASE VERBOSE command to view all properties and their values for a
database. The following example shows the properties for the South_Sales database.
6-5
Chapter 6
Scenario 2: Setting Database Properties
DGMGRL> SHOW DATABASE VERBOSE 'South_Sales'

Intended State: OFFLINE
Transport Lag: (unknown)
Apply Lag: (unknown)
Average Apply Rate: (unknown)
Active Apply Rate: (unknown)
Maximum Apply Rate: (unknown)
Instance(s):
south_sales1
Properties:
DGConnectIdentifier = 'South_Sales.example.com'
RedoRoutes = ''
DelayMins = '0'
Binding = 'OPTIONAL'
MaxFailure = '0'
ReopenSecs = '300'
NetTimeout = '30'
LogShipping = 'ON'
DbFileNameConvert = 'dbs/cdb1_, dbs/cdb2_, dbs/t, dbs/bt, dbs/
cdb4_, dbs/cdb2_, dbs/dt, dbs/bt'
LogFileNameConvert = 'dbs/cdb1_, dbs/cdb2_, dbs/t, dbs/bt, dbs/
cdb4_, dbs/cdb2_, dbs/dt, dbs/bt'
(HOST=south_sales1.example.com)(PORT=2879))
(CONNECT_DATA=(SERVICE_NAME=South_Sales_DGMGRL.example.com)
(INSTANCE_NAME=south_sales1)(SERVER=DEDICATED)))'
LogArchiveTrace = '255'
6-6
Chapter 6
Scenario 3: Enabling the Configuration and Databases
Log file locations:

Unknown
Database Status:
DISABLED
If broker management of the database is enabled, setting a database property value

causes the underlying parameter value to be changed in the corresponding database,
and the value for the changed parameter is reflected in the server parameter file.
Thus, if the database is shut down and restarted outside of Oracle Enterprise Manager
Cloud Control (Cloud Control) and DGMGRL (such as from the SQL*Plus interface),
the database uses the new parameter values from the updated server parameter file
when it starts. However, you should not make changes to the redo transport services
initialization parameters through SQL statements. Doing so will cause an
inconsistency between the database and the broker.
Note:
The database properties are typically displayed in mixed-case (for example,
LogArchiveFormat) typeface to help you visually differentiate database properties
(from the corresponding initialization parameter, SQL statement, or PL/SQL
procedure), which are typically documented in UPPERCASE typeface. However,
the commands to manage properties are not case sensitive; you can issue
commands in uppercase, lowercase, or mixed-case.
You can change a property if the database is enabled or disabled. However, if the
database is disabled when you change a property, the change does not take effect
until the database is enabled.
6.4 Scenario 3: Enabling the Configuration and Databases

So far, the DRSolution configuration is disabled, which means it is not under the control
of the Data Guard broker.
When you finish configuring the databases into a broker configuration and setting any
necessary database properties, you must enable the configuration to allow the Data
Guard broker to manage it.
You can enable:
• The entire configuration, including all of its databases
• A standby database
Enable the entire configuration

You can enable the entire configuration, including all of the databases, with the
following command:
DGMGRL> ENABLE CONFIGURATION;
Enabled.
6-7
Chapter 6
Scenario 4: Setting the Configuration Protection Mode
Show the configuration

Use the SHOW command to verify that the configuration and its databases were
successfully enabled:


Members:
SUCCESS
Enable the database

This step is unnecessary except if the standby database was previously disabled with
the DISABLE DATABASE command. Normally, enabling the configuration also enables the
standby database.
DGMGRL> ENABLE DATABASE 'South_Sales';
Enabled.
Show the database


Apply Rate: 1.54 MByte/s
Instance(s):
south_sales1
Database Status:
SUCCESS
6.5 Scenario 4: Setting the Configuration Protection Mode

You can change the protection mode of the configuration at any time.
6-8
Chapter 6
Scenario 4: Setting the Configuration Protection Mode
Note:
You cannot change the protection mode from maximum performance mode to
maximum protection mode. You must first change the protection mode to
maximum availability and then to maximum protection mode.
A restart of the primary database is not necessary when changing the
protection mode.
This scenario sets the protection mode of the configuration to the MAXAVAILABILITY
mode. Note that this protection mode requires that there be at least one standby
configured to use standby redo log files and it must receive redo via SYNC or FASTSYNC
mode if it receives redo directly from the primary database. If the standby receives
redo via a far sync instance, then the far sync instance must receive redo via SYNC or
FASTYSYNC mode and the standby must receive redo from the far sync instance via
ASYNC mode.
1. Configure standby redo log files, if necessary.

Because you will be setting the protection mode to the MAXAVAILABILITY mode, it is
important to ensure that sufficient standby redo log files are configured on the
standby database. For more information on setting up redo transport, see Oracle
Data Guard Concepts and Administration.
2. Configure redo transport mode appropriately.
Configure the standby to receive redo via SYNC or FASTSYNC mode, if the standby
receives redo directly from the primary database. If the standby receives primary
redo via a far sync instance, then configure the far sync instance to receive redo
via SYNC or FASTSYNC mode and configure the standby to receive redo via ASYNC
mode. For example:
DGMGRL> EDIT DATABASE 'South_Sales' SET PROPERTY 'LogXptMode'='SYNC';
Property "LogXptMode" updated
The broker will not allow this command to succeed unless the standby database is
configured with standby redo log files in the configuration.
3. Change the overall protection mode for the configuration.
Use the EDIT CONFIGURATION command to upgrade the broker configuration to the
MAXAVAILABILITY protection mode:

Succeeded.
If the configuration is disabled when you enter this command, the actual protection
mode change is not applied until you enable the configuration with the ENABLE
CONFIGURATION command. The broker will not allow you to enable the configuration
if it does not find a standby database in the configuration that can support the
requirements of the protection mode.
4. Verify the protection mode has changed.
Use the SHOW CONFIGURATION command to display the current protection mode for
the configuration:
6-9
Chapter 6
Scenario 5: Setting up Maximum Availability Mode with a Far Sync Instance

Members:
SUCCESS
See Also:
6.6 Scenario 5: Setting up Maximum Availability Mode with a

Far Sync Instance
A far sync instance can be used with maximum availability protection mode if the
primary and standby database are geographically far enough apart to make the use of
synchronous transport mode impractical.
The example in this tpoic shows how to add a far sync instance to the configuration
and then set up the RedoRoutes property for all members of the configuration. Setting of
RedoRoutes property for the far sync instance enables it to send redo data based on
either the North_Sales or South_Sales database being the primary.
1. Issue the following commands to add the far sync instance named FS to the broker
configuration:
DGMGRL> ADD FAR_SYNC 'FS' AS CONNECT IDENTIFIER IS FS.EXAMPLE.COM;
DGMGRL> ENABLE FAR_SYNC 'FS';

Members:
FS - Far Sync
SUCCESS
In this output, South_Sales and FS are indented under North_Sales. This indicates
that the primary is sending redo data to both South_Sales and FS.
2. Issue the following commands so that the current primary (North_Sales) sends
redo data to the far sync instance only, and the far sync instance sends redo data
to South_Sales when North_Sales is a primary:
6-10
Chapter 6
Scenario 5: Setting up Maximum Availability Mode with a Far Sync Instance
DGMGRL> EDIT DATABASE 'North_Sales' SET PROPERTY RedoRoutes='(LOCAL : FS SYNC)';

DGMGRL> EDIT FAR_SYNC 'FS' SET PROPERTY RedoRoutes='(North_Sales : South_Sales');

Members:
FS - Far Sync
SUCCESS
The indentation scheme in the output above indicates that North_Sales sends redo
data to FS and FS sends redo data to South_Sales.
3. Issue the following commands to upgrade the protection mode to maximum
availability:

Members:
FS - Far Sync
SUCCESS
If South_Sales ever becomes the primary and North_Sales becomes a standby

database that receives redo data from the far sync instance, FS, then the
RedoRoutes property must be set for South_Sales. Additionally, a new rule must be
included in the RedoRoutes property for FS to allow it to send redo data to
North_Sales when South_Sales is the primary database.
If these rules are not created, then North_Sales will not be able to receive redo
data. To check whether the proper rules have been set, use the SHOW CONFIGURATION
WHEN PRIMARY IS command to see what the redo transport configuration would be if
South_Sales were the primary database. For example:
DGMGRL> SHOW CONFIGURATION WHEN PRIMARY IS 'South_Sales';
Configuration when South_Sales is primary - DRSolution
Members:
South_Sales - Primary database
FS - Far Sync
North_Sales - Physical standby database
6-11
Chapter 6
Scenario 6: Enabling Fast-Start Failover and Starting the Observer
Members Not Receiving Redo:

North_FS - Physical standby database
Warning: ORA-16685: database does not receive redo data
To correct this error, set the RedoRoutes property for South_Sales and FS as follows:
DGMGRL> EDIT DATABASE 'South_Sales' SET PROPERTY RedoRoutes='(LOCAL : FS SYNC)';
DGMGRL> EDIT FAR_SYNC 'FS' SET PROPERTY RedoRoutes=('North_Sales : South_Sales)
(South_Sales : North_Sales)';
After the change to the RedoRoutes property for South_Sales and FS is complete, use
the SHOW CONFIGURATION WHEN PRIMARY IS command to confirm that the error has been
cleared:
Members:
FS - Far Sync
6.7 Scenario 6: Enabling Fast-Start Failover and Starting the

Observer
You can enable fast-start failover from any site, including the observer site, while
connected to any database in the broker configuration.
Enabling fast-start failover does not trigger a failover. Instead, it allows the observer
that is monitoring the configuration to initiate a fast-start failover if conditions warrant a
failover. This section describes the steps to enable fast-start failover and start the
observer where the configuration protection mode is set to maximum availability mode.
1. Ensure standby redo logs are configured on the primary and target standby
databases. You must stop log apply services prior to configuring standby redo
logs.
See Also:
Oracle Data Guard Concepts and Administration for instructions on
configuring standby redo log files
2. Configure the primary and standby databases to receive redo via SYNC or FASTSYNC
mode, if they receive redo directly rather than via a far sync instance. If either
database receives redo via a far sync instance, then configure the far sync
instance to receive redo via SYNC or FASTSYNC mode and configure the database to
receive redo via ASYNC mode. For example:
DGMGRL> EDIT DATABASE 'North_Sales' SET PROPERTY 'LogXptMode'='SYNC';

6-12
Chapter 6
The broker does not allow these commands to succeed unless the databases are
configured with standby redo log files.
3. If you have two or more standby databases, set up the FastStartFailoverTarget
configuration property on the primary database to indicate the desired target
standby database. The broker reciprocally sets this property for the target standby
database to indicate the primary database as its future target standby database
when fast-start failover is actually enabled. There is no need for you set this
property on the target standby as this is done for you automatically. For example:
DGMGRL> EDIT DATABASE 'North_Sales' SET PROPERTY
FastStartFailoverTarget='South_Sales';
Property "FastStartFailoverTarget" updated
4. If it is necessary to upgrade the protection mode, use the following DGMGRL EDIT
CONFIGURATION command. For example:

5. If it is not already enabled on the primary and standby databases, enable
Flashback Database by issuing the following statements on each database:
ALTER SYSTEM SET UNDO_RETENTION=3600 SCOPE=SPFILE;
ALTER SYSTEM SET UNDO_MANAGEMENT='AUTO' SCOPE=SPFILE;
SHUTDOWN IMMEDIATE;
STARTUP MOUNT;
SHOW PARAMETER UNDO;
ALTER SYSTEM SET DB_FLASHBACK_RETENTION_TARGET=4320 SCOPE=BOTH;
ALTER DATABASE ARCHIVELOG;
ALTER SYSTEM SET db_recovery_file_dest_size=<size>;
ALTER SYSTEM SET db_recovery_file_dest=<directory-specification>;
ALTER DATABASE FLASHBACK ON;
ALTER DATABASE OPEN;
Ensure the UNDO_RETENTION and DB_FLASHBACK_RETENTION_TARGET initialization

parameters are set to sufficiently large values so that reinstatement is still possible
after a prolonged outage.
6. Start up to three observers by logging into the observer computers and running
DGMGRL. Connect to the configuration as a user who has the SYSDG or SYSDBA
privilege and then issue the START OBSERVER command. Note that the command
does not return; that is you will not get the DGMGRL prompt after issuing the
command.
Password: password
Connected as SYSDG.
DGMGRL> START OBSERVER observer1 IN BACKGROUND

> FILE IS /net/sales/dat/oracle/broker/fsfo.dat
> LOGFILE IS /net/sales/dat/oracle/broker/observer.log
> CONNECT IDENTIFIER IS North_Sales
Submitted command "START OBSERVER" using connect identifier "North_Sales"
Oracle recommends using this command format for security reasons; no

credentials are visible. This practice prevents other users on the system from
using a utility (for example, the UNIX ps utility) to display connection credentials. It
also prevents clear-text passwords from being visible on the user's terminal.
When starting the observer from a script, Oracle recommends that you use a
method that supports 'connect /', so that database connection credentials do not
6-13
Chapter 6
have to be embedded within the script. If you choose to use a client-side Oracle
Wallet as a secure external password store (see Oracle Database Enterprise User
Security Administrator's Guide), be sure to add credentials for both the primary
and fast-start failover target standby databases. The database connect string that
you specify when adding the credentials for each database must match the
ObserverConnectIdentifer or DGConnectIdentifier database property.
When multiple observers are started, one observer is the master observer after
fast-start failover is enabled, and the remaining observers are backup observers.
Only the master observer can coordinate fast-start failover with Data Guard
broker. If the primary and target standby databases stay connected but the
connection to the master observer is lost, then the broker tries to nominate a
backup observer as the new master observer.
7. Enable fast-start failover. You can enable fast-start failover while connected to any
database system in the broker configuration. For example:
Enabled.
8. Verify the fast-start failover configuration. Use the SHOW FAST_START FAILOVER
command to display the fast-start failover settings:
Target: South_Sales

Health Conditions:
Stuck Archiver NO

(none)
The following commands show that the FastStartFailoverTarget property is set up

reciprocally once fast-start failover is enabled. The first command, issued for the
current primary database North_Sales, shows the value of the
FastStartFailoverTarget property to be the current target standby, South_Sales.
The second command, issued for the target standby South_Sales, shows the
current primary, North_Sales, as the target standby's future target standby should it
ever take over as a primary.
DGMGRL> SHOW DATABASE 'North_Sales' FastStartFailoverTarget;
DGMGRL> SHOW DATABASE 'South_Sales' FastStartFailoverTarget;

FastStartFailoverTarget='North_Sales';
6-14
Chapter 6
Scenario 7: Enabling Fast-Start Failover When a Far Sync Instance Is In Use
6.8 Scenario 7: Enabling Fast-Start Failover When a Far

Sync Instance Is In Use
Fast-start failover can be enabled in maximum availability mode when the fast-start
failover target is a logical or physical standby database that receives redo data from a
far sync instance.
To enable fast-start failover when a far sync instance is used to ship redo data to the
standby database, the FastStartFailoverTarget property must first be set on both the
primary and target standby database, as follows:
DGMGRL> EDIT DATABASE 'South_Sales' SET PROPERTY
FastStartFailoverTarget='North_Sales';
Then, fast-start failover can be enabled, as follows:

Note that the far sync instance database is not specified as the fast-start failover target
for either North_Sales or South_Sales.
6.9 Scenario 8: Performing Routine Management Tasks

There may be situations in which you want to change the state or properties of the
databases in a broker configuration to perform routine maintenance on one or more
databases.
You might also need to temporarily disable broker management of databases in a
configuration.
6.9.1 Changing Properties and States

As you monitor the configuration, you might need to dynamically modify the states of
the databases or their properties.
The following topics show how to change the state or properties of the databases in
the configuration.
6.9.1.1 Alter a Database Property

You can modify the values of database properties at any time—whether the database
is enabled or disabled.
The following example shows how to use the EDIT DATABASE command to change the
LogXptMode database property to the value ASYNC for the North_Sales database.
DGMGRL> EDIT DATABASE 'North_Sales' SET PROPERTY 'LogXptMode'=ASYNC;
DGMGRL returns the following message to indicate that the LogXptMode property was
updated successfully in the Data Guard configuration file:
6-15
Chapter 6
Scenario 8: Performing Routine Management Tasks
If the configuration is currently disabled, the database does not use the new property
value until you enable the broker configuration with the ENABLE CONFIGURATION
command.
6.9.1.2 Reset a Property to Its Default Value

You can reset a configuration or configurable property to its default value at any time
whether the database or configuration is enabled or disabled.
The following example shows how to use the EDIT DATABASE command to reset the
LogXptMode database configurable property to its default value for the North_Sales
database.
EDIT DATABASE 'North_Sales' RESET PROPERTY LogXptMode;
The following example shows how to use the EDIT CONFIGURATION command to reset the
TraceLevel configuration property to its default value.
EDIT CONFIGURATION RESET PROPERTY TraceLevel;
6.9.1.3 Alter the State of a Standby Database

You can temporarily stop Redo Apply on a physical standby.
To change the state of the standby database to APPLY-OFF, enter the EDIT DATABASE
command as shown in the following example.
DGMGRL> EDIT DATABASE 'South_Sales' SET STATE='APPLY-OFF';
Succeeded.
Redo data is still being received when you put the physical standby database in the
APPLY-OFF state.
6.9.1.4 Alter the State of a Primary Database

You can stop the transmittal of redo data to the standby database.
To change the state of the primary database to accommodate this, use the following
command:
DGMGRL> EDIT DATABASE North_Sales SET STATE=TRANSPORT-OFF;
Succeeded.
To change the state of the primary database back to TRANSPORT-ON, do the following:
DGMGRL> EDIT DATABASE North_Sales SET STATE=TRANSPORT-ON;
Succeeded.
6.9.2 Disabling the Configuration and Databases

When you disable the broker configuration or any of its databases, you are disabling
the broker's management of them and are effectively removing your ability to use
DGMGRL to manage and monitor them.
6-16
Chapter 6
However, disabling the broker's management of a broker configuration does not affect
the actual operation of the underlying Oracle Data Guard configuration or the
databases. For example, the redo transport services and log apply services in the
Oracle Data Guard configuration continue to function unchanged, but you can no
longer manage them.
6.9.2.1 Disable a Configuration

You must use the DISABLE CONFIGURATION command to disable management of the
entire broker configuration including the primary database.
For example:
DGMGRL> DISABLE CONFIGURATION;
The only way to disable broker management of the primary database is to use the
DISABLE CONFIGURATION command; the DISABLE DATABASE command only disables
management of a standby database. Likewise, the DISABLE FAR_SYNC command only
disables management of a far sync instance.
Note:
If you disable management of a configuration while connected to the standby
database or far sync instance, you must connect to the primary database (that
is, a database whose control file role is primary) to reenable the configuration.
Disabling the broker's management of a configuration member does not remove the
member from the broker configuration file. You can reenable your ability to use
DGMGRL (or Cloud Control) to manage the member by entering the appropriate
ENABLE CONFIGURATION or ENABLE DATABASE command.
6.9.2.2 Disable a Standby Database

You use the DISABLE DATABASE command when you temporarily do not want the broker
to manage and monitor a standby database.
You can explicitly disable broker management of a standby database to prevent it from
being enabled when the rest of the configuration is enabled. The following example
shows how to disable the South_Sales standby database.
DGMGRL> DISABLE DATABASE 'South_Sales';
Disabled.
Note:
You cannot disable a standby database from the configuration if fast-start
failover is enabled and the database to be disabled is the target standby
database.
6-17
Chapter 6
Note:
If you disable management of a standby database while connected to that
standby database, you must connect to the primary database or another
enabled standby database to reenable broker-management of the standby
database.
WARNING:
When operating under either maximum protection mode or maximum availability

mode, the broker prevents you from disabling the last standby database that supports
the protection mode.
6.9.2.3 Disabling a Far Sync Instance

Use the DISABLE FAR_SYNC command when you temporarily do not want the broker to
manage and monitor a far sync instance.
You can explicitly disable broker management of a far sync instance to prevent it from
being enabled when the rest of the configuration is enabled. The following example
shows how to disable the far sync instance.
DGMGRL> DISABLE FAR_SYNC 'FS';
Disabled.
Note:
The following restrictions apply when disabling a far sync instance:
• You cannot disable a far sync instance if it is specified in the RedoRoutes
property of any other configuration member.
• If you disable management of a far sync instance while connected to that
far sync instance, you must connect to the primary database or another
enabled standby database to reenable broker management of the far sync
instance.
Caution:
If you disable broker management of a far sync instance in the broker
configuration, that far sync instance cannot be specified in a RedoRoutes
property for any other configuration member.
6-18
Chapter 6
6.9.3 Removing the Configuration, a Standby Database, or a Far Sync

Instance
When you use the REMOVE CONFIGURATION, REMOVE DATABASE, or REMOVE FAR_SYNC command,
you effectively delete the configuration, standby database, or far sync instance from
the broker configuration file, removing the ability of Oracle Data Guard broker to
manage them.
A remove operation with the PRESERVE DESTINATIONS clause does not remove or delete
the actual Oracle Data Guard configuration underneath, nor does it affect the
operation of the actual Oracle Data Guard configuration and its databases.
Note:
After you use the REMOVE CONFIGURATION, REMOVE DATABASE, or REMOVE FAR_SYNC
command, you must reissue the command(s) that you originally issued if you
decide to re-create the deleted object. You must go through the steps in
Scenario 1: Creating a Configuration as necessary, to create a broker
configuration that can be managed with DGMGRL (or Cloud Control).
Note:
The following restrictions apply:
• You cannot remove a standby database from the configuration if fast-start
failover is enabled and the database to be removed is the target standby
database.
• You cannot remove a standby database or a far sync instance if it is
specified in the RedoRoutes property for any other member in the
configuration.
6.9.3.1 Removing a Standby Database from the Configuration

When you use the REMOVE DATABASE command, broker management and monitoring of
the database ceases and the database is deleted from the broker configuration file.
Show the configuration before deletion of the South_Sales standby database:

Members:
FS - Far Sync
6-19
Chapter 6
SUCCESS
Issue the DGMGRL REMOVE DATABASE command to remove the South_Sales database
information from the Data Guard configuration file:
DGMGRL> REMOVE DATABASE 'South_Sales';
Removed database "South_Sales" from the configuration
Show the configuration after deletion of the South_Sales standby database:


Members:
FS - Far Sync
SUCCESS
When operating under either maximum protection mode or maximum availability

mode, the broker prevents you from deleting the last standby database that supports
the protection mode.
6.9.3.2 Removing a Far Sync Instance from the Configuration

Use the REMOVE FAR_SYNC command to remove far sync instance information from the
Oracle Data Guard configuration file.
For example, use the following command to remove the FS far sync instance
information:
DGMGRL> REMOVE FAR_SYNC 'FS';
Removed far sync instance "FS" from the configuration
Show the configuration after deletion of the FS far sync instance:


Members:
SUCCESS
6-20
Chapter 6
Scenario 9: Performing a Switchover Operation
6.9.3.3 Removing a Broker Configuration

Use the DGMGRL REMOVE CONFIGURATION command to remove the entire configuration
from management and monitoring by the broker.
For example:
DGMGRL> REMOVE CONFIGURATION;
Note:
You cannot remove the configuration if fast-start failover is enabled.
DGMGRL returns the following message to indicate the command successfully

removed all of the configuration information from the Data Guard configuration file:
Removed configuration

Error: ORA-16532: Data Guard broker configuration does not exist
Configuration details cannot be determined by DGMGRL
6.10 Scenario 9: Performing a Switchover Operation

You can switch the role of the primary database and a standby database using the
SWITCHOVER command.
Before you issue the SWITCHOVER command, you must ensure:
• The state of the primary and standby databases are TRANSPORT-ON and APPLY-ON,
respectively.
• All participating databases are in good health, without any errors or warnings
present.
• The standby database properties were set on the primary database, so that the
primary database can function correctly when transitioning to a standby database
(shown in the following examples in boldface type).
• Standby redo log files are configured on the primary database.
• If the configuration is in maximum availability mode, then the current primary is
configured to receive redo via SYNC or FASTSYNC mode if it will receive redo directly
from the new primary. If it will receive redo via a far sync instance, then the far
sync instance is configured to receive redo via SYNC or FASTSYNC mode and the
current primary is configured to receive redo via ASYNC mode. If the configuration is
in maximum protection mode, then the current primary is configured to receive
redo via SYNC mode.
• If fast-start failover is enabled, you can perform a switchover only to the standby
database that was specified as the target standby database.
The following are the tasks necessary to perform a switchover using the SWITCHOVER
command:
6-21
Chapter 6
• Using the SWITCHOVER Command Task 1: Check the Primary Database

• Using the SWITCHOVER Command Task 2: Check the Standby Database That is
the Target of the Switchover
• Using the SWITCHOVER Command Task 3: Confirm That the Database Is Ready
for a Role Change
• Using the SWITCHOVER Command Task 4: Issue the Switchover Command
• Using the SWITCHOVER Command Task 5: Show the Configuration
6.10.1 Using the SWITCHOVER Command Task 1: Check the Primary

Database
Use the SHOW DATABASE VERBOSE command to check the state, health, and properties of
For example:
SHOW DATABASE VERBOSE 'North_Sales';
Role: PRIMARY
Instance(s):
c0
Properties:
RedoRoutes = ''
DelayMins = '0'
MaxFailure = '0'
ReopenSecs = '300'
NetTimeout = '30'
LogShipping = 'ON'
6-22
Chapter 6
Log file locations:

alert_north1.log
drcnorth1.log
Database Status:
SUCCESS
In particular, you should examine the boldface properties and the current status of the
primary database.
6.10.2 Using the SWITCHOVER Command Task 2: Check the

Standby Database That is the Target of the Switchover
Use the SHOW DATABASE command to check the status of the standby database that is
the target of the switchover.
For example:

Instance(s):
south_sales1
Database Status:
SUCCESS
6-23
Chapter 6
6.10.3 Using the SWITCHOVER Command Task 3: Confirm That the

Database Is Ready for a Role Change
Prior to performing a role change, you can use the VALIDATE DATABASE command to
perform an exhaustive set of checks on the database to confirm that it is ready for a
role change.
The examples shown in this step use the VALIDATE DATABASE command for all three
databases in the DRSolution configuration: a primary, logical standby, and physical
standby database. The configuration looks as follows:

Members:
West_Sales - Logical standby database
SUCCESS
Example: Validate the Primary Database

DGMGRL> VALIDATE DATABASE 'North_Sales';
Database Role: Primary database
Ready for Switchover: Yes
Example: Validate the Logical Standby Database

Validate the logical standby database, as follows:
DGMGRL> VALIDATE DATABASE 'West_Sales';
Database Role: Logical standby database

Primary Database: North_Sales

Ready for Failover: Yes (Primary Running)
Warning: Physical and snapshot standby databases will
be disabled if a role change is performed to this database
Example: Validate the Physical Standby Database

Validate the physical standby database, as follows:
DGMGRL> VALIDATE DATABASE 'South_Sales';
Database Role: Physical standby database

Error: Switchover to this standby is not possible since there
are no other standbys that can support the protection mode
6-24
Chapter 6
Primary Database: North_Sales
Ready for Switchover: No

Transport-Related Property Settings:

Property North_Sales Value South_Sales Value
LogXptMode ASYNC SYNC
Because the configuration protection is set to maximum availability mode and

database South_Sales is the only one that has its LogXptMode property set to SYNC, an
error is displayed to indicate that a switchover is not possible. Note that when a
database receives redo from a database or a far sync instance that has the RedoRoutes
property configured with a transport mode, that mode overrides the transport mode
specified by LogXptMode.
6.10.4 Using the SWITCHOVER Command Task 4: Issue the

Switchover Command
Issue the SWITCHOVER command to swap the roles of the primary and standby
databases.
The following example shows how the broker automatically shuts down and restarts
the old primary database as a part of the switchover. (See the usage notes in
DGMGRL Command Usage Notes for information about how to set up the broker
environment so that DGMGRL can automatically restart the primary and standby
databases for you.)
DGMGRL> SWITCHOVER TO 'South_Sales';
Performing switchover NOW, please wait...
Operation requires a connection to instance "south_sales1" on database "South_Sales"
Connecting to instance "south_sales1"...
Connected as SYSDBA.
New primary database "South_Sales" is opening...
Operation requires startup of instance "north_sales1" on database "North_Sales"
Starting instance "north_sales1"...
ORACLE instance started.
Database mounted.
Switchover succeeded, new primary is "South_Sales"
After the switchover completes, use the SHOW CONFIGURATION and SHOW DATABASE
commands to verify that the switchover operation was successful.
6.10.5 Using the SWITCHOVER Command Task 5: Show the

Configuration
Use the SHOW CONFIGURATION command to verify that the switchover was successful.

Members:
West_Sales - Logical standby database
6-25
Chapter 6
Scenario 10: Performing a Manual Failover Operation
SUCCESS
6.11 Scenario 10: Performing a Manual Failover Operation

You invoke a failover operation in response to an emergency situation, usually when
the primary database cannot be accessed or is unavailable.
See Choosing a Target Standby Database before you fail over to decide which
standby database should be the target of the failover. The following scenario describes
a failover to the remote database called South_Sales.
Note:
If multiple fast-start failover targets are configured, then a manual failover is
only possible to the current fast-start failover target.
If you want to perform a manual failover to a standby database that is not the
fast-start failover target standby database, you must first disable fast-start
failover using the FORCE option on the standby database you want to fail over.
See Disabling Fast-Start Failover for more information about the FORCE option.
1. (Optional) Check the readiness of the target standby.

To validate the target standby database to ensure that it's ready to become the
new primary database, use the VALIDATE DATABASE command, as shown in the
following example:

Primary Database: South_Sales

Ready for Failover: Yes
2. To perform the failover operation, you must connect to the standby database to
which you want to fail over as a user that has the SYSDG or SYSDBA privilege. For
example:
DGMGRL> CONNECT sysdg@South_Sales.example.com;
Password: password
Connected to "South_Sales"
Connected as SYSDG.
3. Now you can issue the failover command to make the target standby database the
new primary database for the configuration.
DGMGRL> FAILOVER TO 'South_Sales';
Performing failover NOW, please wait...
Failover succeeded, new primary is "South_Sales"
6-26
Chapter 6
Scenario 10: Performing a Manual Failover Operation
Note that after the failover completes, the original primary database cannot be
used as a standby database of the new primary database unless it is reinstated or
re-created (as described in Reenabling Disabled Databases After a Role Change).
4. Issue the SHOW CONFIGURATION command to verify the failover.

Members:
Warning: ORA-16629: database reports a different protection level from the
protection mode
North_Sales - Physical standby database (disabled)

WARNING
Note that in this example, the configuration was operating in maximum availability
mode. The protection mode was preserved after the failover. The configuration
also has a warning status. The SHOW DATABASE command for the new primary shows
that the warning is the result of not having an enabled physical standby database.
As a result, the warning status indicates that the protection level of the
configuration is not the same as the configured mode.
5. Show the new primary database.
DGMGRL> SHOW DATABASE South_Sales;
Role: PRIMARY
Instance(s):
south_sales1
Database Warning(s):
ORA-16629: database reports a different protection level from the protection
mode
Database Status:
WARNING
6. Issue the SHOW DATABASE command to see that the former (failed) primary database
was disabled by the broker as a consequence of the failover. It must be reinstated
(as described in Reenabling Disabled Databases After a Role Change).

Apply Lag: (unknown)
Apply Rate: (unknown)
Instance(s):
6-27
Chapter 6
Scenario 11: Reinstating a Failed Primary Database
north_sales1
Database Status:
6.12 Scenario 11: Reinstating a Failed Primary Database

If your former primary database was configured with Flashback Database, you can
easily reinstate the failed primary database as a standby database of the new primary
database.
The failed primary database will be reinstated as a standby type that matches the old
standby database. For example, if you failed over to a physical standby database, the
old primary will be reinstated as a physical standby database.
To reinstate the failed primary database, start it to the mounted state. Then run
DGMGRL, connect to the new primary database and reinstate the old primary
database.
1. Restart the old primary database:
% dgmgrl connect sysdg
Password: password
Connected as SYSDG.
DGMGRL> startup mount;

Database mounted.
2. Reinstate the old primary database:
% dgmgrl connect sysdg
Password: password
Connected as SYSDG.
DGMGRL> REINSTATE DATABASE 'North_Sales';

Reinstating database "North_Sales", please wait...
Reinstatement of database "North_Sales" succeeded
Database dismounted.
ORACLE instance shut down.
Database mounted.
Continuing to reinstate database "North_Sales" ...
After the primary has been reinstated, issue the SHOW CONFIGURATION and SHOW
DATABASE commands to confirm that the old primary has been successfully
reinstated.
3. Show the configuration and its members:
DGMGRL> SHOW CONFIGURATION
6-28
Chapter 6
Scenario 12: Converting a Physical Standby to a Snapshot Standby
Members:
SUCCESS
Role: PRIMARY
Instance(s):
south_sales1
Database Status:
SUCCESS
DGMGRL> SHOW DATABASE 'North_Sales'
Database - 'North_Sales'

Apply Rate: 0 Byte/s
Instance(s):
north_sales1
Database Status:
SUCCESS
6.13 Scenario 12: Converting a Physical Standby to a

Snapshot Standby
If you have a physical standby database that you would like to convert to a snapshot
standby database, use the DGMGRL CONVERT DATABASE command.
Redo data will continue to be received by the database while it is operating as a

snapshot standby database, but it will not be applied until the snapshot standby is
converted back into a physical standby database.
A physical standby database must be configured with a fast recovery area to convert it
to a snapshot standby database. This is because a guaranteed restore point is created
during the conversion process, and guaranteed restore points require a fast recovery
area.
DGMGRL> convert database 'South_Sales' to snapshot standby;
Converting database "South_Sales" to a Snapshot Standby database, please wait...
Database "South_Sales" converted successfully
6-29
Chapter 6
Scenario 13: Monitoring a Data Guard Configuration

Members:
South_Sales - Snapshot standby database
SUCCESS
When you are ready to revert the database back to a physical standby database, use
the DGMGRL CONVERT DATABASE command again as follows. Any updates made to the
database while it was operating as a snapshot standby database will be discarded. All
accumulated redo data will be applied by Redo Apply services after the database is
converted back to a physical standby database.
DGMGRL> CONVERT DATABASE 'South_Sales' to PHYSICAL STANDBY;
Converting database "South_Sales" to a Physical Standby database, please wait...

Operation requires shutdown of instance "south_sales1" on database "South_Sales"
Shutting down instance "south_sales1"...
Database closed.
Operation requires startup of instance "south_sales1" on database "South_Sales"
Starting instance "south_sales1"...
Database mounted.
Continuing to convert database "South_Sales" ...
6.14 Scenario 13: Monitoring a Data Guard Configuration

These steps demonstrate the tasks necessary to use the SHOW command and
monitorable properties to identify and resolve a failure situation.
• Monitoring a Configuration Task 1: Check the Configuration Status
• Monitoring a Configuration Task 2: Check the Database Status
• Monitoring a Configuration Task 3: Check the LogXptStatus Monitorable Property
• Monitoring a Configuration Task 4: Check the InconsistentProperties Monitorable
Property
• Monitoring a Configuration Task 5: Check the InconsistentLogXptProps
Monitorable Property
6.14.1 Monitoring a Configuration Task 1: Check the Configuration

Status
The status of the broker configuration is an aggregated status of all databases and
instances in the broker configuration.
You can check the configuration status first to determine whether or not any further
action needs to be taken. If the configuration status is SUCCESS, everything in the
6-30
Chapter 6
broker configuration is working properly. However, if you see a status of WARNING or

ERROR, then something is wrong in the configuration.
For example, in the following display, you can see that the primary database has
multiple warnings:

Members:
Warning: ORA-16809: multiple warnings detected for the database
WARNING
6.14.2 Monitoring a Configuration Task 2: Check the Database Status

To identify the warnings on the primary database, show its status using the SHOW
DATABASE command.
For example:
Role: PRIMARY
Instance(s):
north_sales1
Warning: ORA-16737: the redo transport service for standby "South_Sales" has
an error
Warning: ORA-16714: the value of property LogArchiveTrace is inconsistent with
the database setting
Warning: ORA-16715: redo transport-related property ReopenSecs of standby
database "South_Sales" is inconsistent
Database Status:
WARNING
6.14.3 Monitoring a Configuration Task 3: Check the LogXptStatus

Monitorable Property
The SHOW DATABASE output in step 2 shows a Warning for error ORA-16737.
To identify the exact transport error, use the LogXptStatus monitorable property:
DGMGRL> SHOW DATABASE 'North_Sales' 'LogXptStatus';
The output shows that the listener for the physical standby database is not running. To
fix this error, start the listener for the physical standby database South_Sales.
6-31
Chapter 6

InconsistentProperties Monitorable Property
The SHOW DATABASE output in step 2 also shows a Warning for error ORA-16714. To
identify the exact error, use the InconsistentProperties monitorable property:
DGMGRL> SHOW DATABASE 'North_Sales' 'InconsistentProperties';
INCONSISTENT PROPERTIES
INSTANCE_NAME PROPERTY_NAME MEMORY_VALUE SPFILE_VALUE BROKER_VALUE
north_sales1 LogArchiveTrace 511 255 255
The current database memory value (511) is different from both the server parameter
file (SPFILE) value (255) and the Oracle Data Guard broker's property value (255). If
you decide the database memory value is correct, you can update the Oracle Data
Guard broker's property value using the following command:
DGMGRL> EDIT DATABASE 'North_Sales' SET PROPERTY 'LogArchiveTrace'=511;
Property "LogArchiveTrace" updated
This command will result in the broker updating the SPFILE value so that the value of
LogArchiveTrace is kept consistent.

InconsistentLogXptProps Monitorable Property
To identify the inconsistent values for the redo transport database property,
ReopenSecs, you can use the InconsistentLogXptProps monitorable property.
This is useful, for example, for the warning shown in the SHOW DATABASE display in Step
2 is ORA-16715.
south_sales1 South_Sales ReopenSecs 600 300
The current database memory value (600) is different from the Oracle Data Guard
broker's property value (300). If you think the broker's property value is correct, you
can fix the inconsistency by re-editing the property of the standby database with the
same value, as shown in the following example:
DGMGRL> EDIT DATABASE 'South_Sales' SET PROPERTY 'ReopenSecs'=300;
Property "ReopenSecs" updated
You can also reenable the standby database or reset the state of the primary database
to TRANSPORT-ON to fix this inconsistency.
6-32
Chapter 6
Scenario 14: Adding a Recovery Appliance to a Broker Configuration
6.15 Scenario 14: Adding a Recovery Appliance to a Broker

Configuration
These steps show how to add a Zero Data Loss Recovery Appliance (Recovery
Appliance) to a broker configuration.
See Also:
Example 4-6 for an example of how to set up a Recovery Appliance as the redo
destination of a physical standby
1. Add the Recovery Appliance to the broker configuration.

DGMGRL> ADD RECOVERY_APPLIANCE EnterpriseRecoveryAppliance AS CONNECT IDENTIFIER
IS
EnterpriseRecoveryAppliance.example.com;
Oracle Recovery Appliance "EnterpriseRecoveryAppliance" added


DISABLED
2. Enable the Recovery Appliance
DGMGRL> ENABLE RECOVERY_APPLIANCE 'EnterpriseRecoveryAppliance';


SUCCESS
6-33
7
Oracle Data Guard Command-Line
Interface Reference
Use the command reference to understand how you can use the Data Guard broker
command-line interface (DGMGRL) to manage your broker configuration.
DGMGRL enables you to manage a Data Guard broker configuration and its various
members directly from the command line, or from batch programs or scripts. You can
use the Data Guard broker command-line interface as an alternative to Oracle
Enterprise Manager Cloud Control (Cloud Control) for managing a Data Guard
configuration.
• Starting the Data Guard Command-Line Interface
• Exiting the Data Guard Command-Line Interface
7.1 Starting the Data Guard Command-Line Interface

To start the Data Guard command-line interface (DGMGRL), enter dgmgrl at the
command-line prompt on a system where Oracle is installed.
% dgmgrl
The DGMGRL command prompt is displayed:

DGMGRL>
To run DGMGRL, you must have SYSDG or SYSDBA administrative privilege.
7.1.1 DGMGRL Optional Parameters

You can supply optional parameters on the command line to indicate how you want
the Data Guard command-line interface to display output.
Output includes items such as command prompts, banners, and messages.
Additionally, a single command mode is available. In this mode, DGMGRL executes
one command and exits upon the completion of the command. The exit code is the
result of the command. If the exit code is 0, the command completed successfully.
Otherwise, there was an error.
The command line of DGMGRL appears as follows:
% dgmgrl [<options>] [<logon> [<command>] ]
Specify any of the following keywords when you invoke the DGMGRL command-line
interface:
• <options> can be one of the following choices:
– -echo
7-1
Chapter 7
Starting the Data Guard Command-Line Interface
Displays command input and output to the default display device. If you do not
use this parameter, only the output from the command is displayed.
– -logfile <file-spec> "<dgmgrl-command>"
Specifies a file into which you can capture the actions of the DGMGRL
command-line interface.
Note:
The DGMGRL -logfile option is deprecated as of Oracle Database
12c Release 2 (12.2.0.1). It is supported for backward compatibility
only. Instead, the log file should now be specified using the LOGFILE IS
clause on the START OBSERVER command.
See Also:
* The "START OBSERVER" command

* Capturing Observer Actions in the Observer Log File
– -silent
Suppresses the display of the DGMGRL (DGMGRL>) command prompt on your

default display device. This option is useful if you are directing the command
output to a file or to another display tool.
• <logon> is:
– username [@connect-identifier]
To connect to the database, enter a username and optionally, a connect-

identifier. You will then be prompted for a password. The connect-identifier
is a fully specified connect descriptor or a name to be resolved by an Oracle
naming method (for example, TNS).
If a fully specified connect descriptor is used, it needs to include quotation
marks; otherwise the connections will fail with an invalid option error. The
following is an example of connecting using quotation marks:
dgmgrl sys@'(DESCRIPTION=(ADDRESS_LIST=(ADDRESS=(PROTOCOL=TCP)(HOST=sales-
server)(PORT=1521)))
(CONNECT_DATA=(SERVICE_NAME=sales.us.example.com)))'
Enter password: password
Whether the connect identifier is specified using a fully specified connect

descriptor or using the Easy Connect naming method, any of the following
syntax is valid (you will be prompted for a password):
* dgmgrl username@'connect_identifier'
* dgmgrl username@"connect_identifier"
* dgmgrl username@"'connect_identifier'"
7-2
Chapter 7
WARNING:
Including a password on the command line when invoking DGMGRL is
a security risk. This risk can be avoided either by omitting the password
when invoking DGMGRL and entering it when prompted, or by using
an external authentication method.
– You can connect as '/' when using operating-system authentication (remote

database restarts will not work), Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) protocol, or
database credentials stored in a wallet.
• <command> is a single command.
For example:
dgmgrl sys "show database 'North_Sales'"
Password: password
The following subsections specify the command format that you enter at the DGMGRL>
command prompt.
7.1.2 DGMGRL Command Format and Parameters

The DGMGRL commands allow you to create and maintain one broker configuration at
a time.
Table 7-1 Summary of DGMGRL Commands
Command Effect
@ (at sign) Command Executes a DGMGRL script.
/ (slash) Command Repeats the last command entered at the DGMGRL
command prompt.
ADD DATABASE Adds a new standby database to the existing broker
configuration.
ADD FAR_SYNC Adds an existing far sync instance to an Oracle Data
ADD RECOVERY_APPLIANCE Adds a Zero Data Loss Recovery Appliance (Recovery
Appliance) to an existing broker configuration.
CONNECT Connects to the specified database using the specified
username.
CONVERT DATABASE Converts the specified database to either a snapshot
standby database or a physical standby database.
CREATE CONFIGURATION Creates a broker configuration and adds a primary
database to that configuration.
DISABLE CONFIGURATION Disables broker management of a configuration so that the
configuration and all of its databases are no longer
managed by the broker.
DISABLE DATABASE Disables broker management of the named standby
database.
DISABLE FAR_SYNC Disables broker management of a far sync instance.
7-3
Chapter 7
Table 7-1 (Cont.) Summary of DGMGRL Commands
Command Effect
DISABLE FAST_START Disables fast-start failover.
FAILOVER
DISABLE FAST_START Allows a user to remove conditions for which a fast-start
FAILOVER CONDITION failover should be performed.
DISABLE Disables broker management of the named Zero Data
RECOVERY_APPLIANCE Loss Recovery Appliance (Recovery Appliance).
EDIT CONFIGURATION Changes the value of a property for the broker
(Property) configuration.
EDIT CONFIGURATION Changes the current protection mode setting for the broker
(Protection Mode) configuration.
EDIT CONFIGURATION Changes the configuration name.
(RENAME)
EDIT CONFIGURATION RESET Resets the specified configuration property to its default
(Property) value.
EDIT DATABASE (Property) Changes the value of a property for the named database.
EDIT DATABASE (Rename) Changes the name used by the broker to refer to the
specified database.
EDIT DATABASE (State) Changes the state of the specified database.
EDIT DATABASE RESET Resets the specified property for the named database to
(Property) its default value.
EDIT FAR_SYNC Changes the name, state, or properties of a far sync
instance.
EDIT FAR_SYNC RESET Resets the specified property for the named far sync
(Property) instance to its default value.
EDIT INSTANCE (AUTO PFILE) Sets the name of the initialization parameter file for the
specified instance.
EDIT INSTANCE (Property) Changes the value of a property for the specified instance.
EDIT INSTANCE RESET Resets an instance-specific property for the specified
(Property) instance(s) to its default value.
EDIT RECOVERY_APPLIANCE Changes the value of the property for the named Zero
(Property) Data Loss Recovery Appliance (Recovery Appliance).
EDIT RECOVERY_APPLIANCE Changes the name used by the broker to refer to the
(Rename) specified Zero Data Loss Recovery Appliance (Recovery
Appliance), as recorded in that Recovery Appliance's
profile in the broker configuration.
EDIT RECOVERY_APPLIANCE Resets the specified property for the named Zero Data
RESET (Property) Loss Recovery Appliance (Recovery Appliance) to its
default value.
ENABLE CONFIGURATION Enables broker management of the broker configuration
and all of its databases.
ENABLE DATABASE Enables broker management of the specified database.
ENABLE FAR_SYNC Enables broker management of the specified far sync
instance.
ENABLE FAST_START Enables the broker to automatically failover from the
FAILOVER primary database to a target standby database.
7-4
Chapter 7
Command Effect
ENABLE FAST_START Allows a user to add conditions for which a fast-start
FAILOVER CONDITION failover should be performed.
ENABLE Enables broker management of the specified Zero Data
RECOVERY_APPLIANCE Loss Recovery Appliance (Recovery Appliance).
EXIT Exits the Data Guard command-line interface.
FAILOVER Performs a database failover operation in which the
standby database, to which DGMGRL is currently
connected, fails over to the role of primary database.
HELP Displays online help for the Data Guard command-line
interface.
HOST or ! (exclamation point) Executes operating system command(s) directly through
the DGMGRL console without leaving DGMGRL.
MIGRATE PLUGGABLE Migrates a PDB from one CDB to another on the same
DATABASE host.
QUIT Quits the Data Guard command-line interface.
REINSTATE DATABASE Reinstates the database after a failover.
REMOVE CONFIGURATION Removes the broker configuration and ends broker
management of its members.
REMOVE DATABASE Removes the specified standby database from the broker
configuration.
REMOVE FAR_SYNC Removes a far sync instance from an Oracle Data Guard
REMOVE INSTANCE Removes an instance from the broker configuration.
REMOVE Removes the specified Zero Data Loss Recovery
RECOVERY_APPLIANCE Appliance (Recovery Appliance) from the broker
configuration and terminates broker management of the
Recovery Appliance.
SET ECHO Controls whether or not to echo commands that are issued
either at the command-line prompt or from a DGMGRL
script.
SET MASTEROBSERVER TO Lets you manually designate which observer is recognized
as the master observer.
SET MASTEROBSERVERHOSTS Sets the master observer of a broker configuration to the
observer on the target host.
SET ObserverConfigFile Sets the full path and file name of an observer
configuration file.
SET TIME Turns timestamp printing on and off.
SHOW ALL Shows the values of DGMGRL CLI properties.
SHOW CONFIGURATION Displays information about the broker configuration.
SHOW CONFIGURATION WHEN Shows the redo transport configuration that would be in
PRIMARY IS effect if the specified database were the primary database.
SHOW DATABASE Displays information about the specified database.
SHOW FAR_SYNC Shows information about a far sync instance.
SHOW FAST_START FAILOVER Displays all fast-start failover related information.
SHOW INSTANCE Displays information about the specified instance.
7-5
Chapter 7
Command Effect
SHOW OBSERVER Shows information about all registered observers in a Data
SHOW ObserverConfigFile Shows the value of the ObserverConfigFile property.
SHOW OBSERVERS Shows information about all observers for all broker
configurations in a specific configuration group.
SHOW RECOVERY_APPLIANCE Displays information or property values of the specified
Zero Data Loss Recovery Appliance (Recovery
Appliance).
SHUTDOWN Shuts down a currently running Oracle database.
SPOOL Records the input and output of DGMGRL to a file.
SQL Allows you to enter SQL statements from the Data Guard
command-line interface (DGMGRL).
START OBSERVER Starts the observer.
START OBSERVER IN Starts a fast-start failover observer as a background
BACKGROUND process on the host where the DGMGRL session is
running.
START OBSERVING Starts a new observer for each broker configuration in the
specified group.
STARTUP Starts an Oracle instance with the same options as
SQL*Plus, including mounting and opening a database.
STOP OBSERVER Stops the observer.
STOP OBSERVING Stops all local observers running on the host where this
DGMGRL session is running, for all broker configurations
in a specific group.
SWITCHOVER Performs a switchover operation in which the current
primary database becomes a standby database, and the
specified standby database becomes the primary
database.
VALIDATE DATABASE Performs a comprehensive set of database checks prior to
a role change.
VALIDATE DATABASE Performs validation of data files across the primary
DATAFILE database and standby databases.
VALIDATE DATABASE SPFILE Performs a comparison of server parameter file (SPFILE)
entries between the primary database and a specified
standby database.
VALIDATE FAR_SYNC Performs a comprehensive set of checks for a far sync
instance.
VALIDATE NETWORK Performs network connectivity checks between members
CONFIGURATION of the configuration .
VALIDATE STATIC CONNECT Validates database static connect identifier(s).
IDENTIFIER
7.1.3 DGMGRL Command Usage Notes

The items in this list describe usage notes specific to DGMGRL.
• The DG_BROKER_START dynamic initialization parameter is set to TRUE.
7-6
Chapter 7
• To enable broker operations that require restarting instances without manual

intervention, Oracle Net Services must be configured on each of the hosts that
contain the primary and standby database instances. Specifically, the listener.ora
file must contain static configuration information about the instance. The
GLOBAL_DBNAME attribute must be set to db_unique_name_DGMGRL.db_domain. See
Prerequisites for additional information.
• The connect identifier used while creating the configuration or adding a database,
must be resolvable from any of the hosts in the configuration.
• You must have SYSDG or SYSDBA privileges to use the Oracle Data Guard command-
line interface. Do not include AS SYSDG or AS SYSDBA on the CONNECT command.
DGMGRL first attempts an AS SYSDG connection; if that fails, it then attempts an AS
SYSDBA connection.
• If you specify more than one option on the command, you can specify the options
in any order.
• A semicolon is required at the end of each DGMGRL command.
• Characters specified in a DGMGRL command string value are interpreted as
lowercase characters, unless enclosed in double (") or single (') quotation marks.
For example, database and DatAbaSe are equivalent, but "database" and
"DatAbaSe" are not.
• You can use the backslash (\) to escape a single quotation mark ('), a double
quotation mark ("), and the backslash character (\) itself if these characters appear
in a character string.
• Some operations on a broker configuration may require that one or more
databases be shut down and restarted. In most cases, DGMGRL will automatically
shut down and restart a given database for you if the following are true:
– The instance-name is the SID (this applies to Cloud Control as well as
DGMGRL).
– The broker must be able to connect to the database using the same
credentials given in the last CONNECT command, even if the last CONNECT
command was used to connect to another database.
Command Examples
Example 7-1 Connecting to a Database Instance on a Local System
This example demonstrates how to connect to a database instance on the local
system.
% dgmgrl
.
.
.
Welcome to DGMGRL, type "help" for information.

Password: password
Connected as SYSDG.
Example 7-2 Connecting to a Database Instance on a Remote System

This example demonstrates how to connect to a database instance on a remote
system.
7-7
Chapter 7
Exiting the Data Guard Command-Line Interface
DGMGRL> CONNECT sysdg@remote-stby;

Password: password
Connected to "remote-stdby"
Connected as SYSDG.
Example 7-3 Connecting Using the AS Option

This example demonstrates how to connect to a database instance using the CONNECT
AS option:
DGMGRL> CONNECT sys@remote-stby AS SYSDBA;

Password: password
Connected to "remote-stdby"
Connect as SYSDBA.
7.2 Exiting the Data Guard Command-Line Interface

When you are done working with the DGMGRL interface and want to return to the
operating system, enter the EXIT or QUIT command.
For example:
DGMGRL> EXIT;
7.3 @ (at sign) Command

The @ command allows you to execute DGMGRL commands stored in script files.
You can put a sequence of commands into a script file and then use the @ command
to execute the file. The commands contained in the script are executed sequentially.
Format
From within DGMGRL, the syntax is as follows:
DGMGRL> @script_file_name
Command Parameters
Flag Description
-echo Prints all the commands in the script along
with their execution results.
Usage Notes
The script that you execute with this command must meet the following qualifications:
• DGMGRL must be able to access the script; otherwise the command fails because
DGMGRL cannot open the file.
• Every DGMGRL command included in the script must end with a semi-colon.
• Recursive @ command execution is allowed, but the limit of recursive levels is 20.
If the recursive level reaches 20, then the execution is aborted and none of the
unexecuted commands is executed. Therefore, self-recursive execution of the @
command (for example, putting an @abc.script command in abc.script itself)
should be used with caution.
7-8
Chapter 7
/ (slash) Command
• If there is a START OBSERVER command in the script, then any commands that come
after it are ignored because the START OBSERVER command turns the DGMGRL
session into an observer.
The START OBSERVER IN BACKGROUND command is treated as a normal command; that
is, any commands that come after it are executed.
• Comment lines are permitted in the script, but they must be terminated with a
semi-colon. For example the following comments would be allowed in a script:
REM Hello World;
-- Hello Again!;
The double dash must be followed by a space character before the comment text.
7.4 / (slash) Command

Use the DGMGRL / (slash) command to repeat the last command entered at the
command prompt.
Format
DGMGRL> /
Usage Notes
• The following commands are not repeatable using the / (slash) command:
– Return
– An unrecognized command
– The CONNECT command (because it may contain credentials)
– The / (slash) command itself
Command Example
In the following example, the / (slash) command is used to easily repeat the SHOW
CONFIGURATION command.

Members:
SUCCESS
DGMGRL> /
7-9
Chapter 7
ADD DATABASE
Members:
SUCCESS
DGMGRL>
7.5 ADD DATABASE

The DGMGRL ADD DATABASE command adds a standby database to an existing broker
configuration.
Format
ADD DATABASE database-name AS CONNECT IDENTIFIER IS connect-

identifier;
Command Parameters
database-name
The name that will be used by the broker to refer to this standby database. It must
match (case-insensitive) the value of the corresponding database DB_UNIQUE_NAME
initialization parameter.
connect-identifier
A fully specified connect descriptor or a name to be resolved by an Oracle Net
Services naming method (for example, TNS). The value you specify is also used as
the initial value of the DGConnectIdentifier database property.
Usage Notes
• To issue this command, you must connect to the primary database or to an
enabled standby database that is already in the configuration.
• The broker uses the specified connect-identifier to communicate with the
specified database from other databases. Therefore, you must ensure that the
connect-identifier can be used to address the specified database from all
databases in your configuration. For example, if TNS is used as the naming
method, you must ensure that the tnsnames.ora file on every database and
instance that is part of the configuration contains an entry for the connect-
identifier. The connect identifier must resolve to the same connect descriptor. If
the database that is being added is an Oracle RAC database, the connect-
identifier provided here must reach all instances of the Oracle RAC, preferably
with FAILOVER attributes set.
See Also:
Oracle Database Net Services Administrator's Guide
7-10
Chapter 7
ADD FAR_SYNC
• If the connection cannot be made, the broker does not add the new database to
the configuration.
• You must clear any remote redo transport destinations on the standby database
before it can be added to the configuration.
Command Example
The following example shows how to add a database named South_Sales.
DGMGRL> ADD DATABASE South_Sales AS CONNECT IDENTIFIER IS South_Sales.example.com;
Database "South_Sales" added
7.6 ADD FAR_SYNC

The ADD FAR_SYNC command adds an existing far sync instance to an Oracle Data
The far sync instance is disabled after creation. You must explicitly enable it before the
broker can ship redo to and from it.
Format
ADD FAR SYNC far_sync_instance_name AS CONNECT IDENTIFIER IS

connect-identifier;
Command Parameters
far_sync_instance_name
The name that will be used by the broker to refer to this far sync instance. It must
match (case-insensitive) the value of the corresponding far sync instance
DB_UNIQUE_NAME initialization parameter.
connect-identifier
the initial value of the DGConnectIdentifier property.
Usage Notes
• The far sync instance must already exist before you can add it to a broker
configuration.
• You must clear any remote redo transport destinations on the far sync instance
before it can be added to the configuration.
Command Example
The following example adds a far sync instance named chicago to the configuration.
DGMGRL> ADD FAR_SYNC chicago AS CONNECT IDENTIFIER IS chicago.example.com;
7.7 ADD RECOVERY_APPLIANCE

The ADD RECOVERY_APPLIANCE command adds a Zero Data Loss Recovery Appliance
(Recovery Appliance) to an existing broker configuration.
7-11
Chapter 7
CONNECT
The AS CONNECT IDENTIFIER clause is optional. If you do not specify this clause, then the
broker searches the LOG_ARCHIVE_DEST_n initialization parameters on the primary
database and all enabled standby databases for an entry that corresponds to the
Recovery Appliance being added.
Format
ADD RECOVERY APPLIANCE object-name AS CONNECT IDENTIFIER IS

connect-identifier;
Command Parameters
object name
The name that will be used by the broker to refer to this Recovery Appliance. It must
match (case-insensitive) the value of the corresponding Recovery Appliance
connect-identifier
the value of the DGConnectIdentifier database property.
Usage Notes
• To issue this command, you must connect to the primary database or to an
enabled standby database that is already in the configuration.
• The broker uses the specified connect identifier to communicate with the specified
Recovery Appliance from any database in the configuration. Therefore, you must
ensure that the connect identifier can be used to address the specified Recovery
Appliance from any database in the configuration. For example, if TNS is used as
the naming method, you must ensure that the tnsnames.ora file on every database
and instance that is part of the configuration contains an entry for the connect
identifier. The connect identifier must resolve to the same connect descriptor.
• If the connection cannot be made, then the broker does not add the new Recovery
Appliance to the configuration.
• It is possible to have more than one Recovery Appliance in the configuration.
Command Example
The following example shows how to add a Recovery Appliance named
DGMGRL> ADD RECOVERY_APPLIANCE EnterpriseRecoveryAppliance AS CONNECT IDENTIFIER IS

EnterpriseRecoveryAppliance.example.com;Oracle Backup Appliance
"EnterpriseRecoveryAppliance" added
7.8 CONNECT
The DGMGRL CONNECT command connects you to a database or far sync instance that
is a member of a Data Guard broker configuration.
Format
CONNECT username@connect-identifer [AS {SYSDBA | SYSDG} ];
7-12
Chapter 7
CONNECT
Command Parameters
username
Represents the username with which you want to connect to the configuration
member. You will be prompted for a password after you enter a username and
optionally, a connect-identifier.
connect-identifier
This parameter is optional. It is an Oracle Net Services connect identifier for the
configuration member to which you want to connect. The exact syntax depends upon
the Oracle Net Services communications protocol your Oracle installation uses.
Usage Notes
• The username and password must be valid for the configuration member to which
you are trying to connect.
The username you specify must have the SYSDG or SYSDBA privilege.
• The AS clause is optional. If it is specified, then DGMGRL attempts to connect as
either SYSDG or SYSDBA, whichever one was specified. If the AS clause is not
specified, then DGMGRL first attempts an AS SYSDG connection; if that fails, it then
attempts an AS SYSDBA connection.
• If the CONNECT command returns an error, check to see that you specified a valid
connect-identifier.
• When the CONNECT command is successful, the name of the configuration member
to which the connection has been made is shown.
Command Examples
Example 1: Connecting to a Local Configuration Member
This example connects to the default database or far sync instance on the local
system.
Password: password
Connected as SYSDG.
Example 2: Connecting to a Remote Configuration Member

This example connects to a database on the remote system (you could specify a far
sync instead).
DGMGRL> CONNECT sysdg@South_Sales;
Password: password
Connected to "South_Sales"
Connected as SYSDG.
Example 3: Connecting Without Showing Connection Credentials

This example connects to a configuration member using CONNECT '/' so that
connection credentials are not visible on the command line:
DGMGRL> CONNECT /@North_Sales.example.com;
7-13
Chapter 7
CONVERT DATABASE
You must set up Oracle Wallet or SSL to use CONNECT '/'. By setting up Oracle Wallet
or SSL, you can write a script to securely start and run the observer as a background
job without specifying database credentials in the script.
7.9 CONVERT DATABASE

The CONVERT DATABASE command converts a physical standby database to a snapshot
standby database, or reverts the snapshot standby database back to a physical
standby database.
A snapshot standby database is a fully updatable standby database. Like a physical or
logical standby database, a snapshot standby database receives and archives redo
data from a primary database. Unlike a physical or logical standby database, a
snapshot standby database does not apply the redo data that it receives. The redo
data received by a snapshot standby database is not applied until the snapshot
standby is converted back into a physical standby database, after first discarding any
local updates made to the snapshot standby database.
A snapshot standby database is best used in scenarios that require a temporary,
updatable snapshot of a physical standby database. Note that because redo data
received by a snapshot standby database is not applied until it is converted back into a
physical standby, the time needed to perform a role transition is directly proportional to
the amount of redo data that needs to be applied.
See Oracle Data Guard Concepts and Administration for additional information about
snapshot standby databases.
Format
CONVERT DATABASE db_unique_name TO {SNAPSHOT | PHYSICAL} STANDBY;
Usage Notes
• A physical standby database cannot be converted to a snapshot standby database
if it is the target of a fast-start failover. The ORA-16668: operation cannot be
performed on the fast-start failover target standby database error will be
returned.
• A physical standby database cannot be converted to a snapshot standby database
if its RedoRoutes configurable property is set to non-NULL value.
• Use the DGMGRL ADD DATABASE command to import an existing snapshot
standby database into an Oracle Data Guard broker configuration.
• A snapshot standby database cannot be the target of a switchover or a fast-start
failover.
• A snapshot standby database can be the target of a manual failover if fast-start
failover is disabled.
• You can use the SHOW CONFIGURATION or SHOW DATABASE command to verify the
conversion result. For example:

Members:
7-14
Chapter 7
CREATE CONFIGURATION

South_Sales - Snapshot standby database
SUCCESS
• After a snapshot standby database is converted back to a physical standby
database, it will be in the default state for a physical standby database, APPLY-ON.
Command Examples
Example 1: Converting a Physical Standby to a Snapshot Standby
Issue the following to convert a physical standby database to a snapshot standby
database:
DGMGRL> CONVERT DATABASE 'South_Sales' to SNAPSHOT STANDBY;
Converting database "South_Sales" to a Snapshot Standby database, please wait...
Example 2: Converting a Snapshot Standby Back to a Physical Standby

Issue the following to convert the snapshot standby database back to a physical
standby database:
DGMGRL> CONVERT DATABASE 'South_Sales' to PHYSICAL STANDBY;
Converting database "South_Sales" to a Physical Standby database, please wait...
Operation requires shutdown of instance "south_sales1" on database "South_Sales"
Shutting down instance "south_sales1"...
Database closed.
Operation requires startup of instance "south_sales1" on database "South_Sales"
Starting instance "south_sales1"...
Database mounted.
Continuing to convert database "South_Sales" ...
7.10 CREATE CONFIGURATION

The CREATE CONFIGURATION command creates a new broker configuration that includes
the specified primary database.
Format
CREATE CONFIGURATION configuration_name AS PRIMARY DATABASE IS

database-name CONNECT IDENTIFIER IS connect-identifier;
Command Parameters
configuration-name
A user-friendly name for the configuration you are creating. Valid names contain any
alphanumeric characters. If spaces are included in the name, the name must be
enclosed in double or single quotation marks. The name must consist of 30 or fewer
bytes.
7-15
Chapter 7
CREATE CONFIGURATION
database-name
The name that will be used by the broker to refer to the primary database. It must
match (case-insensitive) the value of the primary database DB_UNIQUE_NAME
connect-identifier
the initial value of the DGConnectIdentifier database property.
Usage Notes
• A broker configuration is a named collection of one or more databases that you
want to manage as a group. You must specify a value for each of the command
parameters. There are no default values.
• You must connect to the primary database to issue this command.
• The broker uses the specified connect-identifier to communicate with the
specified database from other databases. Therefore, you must ensure that the
connect-identifier can be used to address the specified database from all
databases in your configuration. For example, if TNS is used as the naming
method, you must ensure that the tnsnames.ora file on every database and
instance that is part of the configuration contains an entry for the connect-
identifier. The connect identifier must resolve to the same connect descriptor. If
the database that is being added is an Oracle RAC database, the connect-
identifier provided here must reach all instances of the Oracle RAC, preferably
with FAILOVER attributes set.
See Also:
• To add standby databases after you create the broker configuration, use the ADD
DATABASE command.
• You must clear any remote redo transport destinations on the primary database
that do not have the NOREGISTER attribute, before a configuration can be created.
Command Example
The following example creates a new broker configuration named DRSolution with a
primary database named North_Sales.
DGMGRL> CREATE CONFIGURATION 'DRSolution' AS
> PRIMARY DATABASE IS 'North_Sales'
> CONNECT IDENTIFIER IS North_Sales.example.com;
Configuration "DRSolution" created with primary database "North_Sales"
7-16
Chapter 7
DISABLE CONFIGURATION
7.11 DISABLE CONFIGURATION

The DISABLE CONFIGURATION command disables broker management of a configuration
so that the configuration and all of its databases are no longer managed by the broker.
Format
DISABLE CONFIGURATION;
Command Parameters
None.
Usage Notes
• A disabled configuration and all of its constituent databases are no longer
managed by the broker.
• The only way to disable broker management of the primary database is to use the
DISABLE CONFIGURATION command.
• This command does not remove the broker configuration from the configuration
file. See the REMOVE CONFIGURATION command for more information about
removing the configuration.
• You can edit database properties and modify the configuration's protection mode
while the configuration is disabled. However, any changes made to properties or to
the protection mode will not take effect until the configuration is enabled.
• This command cannot be executed if fast-start failover is enabled.
Command Example
The following example disables management of the broker configuration and all of its
databases.
Disabled.
7.12 DISABLE DATABASE

The DISABLE DATABASE command disables broker management of the named standby
database.
This means that broker directed state changes will be disallowed for this database,
and the broker will not monitor the database for health status or for monitorable
properties.
Format
DISABLE DATABASE database-name;
Command Parameters
database-name
Name of the standby database to be disabled.
7-17
Chapter 7
DISABLE FAR_SYNC
Usage Notes
• You cannot specify the name of a primary database.
• Use the DISABLE CONFIGURATION command to disable the primary and all standby
databases.
• If the sole standby database is disabled, you have no failover option. This standby
database is not viable for failover until it is reenabled.
• This command cannot be used to disable the fast-start failover target database
when fast-start failover is enabled.
Command Example
The following example shows how to disable a database named South_Sales.
DGMGRL> DISABLE DATABASE 'South_Sales';
Disabled.
7.13 DISABLE FAR_SYNC

The DISABLE FAR_SYNC command disables broker management of a far sync instance.
Format
DISABLE FAR_SYNC far_sync_instance_name;
Command Parameters
The name of the far sync instance to be disabled.
Usage Notes
• A far sync instance that has its RedoRoutes property set cannot be disabled.
Command Example
The following example disables broker management of a far sync instance named
chicago.
DGMGRL> DISABLE FAR_SYNC 'chicago';
7.14 DISABLE FAST_START FAILOVER

The DISABLE FAST_START FAILOVER command prevents the observer from initiating a
failover to the target standby database.
See Disabling Fast-Start Failover for additional information.
Format
DISABLE FAST_START FAILOVER [ FORCE ];
Command Parameters
None.
7-18
Chapter 7
DISABLE FAST_START FAILOVER CONDITION
Usage Notes
• If the primary and target standby database have a network connection, use
DISABLE FAST_START FAILOVER without the FORCE option to disable fast-start failover
on all databases in the broker configuration. If errors occur during the disable
operation, the broker returns an error message and stops the disable operation.
You may need to reissue the DISABLE FAST_START FAILOVER command with the FORCE
option to override the error conditions and disable fast-start failover on the
database to which you are connected. See Disabling Fast-Start Failover for more
information.
• Use DISABLE FAST_START FAILOVER with the FORCE option when the network between
the primary and target standby databases is disconnected or when the database
upon which the command is received does not have a connection with the primary
database. The FORCE option disables fast-start failover on the database to which
you are connected, even when errors occur.
• Disabling fast-start failover with the FORCE option on a primary database that is
disconnected from the observer and the target standby database does not prevent
the observer from initiating a fast-start failover to the target standby database.
• You can disable fast-start failover while connected to any database in the broker
configuration so long as connectivity exists between that database and the
primary.
• If disabled by force at the target standby database and the connection
subsequently resumes with the primary database, fast-start failover is disabled on
all databases in the configuration.
• Disabling fast-start failover with the FORCE option while connected to the primary
will disable fast-start failover on the target standby database if there is network
connectivity between both databases.
Command Examples
Example 1: Disabling a Fast-Start Failover
The following example shows how to disable fast-start failover.
DGMGRL> DISABLE FAST_START FAILOVER;
Disabled.
Example 2: Using FORCE When Disabling Fast-Start Failover

The following example uses the FORCE option which disables fast-start failover on the
database to which you are connected.
DGMGRL> DISABLE FAST_START FAILOVER FORCE;
Disabled.
7.15 DISABLE FAST_START FAILOVER CONDITION

The DISABLE FAST_START FAILOVER CONDITION command allows you to remove
conditions for which a fast-start failover should be performed.
Format
DISABLE FAST_START FAILOVER CONDITION value;
7-19
Chapter 7
DISABLE RECOVERY_APPLIANCE
Command Parameters
value
Possible values are any conditions for which a fast-start failover has been enabled.
Usage Notes
If the condition has not been set or if it is an unrecognized condition, then an error is
raised.
Command Example
This example specifies that the detection of a corrupted control file does not
automatically initiate an immediate fast-start failover.
DGMGRL> DISABLE FAST_START FAILOVER CONDITION "Corrupted Controlfile";
7.16 DISABLE RECOVERY_APPLIANCE

The DISABLE RECOVERY_APPLIANCE command disables broker management of
the named Zero Data Loss Recovery Appliance (Recovery Appliance).
Disabling broker management of a Recovery Appliance means that the broker will not
monitor the health of the transport to the Recovery Appliance. However, redo transport
to the Recovery Appliance will not be shut off.
Format
DISABLE RECOVERY_APPLIANCE object_name;
Command Parameters
object name
Name of the Recovery Appliance to be disabled.
Command Example
The following example shows how to disable a Recovery Appliance named
DGMGRL> DISABLE RECOVERY_APPLIANCE 'EnterpriseRecoveryAppliance';

Disabled.
7.17 EDIT CONFIGURATION (Property)

The EDIT CONFIGURATION SET PROPERTY command changes the value of a property for
the broker configuration.
Format
EDIT CONFIGURATION SET PROPERTY property-name=value;
7-20
Chapter 7
EDIT CONFIGURATION (Protection Mode)
Command Parameters
property-name
The name of a configuration property.
value
The new value for the property.
See Also:
Broker Properties for information about configuration properties
Usage Notes
• Issue this command while connected to the primary database or to any standby
database in the broker configuration having connectivity to the primary database.
• Use the SHOW CONFIGURATION command to display the current property information
for the configuration.
Command Example
The following example shows how to set the FastStartFailoverThreshold configuration
property to 90 seconds.
DGMGRL> EDIT CONFIGURATION SET PROPERTY FastStartFailoverThreshold=90;
7.18 EDIT CONFIGURATION (Protection Mode)

The EDIT CONFIGURATION SET PROTECTION MODE AS command edits the current protection
mode setting for the broker configuration.
Format
EDIT CONFIGURATION SET PROTECTION MODE AS protection-mode;
Command Parameters
protection-mode
The data protection mode in which you want the configuration to run when the
configuration is enabled. The possible protection modes are:
MAXPROTECTION
MAXAVAILABILITY
MAXPERFORMANCE
Usage Notes
• Before you use the EDIT CONFIGURATION command to set the protection mode,
ensure that at least one standby is configured to receive redo via SYNC or FASTSYNC
mode if it receives redo directly from the primary. If the standby receives redo via a
7-21
Chapter 7
EDIT CONFIGURATION (Protection Mode)
far sync instance, the far sync instance must be configured to receive redo via SYNC
or FASTSYNC mode and the standby must be configured to receive redo via ASYNC
mode.
• The following table shows the configuration protection modes and the minimum
corresponding settings for redo transport services:
Protection Mode Redo Transport Standby Redo Usable with Fast-Start

Log Files Failover?
Needed?
MAXPROTECTION SYNC Yes Yes
MAXAVAILABILITY SYNC or FASTSYNC Yes Yes
MAXPERFORMANCE ASYNC Yes Yes
The default protection mode for the configuration is MAXPERFORMANCE.
See Also:
Managing the Members of a Broker Configuration for more information
about the protection modes and redo transport services
• This command cannot be executed if fast-start failover is enabled.

• Upgrading from MAXPERFORMANCE to MAXPROTECTION is not allowed. You must first go
to MAXAVAILABILITY and then to MAXPROTECTION.
• Use the SHOW CONFIGURATION command to display the current protection mode for
the configuration.

Members:
SUCCESS
If broker management of the configuration is disabled when you enter the EDIT
CONFIGURATION command, the protection mode of the configuration does not take effect
until the next time you enable the configuration with the ENABLE CONFIGURATION
command.
Command Example
The following example shows how to upgrade the broker configuration to the
MAXAVAILABILITY protection mode.
Verify that standby redo log files are configured on the standby database and that the
redo transport service is set to SYNC, for example:
7-22
Chapter 7
EDIT CONFIGURATION (RENAME)


Succeeded.
7.19 EDIT CONFIGURATION (RENAME)

The EDIT CONFIGURATION RENAME TO command changes a configuration’s name.
Format
EDIT CONFIGURATION RENAME TO new-configuration-name;
Command Parameters
new-configuration-name
The new name for the configuration.
Command Example
The following example shows how to rename a configuration named DR_Sales to
HA_Sales.
Configuration - DR_Sales

Members:
DISABLED
DGMGRL> EDIT CONFIGURATION RENAME TO "HA_Sales";

Succeeded.
DGMGRL> ENABLE CONFIGURATION
Enabled.
Configuration - HA_Sales

Members:
SUCCESS
7-23
Chapter 7
EDIT CONFIGURATION RESET (Property)
7.20 EDIT CONFIGURATION RESET (Property)

The EDIT CONFIGURATION RESET PROPERTY command resets the specified configuration
property to its default value.
Format
EDIT CONFIGURATION RESET PROPERTY property-name;
Command Parameters
property-name
The name of an existing configuration property.
Usage Notes
• Issue this command while connected to the primary database or to any standby
database in the broker configuration having connectivity to the primary database.
• Use the SHOW CONFIGURATION command to display the current property information
for the configuration.
Command Example
The following example shows how to reset the BystandersFollowChange property.
DGMGRL> EDIT CONFIGURATION RESET PROPERTY BystandersFollowChange;
Succeeded.
7.21 EDIT DATABASE (Property)

The EDIT DATABASE command changes the name used by the broker for the specified
database.
Format
EDIT DATABASE database-name SET PROPERTY property-name=value;
Command Parameters
database-name
The name of the database for which you want to change a property value.
property-name
The name of an existing database-specific property. If this is an Oracle RAC
database, this property change affects all instances of the database.
See Also:
Broker Properties for information about properties.
7-24
Chapter 7
EDIT DATABASE (Property)
value
Note:
This command can be used to change the value of an instance-specific
property if and only if just one instance is known by the broker for the named
database. An attempt to use this command to change an instance-specific
property when the broker knows of multiple instances of the database will be
rejected. It is recommended to only use EDIT INSTANCE (property) to change
the value of an instance-specific property.
Command Examples
Example 1: Editing a Configurable Property at the Database Level
The following example edits a configurable property at the database level.
DGMGRL> EDIT DATABASE 'North_Sales' SET PROPERTY 'ArchiveLagTarget'=1200;
Property "ArchiveLagTarget" updated
Example 2: Editing a Configurable Instance-Specific Property of a non-Oracle

RAC Database
The following example edits a configurable instance-specific property of a non-Oracle
RAC database.
DGMGRL> EDIT DATABASE 'South_Sales' SET PROPERTY
> 'LogArchiveTrace'=255;
Property "LogArchiveTrace" updated
Example 3: Editing a Configurable Instance-Specific Property of an Oracle RAC

Database
The following example edits a configurable instance-specific property of an Oracle
RAC database. This will not succeed because it is not clear to which instance the
property change should be applied.
> 'LogArchiveTrace'=255;
Error: ORA-16587: ambiguous object specified to Data Guard broker Failed.
Example 4: Editing a List of Fast-Start Failover Targets

The following examples show how to specify a list of fast-start failover targets.
DGMGRL> EDIT DATBASE db1 SET PROPERTY FastStartFailoverTarget='db2, db3';
DGMGRL> EDIT DATABASE db2 SET PROPERTY FastStartFailoverTarget='db1,db3';
DGMGRL> EDIT DATABASE db3 SET PROPERTY FastStartFailoverTarget='db1';
7-25
Chapter 7
EDIT DATABASE (Rename)
7.22 EDIT DATABASE (Rename)

The EDIT DATABASE (Rename) command changes the name used by the broker to refer
to the specified database.
Format
EDIT DATABASE database-name RENAME TO new-database-name;
Command Parameters
database-name
The name of the database that you want to change.
new-database-name
The new name of the database.
Usage Notes
• Use this command to track changes to the DB_UNIQUE_NAME initialization parameter
for this database.
Caution:
The database-name must always match the value for that database's
• This command can only be done when broker management of the database that
you are renaming is disabled.
Command Example
The following example shows how to edit and rename a database.
DGMGRL> DISABLE DATABASE 'South_Sales_typo';
Disabled.
DGMGRL> EDIT DATABASE 'South_Sales_typo' RENAME TO 'South_Sales';

Succeeded.

Enabled.
7.23 EDIT DATABASE (State)

The EDIT DATABASE (State) command changes the state of the specified database.
Format
EDIT DATABASE database-name SET STATE=state [WITH APPLY

INSTANCE=instance-name];
7-26
Chapter 7
EDIT DATABASE RESET (Property)
Command Parameters
database-name
The name of the database for which you want to change the state.
state
The state in which you want the database to be running. The possible states are:
TRANSPORT-ON (primary database only)
TRANSPORT-OFF (primary database only)
APPLY-ON (physical or logical standby database only)
APPLY-OFF (physical or logical standby database only)
instance-name
The name of the instance you want to become the apply instance if this is an Oracle
RAC standby database.
Usage Notes
• If the target state is APPLY-ON and this database is currently a physical or logical
standby database, the optional WITH APPLY INSTANCE clause specifies which
instance will become the apply instance.
• If the target state is not APPLY-ON or if the database is currently in the primary role,
the WITH APPLY INSTANCE clause is ignored even if it is specified.
• You cannot change the state of a snapshot standby database.
• All instances of an Oracle RAC database are affected by this database state
change.
Command Example
The following examples show how to change the state of a database.
DGMGRL> EDIT DATABASE 'South_Sales' SET STATE='APPLY-ON';
Succeeded.
7.24 EDIT DATABASE RESET (Property)

The EDIT DATABASE RESET (Property) command reset the specified property for the
named database back to its default value.
Format
EDIT DATABASE database-name RESET PROPERTY property-name;
Command Parameters
database-name
The name of the database for which you want to reset the property value back to its
default.
property-name
The name of an existing database-specific configurable property.
7-27
Chapter 7
EDIT FAR_SYNC
Command Example
The following example shows how to reset the NetTimeout property for the database
named South_Sales.
DGMGRL> EDIT DATABASE 'South_Sales' RESET PROPERTY NetTimeout;
Succeeded.
7.25 EDIT FAR_SYNC

The EDIT FAR_SYNC property changes the name and/or properties of a far sync instance.
Format
EDIT FAR_SYNC far_sync_instance_name RENAME TO
new_far_sync_instance_name;
EDIT FAR_SYNC far_sync_instance_name SET PROPERTY property_name =

value;
Command Parameters
The name of the far sync instance for which you want to edit information. It must
new_far_sync_instance_name
The new name of the far sync instance.
property_name
The name of an existing far sync instance-specific configurable property.
Command Example
The following example renames a far sync instance named chicago to the name
dallas.
DGMGRL> DISABLE FAR_SYNC 'chicago_typo';EDIT FAR_SYNC 'chicago_typo' RENAME TO

'chicago';ENABLE FAR_SYNC 'chicago;
7.26 EDIT FAR_SYNC RESET (Property)

The EDIT FAR_SYNC RESET (Property) command resets the specified property for the
named far sync instance to its default value.
Format
EDIT FAR_SYNC far_sync_instance_name RESET PROPERTY property-

name;
7-28
Chapter 7
EDIT INSTANCE (AUTO PFILE)
Command Parameters
The name of the far sync instance for which you want to edit information. It must
property_name
The name of the property to be reset to its default value.
Command Example
The following example shows how to reset the ReopenSecs property back to its default
value for the far sync instance named dallas.
DGMGRL> EDIT FAR_SYNC 'dallas' RESET PROPERTY ReopenSecs;
7.27 EDIT INSTANCE (AUTO PFILE)

The EDIT INSTANCE (AUTO PFILE) command sets the name of the initialization
parameter file for the specified instance.
Format
EDIT INSTANCE instance-name
[ON DATABASE database-name] SET AUTO PFILE [= { initialization-file |

OFF } ];
Command Parameters
instance-name
The name of the instance (SID) for which you want to specify its initialization
parameter file.
database-name
The name of the database to which the instance-name is associated.
initialization-file
Executes the startup operation for the instance when a subsequent broker operation
requires the instance to be started automatically. If SET AUTO PFILE is set to OFF,
automatic restart of that instance is disabled. When a subsequent operation needs to
start that instance, you must start it manually. If you do not specify SET AUTO PFILE for
the instance, the automatic startup operation looks for the initialization parameter file
at the default location.
Usage Notes
• The instance-name can be unique across the configuration. If instance-name is not
unique, you must specify both the database-name and the instance-name to fully
identify the instance.
• SET AUTO PFILE is valid only for the duration of the current DGMGRL session. You
must specify SET AUTO PFILE again if you quit and reenter DGMGRL.
7-29
Chapter 7
EDIT INSTANCE (Property)
Command Example
The following example shows how to change the parameter file used to start an
instance of a database.
DGMGRL> EDIT INSTANCE 'south_sales1' ON DATABASE 'South_Sales'
> SET AUTO PFILE='initsales1.ora';
Instance 'south_sales1' updated
7.28 EDIT INSTANCE (Property)

The EDIT INSTANCE (Property) command changes the value of an instance-specific
property for the specified instance(s).
Format
EDIT INSTANCE { {instance-name [ON {DATABASE database-name |

FAR_SYNC far-sync-name}] } | {* ON {DATABASE database-name | FAR_SYNC
far-sync-name} } }
SET PROPERTY property-name=value;
Command Parameters
instance-name
The name of the instance (SID) for which you want to change an instance-specific
property's value. If an asterisk is specified for instance-name, then either the ON
DATABASE clause or the ON FAR_SYNC clause must also be specified and this change will
be applied to the specified property for each instance associated with that database or
far sync. See Oracle Data Guard Broker Properties for the instance-specific properties
that can be changed using this command.
database-name
The name of the database with which the instance-name is associated. This must be
specified if an asterisk is specified for instance-name, or if instance-name is not unique
across the configuration
far-sync-name
The name of the far sync with which the instance-name is associated.
property-name
The name of the instance-specific property for which you want to set a new value.
See Also:
value
7-30
Chapter 7
EDIT INSTANCE RESET (Property)
Usage Notes
unique, you must specify both the database-name (or far-sync-name) and the
instance-name to fully identify the instance.
• This command cannot be used to change a database-specific property.
Command Examples
Example 1: Editing an Instance-Specific Property
Edit an instance-specific property.
DGMGRL> EDIT INSTANCE 'north_sales1' ON DATABASE 'North_Sales'
> SET PROPERTY 'StandbyArchiveLocation'='/archfs/arch/';
Property "StandbyArchiveLocation" updated.
Example 2: Editing a Database-Specific Property

Edit a database-specific property. This will not be allowed.
DGMGRL> EDIT INSTANCE 'north_sales1' ON DATABASE 'North_Sales'
> SET PROPERTY 'LogXptMode'='SYNC';
Error: ORA-16586: cannot change database property with EDIT INSTANCE command
Failed.
Example 3: Changing Instance-Specific Property for All Instances on an Oracle

RAC Database
Change the value of an instance-specific property for all instances of an Oracle RAC
database:
DGMGRL> EDIT INSTANCE * ON DATABASE 'North_Sales'
> SET PROPERTY LogArchiveTrace=4095;
Example 4: Changing Instance-Specific Property for All Instances of an Oracle

RAC Far Sync
Change the value of an instance-specific property for all instances of an Oracle RAC
far sync instance:
DGMGRL> EDIT INSTANCE * ON FAR_SYNC 'dallas' SET PROPERTY LogArchiveTrace=4095;
7.29 EDIT INSTANCE RESET (Property)

The EDIT INSTANCE RESET (Property) command resets an instance-specific property for
the specified instance(s) to its default value.
Format
EDIT INSTANCE { {instance-name [ON {DATABASE database-name |

FAR_SYNC far-sync-name}] } | {* ON {DATABASE database-name | FAR_SYNC
far-sync-name} } } RESET PROPERTY property-name;
7-31
Chapter 7
EDIT INSTANCE RESET (Property)
Command Parameters
instance-name
The name of the instance (SID) for which you want to reset an instance-specific
property's value to the default. If an asterisk is specified for instance-name, the ON
DATABASE clause must also be specified and the property will be reset to the default for
each instance associated with that database.
database-name
The name of the database with which the instance-name is associated. This must be
specified if an asterisk is specified for instance-name, or if instance-name is not unique
across the configuration.
property-name
The name of the instance-specific property that you want to reset to its default value.
See Also:
value
Usage Notes
• This command cannot be used to change a database-specific property.
Command Examples
Example 1: Resetting a Property for a Specific Instance
The following command shows how to reset the LogArchiveTrace property for the
specific instance south1 on the database named South_Sales.
DGMGRL> EDIT INSTANCE 'south1' ON DATABASE 'South_Sales'
> RESET PROPERTY LogArchiveTrace;
Succeeded.
Example 2: Resetting a Property for All Instances of a Database

The following example shows how to reset the LogArchiveTrace property for all
instances of the database named South_Sales.
DGMGRL> EDIT INSTANCE * ON DATABASE 'South_Sales' RESET PROPERTY LogArchiveTrace;
Succeeded.
7-32
Chapter 7
EDIT RECOVERY_APPLIANCE (Property)
7.30 EDIT RECOVERY_APPLIANCE (Property)

The EDIT RECOVERY_APPLIANCE (Property) command changes the value of the property
for the named Zero Data Loss Recovery Appliance (Recovery Appliance).
Format
EDIT object name SET PROPERTY property-name = value;
Command Parameters
object name
The name of the Recovery Appliance for which you want to change a property value.
property-name
The name of an existing Recovery Appliance-specific property. Valid properties are as
follows:
• DGConnectIdentifier
• LogXptMode
• DelayMins
• Binding
• MaxFailure
• MaxConnections
• ReopenSecs
• NetTimeout
• RedoCompression
• LogShipping
• ArchiveLagTarget
• LogArchiveMaxProcesses
• LogArchiveMinSucceedDest
• InconsistentProperties
• InconsistentLogXptProps
• AlternateLocation
value
Command Example
The following example shows an example of editing a configurable property.
DGMGRL> EDIT RECOVERY_APPLIANCE 'EnterpriseRecoveryAppliance' SET PROPERTY
'ReopenSecs'=300;
Property "ReopenSecs" updated
7-33
Chapter 7
EDIT RECOVERY_APPLIANCE (Rename)
7.31 EDIT RECOVERY_APPLIANCE (Rename)

The EDIT RECOVERY_APPLIANCE (Rename) command changes the name used by the
broker to refer to the specified Recovery Appliance, as recorded in that Recovery
Appliance's profile in the broker configuration.
Format
EDIT RECOVERY_APPLIANCE object name RENAME TO new object name ;
Command Parameters
object name
The name of the Recovery Appliance that you want to change.
new object name

The new name of the Recovery Appliance.
Usage Notes
• Use this command to track changes to the DB_UNIQUE_NAME initialization parameter
for this Recovery Appliance.
Caution:
The name of the Recovery Appliance must always match the value of the
DB_UNIQUE_NAME initialization parameter for that Recovery Appliance.
Command Example
The following example shows how to edit and rename a Recovery Appliance.
DGMGRL> EDIT RECOVERY_APPLIANCE 'EnterpriseRecoveryAppliance_typo'
RENAME TO 'EnterpriseRecoveryAppliance';
Succeeded.
7.32 EDIT RECOVERY_APPLIANCE RESET (Property)

The EDIT RECOVERY_APPLIANCE RESET (Property) command resets the specified property
for the named Recovery Appliance to its default value.
Format
EDIT RECOVERY_APPLIANCE object name RESET PROPERTY property-

name ;
Command Parameters
object name
The name of the Recovery Appliance for which you want to reset the property value
back to its default.
7-34
Chapter 7
ENABLE CONFIGURATION
property-name
The name of an existing database-specific configurable property.
Command Example
The following example shows how to reset the ReopenSecs property back to its default
value for the Recovery Appliance named South_Sales.
DGMGRL> EDIT DATABASE 'South_Sales' RESET PROPERTY ReopenSecs;
Succeeded.
7.33 ENABLE CONFIGURATION

The ENABLE CONFIGURATION command enables the broker to manage the broker
configuration, including all of its databases.
ble
Format
ENABLE CONFIGURATION;
Command Parameters
None.
Usage Notes
• Use this command to enable broker management of the primary database and all
members of the configuration, if these members are not explicitly disabled by the
user.
• To issue this command, you must connect to a database whose control file role is
primary.
• By default, broker management of the configuration's databases is enabled in the
TRANSPORT-ON state with redo transport services turned on at the primary database
and APPLY-ON with log apply services started at the standby databases. Far sync
instances will be enabled such that they receive redo data and send redo data.
You can change the state of a database using the EDIT DATABASE (State)
command, but not when the database or the entire configuration is disabled. You
cannot change the state of a far sync instance.
• Use the SHOW CONFIGURATION command to display information about the
configuration.
• Use this command to update the roles stored in the broker configuration if a
failover or switchover was performed using SQL*Plus instead of DGMGRL or
Cloud Control.
Command Example
The following example enables management of a broker configuration.
Enabled.
7-35
Chapter 7
ENABLE DATABASE
7.34 ENABLE DATABASE

The ENABLE DATABASE command enables broker management of the specified standby
database.
Caution:
Do not issue the ENABLE DATABASE command on a standby database that needs
to be reinstated. See Reenabling Disabled Databases After a Role Change for
more details.
Format
ENABLE DATABASE database-name;
Command Parameters
database-name
The name of the standby database for which you want to enable broker management.
Usage Notes
• You must connect to the primary database or to an already enabled standby
database to issue this command.
• A standby database may have been disabled by the broker as a consequence of a
prior failover or switchover operation. See Reenabling Disabled Databases After a
Role Change to understand how the database can be reinstated or re-created.
• By default, broker management of the physical or logical standby database is
enabled in the APPLY-ON state with log apply services enabled. You can change the
state of the standby database using the EDIT DATABASE (State) command, but
only when the database is enabled.
• Use the SHOW DATABASE command to display information about the database.
• For an Oracle RAC database, only one instance is required to be started and
mounted for this command to succeed.
Command Example
The following example shows how to enable a database named South_Sales.
Enabled.
7-36
Chapter 7
ENABLE FAR_SYNC
7.35 ENABLE FAR_SYNC

The ENABLE FAR_SYNC command enables broker management of the specified far sync
instance.
Format
ENABLE FAR_SYNC far_sync_instance_name ;
Command Parameters
The name of the far sync instance for which you want to enable broker management.
Command Example
The following example enables broker management of a far sync instance named
dallas.
DGMGRL> ENABLE FAR_SYNC 'dallas';
7.36 ENABLE FAST_START FAILOVER

The ENABLE FAST_START FAILOVER command enables the broker to fail over to a
specifically-chosen standby database in the event of loss of the primary database,
without requiring any manual steps.
See Enabling Fast-Start Failover for complete information.
Format
ENABLE FAST_START FAILOVER;
Command Parameters
None.
Usage Notes
• The prerequisites described in Prerequisites for Enabling Fast-Start Failover must
be met before you issue this command to enable fast-start failover.
• Issuing the ENABLE FAST_START FAILOVER command does not trigger a failover, it only
allows the observer that is monitoring the configuration to initiate a fast-start
failover if conditions warrant a failover.
• You can enable fast-start failover while connected to any database in the broker
configuration.
• If you do not start the observer after you have enabled fast-start failover, the
ORA-16819 warning is displayed for the primary and target standby databases. For
example:
Role: PRIMARY
7-37
Chapter 7
ENABLE FAST_START FAILOVER
Instance(s):
south_sales1
ORA-16819: fast-start failover observer not started
Database Status:
WARNING
• To enable fast-start failover for a broker configuration with multiple standby
databases, the FastStartFailoverTarget configuration property on the primary
database must specify one or more viable target standby databases. Both the
primary database and the target standby databases must have:
– Standby redo logs configured
– Redo transport must be properly configured at both databases for the
configured protection mode
Oracle also recommends Flashback Database be enabled on both the primary and
standby databases to allow for reinstatement of the old primary database after a
failover. If it is not enabled, then you will receive a warning when you enable fast-
start failover:
Warning: ORA-16827: Flashback Database is disabled
Task 2 in Enabling Fast-Start Failover, and FastStartFailoverTarget provide more

information about the FastStartFailoverTarget configuration property.
• Once you have enabled fast-start failover, you must comply with the restrictions
described in Restrictions When Fast-Start Failover is Enabled.
Command Examples
Example 1: Enabling a Fast-Start Failover
The following example enables fast-start failover.
Enabled.
Example 2: Successful Enabling of Fast-Start Failover

The following example shows that fast-start failover was successfully enabled when
the configuration is operating in maximum performance mode.

Active Target: South_Sales
Potential Targets: "South_Sales"
South_Sales valid
Observer: (none)
7-38
Chapter 7
ENABLE FAST_START FAILOVER CONDITION
Health Conditions:
Stuck Archiver NO

(none)
7.37 ENABLE FAST_START FAILOVER CONDITION

The ENABLE FAST_START FAILOVER CONDITION command specifies additional conditions for
which a fast-start failover should be performed.
Format
ENABLE FAST_START FAILOVER CONDITION value;
Command Parameters
value
Possible values are those described in the SHOW FAST_START FAILOVER command as
health conditions. The Oracle error ORA-00240 can also be named as a condition by
specifying 240 as the value.
Usage Notes
• Table 7-2 lists some examples of health conditions maintained by the database
health-check facility.
• An error is raised if the specified value is not recognized or if the condition has
already been set.
• Table 7-2 Examples of Health Conditions
Health Condition Description

Datafile Write Errors If fast-start failover is enabled and the Datafile Write Errors
condition is specified, then a fast-start failover is initiated if
write errors are encountered in any data files, including temp
files, system data files, and undo files.
"Corrupted Controlfile" Corrupted controlfile. This condition is enabled by default.
"Corrupted Dictionary" Dictionary corruption of a critical database object. This
condition is enabled by default.
"Inaccessible Logfile" LGWR is unable to write to any member of a log group due to
an I/O error.
"Stuck Archiver" Archiver is unable to archive a redo log because device is full
or unavailable.
• You can display these configurable conditions with the SHOW FAST_START FAILOVER
command.
Command Examples
Example 1
7-39
Chapter 7
ENABLE RECOVERY_APPLIANCE
The following example specifies that a fast-start failover should be done if a corrupted
controlfile is detected.
ENABLE FAST_START FAILOVER CONDITION "Corrupted Controlfile";
Example 2
The following example specifies that a fast-start failover should be done if an
ORA-00240 error is raised.
ENABLE FAST_START FAILOVER CONDITION 240;
Example 3
The following example displays output that shows the condition Datafile Write Errors.

Active Target: (none)
Potential Targets: "South_Sales"
South_Sales valid
Observer: (none)
Lag Limit: 300 seconds

Health Conditions:
Stuck Archiver NO

(none)
7.38 ENABLE RECOVERY_APPLIANCE

The ENABLE RECOVERY_APPLIANCE command enables broker management of the specified
Zero Data Loss Recovery Appliance (Recovery Appliance).
Format
ENABLE RECOVERY_APPLIANCE object name ;
Command Parameters
object name
The name of the Recovery Appliance for which you want to enable broker
management.
7-40
Chapter 7
EXIT
Usage Notes
• You must connect to the primary database or to an already enabled standby
database to issue this command.
• Use the SHOW RECOVERY_APPLIANCE command to display information about the
Recovery Appliance.
Command Example
The following example shows how to enable a Recovery Appliance named
DGMGRL> ENABLE RECOVERY_APPLIANCE 'EnterpriseRecoveryAppliance';Enabled.
7.39 EXIT
The EXIT command exits (quits) the broker’s command-line interface.
Format
EXIT;
Command Parameters
None.
Usage Notes
• This command has the same effect as the QUIT command.
• A database connection is not required to execute this command. However, if you
are connected, this command breaks the connection.
Command Example
The following example demonstrates how to exit (quit) the command-line interface.
DGMGRL> EXIT;
7.40 FAILOVER
The FAILOVER command invokes a failover that transitions the named (target) standby
database into the role of a primary database.
This type of failover is referred to as a manual failover. See Manual Failover for more
information.
7-41
Chapter 7
FAILOVER
Note:
Because a failover results in a transition of a standby database to the primary
role, it should be performed when the primary database has failed or is
unreachable and cannot be recovered in a timely manner. Failover may or may
not result in data loss depending on the protection mode in effect at the time of
the failover and whether the target standby database was synchronized with
Use the SWITCHOVER command if the primary database has not failed and you
want the current primary database and a standby database to switch roles with
no data loss.
Format
FAILOVER TO database-name [IMMEDIATE];
Command Parameters
database-name
The name of a physical, logical, or snapshot standby database that you want to fail
over to the primary database role.
Usage Notes
• Always try to perform a complete failover first unless Redo Apply has stopped at
the failover target due to an ORA-752 or ORA-600 [3020] error. If one of these errors
has occurred, then before proceeding follow the guidelines in "Resolving ORA-752
or ORA-600 [3020] During Standby Recovery" in My Oracle Support Note
1265884.1 at http://support.oracle.com. An immediate failover should only be
performed when a complete failover is unsuccessful or in the error case just noted.
• The specified standby database must be enabled before the primary database
fails. However, an enabled standby database that was shut down can be a
candidate for the failover operation. In this case, restart the standby database
using DGMGRL STARTUP command, then issue the FAILOVER command.
• The failover operates on the specified standby database and changes its role to a
primary database. Bystander standby databases (those not involved in the
failover) remain in the standby role.
• Before you issue the FAILOVER command, verify that you are connected to the
standby database that will become the new primary database. If necessary, issue
a CONNECT command to connect to the standby database to which you want to
failover.
• If the FAILOVER command is issued without any options, the standby database
chosen as the failover target applies all unapplied redo it has received before
changing to the primary role. This is referred to as a complete failover.
• If the broker configuration is operating in maximum protection mode, a manual
failover operation will force the protection mode to be maximum performance. The
redo transport service settings are unaffected. You need to restore the desired
protection mode for the resulting configuration after the failover operation.
7-42
Chapter 7
FAILOVER
Note:
With fast-start failover, the broker preserves the protection mode that was
in effect prior to the failover.
• If the FAILOVER command is issued with the IMMEDIATE option, no attempt is made to
apply any unapplied redo that has been received. This option more likely results in
lost application data even when standby redo log files are configured on the
standby database. Additionally, any remaining standby databases in the
configuration cannot function as such until they are reinstated or re-created. See
Reenabling Disabled Databases After a Role Change for more information.
• You can perform a manual failover or set up the broker to perform a fast-start
failover. See the ENABLE FAST_START FAILOVER command for information
about allowing the broker to automatically invoke failover, when conditions warrant
a failover.
• If fast-start failover is enabled, you can perform a complete manual failover only to
the fast-start failover target standby database and only if the fast-start failover
target standby database is synchronized with, or within the lag limit of, the primary
database, and only when the observer is started. You cannot perform an
immediate manual failover when fast-start failover is enabled.
• If Flashback Database was enabled on the former (failed) primary database prior
to the failover, the former primary database can be reinstated using the broker's
REINSTATE command (see the REINSTATE DATABASE command).
If failover was performed to a physical standby database, any other physical

standby databases that were disabled by the failover can be reinstated if
Flashback Database was enabled on the standby database and there are
sufficient flashback logs available. See Reenabling Disabled Databases After a
Role Change for step-by-step instructions.
• The original primary database can only participate in the configuration as a
standby database after it is reinstated or re-created.
Caution:
You should shut down the original primary database if it still has any active
instances running prior to failing over.
See Also:
Reenabling Disabled Databases After a Role Change about reenabling the
original primary database so that it could serve as a standby database to
the primary database
Command Example
The following example performs a failover in which the standby database, South_Sales,
transitions to the primary role:
7-43
Chapter 7
HELP
DGMGRL> FAILOVER TO 'South_Sales';

Performing failover NOW, please wait...
Failover succeeded, new primary is "South_Sales"


Members:
North_Sales - Physical standby database (disabled)
WARNING
7.41 HELP
The DISPLAY command displays online help for the Data Guard command-line
interface.
Format
HELP [command_name];
Command Parameters
command_name
The command for which you want to display help information. If you do not specify a
command, then all commands are listed. The following commands are available:
@ Execute DGMGRL script file
! Host operating system command
/ Repeat the last command
-- Comment to be ignored by DGMGRL
add Adds a member to the broker configuration
connect Connects to an Oracle database instance
convert Converts a database from one type to another
create Creates a broker configuration
disable Disables a configuration, a member, or fast-start failover
edit Edits a configuration or a member
enable Enables a configuration, a member, or fast-start failover
exit Exits the program
failover Changes a standby database to be the primary database
help Displays description and syntax for a command
host Host operating system command
migrate Migrate a pluggable database from one configuration to another.
quit Exits the program
reinstate Changes a database marked for reinstatement into a viable standby
rem Comment to be ignored by DGMGRL
remove Removes a configuration or a member
set Set a property to a specified value
show Displays information about a configuration or a member
shutdown Shuts down a currently running Oracle database instance
spool store input and output of DGMGRL CLI in a file
sql Executes a SQL statement
7-44
Chapter 7
HOST or ! (exclamation point)
start Starts the fast-start failover observer

startup Starts an Oracle database instance
stop Stops the fast-start failover observer
switchover Switches roles between a primary and standby database
validate Performs an exhaustive set of validations for a database
Enter help command_name to see syntax for individual commands.
Usage Notes
• A database connection is not required to execute this command.
Command Example
The following example gets help on the EDIT commands.
DGMGRL> HELP EDIT
7.42 HOST or ! (exclamation point)

The DGMGRL HOST and ! commands allow you to execute operating system
command(s) directly through the DGMGRL console without leaving DGMGRL.
The HOST command and the ! command have the same functionality. They allow you to
submit operating system commands while you are logged in to DGMGRL. The
DGMGRL prompt becomes a shell prompt which accepts operating system
commands. You can also directly submit individual operating system commands to
DGMGRL through the Host or ! command.
Format
HOST [command]
Or alternatively,
! [command]
Command Parameters
command
Represents an operating system command
Usage Notes
• If you simply enter HOST without specifying a command, then the DGMGRL console
becomes an operating system shell prompt until you issue the EXIT command to
return to the DGMGRL console.
• The HOST and ! commands take all the content entered on the command line
after them as input for the operating system shell prompt. See Command Example
2 below.
Command Examples
Example 1
The following example shows the HOST and ! commands being used to execute an
individual operating system command in the DGMGRL console.
7-45
Chapter 7
MIGRATE PLUGGABLE DATABASE
DGMGRL> HOST DATE

Executing operating system command(s):" date"
Fri Oct 23 14:08:42 EDT 2015
DGMGRL>
DGMGRL> ! DATE
Executing operating system command(s):" date"
Fri Oct 23 14:09:20 EDT 2015
DGMGRL>
Example 2
In the following example, both of the DATE commands are executed in the operating
system shell before control is returned to DGMGRL.
DGMGRL> ! DATE;DATE;
Executing operating system command(s):" date;date;"
Fri Oct 23 14:11:40 EDT 2015
Fri Oct 23 14:11:40 EDT 2015
DGMGRL>
7.43 MIGRATE PLUGGABLE DATABASE

The MIGRATE PLUGGABLE DATABASE command lets you migrate a pluggable database
(PDB) from one multitenant container database (CDB) to another on the same host.
You can migrate a PDB from a primary CDB to another primary CDB or failover a PDB
from a standby CDB to a primary CDB. The MIGRATE PLUGGABLE DATABASE command has
the following prerequisites:
• The destination CDB must be created and started in such a way that it can access
the PDB data files at the same file path as the source CDB.
• The source and destination CDBs must each be in a different Data Guard broker
configuration.
• The source CDB can either be a primary database or a physical standby
database.
• If the source CDB is a physical standby database, then
– the source and destination CDBs must be running the same Oracle version
and patches.
– the source and destination CDBs must have the same setting for the
COMPATIBLE initialization parameter.
– the PDB to be migrated must be closed on its primary CDB.

– if a PDB failover will result in lost data, then you must specifically choose to
execute the failover by using the IMMEDIATE option.
• If the source CDB is a primary database, then
– the destination CDB cannot be running a lower version of Oracle.
– the setting of the COMPATIBLE initialization parameter cannot be set to a lower
value on the destination CDB than on the source CDB.
• The services for the PDB must be stopped and removed from the Oracle
Clusterware repository of the source database to be migrated. This should be
done for all databases in the Data Guard broker configuration of the source
database.
7-46
Chapter 7
• The destination CDB must be open.

• You must have SYSDBA privilege for both the source and destination CDBs.
Format
MIGRATE PLUGGABLE DATABASE [IMMEDIATE] pdb-name

TO CONTAINER dest-cdb-name
USING XML-description-file
[CONNECT AS { /@dest-cdb-connect-identifer | dest-cdb-user/dest-
cdb-pass@dest-cdb-connect-identifer} ];
Command Parameters
pdb-name
The name of the PDB to be migrated.
dest-cdb-name
The database unique name of the CDB to receive the PDB to be migrated.
XML-description-file
An XML file that contains the description of the PDB to be migrated. This file is
automatically created by the SQL statements executed by the MIGRATE PLUGGABLE
DATABASE command.
dest-cdb-user
The user name of the user that has SYSDBA access to the destination CDB.
dest-cdb-pass
The password associated with the user name specified for dest-cdb-user.
dest-cdb-connect-identifier
An Oracle Net connect identifier used to reach the destination CDB.
Usage Notes
• By default, when this command is used for PDB failover, the failover attempt is
rejected if there is a possibility of data loss. You can override this default behavior
by using the IMMEDIATE option.
• The IMMEDIATE option is ignored if the source database is a primary database.
• If a connect identifier is specified, then database credentials are used to
authenticate the user on the destination CDB.
• Operating system credentials cannot be used to authenticate the user on the
destination CDB. A connect identifier must be specified; a slash (/) is not
supported.
• For cases in which a slash (/) is used to specify a connect identifier (for example, /
@boston), the credentials are fetched from the wallet.
• The following options are available if you want to specify a connect string:
– /@dest-cdb-connect-identifier (credentials are fetched from the wallet)
– dest-cdb-user/dest-cdb-pass@dest-cdb-connect-identifier (uses database

credentials)
• To prevent the password from being visible on the command line, specify only a
user name with a connect identifier. You will then be prompted for a password.
7-47
Chapter 7
The following options are supported when you supply only a user name and
connect identifier:
– dest-cdb-user@dest-cdb-connect-identifier (uses database credentials)
– dest-cdb-user/@dest-cdb-connect-identifier (uses database credentials)
• If you omit the connect string entirely from the command line, then you will be
prompted for a user name and password. The following options are supported:
– /@dest-cdb-connect-identifier (no prompt for password, credentials are
fetched from the wallet)
– dest-cdb-user@dest-cdb-connect-identifier (uses database credentials)
– dest-cdb-user/@dest-cdb-connect-identifier (uses database credentials)
Command Examples
Example 1: Migrating a PDB From a Primary CDB
DGMGRL> MIGRATE PLUGGABLE DATABASE REGION1 TO CONTAINER NORTH_SALES_NEW USING
REGION1.xml
CONNECT AS sys/mypassword@NORTH_SALES_NEW;
Connected to "NORTH_SALES_NEW"
Connected.
Beginning migration of pluggable database REGION1.

Source multitenant container database is NORTH_SALES.
Destination multitenant container database is NORTH_SALES_NEW.
Closing pluggable database REGION1 on all instances of multitenant container

database NORTH_SALES.
Unplugging pluggable database REGION1 from multitenant container database
NORTH_SALES.
Pluggable database description will be written to REGION1.xml.
Dropping pluggable database REGION1 from multitenant container database NORTH_SALES.
Creating pluggable database REGION1 on multitenant container database
NORTH_SALES_NEW.
Opening pluggable database REGION1 on all instances of multitenant container
database NORTH_SALES_NEW.
Succeeded.
Example 2: Failing over a PDB from a Physical Standby

DGMGRL> MIGRATE PLUGGABLE DATABASE REGION1 TO CONTAINER SOUTH_SALES_NEW
USING REGION1.xml CONNECT AS sys/mypassword@SOUTH_SALES_NEW;
Connected to "SOUTH_SALES_NEW"
Connected.
Beginning migration of pluggable database REGION1.

Source multitenant container database is SOUTH_SALES.
Destination multitenant container database is SOUTH_SALES_NEW.
Continuing with migration of pluggable database REGION1 to multitenant container

database SOUTH_SALES_NEW.
Stopping Redo Apply services on source multitenant container database SOUTH_SALES.
Succeeded.
Opening database SOUTH_SALES.
Opening pluggable database REGION1 on source multitenant container database
SOUTH_SALES to prepare for migration.
Pluggable database description will be written to REGION1.xml.
Closing pluggable database REGION1 on all instances of multitenant container
7-48
Chapter 7
QUIT
database SOUTH_SALES.
Disabling media recovery for pluggable database REGION1.
Closing database SOUTH_SALES.
Restarting redo apply services on source multitenant container database SOUTH_SALES.
Succeeded.
Creating pluggable database REGION1 on multitenant container database
SOUTH_SALES_NEW.
Opening pluggable database REGION1 on all instances of multitenant container
database SOUTH_SALES_NEW.
Unplugging pluggable database REGION1 from multitenant container database
NORTH_SALES.
Dropping pluggable database REGION1 from multitenant container database NORTH_SALES.
Succeeded.
7.44 QUIT
The QUIT command quits (exits) the Data Guard command-line interface.
Format
QUIT;
Command Parameters
None.
Usage Notes
• This command has the same effect as the EXIT command.
• A database connection is not required to execute this command. However, if you
are connected, this command breaks the connection.
Command Example
The following example shows how to quit (exit) the command-line interface.
DGMGRL> QUIT;
7.45 REINSTATE DATABASE

The REINSTATE DATABASE command reinstates a database as a new standby database in
the broker configuration for the current primary database.
Format
REINSTATE DATABASE database-name;
Command Parameters
database-name
The name of the database that is to be reinstated in the broker configuration.
Usage Notes
• If the conditions for reinstatement described in Reinstating the Former Primary
Database in the Broker Configuration are not satisfied, the reinstatement will fail
with an appropriate error status and the specified database will remain disabled.
7-49
Chapter 7
REMOVE CONFIGURATION
• If the database-name specified is that of the old primary and fast-start failover is
enabled, the old primary database will be reinstated as a standby to the new
primary, and the fast-start failover environment will be updated to reflect the
availability of the new standby database. It will accept redo data from the new
primary database and be the target of a fast-start failover should the new primary
database fail. Reinstatement occurs automatically if the observer is running unless
the FastStartFailoverAutoReinstate configuration property is set to FALSE.
• This command does not require that fast-start failover be enabled. It can be used
to reinstate an old primary database after a complete manual failover has been
performed. It can also be used to reinstate a bystander standby database that had
been disabled after either a complete or immediate failover.
• Issue this command while connected to any database in the broker configuration,
except the database that is to be reinstated.
Command Example
The following example reinstates the North_Sales database as a standby database in
DGMGRL> REINSTATE DATABASE 'North_Sales';
Reinstating database "North_Sales", please wait...
7.46 REMOVE CONFIGURATION

The REMOVE CONFIGURATION command removes the Oracle Data Guard broker
configuration and ends broker management of all members in the configuration.
Format
REMOVE CONFIGURATION [ PRESERVE DESTINATIONS ];
Command Parameters
None.
Usage Notes
• When you remove a broker configuration, management of all of the members
associated with that configuration is disabled.
• By default, the command removes the corresponding broker settings of the
LOG_ARCHIVE_DEST_n initialization parameter on the primary database and the
LOG_ARCHIVE_CONFIG initialization parameters on all members of the configuration.
To preserve these settings, use the PRESERVE DESTINATIONS option.
• This command does not remove or affect the actual primary or standby database
instances, databases, far sync instances, data files, control files, initialization
parameter files, server parameter files, or log files of the underlying Oracle Data
Guard configuration.
• You cannot remove the configuration when fast-start failover is enabled.
7-50
Chapter 7
REMOVE DATABASE
Command Examples
The following examples show a successful and an unsuccessful REMOVE CONFIGURATION
command.
Example 1
The following command shows how to remove configuration information from the
configuration file.
Removed configuration
Error: ORA-16532: Data Guard broker configuration does not exist
Configuration details cannot be determined by DGMGRL
Example 2
The following command is unsuccessful because fast-start failover is enabled.
Error: ORA-16654: fast-start failover is enabled
Failed.

Members:
Configuration status:
SUCCESS
7.47 REMOVE DATABASE

The REMOVE DATABASE command removes the specified standby database from the
broker configuration and terminates broker management of that standby database.
Format
REMOVE DATABASE database-name [ PRESERVE DESTINATIONS ];
Command Parameters
database-name
The name of the standby database that you want to remove from the broker
configuration.
Usage Notes
• An error is returned if you specify the name of the primary database in the broker
configuration.
7-51
Chapter 7
REMOVE FAR_SYNC
• By default, this command removes all references to the specified database from all
redo transport initialization parameters at each member of the configuration. To
preserve these settings, use the PRESERVE DESTINATIONS option.
• This command cannot be executed if fast-start failover is enabled and database-
name specifies the name of the target standby database.
Command Example
The following example shows how to remove a database from the Oracle Data Guard

Members:
SUCCESS
DGMGRL> REMOVE DATABASE 'South_Sales';

Removed database "South_Sales" from the configuration.

Members:
SUCCESS
7.48 REMOVE FAR_SYNC

The REMOVE FAR SYNC command removes a far sync instance from an Oracle Data
Format
REMOVE FAR_SYNC far_sync_instance_name;
Command Parameters
The name of the far sync instance to be removed from the broker configuration. It
must match (case-insensitive) the value of the corresponding database
7-52
Chapter 7
REMOVE INSTANCE
Usage Notes
• A far sync instance that has its RedoRoutes property set cannot be removed.
Command Example
The following example removes a far sync instance named dallas from the broker
configuration.
DGMGRL> REMOVE FAR_SYNC 'dallas';
7.49 REMOVE INSTANCE

The REMOVE INSTANCE command removes the specified instance from the broker
configuration.
Format
REMOVE INSTANCE instance-name [ON { DATABASE | FAR_SYNC } object-

name];
Command Parameters
instance-name
The name of the instance (SID) that you want to remove from the broker
configuration.
object-name
The name of the database or the far sync with which the instance-name is associated.
Usage Notes
• The broker automatically adds started instances to the broker configuration.
However, the broker does not automatically remove instances from the database.
The REMOVE INSTANCE command can be used to manually remove any instance that
no longer exists from the configuration.
• If the instance-name is not unique within the configuration, then you must specify
both the database-name or far sync-name, and the instance-name to fully identify
the instance.
• This command is rejected for an instance that is currently active in the broker
configuration.
• This command is rejected if this is the only instance currently associated with a
database or far sync.
Command Example
The following example shows how to remove an instance of the database.
DGMGRL> REMOVE INSTANCE 'south_sales3' ON DATABASE 'South_Sales';
Removed instance "south_sales3" from the database "South_Sales"
7-53
Chapter 7
REMOVE RECOVERY_APPLIANCE
7.50 REMOVE RECOVERY_APPLIANCE

The REMOVE RECOVERY_APPLIANCE command removes the specified Zero Data Loss
Recovery Appliance (Recovery Appliance) from the broker configuration and
terminates broker management of the Recovery Appliance.
Caution:
When you use the REMOVE RECOVERY_APPLIANCE command, the Recovery
Appliance profile information is deleted from the broker configuration file and
cannot be recovered.
Format
REMOVE RECOVERY_APPLIANCE object-name [ PRESERVE DESTINATIONS ];
Command Parameters
object name
The name of the Recovery Appliance whose profile you want to remove from the
Usage Notes
• By default, this command removes the corresponding broker settings of the
LOG_ARCHIVE_DEST_n initialization parameter on the database that was shipping redo
data to the Recovery Appliance and the LOG_ARCHIVE_CONFIG initialization parameter
on all databases in the configuration. To preserve these settings, use the PRESERVE
DESTINATIONS option.
Command Example
The following example shows how to remove a Recovery Appliance from a Data
Members:
EnterpriseRecoveryAppliance - Oracle Backup Appliance

SUCCESS
DGMGRL> REMOVE RECOVERY_APPLIANCE 'EnterpriseRecoveryAppliance';

Removed Oracle Backup Appliance "EnterpriseRecoveryAppliance" from the configuration.

Members:
7-54
Chapter 7
SET ECHO


SUCCESS
7.51 SET ECHO

The SET ECHO command controls whether or not to echo commands that are issued
either at the command-line prompt or from a DGMGRL script.
Format
SET ECHO [ON | OFF];
Usage Notes
• None
Command Example
DGMGRL> SET ECHO ON;
SHOW CONFIGURATION;

Members:
SUCCESS
7.52 SET MASTEROBSERVER TO

The SET MASTEROBSERVER TO command lets you manually change which observer is
recognized as the master observer.
Use the SET MASTEROBSERVER TO command to manually designate which observer is to
be used as the master.
Format
SET MASTEROBSERVER TO observer_name
Command Parameters
observer_name
The name of the observer that you want to be the master observer.
7-55
Chapter 7
SET MASTEROBSERVERHOSTS
Usage Notes
• If the specified observer name does not exist, an error message is returned and
the master observer is not changed
• When this command is issued, the actual switch does not happen until the next
time the primary contacts the target standby, usually within three seconds if fast-
start failover is enabled. You should use the SHOW OBSERVER command to verify that
the switch took place.
• For the manual setting to succeed, the following conditions must be met during the
next fast-start failover ping:
– The target standby is enabled and does not require reinstatement.
– There is no role change, reinstating, or fast-start failover target switch in
progress
Command Example
The following is an example of designating a new observer to be the master.
DGMGRL> SET MASTEROBSERVER TO boston-obsever;
Succeeded.
7.53 SET MASTEROBSERVERHOSTS

The SET MASTEROBSERVERHOSTS command sets the master observer of a broker
configuration to the observer on the target host.
For each broker configuration in a specified group, if it has a backup observer running
on the target host, then set the master observer of this broker configuration to the
observer on the target host.
Format
SET MASTEROBSERVERHOSTS {FOR cfg_group_name} TO host-name;
Command Parameters
cfg_group_name
The name of a broker configuration group, on which you want to move the master
observer to the target host.
host-name
The target host to which you want to move the master observer for the broker
configurations in the specified group.
Usage Notes
• If no cfg_group_name is specified, then this command attempts to switch the
master observer to the specified host for all broker configurations defined in the
observer configuration file.
• The cfg_group_name cannot be the keyword ALL.
• The actual switch does not happen until the next time the primary contacts the
target standby in each broker configuration, usually within three seconds if fast-
7-56
Chapter 7
SET ObserverConfigFile
start failover is enabled. You should use the SHOW OBSERVERS command to verify that
the switch took place.
Command Example
DGMGRL> SET MASTEROBSERVERHOSTS FOR GRP_A TO dgnet0;
7.54 SET ObserverConfigFile

The SET ObserverConfigFile command sets the full path and file name of an observer
configuration file.
An observer configuration file stores information about managed configurations. The
commands START OBSERVING, STOP OBSERVING, and SHOW OBSERVERS read the information
about broker configuration groups from the file specified on this command.
Format
SET ObserverConfigFile = filename
Command Parameters
filename
The full path of an observer configuration file.
Usage Notes
• ObserverConfigFile is a DGMGRL runtime property. It neither resides in broker
configuration metadata nor is persisted to disk. If the observer configuration file
name is not observer.ora or it does not exist in the current working directory, then
you must specify the name every time you start a new DGMGRL client.
• The default value of the property ObserverConfigFile is observer.ora, and its
default location is in the working directory.
• When you issue this command, the name of the configuration file is changed even
if the file you specify does not exist or the content of the file is invalid.
Command Example
DGMGRL> SET ObserverConfigFile = /usr/oracle/observer.ora
7.55 SET TIME

The DGMGRL SET TIME command turns timestamp printing on and off.
The timestamp printing feature records the timestamp as you input each command at
the DGMGRL prompt. This information can be helpful with analysis of DGMGRL
console input and output.
Format
SET TIME [ON | OFF];
Usage Notes
• None
7-57
Chapter 7
SHOW ALL
Command Example
DGMGRL> SET TIME ON;
07/11/2017 09:28:21 DGMGRL> SHOW CONFIGURATION;

Members:
SUCCESS
07/11/2017 09:28:24 DGMGRL> SET TIME OFF;

DGMGRL>
7.56 SHOW ALL

The SHOW ALL command shows the values of DGMGRL CLI properties.
Format
SHOW ALL;
Usage Notes
• None
Command Example
DGMGRL> SHOW ALL;
debug ON
echo OFF
time OFF
observerconfigfile = observer.ora
7.57 SHOW CONFIGURATION

The SHOW CONFIGURATION command displays a summary and status of the broker
configuration.
The summary lists all members included in the broker configuration and other
information pertaining to the broker configuration itself, including the fast-start failover
status.
Format
SHOW CONFIGURATION [VERBOSE | property-name];
7-58
Chapter 7
SHOW CONFIGURATION
Command Parameters
property-name
The name of the property for which you want to display summary information.
See Oracle Data Guard Broker Properties for complete information about properties.
Usage Notes
• Use the SHOW CONFIGURATION VERBOSE command (or the SHOW FAST_START FAILOVER
command) to show the properties related to fast-start failover.
• You can optionally specify either VERBOSE or property-name, but not both.
• The SHOW CONFIGURATION command displays the status of the configuration and its
members as of the last time the health was evaluated. (The health of the
configuration and its members is evaluated once a minute.)
Specifying the VERBOSE keyword forces an immediate health evaluation of the
configuration and its members before the health information is displayed.
• During a rolling upgrade done using the PL/SQL package DBMS_ROLLING, the SHOW
CONFIGURATION command shows Transient logical standby database as the role of
the upgrade target, and ROLLING DATABASE MAINTENANCE IN PROGRESS as the
configuration status. See Example 3.
• The display highlights the current fast-start failover target with an asterisk (*) when
fast-start failover is enabled
Command Examples
Example 1: Showing a Summary of the DRSolution Configuration
The following example provides a summary of the DRSolution configuration for which
fast-start failover is disabled. The output shows a far sync instance named FS in the
broker configuration. The North_Sales database is shipping to FS, and FS is shipping to
South_Sales.

Members:
FS- Far sync instance
South_Sales- Physical standby database
SUCCESS (status updated 20 seconds ago)
Example 2: Showing Detailed Description of the DRSolution Configuration

The following example provides detailed information about the DRSolution
configuration, including configuration properties, and fast-start failover-related
information:
7-59
Chapter 7
SHOW CONFIGURATION

Members:

FS- Far sync instance
South_Sales- (*) Physical standby database
Properties:
TraceLevel = 'USER'
ConfigurationWideServiceName = 'North_Sales_CFG'
Target: South_Sales
WARNING
Example 3: Sample Output During a Rolling Upgrade Performed with the

DBMS_ROLLING Package

Members:

South_Sales - Transient logical standby database
ROLLING DATABASE MAINTENANCE IN PROGRESS
7-60
Chapter 7
SHOW CONFIGURATION WHEN PRIMARY IS
7.58 SHOW CONFIGURATION WHEN PRIMARY IS

The SHOW CONFIGURATION WHEN PRIMARY IS command displays the redo transport
configuration that would be in effect if the specified database were the primary
database.
The display lists all members, but unlike SHOW CONFIGURATION, it does not provide status
or any other configuration information.
Format
SHOW CONFIGURATION WHEN PRIMARY IS database-name;
Command Parameters
database-name
The name of the database for which you want to see what the redo transport
configuration would be if it were the primary database.
Usage Notes
• Use the SHOW CONFIGURATION WHEN PRIMARY IS command to show the redo transport
configuration that would be in effect if the specified database were the primary
database. You can use this information to identify ahead of time any redo transport
configurations that would be incorrect after a role change.
Command Example
The following example provides a summary of the DRSolution configuration before and
after a role change to the South_Sales database.

Members:
North_FS - Far Sync

South_FS - Far Sync
SUCCESS
Members:
South_FS - Far Sync
7-61
Chapter 7
SHOW DATABASE

North_FS - Far Sync
These displays are based upon the RedoRoutes property being set as follows for each
member:
DGMGRL> SHOW DATABASE 'North_Sales' RedoRoutes;
RedoRoutes = '(LOCAL : North_FS)'
DGMGRL> SHOW FAR_SYNC 'North_FS' RedoRoutes;

RedoRoutes = '(North_Sales : South_Sales)'
DGMGRL> SHOW DATABASE 'South_Sales' RedoRoutes;

RedoRoutes = '(LOCAL : South_FS)'
DGMGRL> SHOW FAR_SYNC 'South_FS' RedoRoutes;

RedoRoutes = '(South_Sales : North_Sales)'
7.59 SHOW DATABASE

The SHOW DATABASE command displays information or property values of the specified
database and its instances.
Format
SHOW DATABASE [VERBOSE]database-name [property-name];
Command Parameters
database-name
The name of the database for which you want to display information. The VERBOSE
keyword, if used, must come before the database-name or an error is returned.
property-name
The name of the property for which you want to display a value. If a property name is
specified, the output shows only the specified property (not all properties of the
database), regardless of whether or not the VERBOSE keyword is specified.
See Also:
Usage Notes
• The SHOW DATABASE command shows a brief summary of the database. TheSHOW
DATABASE VERBOSE command shows properties of the database in addition to the
brief summary. They both show the status of the database.
• The SHOW DATABASE VERBOSE command shows the locations of the Oracle alert log
file and of the broker log file. The broker log file is created in the same directory as
the alert log and is named drc<$ORACLE_SID>.log.
• The SHOW DATABASE VERBOSE command shows database-specific properties and
instance-specific properties. For a non-Oracle RAC database, the values of the
instance-specific properties are those of the only instance of the database. For an
7-62
Chapter 7
SHOW DATABASE
Oracle RAC database, the values of the instance-specific properties will not be
shown, although the property names are still listed. To see the instance-specific
values of these properties, use the SHOW INSTANCE command.
• The properties that the SHOW DATABASE VERBOSE command shows depend on the
database role and the configuration composition:
– For the primary database, properties specific to physical or snapshot standby
databases are shown only if there is at least one physical or snapshot standby
database in the configuration. The properties specific to logical standby
databases are shown only if there is at least one logical standby database in
the configuration.
– For physical and snapshot standby databases, properties specific to logical
standby databases are not shown.
– For logical standby databases, properties specific to physical and snapshot
standby databases are not shown.
• This command is rejected if you use the SHOW DATABASE database-name property-
name command to show an instance-specific property in an Oracle RAC database.
• During a rolling upgrade done using the PL/SQL package DBMS_ROLLING, the SHOW
DATABASE command shows a WARNING with an appropriate ORA error for the upgrade
target and the trailing or leading standbys, depending on the current rolling
upgrade progress. See Example 3.
Command Examples
Example 1: Showing Database Information in Abbreviated Format
This example shows database information in an abbreviated format.

Instance(s):
south_sales1
Database Status:
SUCCESS
Example 2: Showing Database Information in Extended Format

This example shows database information in an extended format.
DGMGRL> SHOW DATABASE VERBOSE 'North_Sales';
Role: PRIMARY
Instance(s):
c0
7-63
Chapter 7
SHOW DATABASE
Properties:
RedoRoutes = ''
DelayMins = '0'
MaxFailure = '0'
ReopenSecs = '300'
NetTimeout = '30'
LogShipping = 'ON'
Log file locations:

alert_north1.log
drcnorth1.log
Database Status:
SUCCESS
Example 3: Sample Output for the Target Database During a Rolling Upgrade
Performed With the DBMS_ROLLING Package
7-64
Chapter 7
SHOW FAR_SYNC
Role: Physical standby database

Average Apply Rate: 6.00 KByte/s
Instance(s):
South
ORA-16866: database converted to transient logical standby database for rolling
database maintenance
Database Status:
WARNING
Example 4: Sample Output For the Leading Standby During a Rolling Upgrade
Performed With the DBMS_ROLLING Package
Role: Physical standby database

Average Apply Rate: 510.00 KByte/s
Instance(s):
South
ORA-16881: standby database is not protecting the current primary database
during rolling database maintenance
Database Status:
WARNING
7.60 SHOW FAR_SYNC

The SHOW FAR_SYNC command shows information about a far sync instance.
Format
SHOW FAR_SYNC [VERBOSE] far_sync_instance_name [property-name];
Command Parameters
The name of the far sync instance for which the broker will show information. It must
7-65
Chapter 7
SHOW FAR_SYNC
property-name
specified, the output shows only the specified property (not all properties of the far
sync), regardless of whether or not the VERBOSE keyword is specified.
See Also:
Command Examples
Example 1: Sample SHOW FAR_SYNC Output Without VERBOSE
The following example shows sample output from this command:
DGMGRL> SHOW FAR_SYNC FS;
Far Sync - FS

Instance(s):
fs1
Far Sync Status:

SUCCESS
Example 2: Sample SHOW FAR SYNC Output With VERBOSE

The following example shows sample output from this command when the VERBOSE
option is used:
DGMGRL> SHOW FAR_SYNC VERBOSE FS;
Far Sync - FS

Instance(s):
b02
Properties:
DGConnectIdentifier = 'fs.example.com'
LogXptMode = 'sync'
RedoRoutes = '(North_Sales : South_Sales)
(South_Sales : North_Sales)'
MaxFailure = '0'
ReopenSecs = '300'
NetTimeout = '30'
LogShipping = 'ON'
LogFileNameConvert = '...'
7-66
Chapter 7
SHOW FAST_START FAILOVER
HostName = 'fs.example.com'
SidName = = '(monitor)'
Far Sync Status:

SUCCESS
7.61 SHOW FAST_START FAILOVER

The SHOW FAST_START FAILOVER command displays all fast-start failover related
information.
If there is more than one registered observer running, then the output of this command
shows all registered observers and indicates, with an asterisk, which one is the master
observer. To see information in addition to host names of observers, use the SHOW
OBSERVER command.
Format
SHOW FAST_START FAILOVER;
Command Parameters
None.
Usage Notes
• The SHOW FAST_START FAILOVER command shows a summary of the fast-start failover
configuration.
•
The display shows the current fast-start failover target as well as candidate fast-
start failover targets. If the FastStartFailoverTarget property of the primary
database is set to ANY, then the candidate targets would include the standby
databases that are properly configured for the prevailing protection mode.
Command Examples
Example 1: This example shows the output when there is only one registered
observer running and there are multiple candidate targets.
Target: South_Sales
Candidate Targets: East_Sales, West_Sales
7-67
Chapter 7
SHOW INSTANCE

Health Conditions:
Stuck Archiver NO

(none)
Example 2: This example shows the output when there are multiple registered
observers running. The asterisk symbol (*) indicates which observer is the master.
DGMGRL> SHOW FAST_START FAILOVER
Target: South_Sales
Observers: (*)observer1.example.com
observer2.example.com
observer3.example.com

Health Conditions:
Stuck Archiver NO

(none)
7.62 SHOW INSTANCE

The SHOW INSTANCE command displays information or property values for the specified
instance.
Format
SHOW INSTANCE [VERBOSE] instance-name [property-name] [ON

{DATABASE database-name | FAR_SYNC far-sync-name} ];
Command Parameters
instance-name
The name of the instance for which you want to display information. The VERBOSE
keyword, if used, must come before the instance name.
7-68
Chapter 7
SHOW INSTANCE
property-name
specified, the output shows only the specified property (not all properties), regardless
of whether or not the VERBOSE keyword is specified.
See Also:
database-name | far-sync-name
The name of the database or far sync associated with the instance for which you want
to show information.
Usage Notes
• The SHOW INSTANCE command shows a brief summary of the instance. TheSHOW
INSTANCE VERBOSE command shows properties of the instance in addition to the brief
summary. They both show the status of the instance.
•
The SHOW INSTANCE VERBOSE command shows the locations of the Oracle alert log
file and of the broker log file. The broker log file is created in the same directory as
the alert log and is named drc<$ORACLE_SID>.log.
• The SHOW INSTANCE VERBOSE command only shows instance-specific properties.
• The properties that the SHOW INSTANCE VERBOSE command shows depend on the
database role and the configuration composition:
– For instances of the primary database, properties specific to physical or
snapshot standby instances are shown only if there is at least one physical or
snapshot standby database in the configuration. The properties specific to
logical standby instances are shown only if there is at least one logical standby
database in the configuration.
– For instances of physical or snapshot standby databases, properties specific
to logical standby instances are not shown.
– For instances of logical standby databases, properties specific to physical and
snapshot standby instances are not shown.
Command Examples
Example 1: Showing Instance Information in Abbreviated Format
The following example shows information about a specific instance of a database.
DGMGRL> SHOW INSTANCE 'north_sales1';
Instance 'north_sales1' of database 'North_Sales'
Instance Status:
SUCCESS
7-69
Chapter 7
SHOW OBSERVER
Example 2: Showing Instance Information in Extended Format

The following example shows instance information in an extended format.
DGMGRL> SHOW INSTANCE VERBOSE 'north_sales1';
Instance 'north_sales1' of database 'North_Sales'
Host Name: north.example.com

PFILE:
Properties:
(HOST=north.example.com)(PORT=2094))
OnlineArchiveLocation = 'USE_DB_RECOVERY_FILE_DEST'
OnlineAlternateLocation = ''
LogArchiveFormat = 'r_%d_%t_%s_%R.arc'
HostName = '(monitor)'
SidName = '(monitor)'
Log file locations:

Alert log : /u01/oracle/diag/rdbms/orclbi/orclbi/trace/
alert_South_Sales.log
Data Guard Broker log : /u01/oracle/diag/rdbms/orclbi/orclbi/trace/
drc_South_Sales.log
Instance Status:
SUCCESS
7.63 SHOW OBSERVER

The SHOW OBSERVER command shows information about all registered observers in a
Data Guard broker configuration.
The SHOW OBSERVER command displays the observer name, the host name where the
observer is running, whether the observer is the master observer, and the last time the
observer pinged the primary and standby. It shows this information for all the
observers (up to 3) in this single configuration.
FORMAT
SHOW OBSERVER;
Command Parameters
None
Usage Notes
• This command requires a DGMGRL session, which submits this command, to be
connected to a single configuration.
7-70
Chapter 7
SHOW ObserverConfigFile
Command Example
The following example SHOW OBSERVER command displays information about all
registered observers in the DRSolution broker configuration.
DGMGRL> SHOW OBSERVER;
Active Target Standby: South_Sales
Observer "ob2" - Master



7.64 SHOW ObserverConfigFile

The SHOW ObserverConfigFile command shows the value of the ObserverConfigFile
property.
Format
SHOW ObserverConfigFile;
Command Parameters
None.
Usage Notes
• If the value of the ObserverConfigFile property is an empty string, then the output is
current_working_directory/observer.ora.
• The SHOW ObserverConfigFile command attempts to parse the file pointed by the
ObserverConfigFile property. If the file does not exist or parsing fails, then a
message is returned that the file is not usable.
Command Example
DGMGRL> SHOW ObserverConfigFile;
ObserverConfigFile=/usr/oracle/observer
observer configuration file parsing succeeded
7-71
Chapter 7
SHOW OBSERVERS
7.65 SHOW OBSERVERS

The SHOW OBSERVERS command shows information about all observers for all broker
configurations in a specific configuration group.
The SHOW OBSERVERS command displays the observer name, the host name where the
observer is running, whether the observer is the master observer, and the last time the
observer pinged the primary and standby.
Format
SHOW OBSERVERS [FOR cfg_group_name ];
Command Parameters
cfg_group_name
The name of a valid broker configuration group file for which you want to show
information about all running observers. Specifying this parameter results in
information being shown about observers for all configurations in the specified group.
The information shown by this command is the same as that shown by a SHOW
OBSERVER command on an individual configuration.
If a group name is not specified, then SHOW OBSERVERS alone is also a valid command. It
shows observer information for all broker configuration groups defined in the observer
configuration file.
The configuration group name cannot be ALL.
Usage Notes
• This command can be used to verify that a manually performed switch to a new
master observer was successful.
Command Example
DGMGRL> SHOW OBSERVERS;
ObserverConfigFile=observer.ora
Submit command SHOW OBSERVER using the connect identifier 'North_Sales'.
Configuration - DrSolution1
Target: South_Sales
Observer DRSolution1_Observer - Master

Submit command SHOW OBSERVER using the connect identifier 'East_Sales'.

Connected to "East_Sales"
Configuration - DRSolution2
Primary: East_Sales
Target: West_Sales
7-72
Chapter 7
SHOW RECOVERY_APPLIANCE
Observer DRSolution2_Observer - Master

7.66 SHOW RECOVERY_APPLIANCE

The SHOW RECOVERY_APPLIANCE command displays information or property values of the
specified Zero Data Loss Recovery Appliance (Recovery Appliance).
Format
SHOW RECOVERY_APPLIANCE [VERBOSE] object name [property name];
Command Parameters
object name
The name of the Recovery Appliance for which you want to display information. The
VERBOSE keyword, if used, must come before the Recovery Appliance name or an error
is returned.
property name
specified, the output shows only the specified property (not all properties of the
Recovery Appliance), regardless of whether or not the VERBOSE keyword is specified.
Usage Notes
• The SHOW RECOVERY_APPLIANCE command shows a brief summary of the Recovery
Appliance. The SHOW RECOVERY_APPLIANCE VERBOSE command shows properties of
the Recovery Appliance in addition to the brief summary. They both show the
status of the database.
• The SHOW RECOVERY_APPLIANCE VERBOSE command shows Recovery Appliance-
specific properties.
Command Examples
Example 1: Recovery Appliance Information in Abbreviated Format
The following example shows Recovery Appliance information in an abbreviated
format.
Redo Source: South_Sales
Oracle Backup Appliance Status:

SUCCESS
Example 2: Recovery Appliance Information in Extended Format

The following example uses the VERBOSE parameter to show Recovery Appliance
information in an extended format.
7-73
Chapter 7
SHUTDOWN
DGMGRL> SHOW RECOVERY_APPLIANCE VERBOSE 'EnterpriseRecoveryAppliance';
Oracle Backup Appliance - EnterpriseRecoveryAppliance
Transport Lag: 0
Redo Source: South_Sales
Properties:
DGConnectIdentifier = 'South_Sales.example.com'
DelayMins = '0'
MaxFailure = '0'
ReopenSecs = '300'
NetTimeout = '30'
LogShipping = 'ON'
RedoSource = 'South_Sales'
Database Status:
SUCCESS
7.67 SHUTDOWN
Shuts down a currently running Oracle instance.
Format
SHUTDOWN [ ABORT | IMMEDIATE | NORMAL ];
Command Parameters
None.
Usage Notes
• Using the SHUTDOWN command with no arguments is equivalent to using the
SHUTDOWN NORMAL command.
• The following list describes the options to the SHUTDOWN command:

– ABORT
Proceeds with the fastest possible shutdown of the database without waiting
for calls to complete or for users to disconnect from the database.
Uncommitted transactions are not rolled back. Client SQL statements being
processed are terminated. All users connected to the database are implicitly
disconnected, and the next database startup will require instance recovery.
You must use this option if a background process terminates abnormally.
7-74
Chapter 7
SPOOL
Caution:
If you use the ABORT option on the primary database when fast-start
failover is enabled and the observer is running, a fast-start failover may
ensue. Use the IMMEDIATE or NORMAL option to prevent an unexpected
fast-start failover from occurring.
– IMMEDIATE
Does not wait for current calls to complete or users to disconnect from the
database. Further connections are prohibited. The database is closed and
dismounted. The instance is shut down, and no instance recovery is required
on the next database startup.
– NORMAL
This is the default option. The process waits for users to disconnect from the
database. Further connections are prohibited. The database is closed and
dismounted. The instance is shut down, and no instance recovery is required
on the next database startup.
Command Example
The following command shuts down the primary database in normal mode.
DGMGRL> SHUTDOWN;
Database closed.
Oracle instance shut down.
7.68 SPOOL
The SPOOL command records the input and output of DGMGRL to a file.
Format
The SPOOL command has three possible formats:
SPOOL;
SPOOL spool-file-name [CREATE | REPLACE | APPEND];
SPOOL OFF;
If you simply enter SPOOL at the DGMGRL command prompt, then the current spool file
name is displayed.
Otherwise, the available spooling options are defined as follows:
• CREATE—Create a new log file. If a spool file with the specified name already exists,
the SPOOL command fails.
• REPLACE—Replace the existing spool file of the name specified. This is the default
behavior if no option is specified.
• APPEND—Append the new log into the specified log file, if it exists. Otherwise create
a new one.
7-75
Chapter 7
SQL
• OFF—Turns spooling off.
Command Parameters
spool-file-name
The name of the file to which DGMGRL input and output will be written.
Usage Notes
• None
Command Example
The following example shows the output of the SPOOL command before and after
spooling is started.
DGMGRL> SPOOL;
not spooling currently
DGMGRL> SPOOL mysession;
DGMGRL> SPOOL;
currently spooling to "mysession"
DGMGRL>
7.69 SQL
The SQL command executes a SQL statement or a PL/SQL stored procedure.
Format
SQL "sql_statmement"
Command Parameters
sql_statement
The SQL statement or PL/SQL stored procedure to be executed.
Usage Notes
• The SQL statement or PL/SQL stored procedure to be executed must be enclosed
in double quotation marks.
• Do not include a semi-colon (;) after the SQL statement to be executed.
• If the string that DGMGRL passes to PL/SQL contains a filename, then the
filename must be enclosed in single quotation marks and the entire string following
the SQL command must be enclosed in double quotation marks. For example, use
the following syntax:
SQL "CREATE TABLESPACE temp1 DATAFILE '?/oradata/trgt/temp1.dbf' SIZE 10M
TEMPORARY"
• You cannot execute SELECT statements.
Command Example
The following command opens the database.
7-76
Chapter 7
START OBSERVER
DGMGRL> SQL "alter database open"
7.70 START OBSERVER

The START OBSERVER command starts a fast-start failover observer on this host (where
the DGMGRL session is running), if there is no registered observer running on this
host for this configuration.
Before using this command, you must first issue a CONNECT command to log into a
specific broker configuration. Otherwise, an error message is returned stating that you
are not logged on.
Format
START OBSERVER [observer-name] [FILE IS observer-file] [LOGFILE IS

logfile] [TRACE LEVEL IS USER | SUPPORT];
Command Parameters
observer-name
A name to identify observers within the same Data Guard broker configuration.
• No two observers on the same Data Guard broker configuration can have the
same name.
observer-file
Specifies the path and name of the runtime data file. If not specified, then the file
name defaults to fsfo.dat and the path is the current working directory.
log-file
The full path name of the observer log file. Each observer has its own log file.
Usage Notes
• You can register up to three observers to monitor a single Data Guard broker
configuration. Each observer is identified by a name that you supply when you
issue the START OBSERVER command. See Installing and Starting the Observer.
• The optional clause TRACE_LEVEL IS lets you control the amount of tracing done and
written to the observer log file. The default value is USER, which limits the observer
log contents to tracing information about fast-start failover, status changes of the
primary and target standby database, and error/warning messages. Setting
TRACE_LEVEL to SUPPORT increases the amount of tracing information to include
lower-level information needed by Oracle Support Services.
• The Oracle Client Administrator kit, or the full Oracle Database Enterprise Edition
or Oracle Personal Edition kit must be installed on the observer computer to
monitor a broker configuration for which fast-start failover is to be enabled. See
Prerequisites for Enabling Fast-Start Failover for more information.
• The START OBSERVER command must be issued on the observer computer. Once the
observer is successfully started, control is not returned to the user until the
7-77
Chapter 7
START OBSERVER
observer is stopped (for example, by issuing the STOP OBSERVER command

from a different client connection). If you want to perform further interaction with
the broker configuration, you must connect through another client.
For information about how to start the observer in the background, see START
OBSERVER IN BACKGROUND.
• If the LOGFILE IS clause is used, then all observer output is recorded in the
specified file. If the specified log file is not accessible, or the LOGFILE IS clause is
not used, then observer output is sent to standard output. Observer output is
useful for troubleshooting problems with the observer and with fast-start failover in
general.
• If a directory path is not specified with the FILE IS parameter, the observer
searches the current working directory for the fsfo.dat file. If an fsfo.dat file is not
found and this is the first time the START OBSERVER command is issued, the observer
creates a fsfo.dat file.
• The primary and target standby database DB_UNIQUE_NAME initialization parameter
and connect identifiers are stored in the fsfo.dat configuration file. Oracle
recommends you ensure this file is protected from unauthorized access.
• Fast-start failover does not need to be enabled before you issue this command.
– If fast-start failover is enabled, the observer will retrieve primary and target
standby connect identifiers from the broker configuration and begin monitoring
the configuration.
– If fast-start failover is not enabled, the observer continually monitors for when
fast-start failover is enabled.
• Only the primary database needs to be running when you issue this command; the
standby database that will be the target of a fast-start failover does not need to be
running in order for this command to complete successfully.
• Use the SHOW OBSERVER command or the SHOW CONFIGURATION VERBOSE command, or
query the V$FS_FAILOVER_OBSERVERS view on the primary database to see the status
of the observer and its host computer.
• If the primary and target standby databases stay connected but they lose the
connection to the observer, then the primary database goes into an unobserved
state. This state is reported by the broker's health check capability.
• The SHOW OBSERVER command indicates whether one or more observers have
already been started.
If the SHOW OBSERVER command shows one or more registered observers, but some
of them are no longer running for some reason, then you can do either of the
following:
– Issue the START OBSERVER command on the same observer computer where it
was started originally, with the observer configuration file used when the
observer was first started.
– Issue the STOP OBSERVER command and then the START OBSERVER command on
any computer to start the observer.
If the SHOW OBSERVER command shows one or more observers and one observer is
already running at one location, then an attempt to start an observer at that
location again will fail with the following error:
Unable to open the observer file
7-78
Chapter 7
START OBSERVER IN BACKGROUND
If the SHOW OBSERVER command shows three registered observers and you attempt
to start an observer at a different location, then the command will fail with the
following error:
ORA-16647: could not start more than three observers
Command Examples
Example 1: Starting the Observer
The following example shows how to start the observer.
Password: password
Connected as SYSDG.
Observer started
Example 2: Starting the Observer Without Showing Credentials

The following example shows how to start the observer using CONNECT '/' so that
connection credentials are not visible on the command line:
DGMGRL> CONNECT /@North_Sales.example.com;
Observer started.
You must set up Oracle Wallet or SSL to use CONNECT '/'. By setting up Oracle Wallet
or SSL, you can write a script to securely start and run the observer as a background
job without specifying database credentials in the script. When using Oracle Wallet as
a secure external password store, be sure to add credentials for both the primary and
fast-start failover target standby databases. The database connect string that you
specify when adding the credentials for each database must match the
ObserverConnectIdentifer or DGConnectIdentifier database property.
7.71 START OBSERVER IN BACKGROUND

The START OBSERVER IN BACKGROUND command starts a fast-start failover observer on this
host (where this DGMGRL session is running) as a background process.
After this command is issued, DGMGRL reports whether the START OBSERVER IN
BACKGROUND command submitted successfully. If yes, then control returns to the user.
(This is different behavior from the START OBSERVER command, in which control does not
return to the user after the observer is started.)
This command uses Oracle wallet to obtain credentials to log into the database server
and register observers. Even if you have successfully connected to a database server
in the broker configuration using the CONNECT command, this command ignores the
existing connection and uses the credentials stored in Oracle wallet. If the wallet is not
configured, then the command will fail to start the Observer.
Format
START OBSERVER [observer-name] IN BACKGROUND [FILE IS observer-

file] [LOGFILE IS log-file]
7-79
Chapter 7
START OBSERVER IN BACKGROUND
CONNECT IDENTIFIER IS connect-identifier [TRACE_LEVEL IS USER |

SUPPORT];
Command Parameters
observer-name
The name to identify observers within the same data guard broker configuration.
• No two observers on the same Data Guard Broker configuration can have the
same name.
observer-file
Specifies the path and name of the runtime data file. If not specified, then the file
name defaults to fsfo.dat and the path is the current working directory.
log-file
The full path of the observer log file. Each observer has its own log file.
connect-identifier
The connect identifier for a database in the broker configuration that the fast-start
failover observer will monitor. Oracle wallet uses this identifier as the key to search
oracle wallet.
Usage Notes
• Even if the START OBSERVER command is submitted successfully, the observer might
fail to start due to credential problems, intermittent network connections, or failure
on observer registration. To verify that the observer started successfully, use the
SHOW OBSERVERS command or check the observer log file.
• This command ignores any connections you have made to a specific configuration
member using the CONNECT command. In other words, even if you have not
connected to a specific member in the broker configuration, you can still start an
observer by using the START OBSERVER IN BACKGROUND command.
• If you have connected to a specific configuration member before issuing the START
OBSERVER IN BACKGROUND command, then you can continue to use the connection
after the control is returned.
• If the observer-file parameter is not specified with the FILE IS parameter, then the
observer searches the current working directory for the fsfo.dat file. If it is not
found, then the observer creates a fsfo.dat file.
• If the log-file parameter is not specified, then a file named observer.log in the
current working directory is used as the observer log file. If this file does not exist,
it is created.
• The optional clause TRACE_LEVEL IS lets you control the amount of tracing done and
written to the observer log file. The default value is USER, which limits the observer
log contents to tracing information about fast-start failover, status changes of the
primary and target standby database, and error/warning messages. Setting
TRACE_LEVEL to SUPPORT increases the amount of tracing information to include
lower-level information needed by Oracle Support Services.
7-80
Chapter 7
START OBSERVING
Command Example
DGMGRL> START OBSERVER observer1 IN BACKGROUND
FILE IS /net/sales/dat/oracle/broker/fsfo.dat
LOGFILE IS /net/sales/dat/oracle/broker/observer.log
CONNECT IDENTIFIER IS sales_p;
Submitted command "START OBSERVER" using connect identifier "sales_p"
7.72 START OBSERVING

The START OBSERVING command starts a new observer for each broker configuration in
the specified group.
The effect of the START OBSERVING command is equivalent to submitting a START
OBSERVER command on each individual configuration.
Format
START OBSERVING [cfg_group_name];
Command Parameters
cfg_group_name
The name of a broker configuration group, in which you want to start one observer for
each broker configuration.
Usage Notes
• If no cfg_group_name is specified, then this command will start a new observer for
each configuration defined in the observer configuration file.
Command Example
DGMGRL> START OBSERVING;
ObserverConfigFile=/net/oracle/dataguard/observer.ora
Submitted command “START OBSERVER” using connect identifier "cfg1_cid".
Check superobserver.log and individual observer logs for execution details.
DGMGRL> START OBSERVING GRP_A;

7.73 STARTUP
The STARTUP command starts an Oracle database instance, and allows you to specify a
number of options.
7-81
Chapter 7
STARTUP
The options you can specify are as follows:

• FORCE: shuts down the current Oracle instance in the SHUTDOWN ABORT mode before
restarting it.
• RESTRICT: allows only Oracle users with the RESTRICTED SESSION system privilege to
connect to the instance.
• PFILE: specifies the PFILE initialization parameter file to be used when the database
instance is started.
• MOUNT: mounts the specified database without opening it.
• OPEN: mounts and opens the specified database.
• NOMOUNT: starts the specified database instance without mounting the database.
Format
STARTUP [FORCE] [RESTRICT] [PFILE=filename] [MOUNT | OPEN

[open_options] | NOMOUNT];
Command Parameters
filename
The name of the initialization parameter file to be used when starting the database
instance. If you do not specify the PFILE parameter option, then the default server
parameter file (specific to your operating system) is used.
open-options
The mode of access in which you want the specified database to start. The possible
modes are:
READ ONLY
READ WRITE
Usage Notes
• Using the STARTUP command with no arguments is equivalent to using the STARTUP
OPEN command.
• If you do not use the FORCE clause when you use the STARTUP command and the
current database instance is running, an error results. The FORCE clause is useful
when you are debugging or when error conditions are occurring. Otherwise, it
should not be used.
• Use the RESTRICT clause to allow only Oracle users with the RESTRICTED SESSION
system privilege to connect to the instance. Later, you can use the ALTER SYSTEM
command through SQL*Plus to disable the restricted session feature.
• If you do not use the PFILE clause to specify the initialization parameter file, the
STARTUP command uses the default server parameter file, if it exists. Otherwise, the
STARTUP command uses the default initialization parameter file. The default files are
platform specific.
See your operating system-specific documentation for more information about the
default parameter files.
• Use the OPEN clause to mount and open the specified database.
• The NOMOUNT clause starts the database instance without mounting the database.
You cannot use the NOMOUNT clause with the MOUNT or OPEN options.
7-82
Chapter 7
STOP OBSERVER
Command Examples
Example 1: Two Methods for Starting a Database Instance
The following examples show two different methods for starting a database instance.
Each command starts a database instance using the standard parameter file, mounts
the default database in exclusive mode, and opens the database.
DGMGRL> STARTUP;
DGMGRL> STARTUP OPEN;
Example 2: Shutting Down the Current Instance and Restarting Without

Mounting or Opening It
The following command shuts down the current instance, immediately restarts it
without mounting or opening the database, and allows only users with restricted
session privileges to connect to it.
DGMGRL> STARTUP FORCE RESTRICT NOMOUNT;
Example 3: Starting (But Not Mounting) an Instance Using a Parameter File

The following command starts an instance using the parameter file testparm without
mounting the database.
DGMGRL> STARTUP PFILE=testparm NOMOUNT;
Example 4: Starting and Mounting an Instance Without Opening It

The following example starts and mounts a database instance, but does not open it.
DGMGRL> STARTUP MOUNT;
7.74 STOP OBSERVER

The STOP OBSERVER command stops the fast-start failover observer.
Format
STOP OBSERVER [observer-name | ALL];
Command Parameters
observer-name
The name of the observer you want to stop. If a name is not specified and there is
only one registered observer for the configuration, then it will be stopped; if there is
more than one registered observer in the configuration, then an error message is
returned.
The ALL keyword stops all observers registered in this broker configuration.
Usage Notes
• You can issue this command while connected to any database in the broker
configuration.
• This command does not disable fast-start failover, but a fast-start failover cannot
be initiated in the absence of an observer.
7-83
Chapter 7
STOP OBSERVING
• Fast-start failover does not need to be enabled when you issue this command.
• If fast-start failover is enabled when you issue the STOP OBSERVER command, then
the primary and standby databases must be connected and communicating with
each other. Otherwise the following error is returned:
ORA-16636 fast-start failover target standby in error state, cannot stop observer
If connectivity does not exist between the primary and standby databases, you can
issue the DISABLE FAST_START FAILOVER FORCE command on the primary database
and then issue the STOP OBSERVER command. Note that disabling fast-start failover
with the FORCE option on a primary database that is disconnected from the observer
and the target standby database does not prevent the observer from initiating a
fast-start failover to the target standby database.
• If fast-start failover is not enabled when you issue the STOP OBSERVER command,
then only the primary database must be running when you stop the observer.
• The observer does not stop immediately when the STOP OBSERVER command is
issued. The observer does not discover it has been stopped until the next time the
observer contacts the broker.
As soon as you have issued the STOP OBSERVER command, you may enter the START
OBSERVER command again on any computer. You can start a new observer right
away, even if the old observer has not yet discovered it was stopped. Any attempt
to restart the old observer will fail, because a new observer has been started for
• The STOP OBSERVER command fails if a switch to a new fast-start failover target or
new master observer is underway.
• The STOP OBSERVER command fails if there are two or more registered observers
and you attempt to stop only the master.
Command Example
The following example stops all observers running in the broker configuration .
DGMGRL> STOP OBSERVER ALL;
7.75 STOP OBSERVING

The STOP OBSERVING command stops all local observers running on this host (where
this DGMGRL session is running) for all broker configurations in a specific group.
Format
STOP OBSERVING [cfg_group_name] [TRACE_LEVEL= USER | SUPPORT];
Command Parameters
cfg_group_name
The name of a broker configuration group, on which you want to stop local observers
running on this host (where DGMGRL is running).
TRACE_LEVEL
The optional clause TRACE_LEVEL IS lets you control the amount of tracing done and
written to the observer log file. The default value is USER, which limits the observer log
7-84
Chapter 7
SWITCHOVER
contents to tracing information about fast-start failover, status changes of the primary
and target standby database, and error/warning messages. Setting TRACE_LEVEL to
SUPPORT increases the amount of tracing information to include lower-level information
needed by Oracle Support Services.
Usage Notes
• If no cfg_group_name is specified, then this command stops all LOCAL observers
running on this host (where this DGMGRL session is running) for all broker
configurations defined in the observer configuration file.
Command Example
DGMGRL> STOP OBSERVING;
Submitted command "STOP OBSERVER HOST IS OBM1" using connect identifier cfg1_cid.
DGMGRL> STOP OBSERVING GRP_A;

7.76 SWITCHOVER
When you issue the SWITCHOVER command, the current primary database becomes a
standby database, and the specified standby database becomes the primary
database.
This is known as a switchover operation.
Format
SWITCHOVER TO database_name [WAIT [timeout_in_seconds]];
The WAIT option specifies that you want to wait for sessions to drain before proceeding
with the switchover. The broker determines the maximum drain_timeout value for all
currently active services and waits for up to that amount of time for all current client
requests to be processed, before proceeding with the switchover. The drain-timeout
value is an option that is specified on the SRVCTL utility's add service command. The
WAIT option has no effect on a single instance database; it is valid only when services
are configured with attributes related to Application Continuity in Oracle Clusterware.
You can also optionally specify the number of seconds to wait for sessions to drain.
The value you specify overrides the drain_timeout value.
7-85
Chapter 7
SWITCHOVER
Command Parameters
database-name
The name of the standby database you want to change to the primary database role.
timeout-in-seconds
The time allowed for resource draining to be completed, in seconds, before the
switchover operation proceeds.
Permitted values are "" (an empty string), 0 (zero), or any positive integer. The default
value is an empty string indicating that this option is not set. If the value is zero, then
draining occurs immediately. During the draining period, all current client requests are
processed, but new requests are not accepted.
Usage Notes
• If fast-start failover is enabled, you may switch over only to the fast-start failover
target standby database.
• The broker verifies that the primary and standby databases are in the following
states before starting the switchover:
– The primary database must be enabled and in the TRANSPORT-ON state so redo
transport services are started.
– The standby database must be enabled and in the APPLY-ON state, with log
apply services started.
• The broker allows the switchover to proceed as long as there are no redo transport
services errors for the standby database that you selected to participate in the
switchover. However, errors occurring for any other bystander standby database
will not prevent the switchover from proceeding.
• Switchover to a logical standby database is not allowed when the configuration is
operating in maximum protection mode.
• If the broker configuration is operating in either maximum protection mode or
maximum availability mode, the switchover maintains the protection mode even
after the operation (described in Before You Perform a Switchover Operation). The
switchover will not be allowed if the mode cannot be maintained because the
target standby database of the switchover was the only standby that satisfied the
protection mode requirement.
• If the standby database that is assuming the primary role is a physical standby
database, then the old primary database will be restarted after the switchover
completes. If the standby database is a logical standby database, then neither the
primary database nor the logical standby database is restarted.
• If the standby database that is assuming the primary role is a physical standby
database, then the original primary becomes a physical standby database.
• If the standby database that is assuming the primary role is a logical standby
database, then the original primary becomes a logical standby database.
• If an Oracle RAC primary database is becoming a physical standby database, all
but one instance of the primary database will be shut down before performing the
switchover. See Switchover for details.
• You cannot switchover to a snapshot standby database.
7-86
Chapter 7
SWITCHOVER
• If the standby database that is assuming the primary role is a logical standby
database and there are physical standby databases in the configuration, after the
switchover, the physical standby databases will be disabled.
Caution:
For this reason, Oracle generally recommends that you specify your
physical standby database for switchover instead of your logical standby
database. If you must switch over to your logical standby database, see
Reenabling Disabled Databases After a Role Change to re-create your
physical standby database.
If you intend to switch back to the original primary database relatively soon,
you may allow the physical and snapshot standbys to remain disabled.
Once you have completed the switchover back to the original primary, you
may then reenable the physical and snapshot standby databases since
they are still viable standbys for the original primary database.
Command Examples
Example 1: Successful Switchover From Physical to Primary
The following example shows a successful switchover in which the physical standby
database, South_Sales, transitions into the primary role.
Operation requires shutdown of instance "north_sales1" on database "North_Sales"
Shutting down instance "north_sales1"...
ORA-01109: database not open
Database mounted.
Switchover succeeded, new primary is "South_Sales"
Example 2: Unsuccessful Switchover Due to Use of O/S Authentication

If you connect to the database using operating system authentication, you can use any
username and password to connect. However, DGMGRL may not be able to shut
down and start up the primary and standby database automatically because it cannot
remotely authenticate itself.
The following example shows a switchover that succeeded but returns an error
because DGMGRL cannot shut down and start up the primary and standby databases.
Operation requires shutdown of instance "north_sales1" on database "North_Sales"
Shutting down instance "north_sales1"...
ORA-01031: insufficient privileges
Warning: You are no longer connected to ORACLE.
7-87
Chapter 7
VALIDATE DATABASE
Please complete the following steps to finish switchover:

shut down instance "north_sales1" of database "North_Sales"
start up and mount instance "north_sales1" of database "North_Sales"
Note:
For DGMGRL to restart instances automatically, you must connect to the
database using the same credentials given in the last CONNECT command, even if
the last CONNECT command was used to connect to another database.
You must manually issue the SHUTDOWN and STARTUP commands to restart the
new primary and any standby instances that may have been shut down.
7.77 VALIDATE DATABASE

The VALIDATE DATABASE command performs a comprehensive set of database checks
prior to a role change.
The checks use information available in various Oracle Data Guard views as well as
the Automatic Diagnostic Repository.
Format
VALIDATE DATABASE [VERBOSE] database-name;
Command Parameters
database-name
Usage Notes
The VALIDATE DATABASE command shows a brief summary of the database, and reports
any errors or warnings that were detected. VALIDATE DATABASE VERBOSE shows
everything in the brief summary plus all items that were validated.
Command Examples
The examples in this section show what the VALIDATE DATABASE command output might
look like in both the brief and verbose forms for primary and standby databases.
The examples in this section show what the VALIDATE DATABASE command output might
look like in both the brief and verbose forms for primary and standby databases.
Example 1: VALIDATE DATABASE Output in Brief Format for a Primary
The following example shows brief output for a primary database:
7-88
Chapter 7
VALIDATE DATABASE
Example 2: VALIDATE DATABASE Output in Brief Format for a Logical Standby

The following example shows brief output for a logical standby database:
DGMGRL> VALIDATE DATABASE 'West_Sales';


Warning: Physical and snapshot standby databases will
Example 3: VALIDATE DATABASE Output in Brief Format for a Physical Standby

The following example shows brief output for a physical standby database:
DGMGRL> VALIDATE DATABASE 'North_Sales';


Example 4: VALIDATE DATABASE Output in Verbose Format for a Primary

The following example shows verbose output for a primary database:
DGMGRL> VALIDATE DATABASE VERBOSE 'South_Sales';
Capacity Information:
Database Instances Threads
South_Sales 2 2
Temporary Tablespace File Information:

South_Sales TEMP Files: 2
Flashback Database Status:

South_Sales: On
Data file Online Move in Progress:

South_Sales: No
Transport-Related Information:
Transport On: Yes
Log Files Cleared:

South_Sales Standby Redo Log Files: Cleared
Automatic Diagnostic Repository Errors:

Error South_Sales
No logging operation NO
Control file corruptions NO
System data file missing NO
System data file corrupted NO
System data file offline NO
7-89
Chapter 7
VALIDATE DATABASE
User data file missing NO

User data file corrupted NO
User data file offline NO
Block Corruptions found NO
Example 5: VALIDATE DATABASE Output in Verbose Format for a Logical

Standby
The following command shows verbose output for a logical standby database:
DGMGRL> VALIDATE DATABASE VERBOSE 'West_Sales';

Warning: Logical and snapshot standby databases will
South_Sales 2 2
West_Sales 2 2

West_Sales TEMP Files: 2

South_Sales: On
West_Sales: On

South_Sales: No
West_Sales: No
Standby Apply-Related Information:

Apply State: Running
Apply Lag: 0 seconds
Apply Delay: 0 minutes
Transport On: Yes
Gap Status: No Gap
Transport Status: Success
Log Files Cleared:

West_Sales Online Redo Log Files: Not applicable for this database
West_Sales Standby Redo Log Files: Available
Current Log File Groups Configuration:

Thread # Online Redo Log Groups Standby Redo Log Groups Status
(South_Sales) (West_Sales)
1 4 5 Sufficient SRLs
Future Log File Groups Configuration:

(West_Sales) (South_Sales)
7-90
Chapter 7
VALIDATE DATABASE
Current Configuration Log File Sizes:

Thread # Smallest Online Redo Smallest Standby Redo
Log File Size Log File Size
(South_Sales) (West_Sales)
1 25 MBytes 25 MBytes
Future Configuration Log File Sizes:

(West_Sales) (South_Sales)
Apply-Related Property Settings:

Property South_Sales Value West_Sales Value
DelayMins 0 0
LsbyMaxEventsRecorded 0 0
LsbyPreserveCommitOrder <empty> <empty>
LsbyRecordSkipErrors <empty> <empty>
LsbyRecordSkipDdl <empty> <empty>
LsbyRecordAppliedDdl <empty> <empty>

Property South_Sales Value West_Sales Value
LogXptMode SYNC SYNC
Dependency <empty> <empty>
DelayMins 0 0
Binding optional optional
MaxFailure 0 0
MaxConnections 1 1
ReopenSecs 30 30
NetTimeout 300 300
RedoCompression DISABLE DISABLE
LogShipping ON ON

Error South_Sales West_Sales
No logging operation NO NO
Control file corruptions NO NO
SRL Group Unavailable NO NO
System data file missing NO NO
System data file corrupted NO NO
System data file offline NO NO
User data file missing NO NO
User data file corrupted NO NO
User data file offline NO NO
Block Corruptions found NO NO
Example 6: VALIDATE DATABASE Output in Verbose Format for a Physical

Standby
The following command shows verbose output for a physical standby database:
DGMGRL> VALIDATE DATABASE VERBOSE North_Sales';
7-91
Chapter 7
VALIDATE DATABASE

South_Sales 2 2
North_Sales 2 2

North_Sales TEMP Files: 2

South_Sales: On
North_Sales: On

South_Sales: No
North_Sales: No
Standby Apply-Related Information:

Apply State: Running
Apply Lag: 0 seconds
Apply Delay: 0 minutes
Transport On: Yes
Gap Status: No Gap
Log Files Cleared:

North_Sales Online Redo Log Files: Cleared
North_Sales Standby Redo Log Files: Available
Current Log File Groups Configuration:

(South_Sales) (North_Sales)
Future Log File Groups Configuration:

Thread # Online Redo Log Groups Standby Redo Log Groups
(North_Sales) (South_Sales)
Current Configuration Log File Sizes:

(South_Sales) (North_Sales)
Future Configuration Log File Sizes:

(North_Sales) (South_Sales)
7-92
Chapter 7
VALIDATE DATABASE DATAFILE
Apply-Related Property Settings:

Property South_Sales Value North_Sales Value
DelayMins 0 0
ApplyParallel AUTO AUTO

Property South_Sales Value North_Sales Value
LogXptMode SYNC SYNC
Dependency <empty> <empty>
DelayMins 0 0
Binding optional optional
MaxFailure 0 0
MaxConnections 1 1
ReopenSecs 30 30
NetTimeout 300 300
RedoCompression DISABLE DISABLE
LogShipping ON ON

Error South_Sales North_Sales
No logging operation NO NO
Control file corruptions NO NO
SRL Group Unavailable NO NO
System data file missing NO NO
System data file corrupted NO NO
System data file offline NO NO
User data file missing NO NO
User data file corrupted NO NO
User data file offline NO NO
Block Corruptions found NO NO
7.78 VALIDATE DATABASE DATAFILE

The VALIDATE DATABASE DATAFILE command performs validation of data files across the
primary database and standby databases.
The validation of data files detects lost writes at either database.
Format
VALIDATE DATABASE [database-name | ALL] DATAFILE [datafile-name |

datafile-number | ALL] OUTPUT="output-file-name";
Command Parameters
database-name
If the database to be validated is either the primary or ALL, then the data files for all
standby databases are compared with data files of the primary.
If the database to be validated is a standby database, then its data files are compared
with the data files of the primary.
datafile-name | datafile-number
You can specify a data file to be compared by name (datafile-name) or by number
(datafile-number).
7-93
Chapter 7
VALIDATE DATABASE DATAFILE
The datafile-name is the name of a specific date file that you want validated.
The datafile-number is the file identification number of a data file (as shown in the
FILE# column of the V$DATAFILE view).
output-file-name
A file generated on the server that you must check to determine if block comparison is
completed and whether there were any lost writes. Output files are created in the
diagnostics trace directory of the database being compared.
Usage Notes
• The VALIDATE DATABASE command shows a brief summary of the database, and
reports any errors or warnings that were detected.
• When the VALIDATE DATABASE command is issued, it immediately returns a message
that data file comparison has started on a database, but this does not mean that
data file comparison completed or that there were no lost-writes between data
files. You must check the output files that are generated to determine whether data
file comparison was completed, or if there were lost writes.
Command Example
Example: Using VALIDATE DATABASE DATAFILE to Compare Data Files
The following command would compare the data files on the standby to those on the
primary. Output would be sent to a file named dbcomp1.out.
DGMGRL> VALIDATE DATABASE boston DATAFILE ALL OUTPUT=dbcomp1.out;
Operation requires a connection to database "boston"
Connecting ...
Output files are created in /path/to/trace on host "standby-host"
The following shows sample output from the command:

Client is connected to database: boston. Role: physical standby.
******************************
Remote database chicago.
remote db role: primary database
Slave Id 0
Summary:
Different data block pairs: 66617
Details:
***************************************************
ID: Block Type Id
TOTAL: Total number of blocks found
DIFFV: Number of block pairs with different version
LWLOC: Lost Writes at Local
LWRMT: Lost Writes at Remote
SAMEV: Number of block pairs with same version
SAMEV&C: Number of block pairs with same version and checksum
DIFFPAIR: Number of block pairs with same version but different contents
ENCERR: Undecided blocks related to encryption/decrytion error.
e.g. Wallet is not open.
SKIPPED: Skipped blocks due to data corruption, direct load, etc
ID TOTAL DIFFV LWLOC LWRMT SAMEV SAMEV&C DIFFPAIR ENCERR SKIPPED

02 0067698 0001032 0000000 0000000 0066666 0000049 0066617 0000000 0000000
29 0000001 0000001 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000
7-94
Chapter 7
VALIDATE DATABASE SPFILE
30 0000125 0000001 0000000 0000000 0000124 0000124 0000000 0000000 0000000

38 0000014 0000014 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000
7.79 VALIDATE DATABASE SPFILE

The VALIDATE DATABASE SPFILE command performs a comparison of server parameter
file (SPFILE) entries between the primary database and a specified standby database.
The validation of the server parameter file detects parameter value discrepancies
between the primary and the specified standby database so that they can be rectified
before a role change, thus ensuring that after a role change the databases perform at
the same level they did prior to the role change. Additionally, using this command
frees you from having to restart a database to correct improperly set parameters.
Format
VALIDATE DATABASE {database-name} SPFILE;
Command Parameters
database-name
The name of the standby database for which you want to display information. The
VERBOSE keyword, if used, must come before the database-name or an error is
returned.
If the database to be validated is the primary database, then a message is returned
saying the command cannot be issued on a primary database.
If the database to be validated is a standby database, then the server parameter file
values on the primary database are compared with the server parameter file values
on the standby database.
Usage Notes
• The VALIDATE DATABASE SPFILE command reports No parameter differences found if
there are no differences and a list of the parameters with their differing values on
the primary and the specified standby databases.
• When the VALIDATE DATABASE SPFILE command is issued, it makes a connection to
the primary database and the specified standby database based on the respective
values of the DGConnectIdentifier property. The command fails if a connection
attempt cannot complete successfully.
Command Example
Example: Using VALIDATE DATABASE SPFILE to Compare Server Parameter
File Values
The following is sample output from the VALIDATE DATABASE SPFILE command when
there are no differences between the server parameter file values on the specified
standby database and the primary database:
DGMGRL> VALIDATE DATABASE chicago SPFILE;
Connecting to "boston".
Connecting to "chicago".
No parameter differences found.
7-95
Chapter 7
VALIDATE FAR_SYNC
The following is sample output from the VALIDATE DATABASE SPFILE command when
there are differences (different values, or specified on one and not on the other)
between the server parameter file values on the specified standby database and the
primary database:
DGMGRL> VALIDATE DATABASE chicago SPFILE;
Connecting to "boston".
Connecting to "chicago".
Parameter settings with different values:
aq_tm_processes:
boston (PRIMARY) : 8
chicago : 9
commit_point_strength:
boston (PRIMARY) : NOT SPECIFIED
chicago : 255
sec_max_failed_login_attempts:
boston (PRIMARY) : 2
chicago : NOT SPECIFIED
use_large_pages:
boston (PRIMARY) : TRUE
chicago : NOT SPECIFIED
DGMGRL>
7.80 VALIDATE FAR_SYNC

The VALIDATE FAR_SYNC command performs a comprehensive set of checks for a far
sync instance.
The checks use information available in various Oracle Data Guard views.
Format
VALIDATE FAR_SYNC [VERBOSE] far_sync_instance_name [WHEN PRIMARY

IS database-name];
Command Parameters
The name of the far sync instance for which you want to display information. The
VERBOSE keyword, if used, must come before the far_sync_instance_name or an error is
returned.
database-name
The validation of the far sync instance is performed based on the specified database
being the primary database.
Usage Notes
The VALIDATE FAR_SYNC command shows a brief summary of the far sync instance and
reports any errors or warnings that were detected. The VALIDATE FAR_SYNC VERBOSE
command shows everything in the brief summary plus redo transport-related
information.
7-96
Chapter 7
VALIDATE FAR_SYNC
Command Examples
The examples in this section show what the VALIDATE FAR_SYNC command output might
look like in various scenarios.
Example 1: Brief VALIDATE FAR_SYNC Output
The following example shows brief output for a far sync instance:
DGMGRL> VALIDATE FAR_SYNC FS;
Member Role: Far Sync Instance

When Primary Is: North_Sales
Active Redo Source: North_Sales

Redo Destinations:
South_Sales
North_Sales FS
Example 2: Verbose VALIDATE FAR_SYNC Output

The following example shows verbose output for a far sync instance:
DGMGRL> VALIDATE FAR_SYNC VERBOSE FS;

When Primary Is: North_Sales
Active Redo Source: North_Sales

Redo Destinations:
South_Sales
North_Sales FS
Transport On: Yes
Gap Status: No Gap
Example 3: VALIDATE FAR_SYNC Output When South_Sales Is the Primary

The following example shows the output when the South_Sales database is specified
as the primary database:
DGMGRL> VALIDATE FAR_SYNC FS WHEN PRIMARY IS 'South_Sales';

When Primary Is: South_Sales
Redo Destinations:
North_Sales
South_Sales FS
7-97
Chapter 7
VALIDATE NETWORK CONFIGURATION
7.81 VALIDATE NETWORK CONFIGURATION

The VALIDATE NETWORK CONFIGURATION command performs network connectivity checks
between members of a configuration.
The connect identifier for each connectivity check is generated based on the
DGConnectIdentifier property of the associated database.
Format
VALIDATE NETWORK CONFIGURATION FOR { ALL | member name };
Command Parameters
member name
The name of the configuration member to validate.
Usage Notes
• This command also performs a check for the static connect identifier.
Command Examples
Example 1: Validating Network Configuration for a Specific Database
DGMGRL> VALIDATE NETWORK CONFIGURATION FOR North_Sales;
Connecting to instance "north_sales1" on database "North_Sales" ...
Checking connectivity from instance "north_sales1" on database "North_Sales to

instance "south_sales1" on database "South_Sales"...
Succeeded.

Succeeded.
Connecting to instance "south_sales1" on database "South_Sales" ...
Checking connectivity from instance "south_sales1" on database "South_Sales to

instance "north_sales1" on database "North_Sales"...
Succeeded.

Succeeded.
Oracle Clusterware on database "North_Sales" is available for database restart.
Example 2: Validating Network Configuration For All Members

DGMGRL> VALIDATE NETWORK CONFIGURATION FOR ALL;
7-98
Chapter 7
VALIDATE STATIC CONNECT IDENTIFIER

Succeeded.

Succeeded.
Connecting to instance "south_sales1" on database "South_Sales" ...

Succeeded.

Succeeded.
Oracle Clusterware is not configured on database "South_Sales".

Connecting to database "South_Sales" using static connect identifier
"(DESCRIPTION=(ADDRESS_LIST=(ADDRESS=(PROTOCOL=tcp)(HOST=<nodename>)((PORT=.*))))
(CONNECT_DATA=(SERVICE_NAME=South_Sales_DGMGRL.example.com)
(INSTANCE_NAME=south_sales1)(SERVER=DEDICATED)(STATIC_SERVICE=TRUE)))" ...
Succeeded.
The static connect identifier allows for a connection to database "South_Sales".
7.82 VALIDATE STATIC CONNECT IDENTIFIER

The VALIDATE STATIC CONNECT IDENTIFIER command validates the static connect
identifier of a database.
To perform this validation, the broker makes a new connection to the database using a
static connect identifier based on the StaticConnectIdentifer property of the database.
A new attribute, STATIC_SERVICE=TRUE is added to the connect identifier to ensure that a
connection to the database is established using only a static service, not a dynamic
service.
Format
VALIDATE STATIC CONNECT IDENTIFIER FOR { ALL | database name };
Command Parameters
database name
The name of a specific database to validate.
7-99
Chapter 7
VALIDATE STATIC CONNECT IDENTIFIER
Usage Notes
• None
Command Examples
Example 1: Validation of Static Connect Identifier For a Database on Which
Oracle Clusterware Is Configured
DGMGRL> VALIDATE STATIC CONNECT IDENTIFIER FOR North_Sales;
Example 2: Validation of Static Connect Identifier For a Database on Which

Oracle Clusterware Is Not Configured
DGMGRL> VALIDATE STATIC CONNECT IDENTIFIER FOR South_Sales;

(CONNECT_DATA=(SERVICE_NAME=South_Sales_DGMGRL.example.com)(INSTANCE_NAME=tkdg2_sid)
(SERVER=DEDICATED)(STATIC_SERVICE=TRUE)))" ...
Succeeded.
Example1: Validation of Static Connect Identifier For all Databases

DGMGRL> VALIDATE STATIC CONNECT IDENTIFIER FOR all;

(CONNECT_DATA=(SERVICE_NAME=South_Sales_DGMGRL.example.com)(INSTANCE_NAME=tkdg2_sid)
(SERVER=DEDICATED)(STATIC_SERVICE=TRUE)))" ...
Succeeded.
7-100
8
Oracle Data Guard Broker Properties
Use Oracle Data Guard broker properties to manage instances or the entire
configuration.
Broker configuration and database properties help you to view and control the
behavior of entire broker configurations, individual configuration members, redo
transport services, and log apply services.
• Configuration Properties
• Monitorable (Read-Only) Properties
• Configurable Properties
Properties have either configuration-wide scope, database-wide scope, far sync
instance-wide scope, or instance-specific scope. Configuration-wide properties control
the behavior of the broker on all members of the configuration. The values of such
properties apply uniformly across all members of the configuration.
Database-wide properties allow you to view or control the behavior of a specific
database. If the database (primary or standby) is an Oracle RAC database consisting
of multiple instances, then the value of such a property applies uniformly across all
instances of that database.
Far sync instance-wide properties allow you to view or control the behavior of a far
sync instance.
Instance-specific properties allow you to view or control the behavior of an individual
database instance. Such a property exists for all instances of an Oracle RAC
database, but its value can differ from one specific instance to another.
Note:
You can use the Oracle Data Guard broker command-line interface (DGMGRL)
to view or modify broker properties.
Oracle Enterprise Manager Cloud Control (Cloud Control) explicitly presents
some broker properties on the Edit Properties page. Information from other
properties can be implicitly incorporated into other Web pages displayed by
Cloud Control. See the individual description of each property for information
about how Cloud Control presents that property.
8.1 Configuration Properties

Configuration properties control the behavior of the broker configuration.
DGMGRL.
8-1
Chapter 8
A configuration property has configuration-wide scope; meaning that the value you set
for the property applies uniformly to each member in the configuration.
Configuration properties are set using the EDIT CONFIGURATION SET PROPERTY command,
as shown in the following examples.
Example 1
This example sets the FastStartFailoverThreshold configuration property to 90
seconds.
DGMGRL> EDIT CONFIGURATION SET PROPERTY FastStartFailoverThreshold=90;
Example 2
This example sets the ExternalDestination1 configuration property to point to a redo
transport destination with a service name of Sales and a DB_UNIQUE_NAME of chicago.
EDIT CONFIGURATION SET PROPERTY ExternalDestination1='SERVICE=Sales
DB_UNIQUE_NAME=chicago';
Note:
In general, quotation marks are not necessary around property values unless
the case you specify needs to be preserved. By default, DGMGRL lowercases
any string you supply, unless it is placed within quotation marks.
Quotation marks are required for any property values that include spaces or
punctuation characters (for example, RedoRoutes, LogFileNameConvert, or
DBFileNameConvert).
The following sections describe the configuration properties:

• BystandersFollowRoleChange
• CommunicationTimeout
• ConfigurationWideServiceName
• ExternalDestination1
• ExternalDestination2
• FastStartFailoverAutoReinstate
• FastStartFailoverLagLimit
• FastStartFailoverPmyShutdown
• FastStartFailoverThreshold
• ObserverOverride
• ObserverReconnect
• OperationTimeout
• PreferredObserverHosts
• PrimaryLostWriteAction
• TraceLevel
8-2
Chapter 8
8.1.1 BystandersFollowRoleChange
The BystandersFollowRoleChange configuration property establishes whether bystander
standby databases are evaluated during failover (value = ALL) or after failover (value =
NONE).
Descriptions of the ALL and NONE options are as follows:
• ALL - During the failover process, the broker determines whether the bystander
standby databases are ahead of or behind the failover target standby (that is, the
standby that will be the new primary).
If the bystander standbys are ahead, they will be disabled with a status of
ORA-16661 as part of the failover operation. The bystander standbys must be
reinstated after failover completes. The broker reinstates a standby through a
flashback to the SCN at which the target standby became a primary database, and
sets up the redo transport configuration from the new primary to the standby.
If the bystander standbys are behind, then the broker simply sets up the redo
transport configuration from the soon-to-be-new-primary to these standbys and
completes the failover process.
• NONE - During the failover process, the broker does NOT evaluate the status of the
bystander standbys as part of the failover operation. They are marked as disabled
with a status of ORA-16661 so that they can be evaluated later. The broker simply
completes the failover to produce a new primary database as soon as possible.
After the failover is completed, you can reinstate the bystander standbys. During
reinstatement of a bystander, the broker determines whether the bystander is
ahead of, or behind, the new primary. If the bystander is ahead of the new primary,
then the broker automatically flashes back the standby to the SCN at which the
target standby became a primary database and sets up redo transport from the
new primary to the standby. (Even if a flashback is not required, the broker sets up
the redo transport configuration from the new primary to these standbys.)
The NONE option decreases the processing time for failover, but disables broker
management of all bystander databases in the configuration. If fast-start failover is
enabled, then the observer automatically reinstates the standby databases after
failover has completed. Otherwise, you will have to manually reinstate the standby
databases after failover has completed.
Category Description
Datatype String
Valid value ALL or NONE
Broker default ALL
Imported? No
Parameter class Not applicable
Role Primary and standby
Standby type Not applicable
Corresponds to Not applicable
Scope Broker configuration. This property will be consumed by broker on the
database that is the target of a complete failover.
8-3
Chapter 8
Cloud Control name Not applicable
8.1.2 CommunicationTimeout
The CommunicationTimeout configuration property allows you to decide how many
seconds the broker should wait before timing out its network communication between
members in the configuration.
A value of zero indicates that a network communication should never be timed out.
Datatype Integer
Valid values >= 0
Broker default 180 seconds
Imported? No
Scope Broker configuration. This property will be consumed by broker on all
databases in the configuration.
8.1.3 ConfigurationWideServiceName
The ConfigurationWideServiceName configuration property is used to change the name
of the configuration-wide service.
The broker publishes a service on each member of a configuration with a unified
service name. The default service name of this configuration-wide service is
primarydbname_CFG, where the primary database name is appended with a suffix of _CFG.
The service name does not change after a role transition.
Datatype String
Valid values • The characters are limited to the following: [a...z], [A...Z],
[0...9], and _
• The first character must be an alphanumeric character.
• There is a 30–character maximum.
Broker default primarydbname_CFG
Imported? No
8-4
Chapter 8
Scope Configuration
8.1.4 ExternalDestination1
The ExternalDestination1 configuration property is used to specify a redo transport
destination that can receive redo data from the current primary database.
To set up transport of redo data to the specified destination, the broker uses the
values specified for this parameter to define a LOG_ARCHIVE_DEST_n initialization
parameter on the primary database. The broker also monitors the health of the
transport to the specified destination.
After a role change, the broker automatically sets up a LOG_ARCHIVE_DEST_n initialization
parameter on the new primary database to ship redo data to the specified destination.
Note:
The ExternalDestination1 property requires that the database unique name
(DB_UNIQUE_NAME) be specified.
Datatype String
Valid values Any LOG_ARCHIVE_DEST_n attributes, except the following:
• ALTERNATE
• GROUP
• PRIORITY
• VALID_FOR
See Oracle Data Guard Concepts and Administration for more
information about the LOG_ARCHIVE_DEST_n parameter.
Broker default Empty string
Imported? No
Role Primary
Scope Configuration
8-5
Chapter 8
Note:
The Externaldestination1 configuration property is available only in Oracle
Database 11g Release 2 (11.2.0.4) and in Oracle Database 12c Release 1
(12.1.0.2) and later.
8.1.5 ExternalDestination2
The ExternalDestination2 configuration property is used to specify a redo transport
destination that can receive redo data from the current primary database.
To set up transport of redo data to the specified destination, the broker uses the
values specified for this parameter to define a LOG_ARCHIVE_DEST_n initialization
parameter on the primary database. The broker also monitors the health of the
transport to the specified destination.
After a role change, the broker automatically sets up a LOG_ARCHIVE_DEST_n initialization
parameter on the new primary database to ship redo data to the specified destination.
Note:
The ExternalDestination2 property requires that the database unique name
(DB_UNIQUE_NAME) be specified.
Datatype String
Valid values Any LOG_ARCHIVE_DEST_n attributes, except the following:
• ALTERNATE
• GROUP
• PRIORITY
• VALID_FOR
See Oracle Data Guard Concepts and Administration for more
information about the LOG_ARCHIVE_DEST_n parameter.
Imported? No
Role Primary
Scope Configuration
8-6
Chapter 8
Note:
The Externaldestination2 configuration property is available only in Oracle
(12.1.0.2) and later.
8.1.6 FastStartFailoverAutoReinstate
The FastStartFailoverAutoReinstate configuration property causes the former primary
database to be automatically reinstated if a fast-start failover was initiated because the
primary database was either isolated or had crashed.
To prevent automatic reinstatement of the former primary database in these cases, set
this configuration property to FALSE.
The broker never automatically reinstates the former primary database if a fast-start
failover was initiated because a user configuration condition was detected or was
requested by an application calling the DBMS_DG.INITIATE_FS_FAILOVER function.
Datatype Boolean
Valid value TRUE or FALSE
Broker default TRUE
Imported? No
Scope Broker configuration. This property will be consumed by the observer
after fast-start failover has been enabled.
Cloud Control name Automatically Reinstate Primary
8.1.7 FastStartFailoverLagLimit
The FastStartFailoverLagLimit configuration property establishes an acceptable limit,
in seconds, that the standby is allowed to fall behind the primary in terms of redo
applied.
If the limit is reached, then a fast-start failover is not allowed. The lowest possible
value is 5 seconds.
This property is used when fast-start failover is enabled and the configuration is
Datatype Integer
Valid value Integral number of seconds. Must be greater than, or equal to, 5.
8-7
Chapter 8
Imported? No
Scope Broker configuration. This property will be consumed by the
primary database after fast-start failover has been enabled.
Cloud Control name Lag Limit
8.1.8 FastStartFailoverPmyShutdown
The FastStartFailoverPmyShutdown configuration property causes the primary database
to shut down under certain conditions.
The primary database shuts down if fast-start failover is enabled and
V$DATABASE.FS_FAILOVER_STATUS indicates the primary has been STALLED for longer than
FastStartFailoverThreshold seconds. In such a situation, it is likely that the primary has
been isolated and a fast-start failover has already occurred. A value of TRUE helps to
ensure that an isolated primary database cannot satisfy user queries.
Setting this property to FALSE will not prevent the primary database from shutting down
if a fast-start failover occurred because a user configuration condition was detected or
was requested by an application by calling the DBMS_DG.INITIATE_FS_FAILOVER function.
Datatype Boolean
Valid value TRUE or FALSE
Broker default TRUE
Imported? No
Scope Broker configuration. This property will be consumed by the primary
database after fast-start failover has been enabled.
Cloud Control name Automatically Shutdown Primary
8-8
Chapter 8
8.1.9 FastStartFailoverThreshold
The FastStartFailoverThreshold configuration property defines the number of seconds
the master observer attempts to reconnect to the primary database before initiating a
fast-start failover.
(If there is only one observer, then by default it is considered the master. The time
interval starts when the observer first loses connection with the primary database. If
the observer is unable to regain a connection to the primary database within the
specified time, then the observer initiates a fast-start failover to the target standby
database. See Task 4 in Enabling Fast-Start Failover for more information about
setting this property.
The observer ignores the threshold completely if a configurable fast-start failover
condition is detected or an application has requested that fast-start failover be initiated.
For help in determining an appropriate value for this property, you can use the
information provided in the V$FS_OBSERVER_HISTOGRAM view. This view displays statistics
that are based on the frequency of successful pings between the observer and primary
database for different time intervals. (This view is available in Oracle Database 12c
Release 1 (12.1.0.2) and later. It is also available in Oracle Database 11g Release 2
(11.2.0.4), but not in Oracle Database 12c Release 1 (12.1.0.1).) See Oracle
Database Reference for a description of the V$FS_OBSERVER_HISTOGRAM view.
Datatype Integer
Valid value Integral number of seconds. Must be greater than, or equal to, 6.
Imported? No
Role Target standby database that is about to fail over to the primary role
Cloud Control name Cloud Control presents this as "Failover Threshold" on the Oracle Data
Guard Overview page.
8.1.10 ObserverOverride
The ObserverOverride configuration property, when set to TRUE, allows an automatic
failover to occur when the observer has lost connectivity to the primary.
This is the behavior even if the standby has a healthy connection to the primary.
Datatype Boolean
Valid values TRUE or FALSE
8-9
Chapter 8
Broker default FALSE
Imported? No
8.1.11 ObserverReconnect
The ObserverReconnect configuration property specifies how often the observer
establishes a new connection to the primary database.
When this property is set to the default value of 0, the observer creates and maintains
a connection to the primary database, but it does not periodically create a new
connection to the primary database. While this eliminates the processing overhead
associated with periodically establishing a new observer connection to the primary
database, it also prevents the observer from detecting that it is not possible to create
new connections to the primary database. Oracle recommends that this property be
set to a value that is small enough to allow timely detection of faults at the primary
database, but large enough to limit the overhead associated with periodic observer
connections to an acceptable level.
Datatype Integer
Valid values Integral number of seconds. Must be greater than, or equal to, 0.
Broker default 0
Imported? No
8.1.12 OperationTimeout
The OperationTimeout configuration property specifies the maximum amount of time the
broker should wait for health check, get monitorable property, and set property
operations to complete.
8-10
Chapter 8
Datatype Integer
Valid values >= 30 and <= 3600
Imported? No
Scope Broker configuration. This property will be consumed by broker on all
8.1.13 PreferredObserverHosts
The PreferredObserverHosts configurable property allows you to list the hosts that you
would prefer as hosts for the master observer when that database is in the primary
role.
The value of this property can be changed at any time, regardless of whether Fast-
Start Failover is enabled or not, or whether the observer is in an OBSERVED state.
However, the change does not affect the location of the master observer until the next
role change.
If this property is set, then after a role change the broker takes the following steps:
1. Checks whether the current master observer is running on a host in the list
specified by the PreferredObserverHosts property of the new primary. If yes, stop
here; otherwise, go to step 2.
2. Scans the list from the beginning to look for a host where one observer is running,
and connects to the primary and target standby databases. If found, go to step 3;
otherwise, stop here.
3. Attempts to switch the master observer to the host found in step 2. If switching
fails, no other hosts are tried.
Data type String
Valid value A character string that contains one or more host names,
separated by comma:
host_name_1 [,host_name_n]
Each host name can be any character string for a valid

network name, even if there is no observer running on
this host when it is set.
Broker default Null
Imported? No
8-11
Chapter 8
Role Primary, standby
Standby type Physical standby and logical standby
Scope Database
8.1.14 PrimaryLostWriteAction
The PrimaryLostWriteAction configuration property determines what action is taken if a
standby database detects that a lost write has occurred at the primary database.
Note:
The PrimaryLostWriteAction configuration property is available only in Oracle
(12.1.0.2) and later.
The possible actions are as follows:

• CONTINUE - The primary database continues operating even if a standby database
detects that a lost write has occurred at the primary database. This is the default
action.
• SHUTDOWN - If a standby database detects that a lost write has occurred at the
primary database, then fast start failover is disabled and the primary database
performs a shutdown abort. Automatic failover will not occur.
• FAILOVER - If fast-start failover is enabled in maximum performance mode, and the
configuration is within the acceptable limit specified for the
FastStartFailoverLagLimit property, then the observer initiates a failover.
• FORCEFAILOVER - If fast-start failover is enabled (in either maximum performance or

maximum availability mode), then the observer initiates a failover. This option
results in a data loss failover.
For both the FAILOVER and FORCEFAILOVER options, if fast-start failover is disabled then
no failover occurs, but the primary is shut down.
Fast start failover is disabled if a standby detects that a lost write has occurred at the
primary database. Automatic failover will therefore not occur if a standby detects that a
lost write has occurred at the primary database, even if PrimaryLostWriteAction is set
to SHUTDOWN.
Diagnostic information is written to the database alert and broker logs at the primary
database and at the standby database where the lost write was detected.
If a lost write occurs at the primary database, then follow the guidelines in "Resolving
ORA-752 or ORA-600 [3020] During Standby Recovery" in My Oracle Support Note
1265884.1 located at http://support.oracle.com.
8-12
Chapter 8
Note:
The DB_LOST_WRITE_PROTECT database initialization parameter must be set to
TYPICAL or FULL at the primary database and at each standby database in the
configuration to ensure that lost primary writes can be detected by all standby
Datatype String
Valid values CONTINUE, SHUTDOWN, FAILOVER, or FORCEFAILOVER
Broker default CONTINUE
Imported? No
Scope Broker configuration
8.1.15 TraceLevel
The TraceLevel configuration property is used to control the amount of tracing
performed by the broker for every member in the configuration.
Setting the property to USER limits the tracing to completed operations and to any
warning or error messages resulting from an operation or health check. Setting the
property to SUPPORT increases the amount of tracing to include lower-level information
needed by Oracle Support Services.
Datatype String
Valid values USER, SUPPORT
Broker default USER
Imported? No
Scope Database
8-13
Chapter 8
Monitorable (Read-Only) Properties
8.2 Monitorable (Read-Only) Properties

Monitorable properties allow you to view information related to the database, database
instance, or far sync instance.
You cannot change the values of monitorable properties. You can view all of them
using the DGMGRL SHOW commands.
Note:
Information for monitorable properties can be seen only when broker
management of the entity is enabled. Cloud Control displays the information
obtained from these properties on the Property page.
If the database is an Oracle RAC database, the output values of some properties may
also show instance-specific information. For example if the primary database is an
Oracle RAC database, LogXptStatus may show Instance1 transmitting redo data to
Standby2 has an error and Instance2 transmitting redo data to Standby4 has an error.
The following sections describe the monitorable properties:

• InconsistentLogXptProps (Inconsistent Redo Transport Properties)
• InconsistentProperties (Inconsistent Properties)
• LogXptStatus (Redo Transport Status)
• LsbyFailedTxnInfo (Logical Standby Failed Transaction Information)
• LsbyParameters (Logical Standby Parameters)
• RecvQEntries (Receive Queue Entries)
• SendQEntries (Send Queue Entries)
• TopWaitEvents
8.2.1 InconsistentLogXptProps (Inconsistent Redo Transport

Properties)
The InconsistentLogXptProps monitorable property returns a table that shows all
properties related to redo transport services whose values are inconsistent between
the broker configuration file and the runtime value.
Although the properties reported in this table are database-specific or far sync
instance-specific properties, the inconsistency is reported on an instance-specific
basis. A database or far sync instance-specific property only ensures that there is one
value in the broker's configuration file for all instances of the database or far sync
instance, but the runtime values can be different. This means that a database or far
sync instance-specific property may be inconsistent only on some instances.
This property pertains to the primary database, a physical standby database that ships
redo data, or a far sync instance. The table contains the following columns:
• INSTANCE_NAME
8-14
Chapter 8
The value identifying the SID for the instance.

• STANDBY_NAME
The database unique name (DB_UNIQUE_NAME) of the standby database or far sync
instance to which this redo transport services property pertains.
• PROPERTY_NAME
The name of the redo transport services property with an inconsistent value.
• MEMORY_VALUE
The runtime value being used in the database or far sync instance.
• BROKER_VALUE
The value of the redo transport services property saved in the broker configuration
file.
8.2.2 InconsistentProperties (Inconsistent Properties)

The InconsistentProperties monitorable property shows all property values in the
broker configuration file that are inconsistent with the values in the corresponding
server parameter file or the runtime values.
The information is shown in table format. Although the properties reported in this table
are database-specific or far sync instance-specific properties, the inconsistency is
reported on an instance-specific basis. A database or far sync instance-specific
property only ensures that there is one value in the broker's configuration file for all
instances of the database or far sync instance, but the runtime values can be different.
This means that a database or far sync instance-specific property may be inconsistent
only on some instances
Each individual configuration member has this property. The table contains the
following columns:
• INSTANCE_NAME
The value identifying the SID for the instance.

• PROPERTY_NAME
The name of the property with the inconsistent value.

• MEMORY_VALUE
The corresponding runtime value being used.

• SPFILE_VALUE
The corresponding value saved in the server parameter file (SPFILE).

• BROKER_VALUE
The value of the property saved in the broker configuration file.
8.2.3 LogXptStatus (Redo Transport Status)

The LogXptStatus monitorable property returns a table that contains the error status of
redo transport services for each of the enabled configuration members.
This property pertains to the primary database, a physical standby database that ships
redo data, or a far sync instance.
8-15
Chapter 8
The table contains the following columns:

• PRIMARY_INSTANCE_NAME
The value identifying the SID for the instance on the primary database.
• STANDBY_DATABASE_NAME
The database unique name (DB_UNIQUE_NAME) of the standby database or far sync
instance.
• ERROR
The text of the redo transport error. If there is no error, the field is empty.
Each entry in the table indicates the status of redo transport services on one redo
source to one redo destination.
The error status can be an empty string, which indicates there is no error.
In the following example, the STATUS from South_Sales is empty because there is no
error for the South_Sales destination. The South_Report destination returned the
ORA-01034 message.
DGMGRL> SHOW DATABASE 'North_Sales' 'LogXptStatus' ;

north_sales1 South_Sales
north_sales1 South_Report ORA-01034: ORACLE not available
8.2.4 LsbyFailedTxnInfo (Logical Standby Failed Transaction

Information)
The LsbyFailedTxnInfo monitorable property identifies a failed transaction that caused
log apply services to stop.
This property contains a string with the following values from the DBA_LOGSTDBY_EVENTS
view:
• XIDUSN: Transaction ID undo segment number
• XIDSLT: Transaction ID slot number
• XIDSQN: Transaction ID sequence number
• STATUS_CODE: Status (or Oracle error code) belonging to the STATUS message
• STATUS: Description of the current activity of the process or the reason why log
apply services stopped
The transaction IDs and status information are separated by a string of number signs
(###).
This property pertains to a logical standby database.
8-16
Chapter 8
8.2.5 LsbyParameters (Logical Standby Parameters)

The LsbyParameters monitorable property contains a string that identifies the value of
MAX_SGA and MAX_SERVERS specifically reserved for log apply services.
The MAX_SGA is the maximum system global area and MAX_SERVERS is the maximum
number of parallel query servers. These values are separated by a string of number
signs (###) in the LsbyParameters property.
This property pertains to a logical standby database.
8.2.6 RecvQEntries (Receive Queue Entries)

The RecvQEntries monitorable property returns a table indicating all log files that were
received by the standby database but have not yet been applied.
If no rows are returned, it implies all log files received have been applied. This property
pertains to a standby database.
The table contains the following columns in the order shown:
• STATUS
The STATUS column is set to one of the following values for a log file on a logical
standby database:
– NOT_APPLIED: No redo records in this log file have been applied.
– PARTIALLY_APPLIED: Some of the redo records in this log file have been applied
while others have not.
– COMMITTED_TRANSACTIONS_APPLIED: This status value only applies to a logical
standby database. All redo records belonging to the committed transactions
have been applied. Redo records belonging to uncommitted transactions have
not been read by LogMiner and may still be needed when the transactions are
committed in the future. Therefore, it is not safe yet to discard this online redo
log file.
• RESETLOGS_ID
Resetlogs identifier associated with the archived redo log file

• THREAD
The redo thread number

• LOG_SEQ
The online redo log file sequence number

• TIME_GENERATED
The first time when the online redo log file was written to the primary database
• TIME_COMPLETED
The next time when the log file was archived on the primary database
(corresponds to the NEXT_CHANGE# column)
• FIRST_CHANGE#
First change number in the archived redo log file
8-17
Chapter 8
• NEXT_CHANGE#
First change in the next log file

• SIZE (KBs)
The SIZE of the online redo log file in kilobytes

For example:
DGMGRL> SHOW DATABASE 'South_Sales' 'RecvQEntries' ;
STATUS RESETLOGS_ID THREAD
LOG_SEQ TIME_GENERATED TIME_COMPLETED FIRST_CHANGE#
NEXT_CHANGE# SIZE (KBs)
NOT_APPLIED 497198843 1 5
06/20/2003 14:55:38 06/20/2003 16:31:26 202138
210718 7364
06/20/2003 16:31:26 06/20/2003 16:31:39 210718
210753 13
06/20/2003 16:31:39 06/20/2003 16:31:54 210753
210758 1
06/20/2003 16:31:54 06/20/2003 16:31:59 210758
210789 11
Note:
Cloud Control displays this information on the Log File Details page.
8.2.7 SendQEntries (Send Queue Entries)

The SendQEntries monitorable property returns a table that shows all log files on the
primary database that were not successfully archived to one or more standby
databases.
This property pertains to the primary database.
The table contains the following columns:
• STANDBY_NAME
The value can be empty or it can contain the database unique name
(DB_UNIQUE_NAME) of a standby database. If empty, the STATUS column will contain a
value of CURRENT or NOT_ARCHIVED.
• STATUS
The STATUS column is set to one of the following values:

– CURRENT: A log file to which online redo is currently being written.
– NOT_ARCHIVED: A completed online redo log file that has not been archived
locally.
– ARCHIVED: A completed log file that has been archived locally but has not been
transmitted to the standby database specified in the STANDBY_NAME column.
8-18
Chapter 8
The table contains exactly one row with the value of STATUS=CURRENT. There can be
multiple rows with the value STATUS=ARCHIVED or STATUS=NOT_ARCHIVED.
• RESETLOGS_ID
Resetlogs identifier associated with the archived redo log file

• THREAD
The redo thread number.

• LOG_SEQ
The log sequence number. Multiple rows may have the same LOG_SEQ value (for
different STANDBY_NAME values).
• TIME_GENERATED
The first time when the online redo log file was written to the primary database.
• TIME_COMPLETED
The next time when the log file was archived on the primary database
(corresponds to the NEXT_CHANGE# column).
• FIRST_CHANGE#
First change number in the archived redo log file.

• NEXT_CHANGE#
First change in the next log file.

• SIZE (KBs)
The SIZE of the online redo log file in kilobytes.

For example, the following shows output from a SHOW DATABASE command:
DGMGRL> SHOW DATABASE 'North_Sales' 'SendQEntries' ;
PRIMARY_SEND_QUEUE
STANDBY_NAME STATUS RESETLOGS_ID
THREAD LOG_SEQ TIME_GENERATED TIME_COMPLETED
FIRST_CHANGE# NEXT_CHANGE# SIZE (KBs)
South_Sales ARCHIVED 497198843
1 9 06/20/2003 16:31:59 06/20/2003 16:39:57
210789 211411 186
1 10 06/20/2003 16:39:57 06/20/2003 16:40:01
211411 211415 1
1 11 06/20/2003 16:40:01 06/20/2003 16:40:07
211415 211418 1
CURRENT 497198843
1 12 06/20/2003 16:40:07
211418 1
Note:
Cloud Control displays this information on the Log File Details page.
8-19
Chapter 8
Configurable Properties
8.2.8 TopWaitEvents
The TopWaitEvents monitorable property specifies the 5 events with the longest waiting
time in the specified instance.
The events and their waiting time are retrieved from V$SYSTEM_EVENT. Each instance in
the configuration has this property. This property is an instance-specific monitorable
property. The table contains the following columns in the order shown:
• Event
The system wait event.
• Wait Time
The total amount of time waited for this event in hundredths of a second.
The following example shows output from a SHOW INSTANCE command:
DGMGRL> SHOW INSTANCE north_sales1 'TopWaitEvents';
TOP SYSTEM WAIT EVENTS
Event Wait Time
rdbms ipc message 671350
SQL*Net message from client 62390
pmon timer 47897
Queue Monitor Wait 43016
wakeup time manager 38508
8.3 Configurable Properties

Configurable properties control the behavior of broker configuration members.
DGMGRL.
These properties control certain database initialization parameters and SQL
statements that the broker uses to manage an Oracle Data Guard broker
configuration. Therefore, you should not manually set those initialization parameters or
issue those SQL statements on a broker configuration.
In most cases, the configurable property is said to apply to the entire member,
meaning the value you set for the property applies to each instance of the member
(that is, database or far sync instance). However, in a few cases, the configurable
property is said to have instance-specific scope which means that for a multiple-
instance database or far sync instance, it is possible that the values of some particular
properties may differ between instances. The following table lists each configurable
property and indicates whether the scope of the property is member-wide or instance-
specific. If the Scope column contains:
• Member—The value of the property is database or far sync instance-wide, not
instance or configuration specific.
• Instance—The value of the property is instance specific.
If there is an asterisk (*) present, it indicates that the property value can be set for
all instances of an Oracle RAC database using the EDIT INSTANCE * ON DATABASE
command.
8-20
Chapter 8
• Configuration—The value of the property is configuration wide, not instance or

member specific.
Table 8-1 Configurable Properties
Configurable Property Name Scope Pertains To

StandbyAlternateLocation Instance Redo transport services
ApplyInstances Member Redo Apply
ApplyInstanceTimeout Member Redo Apply and SQL Apply
ApplyLagThreshold Member Redo transport services
ApplyParallel Member Redo Apply
ArchiveLagTarget Member Redo transport services
Binding Member Redo transport services
DataGuardSyncLatency Member Redo transport services
DbFileNameConvert Member Redo Apply
DelayMins Member Redo Apply and SQL Apply
DGConnectIdentifier Member Broker communication, Redo transport
services
Encryption Member Redo transport services
FastStartFailoverTarget Member Fast-start failover
InstanceName Instance Instance identification
LogArchiveFormat Instance * Redo transport services
LogArchiveMaxProcesses Member Redo transport services
LogArchiveMinSucceedDest Member Redo transport services
LogArchiveTrace Instance * Diagnosis
LogFileNameConvert Member Redo Apply
LogShipping Member Redo transport services
LogXptMode Member Redo transport services
LsbyMaxEventsRecorded Member SQL Apply
LsbyMaxServers Instance * SQL Apply
LsbyMaxSga Instance * SQL Apply
LsbyPreserveCommitOrder Member SQL Apply
LsbyRecordAppliedDdl Member SQL Apply
LsbyRecordSkipDdl Member SQL Apply
LsbyRecordSkipErrors Member SQL Apply
MaxConnections Member Redo transport services
MaxFailure Member Redo transport services
NetTimeout Member Redo transport services
ObserverConnectIdentifier Member Fast-start failover
OnlineAlternateLocation Instance Redo transport services
OnlineArchiveLocation Instance Redo transport services
PreferredApplyInstance Member Redo Apply and SQL Apply
PreferredObserverHosts Member Fast-start failover
RedoCompression Member Redo transport services
8-21
Chapter 8
Table 8-1 (Cont.) Configurable Properties
Configurable Property Name Scope Pertains To

RedoRoutes Member Redo transport services
ReopenSecs Member Redo transport services
StandbyArchiveLocation Instance Redo transport services
StandbyFileManagement Member Redo Apply and SQL Apply
StaticConnectIdentifier Instance Instance Startup and Shutdown
TransportDisconnectedThreshold Member Redo transport services
TransportLagThreshold Member Redo transport services
See Also:
property management
Note:
When a broker configuration with its primary database is created and members
are added to the configuration, the broker imports existing settings from the
members to set many of the properties. If importing an existing setting fails, or if
a property value is not imported, then the broker uses a broker default value.
The default values and whether or not a property is imported is indicated within
each property description.
Broker Controlled Database Initialization Parameters and SQL Statements

The following database initialization parameters are controlled by broker configurable
properties. Therefore, you should not set these parameters manually:
• LOG_ARCHIVE_DEST_n
• LOG_ARCHIVE_DEST_STATE_n
• ARCHIVE_LAG_TARGET
• DB_FILE_NAME_CONVERT
• LOG_ARCHIVE_FORMAT
• LOG_ARCHIVE_MAX_PROCESSES
• LOG_ARCHIVE_MIN_SUCCEED_DEST
• LOG_ARCHIVE_TRACE
• LOG_FILE_NAME_CONVERT
• STANDBY_FILE_MANAGEMENT
8-22
Chapter 8
The broker also uses configurable property settings to manage how apply is to be
started. Therefore, the following SQL statements are managed automatically by the
broker:
• ALTER DATABASE RECOVER MANAGED STANDBY DATABASE
• ALTER DATABASE START LOGICAL STANDBY APPLY IMMEDIATE
The broker sets the following apply parameters on a logical standby automatically; you
should not manually set them:
• MAX_EVENTS_RECORDED
• MAX_SERVERS
• MAX_SGA
• PRESERVE_COMMIT_ORDER
• RECORD_APPLIES_DDL
• RECORD_SKIP_DDL
• RECORD_SKIP_ERRORS
8.3.1 ApplyInstances
The ApplyInstances property lets you specify how many physical standby instances run
Redo Apply.
As of Oracle Database 12c Release 2 (12.2.0.1), a new INSTANCES keyword is available
on the SQL ALTER RECOVER MANAGED STANDBY DATABASE statement (only for Oracle Real
Application Clusters (Oracle RAC) or Oracle RAC One Node databases). When used,
it causes Redo Apply to run on each active running physical standby instance that is
running in the same mode as the instance on which Redo Apply was started. You can
specify ALL or you can specify a specific number to restrict the number of instances
that Redo Apply uses. If a database has already been set up to run Redo Apply on
multiple instances, then you can use the Data Guard broker property ApplyInstances to
restrict the number of instances that are involved in Redo Apply on an Oracle RAC
physical standby database.
See Also:

about setting up multi-instance Redo Apply.
Datatype Integer
8-23
Chapter 8
Valid values 0 to 16, ALL
• ALL: indicates that redo apply will be started on
all currently active instances
• 0 and 1: recovery will be started in single
instance mode.
• >1: indicates that redo apply should not run on
any more than the number of instances
specified.
Broker default The default is 0.
Imported? Yes
Role Standby
Standby type Physical standby
Corresponds to INSTANCES keyword of ALTER DATABASE RECOVER
MANAGED STANDBY DATABASE command.
Scope Database
8.3.2 ApplyInstanceTimeout
The ApplyInstanceTimeout configurable property specifies the number of seconds the
broker waits after detecting the current apply instance failed before initiating the apply
instance failover.
Datatype Integer
Valid values >=0 (seconds)
Broker default 0 (results in immediate apply instance failover)
Imported? No
Role Standby, Recovery Appliance
Standby type Physical, logical, Recovery Appliance
Scope Database
8.3.3 ApplyLagThreshold
The ApplyLagThreshold configurable property generates a warning status for a logical
or physical standby when the member's apply lag exceeds the value specified by the
property.
The property value is expressed in seconds. A value of 0 seconds results in no
warnings being generated when an apply lag exists.
8-24
Chapter 8
Datatype Number
Valid values >=0
Imported? No
Standby type Physical, logical
Scope Database
8.3.4 ApplyParallel
The ApplyParallel configurable property specifies whether Redo Apply should use
multiple processes to apply redo data to the physical standby database.
If Redo Apply is shut off, then setting the property has no immediate effect. However,
when Redo Apply is running again, the value of the property is used to determine the
parallel apply behavior of Redo Apply.
Datatype String
Valid values • AUTO—the number of parallel processes used for Redo Apply is
automatically determined by Oracle based on the number of CPUs
that the system has.
• NO—no parallel apply
• 2, 3, and so on—manually specify the number of parallel processes
used for Redo Apply. (Specifying 0 is the same as specifying NO;
specifying 1 is the same as specifying AUTO.)
Broker default AUTO
Imported? No
Role Standby
Standby type Physical
Corresponds to • AUTO corresponds to the PARALLEL clause of the ALTER DATABASE
RECOVER MANAGED STANDBY DATABASE statement
• NO corresponds to the NOPARALLEL clause of the ALTER DATABASE
RECOVER MANAGED STANDBY DATABASE statement
• 2, 3, and so on corresponds to the PARALLEL n clause of the ALTER
DATABASE RECOVER MANAGED STANDBY DATABASE statement
Scope Database
Cloud Control Not applicable
name
8-25
Chapter 8
8.3.5 ArchiveLagTarget
The ArchiveLagTarget configurable property limits the amount of data that can be lost.
In effect, limiting the amount of data that can be lost increases the availability of the
standby database by forcing a log switch after the amount of time you specify (in
seconds) elapses. That way, the standby database will not miss redo records
generated from a time range longer than the value set for the ARCHIVE_LAG_TARGET
Datatype Number
Valid values Seconds (either 0 seconds, or any number from 60 to 7200 seconds)
Broker default Value imported from the ARCHIVE_LAG_TARGET initialization parameter
Imported? Yes, from the ARCHIVE_LAG_TARGET initialization parameter
Parameter class Dynamic
Role Primary database, far sync instance, Recovery Appliance
Corresponds to ARCHIVE_LAG_TARGET=seconds initialization parameter
Scope Database
Cloud Control name Archive Lag Target
8.3.6 Binding
The Binding configurable property specifies whether the destination is MANDATORY or
OPTIONAL.
Datatype String
Valid values • MANDATORY
You can specify a policy for reuse of online redo log files using the
MANDATORY value. If the archiving operation of a mandatory
destination fails, online redo log files cannot be overwritten.
• OPTIONAL
You can specify a policy for reuse of online redo log files using the
OPTIONAL value. If the archiving operation of an optional destination
fails, the online redo log files are overwritten.
Broker default OPTIONAL
Imported? No
Role Standby database, Recovery Appliance, far sync instance1
Standby type Physical, logical, or snapshot standby, far sync instance, Recovery
Appliance
8-26
Chapter 8
Corresponds to • MANDATORY and OPTIONAL attributes for the LOG_ARCHIVE_DEST_n
initialization parameter of the database or far sync instance that is
sending redo data
• BINDING column of the V$ARCHIVE_DEST view of the database or far
sync instance that is sending redo data
Scope Database, far sync instance, Recovery Appliance
1 Although this property is set for the redo destination, it is indirectly related to the redo transport services
for the database or far sync instance that is sending redo data. The broker propagates the setting you
specify to the corresponding attributes of the LOG_ARCHIVE_DEST_n value of the database or far sync
instance that is sending redo data.
8.3.7 DataGuardSyncLatency
The DataGuardSyncLatency database property supports the database initialization
parameter, DATA_GUARD_SYNC_LATENCY.
The database initialization parameter, DATA_GUARD_SYNC_LATENCY, applies to all

synchronous standby destinations. It defines the maximum amount of time (in
seconds) that the primary database must wait before disconnecting subsequent
destinations after at least one synchronous standby has acknowledged receipt of the
redo. If you add a member to a broker configuration, then the broker automatically
determines the DATA_GUARD_SYNC_LATENCY value and updates broker metadata with that
value. If you edit the DataGuardSyncLatency property, then the broker updates the
DATA_GUARD_SYNC_LATENCY parameter on the database.
The broker periodically runs a health-check routine to check the consistency between
the value of the DataGuardSyncLatency property value and the value of the
DATA_GUARD_SYNC_LATENCY initialization parameter on each member of the configuration.
If an inconsistency is found, the health-check report signals an error.
Data type Integer
Valid values >= 0
Broker default Value imported from the DATA_GUARD_SYNC_LATENCY
database initialization parameter.
Imported? Yes, from the DATA_GUARD_SYNC_LATENCY initialization
parameter
Role Primary
Corresponds to DATA_GUARD_SYNC_LATENCY database initialization
parameter
Scope Database
8-27
Chapter 8
8.3.8 DbFileNameConvert
The DbFileNameConvert configurable property distinguishes physical standby datafile
filenames from primary datafile filenames.
If you add a datafile to the primary database, this property converts the datafile name
on the primary database to the datafile on the physical standby database.
This property is used in the following situations:
• At physical standby mount time, it is used to rename primary datafile filenames to
standby datafile filenames if the datafile file path on the physical standby system is
different from the primary database system.
• When a new data file is created on the primary database, a corresponding new
data file will be created on the physical standby database if the
StandbyFileManagement configurable property is set to 'AUTO'. Oracle uses the data-
file file-path mapping information from the DbFileNameConvert property to determine
the standby file path of the new standby data file. If the StandbyFileManagement
property is set to 'MANUAL', you must add a corresponding file to the physical
standby database.
Note:
When a database is added to the configuration, the broker sets the initial value
of this property to the in-memory value of the DB_FILE_NAME_CONVERT initialization
parameter. It is possible that the in-memory value and server parameter file
(SPFILE) value of this parameter will differ. If you want to use the parameter's
in-memory value, then enable the database and the broker will ensure that the
SPFILE value of the parameter is set to the in-memory value. If you want to use
the SPFILE value, then set the property value to be the parameter's value
stored in the SPFILE. Then enable the database.
Datatype String
Valid values Set the value of this property to a list of string pairs:
1. The first string is the substring found in the datafile names on the
primary database.
2. The second string is the substring found in the datafile names on the
standby database.
For example, ('string1', 'string2', 'string3', 'string4',...)
Where:
• string1 is the substring of the primary database filename.
• string2 is the substring of the standby database filename.
Broker default Value of the DB_FILE_NAME_CONVERT initialization parameter
Imported? Yes, from the DB_FILE_NAME_CONVERT initialization parameter
8-28
Chapter 8
Parameter class Static
Role Standby
Standby type Physical
Corresponds to DB_FILE_NAME_CONVERT initialization parameter
Scope Database
Cloud Control name DB File Name Convert
8.3.9 DelayMins
The DelayMins configurable property specifies the number of minutes log apply
services will delay applying the archived redo log data on the standby database.
When the DelayMins property is set to the default value of 0 minutes, log apply services
apply redo data as soon as possible.
If the DelayMins property is set to 0, start log apply services as follows:
• Start Redo Apply on physical standby databases using the following SQL
statement:
ALTER DATABASE RECOVER MANAGED STANDBY DATABASE;
• Start SQL Apply on logical standby databases using the following SQL statement:
ALTER DATABASE START LOGICAL STANDBY APPLY IMMEDIATE;
Datatype Integer
Valid values >=0 (minutes) 1
Broker default 0
Imported? No
Role Standby2, Recovery Appliance
Standby type Physical, logical, Recovery Appliance
Corresponds to • DELAY attribute for the LOG_ARCHIVE_DEST_n initialization parameter
of the database or far sync instance that is sending redo data
• DELAY_MINS column of the V$ARCHIVE_DEST view of the database or
far sync instance that is sending redo data
• Options used to start Redo Apply and SQL Apply
Scope Database
Cloud Control name Apply Delay (mins)
1 The DelayMins property must be reset to 0 before attempting a switchover to a standby with DelayMins
greater than 0.
2 Although this property is set for the standby database, it is indirectly related to the redo transport services
for the database or far sync instance that is sending redo data. The broker propagates the setting you
specify on the standby database to the corresponding attributes of the LOG_ARCHIVE_DEST_n value of
the database or far sync instance that is sending redo data.
8-29
Chapter 8
8.3.10 DGConnectIdentifier
The DGConnectIdentifier configurable property specifies the connection identifier the
broker uses when making connections to a configuration member.
If you are using DGMGRL, then you supply the value when you enter the CREATE
CONFIGURATION, ADD DATABASE, or ADD FAR_SYNC command. If you are using Cloud Control,
the value is supplied automatically. The connect identifier for a configuration member
must:
• Allow all other members in the configuration to reach it.
• Allow the member to reach itself.
• Allow all instances of an Oracle RAC database to be reached.
• Specify a service that all instances dynamically register with the listeners so that
connect-time failover on an Oracle RAC database is possible.
Caution:
The service should NOT be one that is defined and managed by Oracle
Clusterware.
• Have failover attributes set to allow the primary database's Redo Transport
Services to continue shipping redo data to an Oracle RAC standby database, even
if the receiving instance of that standby database has failed.
The value of this property is specified in the SERVICE attribute of the LOG_ARCHIVE_DEST_n
parameter when the broker configures redo transport services on the primary
database.
Datatype String
Valid values A connect identifier that can be used to connect to this database
Broker default Not applicable
Imported? No
Role Primary, standby, far sync instance, Recovery Appliance
Appliance
Corresponds to SERVICE_NAME attribute of the LOG_ARCHIVE_DEST_n initialization
parameter of the configuration member that is sending redo data
name
8-30
Chapter 8
See Also:
8.3.11 Encryption
The Encryption configurable property is used to specify whether redo data is encrypted
before transmitting it to a Recovery Appliance.
Note:
Redo transport encryption can only be used with a Recovery Appliance.
Datatype String
Valid values DISABLE, ENABLE
• When ENABLE is specified, the redo data is encrypted before it is sent to
a Recovery Appliance.
• When DISABLE is specified, the redo data is not encrypted before it is
sent to a Recovery Appliance.
Broker Default DISABLE
Imported? No
Role Recovery Appliance
Standby type Recovery Appliance
Corresponds to • ENCRYPTION attribute for the LOG_ARCHIVE_DEST_n initialization
parameter of the database or far sync instance that is sending redo
data
• ENCRYPTION column of the V$ARCHIVE_DEST view of the database or far
sync instance that is sending redo data to the Recovery Appliance
Scope Recovery Appliance
Cloud Control Not Applicable
name
8.3.12 FastStartFailoverTarget
The FastStartFailoverTarget configuration property specifies the DB_UNIQUE_NAME of one
or more standby databases that can act as target databases in a fast-start failover
situation when the database on which the property is set is the primary database.
These possible target databases are referred to as candidate fast-start failover targets.
See Task 2 in Enabling Fast-Start Failover for more information about setting this
property.
The FastStartFailoverTarget configuration property can only be set to the name of
physical or logical standbys. It cannot be set to the name of a snapshot standby
database, far sync instance, or Zero Data Loss Recovery Appliance.
8-31
Chapter 8
Datatype String
Valid value DB_UNIQUE_NAME of the database that is the target of the fast-start
failover. You can specify names of multiple standbys or the keyword
ANY. If multiple names are specified, then the broker selects them in the
order in which they are listed. If the property is set to ANY, then the
broker can select any one of all viable standbys of the primary as the
current FSFO target.
Broker default If only one physical or logical standby database exists, then the broker
selects that as the default value for this property on the primary
database when fast-start failover is enabled.
If more than one physical or logical standby database exists, then the
broker selects one based on the order in which they are specified in the
property definition. Targets are verified when fast-start failover is
enabled.
For the target standby database, the broker automatically selects the
current primary database as the value for this property when fast-start
failover is enabled.
Imported? No
Role Primary or standby
Standby type Physical or logical
Scope Database
Cloud Control name Cloud Control displays the value for the current primary database on the
Oracle Data Guard Overview page, along with whether or not fast-start
failover has been enabled.
8.3.13 InstanceName
The InstanceName configurable property corresponds to the INSTANCE_NAME initialization
parameter.
The property can only be updated when broker management of the database is
disabled. You should only update the value when the INSTANCE_NAME initialization
parameter is changed. In such a case, you must disable broker management of the
database, update the InstanceName property to match the new INSTANCE_NAME value, and
then reenable broker management of the database.
Note:
If no existing instance in the broker configuration, for the database whose name
matches this instance's db_unique_name, has an InstanceName property with a
value that matches the INSTANCE_NAME initialization parameter for this instance,
then the broker creates a new instance for this database that has this
instance's db_unique_name.
8-32
Chapter 8
Datatype String
Valid values The value of the INSTANCE_NAME initialization parameter for this instance.
On certain platforms, the value may be case-sensitive.
Broker default Not applicable
Imported? Yes
Standby type Physical, logical, or snapshot
Corresponds to INSTANCE_NAME initialization parameter
Scope Instance
8.3.14 LogArchiveFormat
The LogArchiveFormat configurable instance-specific property specifies the format for
filenames of archived redo log files.
To specify the format, it uses a database ID (%d), thread (%t), sequence number (%s),
and resetlogs ID (%r).
Note:
When a member is added to the configuration, the broker sets the initial value
of this property to the in-memory value of the LOG_ARCHIVE_FORMAT initialization
parameter. It is possible that the in-memory value and server parameter file
(SPFILE) value of this parameter will differ. If you want to use the parameter's
in-memory value, then enable the member and the broker will ensure that the
SPFILE value of the parameter is set to the in-memory value. If you want to use
the SPFILE value, then set the property value to be the parameter's value
stored in the SPFILE. Then enable the member.
Datatype String
Valid values %d_%t_%s_%r
Broker default Value of the LOG_ARCHIVE_FORMAT initialization parameter
Imported? Yes, from the LOG_ARCHIVE_FORMAT initialization parameter on the
primary database
Role Primary, standby, far sync instance
Standby type Physical, logical, or snapshot standby, or a far sync instance
Corresponds to LOG_ARCHIVE_FORMAT initialization parameter
8-33
Chapter 8
Scope Instance (On an Oracle RAC database, you can use the EDIT INSTANCE
* ON DATABASE command to have all instances use the same value for
this property.)
8.3.15 LogArchiveMaxProcesses
The LogArchiveMaxProcesses configurable property specifies the initial number of
archiver processes (ARCn) that are invoked.
The actual number of archiver processes in use may increase subsequently based on
the archiving workload.
Datatype Integer
Valid values 1 to 30
Broker default Value of the LOG_ARCHIVE_MAX_PROCESSES initialization parameter
Imported? Yes, from the LOG_ARCHIVE_MAX_PROCESSES initialization parameter
Appliance
Corresponds to LOG_ARCHIVE_MAX_PROCESSES initialization parameter
Scope Database, far sync instance
Cloud Control name Archiver Processes
8.3.16 LogArchiveMinSucceedDest
The LogArchiveMinSucceedDest configurable property controls when online redo log files
are available for reuse.
For the online redo log files to be available for reuse, archiving must succeed to a
minimum number of destinations.
Datatype Integer
Broker default Value of the LOG_ARCHIVE_MIN_SUCCEED_DEST initialization parameter
Imported? Yes, from the LOG_ARCHIVE_MIN_SUCCEED_DEST initialization parameter
Role Primary database, far sync instance, Recovery Appliance
Corresponds to LOG_ARCHIVE_MIN_SUCCEED_DEST initialization parameter
8-34
Chapter 8
name
8.3.17 LogArchiveTrace
Set the LogArchiveTrace configurable instance-specific property to an integer value to
see the progression of the archiving of online redo log files on the primary and the
standby databases.
The Oracle database writes an audit trail of the archived redo log files received from
the primary database into process trace files.
Datatype Integer
Valid values A valid value is the sum of any combination of any of the following
values:
0: Disable archive redo log tracing
1: Track archiving of online redo log file
2: Track archiving status of each archive redo log destination
4: Track archiving operational phase
8: Track ARCHIVELOG destination activity
16: Track detailed ARCHIVELOG destination activity
32: Track ARCHIVELOG destination parameter modifications
64: Track ARCn process state activity
128: Track FAL (fetch archive log) server related activities
256: Tracks RFS Logical Client
512: Tracks LGWR redo shipping network activity
1024: Tracks RFS physical client
2048: Tracks RFS/ARCn ping heartbeat
4096: Tracks real-time apply activity
8192: Tracks Redo Apply (media recovery or physical standby)
16384: Tracks archive I/O buffers
32768: Tracks LogMiner dictionary archiving
Broker default Value of the LOG_ARCHIVE_TRACE initialization parameter
Imported? Yes, from the LOG_ARCHIVE_TRACE initialization parameter
Corresponds to LOG_ARCHIVE_TRACE initialization parameter
this property.)
Cloud Control name Log Archive Trace
8-35
Chapter 8
8.3.18 LogFileNameConvert
The LogFileNameConvert configurable property converts the filename of an online redo
log file on the primary database to the filename of a corresponding online redo log file
on the physical standby database.
Note:
When a database is added to the configuration, the broker sets the initial value
of this property to the in-memory value of the LOG_FILE_NAME_CONVERT
initialization parameter. It is possible that the in-memory value and server
parameter file (SPFILE) value of this parameter will differ. If you want to use the
parameter's in-memory value, then enable the database and the broker will
ensure that the SPFILE value of the parameter is set to the in-memory value. If
you want to use the SPFILE value, then set the property value to be the
parameter's value stored in the SPFILE. Then enable the database.
Datatype String
Valid values Set the value of this property to a list of an even number of string pairs,
separated by commas.
1. The first string is the substring found in the datafile names on the
primary database.
2. The second string is the substring found in the datafile names on the
standby database.
For example, ('string1', 'string2', 'string3', 'string4',...)
Where:
Broker default Value of the LOG_FILE_NAME_CONVERT initialization parameter
Imported? Yes, from the LOG_FILE_NAME_CONVERT initialization parameter
Role Standby
Standby type Physical database and far sync instance
Corresponds to LOG_FILE_NAME_CONVERT initialization parameter
Scope Database
Cloud Control name Log File Name Convert
8-36
Chapter 8
8.3.19 LogShipping
The broker uses the value of the LogShipping property when the primary database is in
the TRANSPORT-ON state or when the physical standby or far sync instance forwards redo
data to another member.
The other member can be a physical, logical, or snapshot standby, or a far sync
instance.
• If the primary database is in the TRANSPORT-ON state and the value of the
LogShipping property is ON, then redo transport services are enabled to send redo
data to the particular configuration member. If the LogShipping property is OFF, then
redo transport services are disabled to that member.
• If a configuration member that forwards redo data has its LogShipping property set
to ON and the member to which it sends redo data also has its LogShipping property
set to ON, then redo transport services are enabled from the member sending redo
data to the member that is to receive redo data.
If a member that forwards redo data has its LogShipping property set to ON but the
member to which it sends redo data has its LogShipping property set to OFF, then
redo transport services are disabled from the member sending redo data to the
member that is to receive redo data.
Datatype String
Valid values ON or OFF
Broker default ON
Imported? No
Appliance
Corresponds to ENABLE and DEFER values for the LOG_ARCHIVE_DEST_STATE_n initialization
parameter of the database or far sync instance that is sending redo data
Scope Database, Recovery Appliance
Cloud Control name Log Shipping
1 Although this property is set for a standby database or far sync instance, it is indirectly related to the redo
transport services for the database or far sync instance that is sending redo data. The broker propagates
the setting you specify on the standby database to the corresponding attributes of the
LOG_ARCHIVE_DEST_n value of the database or far sync instance that is sending redo data.
8.3.20 LogXptMode
The LogXptMode configurable property enables you to set the redo transport service.
You set the redo transport services on each configuration member to one of the
following modes:
• SYNC
8-37
Chapter 8
Configures redo transport services for this configuration member using the SYNC
and AFFIRM attributes of the LOG_ARCHIVE_DEST_n initialization parameter. Standby
redo log files are required. This mode is required for the maximum protection or
maximum availability data protection modes. This redo transport service enables
the highest grade of data protection to the primary database, but also incurs the
highest performance impact.
• ASYNC
Configures redo transport services for this configuration member using the ASYNC
and NOAFFIRM attributes of the LOG_ARCHIVE_DEST_n initialization parameter. Standby
redo log files are required. This mode enables a moderate grade of data protection
to the primary database, and incurs a lower performance impact than SYNC.
• FASTSYNC
Configures redo transport services for this configuration member using the SYNC
and NOAFFIRM attributes of the LOG_ARCHIVE_DEST_n initialization parameter. This
mode is only available in maximum availability protection mode. Because FASTSYNC
transport mode uses the NOAFFIRM attribute of the LOG_ARCHIVE_DEST_n parameter,
data loss is possible.
Datatype String
Valid values SYNC, ASYNC, or FASTSYNC
Broker default ASYNC
Imported? No
Appliance
Corresponds to • SYNC, ASYNC, AFFIRM, and NOAFFIRM attributes for the
LOG_ARCHIVE_DEST_n initialization parameter of the database or far
• ARCHIVER, TRANSMIT_MODE, and AFFIRM columns of V$ARCHIVE_DEST
view of the database or far sync instance that is sendng redo data
Cloud Control name Redo Transport Service
1 Although this property is set for the standby database or far sync instance, it is indirectly related to the
redo transport services for the database or far sync instance that is sending redo. The broker propagates
the setting you specify on the standby database or far sync instance to the corresponding attributes of the
LOG_ARCHIVE_DEST_n value of the database or far sync instance that is sending redo data. Note that if a
database receives redo from a database or far sync instance where the RedoRoutes property has been
configured with a redo transport mode, then the mode specified by that RedoRoutes property value
overrides the value of the LogXptMode property.
See Also:
setting data protection modes for redo transport services
8-38
Chapter 8
8.3.21 LsbyMaxEventsRecorded
The LsbyMaxEventsRecorded configurable property specifies the number of events that
will be stored in the DBA_LOGSTDBY_EVENTS table, which stores logical standby event
information.
Datatype Integer
Valid values >=0
Broker default Value of the MAX_EVENTS_RECORDED row of SYSTEM.LOGSTDBY$PARAMETERS
Imported? Yes, from the MAX_EVENTS_RECORDED row of
SYSTEM.LOGSTDBY$PARAMETERS
Parameter class Dynamic; SQL Apply does not require restart
Role Standby
Standby type Logical
Corresponds to DBMS_LOGSTDBY.APPLY_SET('MAX_EVENTS_RECORDED') and the
DBMS_LOGSTDBY.APPLY_UNSET('MAX_EVENTS_RECORDED') procedures
Scope Database
Cloud Control name Max Events Recorded
8.3.22 LsbyMaxServers
The LsbyMaxServers configurable instance-specific property specifies the number of
parallel query servers specifically reserved for SQL Apply.
If the value is 0, then SQL Apply uses all available parallel query servers to read the
log files and apply changes.
Datatype Integer
Valid values >=0
Broker default Value of the MAX_SERVERS row of SYSTEM.LOGSTDBY$PARAMETERS
Imported? Yes, from the MAX_SERVERS row of SYSTEM.LOGSTDBY$PARAMETERS
Role Standby
Corresponds to DBMS_LOGSTDBY.APPLY_SET('MAX_SERVERS') and the
DBMS_LOGSTDBY.APPLY_UNSET('MAX_SERVERS') procedures
this property.)
Cloud Control name Max Servers
8-39
Chapter 8
8.3.23 LsbyMaxSga
The LsbyMaxSga configurable instance-specific property specifies the number of
megabytes for the allocation of SQL Apply cache in the system global area (SGA).
If the value is 0, SQL Apply uses one quarter of the value set for the SHARED_POOL_SIZE
Datatype Integer
Valid values >=0
Broker default Value of the MAX_SGA row of SYSTEM.LOGSTDBY$PARAMETERS
Imported? Yes, from the MAX_SGA row of SYSTEM.LOGSTDBY$PARAMETERS
Role Standby
Corresponds to DBMS_LOGSTDBY.APPLY_SET('MAX_SGA') and the
DBMS_LOGSTDBY.APPLY_UNSET('MAX_SGA') procedures
this property.)
Cloud Control name Max SGA (MB)
8.3.24 LsbyPreserveCommitOrder
The LsbyPreserveCommitOrder configurable property controls whether transactions are
committed on the logical standby database in the exact same order in which they were
committed on the primary database.
Specify one of the following values:
• TRUE: Transactions are applied to the logical standby database in the exact order in
which they were committed on the primary database.
• FALSE: Transactions containing non-overlapping sets of rows may be committed in
a different order than they were committed on the primary database.
Datatype String
Broker default Value of the PRESERVE_COMMIT_ORDER row of
Imported? Yes, from the PRESERVE_COMMIT_ORDER row of
Parameter class Static; SQL Apply requires restart
Role Standby
8-40
Chapter 8
Corresponds to DBMS_LOGSTDBY.APPLY_SET('PRESERVE_COMMIT_ORDER') and
DBMS_LOGSTDBY.APPLY_UNSET('PRESERVE_COMMIT_ORDER') procedures
Scope Database
Cloud Control name Preserve Commit Order
8.3.25 LsbyRecordAppliedDdl
The LsbyRecordAppliedDdl configurable property controls whether or not SQL
statements that were applied to the logical standby database are recorded in the
DBA_LOGSTDBY_EVENTS table.

• TRUE: DDL statements applied to the logical standby database are recorded in the
DBA_LOGSTDBY_EVENTS table. This is the default setting.
• FALSE: Applied DDL statements are not recorded.
Datatype String
Broker default Value of the RECORD_APPLIED_DDL row of SYSTEM.LOGSTDBY$PARAMETERS
Imported? Yes, from the RECORD_APPLIED_DDL row of SYSTEM.LOGSTDBY$PARAMETERS
Role Standby
Corresponds to DBMS_LOGSTDBY.APPLY_SET('RECORD_APPLIED_DDL') and the
DBMS_LOGSTDBY.APPLY_UNSET('RECORD_APPLIED_DDL') procedures
Scope Database
Cloud Control name Record Applied DDL
8.3.26 LsbyRecordSkipDdl
The LsbyRecordSkipDdl configurable property controls whether or not skipped DDL
statements are recorded in the DBA_LOGSTDBY_EVENTS table.

• TRUE: Skipped DDL statements are recorded in the DBA_LOGSTDBY_EVENTS table. This
is the default setting.
• FALSE: Skipped DDL statements are not recorded in the DBA_LOGSTDBY_EVENTS table.
Datatype String
8-41
Chapter 8
Broker default Value of the RECORD_SKIP_DDL row of SYSTEM.LOGSTDBY$PARAMETERS
Imported? Yes, from the RECORD_SKIP_DDL row of SYSTEM.LOGSTDBY$PARAMETERS
Role Standby
Corresponds to DBMS_LOGSTDBY.APPLY_SET('RECORD_SKIP_DDL') and the
DBMS_LOGSTDBY.APPLY_UNSET('RECORD_SKIP_DDL') procedures
Scope Database
Cloud Control name Record Skip DDL
8.3.27 LsbyRecordSkipErrors
The LsbyRecordSkipErrors configurable property controls whether or not skipped errors
(as described by the DBMS_LOGSTDBY.SKIP_ERROR procedure) are recorded in the
DBA_LOGSTDBY_EVENTS table.

• TRUE: Skipped errors are recorded in the DBA_LOGSTDBY_EVENTS table.
• FALSE: Skipped errors are not recorded in the DBA_LOGSTDBY_EVENTS table.
Datatype String
Broker default Value of the RECORD_SKIP_ERRORS row of SYSTEM.LOGSTDBY$PARAMETERS
Imported? Yes, from the RECORD_SKIP_ERRORS row of SYSTEM.LOGSTDBY$PARAMETERS
Role Standby
Corresponds to DBMS_LOGSTDBY.APPLY_SET('RECORD_SKIP_ERRORS') and the
DBMS_LOGSTDBY.APPLY_UNSET('RECORD_SKIP_ERRORS') procedures
Scope Database
Cloud Control name Record Skip Errors
8.3.28 MaxConnections
The MaxConnections configurable property specifies how many ARCn processes will be
used in parallel to transmit redo data from a single archived redo log on the database
or far sync instance to the archived redo log at the remote site.
If the MaxConnections property is set to a value greater than 1, then redo transport
services use multiple ARCn processes to transmit redo data to archived redo log files
at the remote destinations.
8-42
Chapter 8
Datatype Integer
Broker default 1
Imported? No
Standby type Physical, logical, snapshot, Recovery Appliance
Corresponds to • LOG_ARCHIVE_MAX_PROCESSES initialization parameter1
• MAX_CONNECTIONS attribute for the LOG_ARCHIVE_DEST_n initialization
data
• MAX_CONNECTIONS column of the V$ARCHIVE_DEST view of the
database or far sync instance that is sending redo data
Note:
The MAX_CONNECTIONS attribute for the
LOG_ARCHIVE_DEST_n initialization parameter
is deprecated as of Oracle Database 18c
and is supported for backward compatibility
only.

1 The LOG_ARCHIVE_MAX_PROCESSES initialization parameter affects the actual number of ARCn

processes used by an instance.
8.3.29 MaxFailure
The MaxFailure configurable property specifies the maximum number of contiguous
archiving failures before the redo transport services stop trying to transport archived
redo log files to the standby database.
A value of zero indicates that an unlimited number of failures are allowed.
Datatype Integer
Valid values >=0
Broker default If the standby database is part of a group as specified with the broker
RedoRoutes property, then the default value 1. Otherwise, the default
value is 0.
Imported? No
Role Standby1, Recovery Appliance
8-43
Chapter 8
Standby type Physical, logical, snapshot, Recovery Appliance
Corresponds to • MAX_FAILURE attribute for the LOG_ARCHIVE_DEST_n initialization
data
• MAX_FAILURE column of the V$ARCHIVE_DEST view of the database or
8.3.30 NetTimeout
The NetTimeout configurable property specifies the number of seconds the LGWR
waits for Oracle Net Services to respond to a LGWR request.
It is used to bypass the long connection timeout in TCP.
Datatype Integer
Valid values 0, 15 to 1200
Broker default 30
Imported? No
Appliance
Corresponds to • NET_TIMEOUT attribute of the LOG_ARCHIVE_DEST_n initialization
data
• NET_TIMEOUT column of V$ARCHIVE_DEST view of the database or far
8.3.31 ObserverConnectIdentifier
The ObserverConnectIdentifier configurable property specifies a connect identifier that
can be used by the observer to connect to this database.
The connect identifier can pertain only to the primary database, or to the target
standby database when fast-start failover is enabled.
8-44
Chapter 8
Datatype String
Valid Values A connect identifier that observer can use to connect to this database
Broker Default Empty String1
Imported? No
Parameter Class Not applicable
Role Primary and Standby
Standby Type Physical or logical
Scope Database
Cloud Control name Observer Connect Identifier
1 When this is Empty String (not set by the user), the connect identifier specified by this database's
DGConnectIdentifier property will be used by the observer.
8.3.32 OnlineAlternateLocation
The OnlineAlternateLocation configurable property specifies an alternate online redo
log archive location for primary, logical, and snapshot standby databases when the
location specified by the OnlineArchiveLocation configurable property fails.
This property has instance-specific scope, and the location it specifies must be
accessible by the instance.
Datatype String
Valid • An empty string when no alternate location is desired.
values • A directory specification that is accessible by the instance.
• A valid LOG_ARCHIVE_DEST_n parameter string with the LOCATION attribute
specified, but no VALID_FOR, ALTERNATE, or SERVICE attributes.
Broker Empty string
default
Imported? No
Parameter Dynamic
class
Standby Physical, logical, or snapshot standby
type
Correspon On the primary or standby database, the LOCATION attribute for
ds to the LOG_ARCHIVE_DEST_n initialization parameter that represents an alternate
destination of the local destination that matches the configurable property
OnlineArchiveLocation.
Scope Instance
Cloud There is no Cloud Control name
Control
name
8-45
Chapter 8
8.3.33 OnlineArchiveLocation
The OnlineArchiveLocation configurable property specifies the online redo log archive
location for primary, logical, and snapshot standby databases.
Oracle recommends that you always explicitly set a value for this property.
Datatype String
Valid • An empty string when you do not want broker to manage the online archive
values location.
• A nonempty file specification of the redo log archive location for the instance.
Specify USE_DB_RECOVERY_FILE_DEST if a database recovery area is desired.
• A valid LOG_ARCHIVE_DEST_n parameter string with the LOCATION attribute
specified, but no VALID_FOR, ALTERNATE, or SERVICE attributes.
Broker Empty string
default
Imported? Yes, from the DESTINATION column of the V$ARCHIVE_DEST view of the instance
where the destination is a local destination and where the VALID_FOR attribute is
compatible with the string (ONLINE_LOGFILE, ALL_ROLES).
Parameter Dynamic
class
Standby Physical, logical, or snapshot standby
type
Correspon • LOCATION attribute of the LOG_ARCHIVE_DEST_n initialization parameter of the
ds to primary or standby database with VALID_FOR compatible with
(ONLINE_LOGFILE, ALL_ROLES)
• DESTINATION column of the V$ARCHIVE_DEST view of the primary or standby
database
Scope Instance
Cloud There is no Cloud Control name
Control
name
8.3.34 PreferredApplyInstance
The PreferredApplyInstance configurable property indicates that a particular instance is
the preferred choice for serving log apply services.
It is only used when the database is a standby Oracle RAC database. The value could
be an empty string (default) which means the broker chooses the apply instance.
Datatype String
Valid Values The instance name (SID) or empty string. Note that on certain platforms,
SIDs may be case-sensitive.
Broker Default Empty string
Imported? No
8-46
Chapter 8
Parameter Class Not applicable
Standby Type Physical, logical, Recovery Appliance
Cloud Control name Apply Instance
See Also:
• Oracle Database Administrator's Guide for more information about SIDs

• Apply Services in an Oracle RAC Database Environment for information
about apply services in an Oracle RAC environment
8.3.35 PreferredObserverHosts
The PreferredObserverHosts configurable property allows you to list the hosts that you
would prefer as hosts for the master observer when that database is in the primary
role.
The value of this property can be changed at any time, regardless of whether Fast-
Start Failover is enabled or not, or whether the observer is in an OBSERVED state.
However, the change does not affect the location of the master observer until the next
role change.
If this property is set, then after a role change the broker takes the following steps:
1. Checks whether the current master observer is running on a host in the list
specified by the PreferredObserverHosts property of the new primary. If yes, stop
here; otherwise, go to step 2.
2. Scans the list from the beginning to look for a host where one observer is running,
and connects to the primary and target standby databases. If found, go to step 3;
otherwise, stop here.
3. Attempts to switch the master observer to the host found in step 2. If switching
fails, no other hosts are tried.
Data type String
Valid value A character string that contains one or more host names,
separated by comma:
host_name_1 [,host_name_n]
Each host name can be any character string for a valid

network name, even if there is no observer running on
this host when it is set.
8-47
Chapter 8
Broker default Null
Imported? No
Role Primary, standby
Standby type Physical standby and logical standby
Scope Database
8.3.36 RedoCompression
The RedoCompression configurable property is used to specify whether redo data is
transmitted to a standby database or far sync instance in compressed or
uncompressed form.
Note:
Redo transport compression is a feature of the Oracle Advanced Compression
option. You must purchase a license for this option before using the redo
transport compression feature.
Datatype String
Valid value DISABLE ,ENABLE, ZLIB, or LZO
• When ENABLE is specified, the default compression algorithm is
ZLIB.
• LZO is not supported when LogXptMode is set to SYNC or FASTSYNC.
Broker Default DISABLE
Imported? No
Role Standby database, far sync instance1, Recovery Appliance
Appliance
Corresponds to • COMPRESSION attribute for the LOG_ARCHIVE_DEST_n initialization
data
• COMPRESSION column of the V$ARCHIVE_DEST view of the database
or far sync instance that is sending redo data
8-48
Chapter 8
8.3.37 RedoRoutes
The RedoRoutes property lets you override the default behavior by which a primary
database sends the redo that it generates to every other redo transport destination in
the configuration.
You can use the RedoRoutes property to create a more complex redo transport
topology, such as one in which a physical standby database or a far sync instance
forwards redo received from the primary database to one or more destinations, or one
in which the redo transport mode used for a given destination is dependent on which
database is in the primary role.
The RedoRoutes property is set to a character string that contains one or more redo
routing rules. Each rule contains one or more redo sources and one or more redo
destinations. A redo routing rule becomes active when one of the redo sources in the
rule is in the primary role. This results in redo from the primary database being sent to
every redo destination in that rule.
Datatype String
Valid values A character string that contains one or more redo routing rules, each
contained within a pair of parentheses:
(redo_routing_rule_1) [(redo_routing_rule_n)]
See "Redo Routing Rules" for more information about redo routing rules.
Broker default Null
Imported? No
Standby type Physical standby and far sync instance
Corresponds to LOG_ARCHIVE_DEST_n
Cloud Control Name RedoRoutes
8.3.37.1 Redo Routing Rules

The RedoRoutes property is set to a character string that contains one or more redo
routing rules.
Each rule is contained within a set of parentheses, as follows:
(redo_routing_rule_1) [(redo_routing_rule_n)]
A redo routing rule contains a redo source field and a redo destination field separated
by a colon:
(redo source : redo destination)
8-49
Chapter 8
The redo source field must contain the keyword LOCAL or ANY, or a comma-separated
list of DB_UNIQUE_NAME values, as follows:
{LOCAL | ANY | db_unique_name_1,[,db_unique_name_n]}
• The LOCAL keyword is an alias for the local database name. This keyword cannot
be used at a far sync instance.
• The ANY keyword is an alias for any database in the configuration.
• A database cannot be specified as a redo source in more than one redo routing
rule defined at a given database, either explicitly or implicitly through use of the
LOCAL keyword.
The redo destination field must contain the keyword ALL or a comma-separated list of
redo destination groups, each of which consists of destination databases with optional
priority attributes and optional redo transport mode attributes:
{ALL [xpt_mode] | redo_dest_group_1 [, redo_dest_group_n]}
• The ALL keyword is an alias for all possible destinations in the configuration.
• The redo_dest_group_n is:
{ db_unique_name_1 [xpt_mode] | ( db_unique_name_1 [xpt_mode] [PRIORITY=n]
[,db_unique_name_n [xpt_mode] [PRIORITY=n]] ) }
The optional xpt_mode specifies the redo transport mode to be used to send redo to
the associated destination. It can have one of three values: ASYNC, SYNC, or
FASTSYNC. If the redo transport attribute is not specified, then the transport mode
used will be the one specified by the LogXptMode property for the redo destination.
The optional [PRIORITY=n] can have n =1 ~ 8. The default value for far sync
members is 1 and the default value for non-far sync members is 8. It is important
to understand how different group and priority settings affect redo transport under
various conditions. The following examples describe some sample situations.
Example 1: Different Priorities Within a Group
Assume there are three members in a broker configuration:
PRI (primary database)
SB1 (standby database)
FS1 (far sync instance)
The primary database PRI generates the redo log for use by the standby database SB1.
Because there is a far sync instance, FS1, there are two possible redo delivery paths to
the standby database:
(path 1) PRI —> FS1 —> SB1
(path 2) PRI —> SB1
Assume (path 1) is more desirable than (path 2). This can be expressed with the
RedoRoutes property as follows:
PRI —RedoRoutes = (local : ( FS1 PRIORITY=1, SB1 PRIORITY=2 ) )

FS1 —RedoRoutes = ( PRI : SB1 )
As specified in the PRI RedoRoutes property, the primary (PRI) has two destinations : one
for FS1 with PRIORITY=1 and one for SB1 with PRIORITY=2. Smaller priority numbers mean
higher priority, so primary PRI tries to ship the redo log to FS1 first.
8-50
Chapter 8
If FS1 is available, then the primary ships to FS1 which has PRIORITY=1. If FS1 is
unavailable, then the primary ships to SB1 which has PRIORITY=2. When FS1 becomes
active again, the primary will ship to it again because priority 1 is higher than priority 2.
Example 2: The Same Priorities Within a Group
Suppose you add one more far sync instance, FS2, to the configuration set up in
Example 1, and then update the RedoRoutes property as follows:
PRI — RedoRoutes = (local : ( FS1 PRIORITY=1, FS2 PRIORITY=1 ) )
FS1 — RedoRoutes = ( PRI : SB1 )
The primary PRI now has two destinations, FS1 and FS2, with the same priority. The
primary must choose either FS1 or FS2. Assume the primary chooses FS1.
If FS1 is available, then the primary ships to FS1. If FS1 is unavailable, then the primary
ships to FS2. Even after FS1 becomes active again, the primary continues shipping to
FS2 because FS1 and FS2 have the same priority. If FS2 fails, then the primary ships to
FS1.
Example 3: Multiple Groups

Assume that you add one more standby, SB2, to the configuration, and then update the
RedoRoutes property as follows so that the primary has two destination groups:
PRI — RedoRoutes = (local : ( FS1 PRIORITY=1, SB1 PRIORITY=2 ), ( FS2

PRIORITY=1, SB2 PRIORITY=2 ) )
The general rule is that there is one active redo path for each group. (See Example 4
for a scenario in which there are multiple active redo paths.) The primary establishes
one redo delivery path for the first group ( FS1 PRIORITY=1, SB1 PRIORITY=2 ), and
establishes another redo delivery path for the second group ( FS2 PRIORITY=1, SB2
PRIORITY=2 ).
• If both FS1 and FS2 are available, then the primary ships to FS1 and FS2.
• If FS1 is unavailable and FS2 is available, then the primary ships to SB1 and FS2.
• If FS1 is available and FS2 is unavailable, then the primary ships to FS1 and SB2.
• If both FS1 and FS2 are unavailable, then the primary ships to SB1 and SB2.
Example 4: The PRIORITY Attribute is Set to 8
Setting PRIORITY=8 has special meaning. If a primary ships redo to a destination with
PRIORITY=8, then it must ship to every PRIORITY=8 destination. Suppose you update the
RedoRoutes property as follows so that the primary has one group containing three
destinations:
PRI — RedoRoutes = (local : ( FS1 PRIORITY=1, SB1 PRIORITY=8, SB2
PRIORITY=8 ) )
FS1 — RedoRoutes = ( PRI : SB1, SB2 )
These settings result in the following behavior:

• If FS1 is available, then the primary ships to FS1.
• If FS1 is unavailable, then the primary ships to both SB1 and SB2 because they both
have PRIORITY=8
8-51
Chapter 8
• If FS1 becomes active again, then the primary ships to FS1.
Usage Notes for Advanced Redo Transport Settings

The following usage notes apply regarding advanced redo transport settings:
• The RedoRoutes property has a default value of NULL, which is treated as (LOCAL :
ALL) at a primary database.
• A redo routing rule is active if its redo source field specifies the current primary
database. If a rule is active, primary database redo is sent by the database at
which the rule is defined to each destination specified in the redo destination field
of that rule.
• The ASYNC redo transport attribute must be explicitly specified for a cascaded
destination to enable real-time cascading to that destination.
• The RedoRoutes property cannot be configured such that when a physical standby
database is converted to a snapshot standby, the snapshot standby would send
redo data to another member.
• The RedoRoutes property can be set for a logical standby database only if the redo
source field is set to LOCAL.
8.3.38 ReopenSecs
The ReopenSecs configurable property specifies the minimum number of seconds before
the archiver process (ARCn, foreground, or log writer process) should try again to
access a previously failed destination.
Datatype Integer
Valid values >=0 seconds
Broker default 300
Imported? No
Role Standby database, far sync instance1, Recovery Appliance
Standby type Physical, logical, snapshot standby, far sync instance, Recovery
Appliance
Corresponds to • REOPEN attribute for the LOG_ARCHIVE_DEST_n initialization parameter
of the database or far sync instance that is sending redo data
• REOPEN_SECS column of the V$ARCHIVE_DEST view of the database or
8-52
Chapter 8
8.3.39 StandbyAlternateLocation
The StandbyAlternateLocation configurable property specifies an alternate standby
redo log archive location to use when the location specified by the
StandbyArchiveLocation configurable property fails.
The property has instance-specific scope, and the location it specifies has to be
accessible by the instance.
Datatype String
Valid values • An empty string, when no alternate location is desired.
• A directory specification that is accessible by the instance.
• A valid LOG_ARCHIVE_DEST_n parameter string with the
LOCATION attribute specified, but no VALID_FOR,
ALTERNATE, or SERVICE attributes.
Imported? No
Role Primary, standby, and far sync instance
Corresponds to On the standby database or the far sync instance, the LOCATION
attribute for the LOG_ARCHIVE_DEST_n initialization parameter
that represents an alternate destination of the local destination
that matches the configurable property
StandbyArchiveLocation.
Scope Instance
Cloud Control name Alternate Standby Location
Note:
On a logical standby database, Oracle recommends the LOCATION attribute of
the LOG_ARCHIVE_DEST_n initialization parameter for the local destination be
different from the value of StandbyAlternateLocation configurable property.
8.3.40 StandbyArchiveLocation
The StandbyArchiveLocation configurable property specifies the standby redo log
archive location. Oracle recommends that you always explicitly set the value.
Datatype String
8-53
Chapter 8
Valid values • An empty string when you do not want broker to manage the
standby redo log archive location.
• A nonempty file specification of the standby redo log archive location
for the instance. Specify USE_DB_RECOVERY_FILE_DEST if a database
recovery area is desired.
• A valid LOG_ARCHIVE_DEST_n parameter string with the LOCATION
attribute specified, but no VALID_FOR, ALTERNATE, or SERVICE
attributes.
Imported? Yes, from the DESTINATION column of the V$ARCHIVE_DEST view of
primary database, standby database, or far sync instance where the
destination is a local destination and where the VALID_FOR attribute is
compatible with the string (STANDBY_LOGFILE, ALL_ROLES).
Role Primary, standby, and far sync instance
Corresponds to • LOCATION attribute of the LOG_ARCHIVE_DEST_n initialization
parameter of the standby database or far sync instance with
VALID_FOR compatible with (STANDBY_LOGFILE, ALL_ROLES)
• DESTINATION column of the V$ARCHIVE_DEST view of the standby
database
Scope Instance
Cloud Control name Standby Archive Location
Note:
On a logical standby database, Oracle recommends the LOCATION attribute of
the LOG_ARCHIVE_DEST_n initialization parameter for the local destination be
different from the value of StandbyArchiveLocation property, unless you are
using a database recovery area.
8.3.41 StandbyFileManagement
The StandbyFileManagement configurable property affects how the add datafile operation
on the primary database is applied on the standby database.
If this property is set to AUTO, in conjunction with valid settings in the DbFileNameConvert
configurable property, a corresponding new datafile is automatically created on the
standby database. The location of this new standby datafile is determined by the value
of the DbFileNameConvert property.
If this property is set to MANUAL, you have to create the correct new datafile on the
standby database manually.
Datatype String
8-54
Chapter 8
Valid values AUTO or MANUAL
Broker default AUTO
Imported? Yes, from the STANDBY_FILE_MANAGEMENT initialization parameter
Role Standby
Standby type Physical or snapshot
Corresponds to STANDBY_FILE_MANAGEMENT initialization parameter
Scope Database
8.3.42 StaticConnectIdentifier
The StaticConnectIdentifier configurable instance-specific property specifies the
connection identifier that the DGMGRL client will use when starting database
instances.
If this property has a null value, then the DGConnectIdentifier value is used for
operations that involve shutting down and starting up the instance.
Datatype String
Valid values A connect identifier that refers to a service that is statically registered.
Broker default Connect descriptor that is the concatenation of:1
• The ADDRESS attribute value of the listener that is specified for the
LOCAL_LISTENER initialization parameter
• The value for the SERVICE_NAME attribute will be set to a
concatenation of db_unique_name_DGMGRL.db_domain
Imported? Yes, from the LOCAL_LISTENER and DB_UNIQUE_NAME initialization
parameters.
Standby type Physical, logical, or snapshot
Scope Instance
1 If the instance specified by the InstanceName property is started with a different SID (read from the
INSTANCE_NAME column of the V$INSTANCE view) than the SID with which it was previously started
and/or it is started on a different host (read from the HOST_NAME column of the V$INSTANCE view) than
the host on which it was previously started, then the broker automatically updates the default value of the
StaticConnectIdentifier property to incorporate the current ADDRESS attribute of the listener that is
specified for the LOCAL_LISTENER initialization parameter.
8-55
Chapter 8
See Also:
• See Oracle Database Net Services Administrator's Guide for more

information about statically registered services
• See the My Oracle Support Note 1387859.1 at http://support.oracle.com
for additional information about using static services and the
StaticConnectIdentifier configurable property
8.3.43 TransportDisconnectedThreshold
The TransportDisconnectedThreshold configurable property can be used to generate a
warning status for a logical, physical, or snapshot standby, or a far sync instance when
the last communication from the primary database exceeds the property value.
warnings being generated.
Datatype Number
Valid values >=0
Imported? No
Role Standby database, far sync instance
8.3.44 TransportLagThreshold
The TransportLagThreshold configurable property can be used to generate a warning
status for a logical, physical, or snapshot standby, or a far sync instance when the
member's transport lag exceeds the property value.
warnings being generated when a transport lag exists.
Datatype Number
Valid values >=0
Imported? No
8-56
Chapter 8
Role Standby database, far sync instance
8-57
9
Troubleshooting Oracle Data Guard
Use this information about common issues and resolutions to maintain your Oracle
Data Guard environment.
• Sources of Diagnostic Information
• General Problems and Solutions
• Troubleshooting Problems During a Switchover Operation
• Troubleshooting Problems During a Failover Operation
• Troubleshooting Problems with the Observer
9.1 Sources of Diagnostic Information

The Oracle Data Guard broker provides information about its activities in several
forms.
• Database status information (see Database Status)
• Oracle alert log files
The broker records key information in the alert log file for each instance of each
database in a broker configuration. You can check the alert log files for such
information when troubleshooting Oracle Data Guard.
• Oracle Data Guard "broker log files"
For each instance of each database in a broker configuration, the broker DMON
process records important behavior and status information in a broker log file,
useful in diagnosing Oracle Data Guard failures. The TraceLevel configuration
property (see TraceLevel) is used to specify the level of diagnostic information
reported in the broker log files.
The broker log file is created in the same directory as the alert log and is named
drc<$ORACLE_SID>.log.
• Oracle Data Guard command line (DGMGRL) logfile

If the DGMGRL command-line interface was started with the -logfile optional
parameter (see DGMGRL Optional Parameters), then the resulting log file may
contain a useful record of past operations, error conditions, or both.
Note:
Release 2 (12.2.0.1). It is supported for backward compatibility only.
Instead, the log file should now be specified using the LOGFILE IS clause on
the START OBSERVER command.
9-1
Chapter 9
General Problems and Solutions
9.2 General Problems and Solutions

These topics describe general problems and solutions when using Oracle Data Guard
broker.
• ORA-16596: database not part of the Oracle Data Guard broker configuration
• Redo Accumulating on the Primary Is Not Sent to Some Standby Databases
• Many Log Files Are Received on a Standby Database But Not Applied
• The Request Timed Out or Cloud Control Performance Is Sluggish
• The Primary Database is Flashed Back
• Standby Fails to Automatically Start Up Due to Unknown Service (ORA-12514)
9.2.1 ORA-16596: database not part of the Oracle Data Guard broker
configuration
A request was issued to the broker, but the database instance through which you have
connected is no longer a part of the broker configuration.
Solution
Reconnect to the configuration through another database that you know is part of the
broker configuration. Confirm that a database exists in the broker configuration that
has a name that matches the db_unique_name value of the database that returned the
ORA-16596 error.
This problem can also occur if you attempt to enable a configuration, but the broker
configuration file for one of its databases was accidentally removed or is outdated. In
this case, remove the database from the broker configuration, manually delete the
configuration file for that standby database (not for the primary database), and try
again to enable the configuration. After the configuration is enabled, you can either
use the Cloud Control Add Standby Database wizard and choose the Add existing
standby database option, or you can use the DGMGRL command-line interface and
issue the ADD DATABASE command.
9.2.2 Redo Accumulating on the Primary Is Not Sent to Some Standby

Databases
By viewing the Log File Details page in Cloud Control, you have determined that log
files are accumulating on the primary database and are not being archived to some of
the standby databases in the broker configuration.
Solution
To narrow down the problem, do the following:
• Verify that the state of the primary database is in the TRANSPORT-ON state (not
TRANSPORT-OFF).
• Verify that the value of the LogShipping database property of the standby database
in question is ON.
9-2
Chapter 9
• Check the status of the redo transport services on the primary database using the
LogXptStatus monitorable property. If redo transport services have an error, then
use the error message to determine further checking and resolution action. For
example:
– If the error indicates the standby database is not available, you need to restart
the standby database.
– If the error indicates no listener, you need to restart the listener.
– If the error indicates the standby database has no local destination, you need
to set up a standby location to store archived redo log files from the primary
database.
9.2.3 Many Log Files Are Received on a Standby Database But Not
Applied
By viewing the Performance page or Log File Details page in Cloud Control, you have
determined that the standby database accumulates too many log files without applying
them.
Solution
There are many possible reasons why archived redo log files might not be applied to
the standby database. Investigate why the log files are building up and rule out the
valid reasons.
If the current status of the standby database is not normal:

• Determine whether or not the log apply services might be unexpectedly stopped.
See the ORA-16766 (for physical standby databases) or ORA-16768 (for logical
standby databases) error description and solution statement for more help.
• If this is a logical standby database, check to see if a failed transaction has
occurred.
• If you want to suppress the error while you investigate the problem, you can
temporarily disable broker management of the database.
See Also:
Oracle Data Guard Command-Line Interface Reference for additional
information about disabling the database using the DGMGRL command-
line interface
If the current status of the standby database is normal:

• Verify the state of the standby database is APPLY-ON (not in the APPLY-OFF state).
• Verify the state of the primary database is TRANSPORT-ON (not in the TRANSPORT-OFF
state).
9-3
Chapter 9
See Also:
Oracle Data Guard Broker Properties for additional information about the
LogShipping database property
• Check to see if log files are building up because the value of the DelayMins
property is set too large. (Log apply services will delay applying the archived redo
log files on the standby database for the number of minutes specified.)
See Also:
Oracle Data Guard Broker Properties for additional information about the
DelayMins database property
• If you cannot see any errors, compare the archive rate to the apply rate on the
Performance page in Cloud Control to see if the apply rate is lower than the
archive rate.
9.2.4 The Request Timed Out or Cloud Control Performance Is

Sluggish
If the broker requests are not completing within the normal timeout parameters, try
these actions to solve the problem.
1. Verify the network is operating appropriately.
2. Try to ping all of the nodes in the configuration.
3. Try reconnecting through another database to retry the operation.
4. Run the VERIFY command to determine on which database the broker is unable to
process the requests.
9.2.5 The Primary Database is Flashed Back

If the primary database is flashed back, then the standby databases in the
configuration must be also be flashed back or re-created to be viable targets for
switchovers or failovers.
The broker will report errors for the standby databases if the primary database has
been flashed back.
For more information about restoring the viability of a standby database that was
disabled by the broker, see Reenabling Disabled Databases After a Role Change.
9-4
Chapter 9
Troubleshooting Problems During a Switchover Operation
9.2.6 Standby Fails to Automatically Start Up Due to Unknown Service

(ORA-12514)
An ORA-12514 error may be generated if the DGMGRL CLI fails to automatically start up
an instance after a broker operation (for example, a switchover, reinstatement, convert
to physical standby, or upgrade of protection mode to maximum protection mode).
The full error text is ORA-12514: TNS:listener does not currently know of service
requested in connect descriptor. If you receive this error, then you must manually
start the instance to complete or continue the broker operation.
You can restart the instance before or after completing the following steps:
1. Issue the following DGMGRL CLI command to check the value of the
StaticConnectIdentifer configurable property for the instance the DGMGRL CLI
was unable to restart. (You will have to connect to another running instance to
issue this command):
DGMGRL> SHOW INSTANCE VERBOSE 'instance_name' ON DATABASE db_unique_name;
2. The static service name specified in the value of the StaticConnectIdentifer
instance property should be registered with the listener specified in the property
value. The default value for the static service name is of the following form:
db_unique_name_DGMGRL.db_domain
See Prerequisites for more information about this, and other prerequisites, for
using the broker.
3. Confirm that the static service name is registered with the listener specified in the
StaticConnectIdentifer configurable property value by using the Listener Control
utility's status command. If the static service name is properly registered with the
listener, it will be included in the output generated by the following command:
lsnrctl status
4. If you are working in an Oracle RAC environment, you may want to repeat steps 1
and 2 for each instance to ensure that a static service name is properly registered
with its respective listener.
9.3 Troubleshooting Problems During a Switchover

Operation
If the switchover fails due to problems with the configuration, then the broker reports
any problems it encounters in the alert log files or in the broker log files.
See Sources of Diagnostic Information for more information about log files. If the
reported problems can be corrected, you can retry the switchover operation and it will
usually succeed. If the reported problems cannot be corrected or the switchover
operation fails even after correcting the reported problems, then you can choose
another database for the switchover or restore the configuration to its pre-switchover
state and then retry the switchover.
If fast-start failover is enabled, the broker does not allow switchover to any standby
database except to the target standby database. In addition, switchover to the target
9-5
Chapter 9
Troubleshooting Problems During a Failover Operation
standby database is allowed only when the value of the FS_FAILOVER_STATUS column in
the V$DATABASE view on the target standby database is either READY or SUSPENDED.
See Also:
When Fast-Start Failover Is Enabled and the Observer Is Running
9.4 Troubleshooting Problems During a Failover Operation

Although it is possible for a failover operation to fail, it is unlikely. If an error does occur
there are guidelines you can follow to fix the problem and then retry the broker failover.
9.4.1 Failed Failovers to Physical Standby Databases

These steps describe how to recover from a failed broker failover to a physical standby
database.
9.4.1.1 Failed Broker Complete Physical Failovers

Examine the alert log file and the broker log file (drc*.log) on the target standby
database to determine the cause of the failure and correct the problem.
If the reported problem can be corrected, then retry the failover operation. If the
reported problem cannot be corrected or if the failover operation fails again after the
reported problem has been corrected, then take the following steps:
1. Connect to the target standby database and disable fast-start failover using the
FORCE option if it is enabled.
2. Then you can either:

• Connect to another physical standby database and attempt a broker complete
failover.
• Perform a broker immediate failover to the target physical standby database.
3. Reinstate the original primary database and any bystander physical standby
databases that are disabled with a status of reinstatement required (ORA-16661).
4. Reenable fast-start failover if it was disabled in step 1.
9.4.1.2 Failed Broker Immediate Physical Failovers

Examine the alert log file and the broker log file (drc*.log) on the target standby
If the problem can be corrected, retry the broker immediate failover. Otherwise
connect to another physical standby database and attempt either a broker complete or
immediate failover.
9-6
Chapter 9
Troubleshooting Problems with the Observer
9.4.2 Failed Failovers to Logical Standby Databases

These are the steps to follow if a failover to a logical standby database fails.
1. Examine the alert log file and the broker log file (drc*.log) on the target standby
2. Connect to the target standby database and disable fast-start failover using the
FORCE option if it is enabled.
3. Retry the broker failover.

4. Reinstate the old primary database. All bystander standby databases will be re-
created from a copy of the new primary database.
5. Reenable fast-start failover if it was disabled in step 1.
If broker failover continues to fail, you should stop the broker on all databases in the
Oracle Data Guard configuration (set the DG_BROKER_START initialization parameter to
FALSE). Remove the Oracle Data Guard broker configuration files from all databases.
Attempt a manual failover using the guidelines for role transitions in Oracle Data
Guard Concepts and Administration.
Note:
You can enable or disable the broker configuration using DGMGRL ENABLE
CONFIGURATION and DISABLE CONFIGURATION commands. You cannot disable the
configuration using Cloud Control. You can only enable the configuration using
Cloud Control if it was previously disabled using DGMGRL.
9.5 Troubleshooting Problems with the Observer

The observer continuously monitors the fast-start failover environment to ensure the
primary database is available.
Installing and starting the observer is an integral part of using fast-start failover. The
following sections describe techniques for troubleshooting the observer:
• Problems Starting the Observer
• Problems Because the Observer Has Stopped
• Capturing Observer Actions in the Observer Log File
9.5.1 Problems Starting the Observer

Only one observer can be observing the broker configuration at any given time.
If you attempt to start a second observer, one of the following errors is returned:
ORA-16647: could not start more than one observer
DGM-16954: Unable to open and lock the Observer configuration file
Use the DGMGRL SHOW CONFIGURATION VERBOSE command to determine the location of
the observer that is currently associated with the broker configuration.
9-7
Chapter 9

Members:
North_Sales- Primary database
South_Sales- Physical standby database
Properties:
TraceLevel = 'USER'
FastStartFailoverLagLimit = '30
ConfigurationWideService = 'North_Sales_CFG'
Target: South_Sales
SUCCESS
9.5.2 Problems Because the Observer Has Stopped

If the observer host machine crashes, the broker configuration is no longer observed
and fast-start failover is no longer possible.
In this case, you may have to move the observer to a new host if the original host
machine cannot be repaired in a timely fashion. To move the observer, you must stop
allowing the first observer to observe this broker configuration, and then start a new
observer on another host.
1. Issue the DGMGRL STOP OBSERVER command to sever the link between the original
observer and the broker configuration:
DGMGRL> STOP OBSERVER;
Done.
2. Issue the DGMGRL SHOW CONFIGURATION VERBOSE command to verify that the
configuration is no longer being observed:
9-8
Chapter 9

Members:
Warning: ORA-16819: fast-start failover observer not started

Warning: ORA-16819: fast-start failover observer not started
Properties:
TraceLevel = 'USER'
ConfigurationWideService = 'North_Sales_CFG'
Target: South_Sales
WARNING
3. Note that you do not need to issue the DGMGRL SHOW CONFIGURATION command to
verify that the observer has actually stopped. Successful completion of the
DGMGRL STOP OBSERVER command will allow a new observer to become
associated with the configuration.
9.5.3 Capturing Observer Actions in the Observer Log File

You can use the DGMGRL -logfile option to start the observer.
Using -logfile results in all of the troubleshooting actions performed in Problems

Starting the Observer being captured in a file. For example:
% dgmgrl -logfile observer.log / "start observer"
All the observer output is then recorded in a file named observer.log in the current
working directory where you issued the DGMGRL command. If the specified log file is
not accessible, then the observer output is sent to standard output as though a log file
had not been specified.
9-9
Chapter 9
Note that this is not only useful for troubleshooting problems with the observer, but
also for troubleshooting problems with fast-start failover in general.
Note:
Release 2 (12.2.0.1). The information in this section is supported for backward
compatibility only. Instead, the log file should now be specified using the
LOGFILE IS clause on the START OBSERVER command.
9-10
A
Oracle Data Guard Broker Upgrading and
Downgrading
Use these topics to upgrade or downgrade Oracle databases and Oracle Enterprise
Manager Cloud Control (Cloud Control) in a broker configuration.
• Upgrading from Oracle Database 9i Release 2 (9.2) to Oracle Database 12c
• Upgrading from Oracle Database 10g and Oracle Database 11g to Oracle
Database 12c
• Downgrading from Oracle Database 12c
See Also:
Oracle Data Guard Installation
A.1 Upgrading from Oracle Database 9i Release 2 (9.2) to

Oracle Database 12c
If you are currently running a broker configuration in Oracle Database 9i Release 2
(9.2), then you must upgrade to Oracle Database 12c Release 1 (12.1) or Oracle
Database 12c Release 2 (12.2), and then re-create the broker configuration.
The following steps use Oracle Database 12c Release 2 (12.2), but you could
substitute Oracle Database 12c Release 1 (12.1).
1. Delete (remove) the Oracle Database 9i Release 2 (9.2) broker configuration. For
example, the DGMGRL REMOVE CONFIGURATION command can be used. To perform
the deletion you must use Oracle Data Guard Manager or DGMGRL running on
Oracle Database 9i Release 2 (9.2).
2. If using DGMGRL, clear the LOG_ARCHIVE_DEST_n initialization parameter settings by
using the ALTER SYSTEM SET LOG_ARCHIVE_DEST_n=" " SQL*Plus command.
3. Upgrade the database software to Oracle Database 12c Release 2 (12.2). See the
Oracle Database installation documentation that is appropriate for your operating
system.
4. Oracle Enterprise Manager and Oracle Data Guard Manager running on Oracle
Database 9i Release 2 (9.2) cannot manage a broker configuration running on
Oracle Database 12c Release 2 (12.2).
A-1
Appendix A
Upgrading from Oracle Database 10g and Oracle Database 11g to Oracle Database 12c
See Also:
My Oracle Support note 787461.1 at http://support.oracle.com for
information about which versions of Enterprise Manager Cloud Control
(formerly called Grid Control) are required to manage the full set of Oracle
Data Guard features in various Oracle Database releases
5. If you are using DGMGRL running on Oracle Database 9i Release 2 (9.2), then
you must upgrade to DGMGRL running on Oracle Database 12c Release 2 (12.2):
• DGMGRL running on Oracle Database 9i Release 2 (9.2) is not compatible
with Oracle Data Guard running on Oracle Database 12c Release 2 (12.2).
• DGMGRL running on Oracle Database 12c Release 2 (12.2) is not compatible
with Oracle Data Guard running on Oracle Database 9i Release 2 (9.2).
Note:
Oracle Database 12c command-line scripts are not supported in
Oracle9i.
6. Invoke Enterprise Manager or the DGMGRL command-line interface, and re-

create the broker configuration.
A.2 Upgrading from Oracle Database 10g and Oracle

Database 11g to Oracle Database 12c
If you are currently running Oracle Data Guard on Oracle Database 10g or Oracle
Database 11g, then you can upgrade the database software to Oracle Database 12c
Release 1 (12.1) or Oracle Database 12c Release 2 (12.2) using the Oracle Database
installation documentation that is appropriate for your operating system.
Note:
Prior to Oracle Database 11g Release 2 (11.2), the configuration file was
restricted to reside only on disks having the same sector size (physical block
size) as that upon which the file was initially created. This was not a problem
because there was typically a single sector size in use within a given broker
configuration. In anticipation of having mixed sector sizes somewhere within a
given broker configuration, the broker configuration file is now completely
insensitive to the underlying sector size, so long as the sector size is 4KB or
less.
Conversion of the configuration file to be insensitive to the underlying sector
size occurs during the upgrade processing in Step 5 below.
The following steps use Oracle Database 12c Release 2 (12.2), but you could
substitute Oracle Database 12c Release 1 (12.1).
A-2
Appendix A
Upgrading from Oracle Database 10g and Oracle Database 11g to Oracle Database 12c
1. Issue the following DGMGRL command to disable fast-start failover:

DGMGRL> DISABLE FAST_START FAILOVER;
2. Shut down the 10.n or 11.n Oracle Data Guard broker, whichever version you are
running.
a. Issue the following DGMGRL command to disable the broker's active
management of the databases in the Oracle Data Guard configuration:
b. Issue the following SQL*Plus statement to stop the broker:
SQL> ALTER SYSTEM SET DG_BROKER_START=FALSE;
3. Make a copy of the current broker configuration files, as indicated by the following
initialization parameters: DG_BROKER_CONFIG_FILE1 and DG_BROKER_CONFIG_FILE2.
4. Upgrade the Oracle Database software to Oracle Database 12c Release 2 (12.2).
For step-by-step upgrade instructions, see the Oracle Database installation
documentation that is appropriate for your operating system.
The DGMGRL command-line interface must also be upgraded in order to manage
and monitor a broker configuration running on Oracle Database 12c Release 2
(12.2). DGMGRL running on Oracle Database 12c Release 2 (12.2) cannot be
used to manage Oracle Data Guard running on Oracle Database 10g or Oracle
Database 11g.
Note:
Existing DGMGRL command-line scripts for Oracle Database 10g and
Oracle Database 11g are supported by the DGMGRL command-line
interface available in Oracle Database 12c Release 2 (12.2).
DGMGRL command-line scripts for Oracle Database 11g are not
guaranteed to be supported by Oracle Database 10g.
5. After the upgrade to Oracle Database 12c Release 2 (12.2), start the broker. For
example:
a. Issue the following SQL*Plus statements to start the broker:
b. Issue the following DGMGRL command to enable the broker's active
management of the databases in the Oracle Data Guard configuration:
The first time the broker starts on Oracle Database 12c Release 2 (12.2) it detects
the existence of the Oracle Database 10g and Oracle Database 11g broker
configuration files. It automatically upgrades them to include any new properties
that were introduced in Oracle Database 12c Release 2 (12.2). This automatic
conversion is transparent, permanent, and occurs only once.
A-3
Appendix A
Downgrading from Oracle Database 12c
Note:
As of this automatic upgrade that occurs in Step 5, the configuration file
may henceforth reside on a disk having any supported disk sector size
(physical block size) up to and including 4KB sectors.
Note:
The observer that was started prior to the upgrade will automatically be
stopped and unable to observe the configuration once the upgrade is complete.
You must use an Oracle Database 12c version of the Oracle Observer software
to observe Oracle databases running on Oracle Database 12c Release 2 (12.2)
or higher.
A.3 Downgrading from Oracle Database 12c

If you have upgraded to Oracle Database 12c Release 1 (12.1) or Oracle Database
12c Release 2 (12.2) and want to downgrade to your prior release, then you must
downgrade the database release and re-create the broker configuration.
Take the following steps (these steps use Oracle Database 12c Release 2 (12.2), but
you could substitute Oracle Database 12c Release 1 (12.1)).
1. Delete (remove) the Oracle Database 12c Release 2 (12.2) broker configuration
using Enterprise Manager or DGMGRL running on Oracle Database 12c Release
2 (12.2). For example, the DGMGRL REMOVE CONFIGURATION command can be used.
2. Downgrade the Oracle Database software to the prior Oracle release. See the
Oracle Database documentation that is appropriate for your operating system.
3. You can downgrade the Oracle Data Guard broker to Oracle Database 10g or
Oracle Database 11g as follows:
• If you are confident that you made no changes to your broker configuration
after upgrading to Oracle Database 12c Release 2 (12.2), then you can copy
the broker configuration files that you created during the upgrade procedure
(described in Upgrading from Oracle Database 10g and Oracle Database 11g
to Oracle Database 12c ). Then, invoke Enterprise Manager or the DGMGRL
command-line interface and reenable the broker configuration as it existed at
the time you made that copy.
• Alternatively, you can invoke Enterprise Manager or the DGMGRL command-
line interface to re-create the broker configuration.
4. You can downgrade the Oracle Data Guard broker to Oracle Database 9i Release
2 (9.2), as follows:
• If you were using Oracle Enterprise Manager, you can continue to use it
running on Oracle Database 10g Release 2 (10.2) to manage your Oracle
Database 9i Release 2 (9.2) broker configuration. You can also downgrade to
the Oracle Data Guard Manager by re-installing Oracle Database 9i Release 2
(9.2) Enterprise Manager.
A-4
Appendix A
Downgrading from Oracle Database 12c
• Invoke Enterprise Manager, the Oracle Data Guard Manager, or the DGMGRL
command-line interface and re-create the broker configuration.
A-5
Glossary
apply instance
In an Oracle Real Application Clusters (Oracle RAC) databases environment, the
apply instance is the one instance applying archived redo data to a standby database.
broker
A distributed management framework that automates and simplifies most of the
complex operations required to create, control, and monitor an Oracle Data Guard
configuration.
broker configuration
A logical grouping of the primary and standby databases (including redo transport
services and log apply services) of an Oracle Data Guard configuration.
See also Data Guard configuration.
bystander standby database

A standby database that is not the target of, or directly involved in, a switchover or
failover operation.
configuration object
A named collection of database objects. It is an abstraction of an Oracle Data Guard
configuration.
database guard
The database guard controls whether or not modifications can be made to the tables in
a logical standby database.
database object
A named object that corresponds to a primary or standby database in an Oracle Data
Guard configuration. The broker uses this object to manage and control the state of a
single database and to associate properties with the database.
Data Guard command-line interface

The Oracle Data Guard command-line interface (DGMGRL) enables you to control
and monitor an Oracle Data Guard configuration from the DGMGRL prompt or within
scripts.
Glossary-1
Glossary
Data Guard configuration

A distributed computing system that prevents or minimizes losses due to unplanned
events (for example, human errors, environmental disasters, or data corruption) as
well as to planned downtime (such as for routine maintenance tasks).
See also broker configuration.
Data Guard environment

The physical configuration of the primary, standby databases, and far sync instances.
The environment depends on many factors, including the:
• Number of standby databases and far sync instances associated with a primary
database
• Number of host systems used by the databases

• Directory structures of the machines used by the databases
• Network configuration
• Redo transport services
• Log apply services
The Oracle Data Guard environment can be managed manually by a DBA,

automatically using Enterprise Manager or the Data Guard command-line interface
(DGMGRL) or a combination of all of these.
default state
The initial runtime state in which the database object will run when you enable broker
management of the configuration. The actual default state can vary depending on the
role (primary or standby) in which the database is running.
See also intended state.
failover
Failover changes a standby database into the role of a primary database and disables
the old primary database.
See also fast-start failover and manual failover.
far sync instance

A remote Oracle Data Guard destination that accepts redo from the primary database
and redistributes that redo throughout the Oracle Data Guard configuration. It is similar
to a physical standby database in that it manages a control file, receives redo into
Standby Redo Logs (SRLs), and archives those SRLs to local Archived Redo Logs
(ARLs). But unlike a standby database, a far sync instance does not manage data
files, cannot be opened for access, and cannot run redo apply.
fast-start failover
Enables a failover automatically when the primary database becomes unavailable.
When fast-start failover is enabled, the broker determines if a failover is necessary and
Glossary-2
Glossary
automatically, quickly, and reliably fails over to a designated standby without requiring
that you perform any manual steps to invoke the failover.
See also manual failover.
instance object
A named object; a database object is a collection of one or more named instance
objects. The broker uses this object to manage and control the state of the database
with which the instance is associated, and to associate instance-specific properties
with this instance of the database.
intended state
The runtime state of a database object while it is enabled for management by the
broker.
See also default state.
lights out computing

Refers to computing equipment or software whose operations are automated,
requiring little to no intervention by human administrators.
The term "lights out" originated from when computing centers were located in one
room and contained a number of servers that were kept under lock and key and in the
dark. Under normal operation, the room was not entered by human administrators, and
all operations in the room were automated.
logical standby database

A logical standby database takes standard Oracle archived redo log files, transforms
them back into SQL transactions, and then applies them to an open standby database.
Although changes can be applied concurrently with end-user access, the tables being
maintained through regenerated SQL transactions allow read-only access to users of
the logical standby database. Because the database is open to allow application of
reconstructed SQL transactions, it is physically different from the primary database.
The database tables can have different indexes and physical characteristics from their
primary database peers, but the tables must maintain logical consistency from an
application access perspective, to fulfill their role as a standby data source.
manual failover
A failover that is initiated by the DBA who first determines a failover is necessary and
then invokes one by clicking FAILOVER in Enterprise Manager or by issuing the
DGMGRL FAILOVER command. The word manual is used to contrast this type of failover
with a fast-start failover.
See also fast-start failover.
Glossary-3
Glossary
observer
A DGMGRL client that continuously monitors the primary and target standby
databases, evaluates whether failover is necessary, and initiates a fast-start failover
when conditions warrant.
physical standby database

A physical standby database is an exact copy of a primary database. While the
primary database is open and active, a physical standby database uses Redo Apply to
apply redo data received from the primary database. Redo Apply can run on a physical
standby database instance that is mounted. If a license for the Oracle Active Data
Guard option has been purchased, Redo Apply can also run on a physical standby
database instance that is open. See Oracle Data Guard Concepts and Administration
for more details.
primary database
A production database from which one or more standby databases is created and
maintained. Every standby database is associated with one and only one primary
database. A single primary database can, however, support multiple standby
databases. The Oracle Data Guard broker monitor (DMON) maintains the master copy
of the binary configuration file with the primary database, ensuring that each standby
database's copy of the file is kept up to date as changes are made.
The broker refers to this database using the value in the DB_UNIQUE_NAME initialization
parameter which is defined to be globally unique.
read-only mode
A mode in which a database can be opened that allows queries, but disallows
modifications.
A physical standby database can be opened read-only so that queries may be

performed. If a license for the Oracle Active Data Guard option has been purchased, a
physical standby database can be open while Redo Apply is active. This capability is
known as real-time query. See Oracle Data Guard Concepts and Administration for
more details.
Redo Apply
A physical standby database is kept synchronized with the primary database through
Redo Apply, which recovers the redo data received from the primary database and
applies the redo to the physical standby database.
reinstatement
Reinstatement is the process of turning a database, including the old primary
database, that had been disabled after a failover operation into a viable standby
database for the new primary database. Flashback database must be enabled on a
database in order to reinstate it.
Glossary-4
Glossary
snapshot standby database

A snapshot standby is a fully updatable standby database that is created from a
physical standby database. On snapshot standby databases, redo data is received but
not applied until the snapshot standby database is converted back to a physical
standby database.
SQL Apply
A logical standby database is kept synchronized with the primary database through
SQL Apply, which transforms the data in the redo received from the primary database
into SQL statements and then executes the SQL statements on the standby database.
standby database
A copy of a primary database created using a backup of your primary database.
Standby databases are kept synchronized with the primary database by applying
archived redo data over time from the primary database to each standby database.
The standby database can take over processing from the primary database, providing
nearly continuous database availability. A standby database has its own server
parameter file, control file, and data files. It also has a copy of the broker's
configuration file, kept up to date at the direction of the DMON process running in the
primary database instance.
The broker refers to a standby database by its globally unique name that is stored in
its DB_UNIQUE_NAME initialization parameter.
See also logical standby database, physical standby database and snapshot standby
database.
Glossary-5
Index
A before you use DGMGRL, 6-1
benefits
ADD DATABASE command, 7-10 Data Guard broker, 1-5
ADD FAR_SYNC command, 7-11 high availability, 1-5
Add Standby Database wizard scalability, 1-5
creating a broker configuration, 3-8 with Oracle Real Application Clusters, 1-5
definition, 1-9 Binding property, 8-26
introduction, 1-9 broker
altering components, 1-8
properties configuration, 1-1
database, 6-15 Data Guard configuration file, 1-12
states drc* log files, 9-1
database, 6-16 introduction, 1-2
application continuity user interfaces, 1-9
support in Oracle Data Guard broker, 5-60 broker configurations
application integration, 1-5 benefits, 1-5
apply instance, 4-21 changing roles, 3-8
failover, 4-21 creating, 6-2
PreferredApplyInstance property, 4-22 Data Guard configuration file, 1-10
selecting, 4-22 disabling databases, 3-11, 7-17
ApplyInstanceTimeout property, 8-24 effects of removing metadata from, 7-50
ApplyLagThreshold property, 8-24 enabling, 6-7, 7-35
ApplyParallel property, 8-25 enabling databases, 3-8, 3-11, 6-7, 7-35
architecture enabling fast-start failover, 7-37
Data Guard broker, 1-8 health, 1-10, 3-12
ARCHIVE_LAG_TARGET initialization parameter life cycle, 3-8
setting in a broker configuration, 8-26 management, 1-9, 1-10, 1-12
archived redo logs monitoring, 6-30
destination and configuration parameters, 3-1 Oracle Net Services configuration, 1-6, 1-9
in a Data Guard configuration, 3-1 properties, 4-5
primary database setup, 2-2 protection modes, 7-21
ArchiveLagTarget property, 8-26 setting protection mode, 4-25
ASYNC redo transport service, 4-10 status modes, 3-12
supported, 3-1
broker processes
B monitoring, 1-10
background processes bystander standby databases, 5-5
DMON, 1-10 reintegrating into configuration, 5-12
banners BystandersFollowRoleChange property, 8-3
suppressing from DGMGRL command-line
interface output, 7-1 C
batch programs
using Data Guard command-line interface CDBs
(DGMGRL), 7-1 Data Guard broker support, 1-4
before you perform a switchover, 5-5 CFS
Index-1
Index
See cluster file system configurable properties (continued)

changing, 7-20, 7-21 OnlineAlternateLocation, 8-45
properties OnlineArchiveLocation, 8-46
databases in a broker configuration, 3-8, PreferredApplyInstance, 8-46
4-7 RedoCompression, 8-48
roles RedoRoutes, 8-49
within the broker configuration, 3-8 ReopenSecs, 8-52
states resetting to default values, 4-8
databases in a broker configuration, 4-3 StandbyAlternateLocation, 8-53
of databases in a broker configuration, StandbyArchiveLocation, 8-53
6-15 StandbyFileManagement, 8-54
cluster file system (CFS) StaticConnectIdentifier, 8-55
broker configuration files, 3-6 TransportDisconnectedThreshold, 8-56
command prompts TransportLagThreshold, 8-56
suppressing from DGMGRL command-line configuration files
interface output, 7-1 fast-start failover configuration (fsfo.dat) file,
command-line interface 5-49
See Data Guard command-line interface See Also Data Guard configuration file, 1-12
(DGMGRL) configuration properties, 3-3
CommunicationTimeout property, 8-4 BystandersFollowRoleChange, 8-3
complete failover, 5-8, 7-41 CommunicationTimeout, 8-4
components FastStartFailoverAutoReinstate, 8-7
broker, 1-8 FastStartFailoverLagLimit, 8-7
Data Guard configuration, 3-1 FastStartFailoverPmyShutdown, 8-8
configurable properties, 4-5 FastStartFailoverThreshold, 8-9
ApplyInstanceTimeout, 8-24 ObserverOverride, 8-9
ApplyLagThreshold, 8-24 ObserverReconnect, 8-10
ApplyParallel, 8-25 OperationTimeout, 8-10
ArchiveLagTarget, 8-26 PrimaryLostWriteAction, 8-12
Binding, 8-26 Tracelevel, 8-13
database, 4-7, 8-20 connecting
DbFileNameConvert, 8-28 privileges required for Data Guard broker
DelayMins, 8-29 configurations, 7-7
DGConnectIdentifier, 8-30 starting the observer, 6-13
FastStartFailoverTarget, 8-31 controlling
InstanceName, 8-32 available SGA memory, 4-21
LogArchiveFormat, 8-33 CONVERT DATABASE command, 7-14
LogArchiveMaxProcesses, 8-34 CREATE CONFIGURATION command, 7-15
LogArchiveMinSucceedDest, 8-34 creating
LogArchiveTrace, 8-35 a broker configuration, 6-2
LogFileNameConvert, 8-36 with the Add Standby Database wizard,
LogShipping, 8-37 3-8
LogXptMode, 8-37 a standby database, 3-8
LsbyMaxEventsRecorded, 8-39
LsbyMaxServers, 8-39
LsbyMaxSga, 8-40 D
LsbyPreserveCommitOrder, 8-40
Data Guard
LsbyRecordAppliedDdl, 8-41
troubleshooting, 9-1
LsbyRecordSkipDdl, 8-41
Data Guard broker
LsbyRecordSkipErrors, 8-42
See Also broker, 1-2
managing redo transport services, 4-9
Data Guard command line interface
MaxConnections, 8-42
echoing commands, 7-55
MaxFailure, 8-43
Data Guard command-line interface
NetTimeout, 8-44
commands
ObserverConnectIdentifier, 8-44
Index-2
Index
Data Guard command-line interface (continued) Data Guard command-line interface (DGMGRL) (continued)
commands (continued) commands (continued)
ENABLE FAST_START FAILOVER, REMOVE CONFIGURATION, 7-50
7-37 REMOVE DATABASE, 7-51
SET STATE, 4-22 REMOVE FAR_SYNC, 7-52
DG_BROKER_START initialization REMOVE INSTANCE, 7-53
parameter, 2-2 SHOW CONFIGURATION, 7-58, 7-61
enabling a database, 6-7 SHOW DATABASE, 7-62
introduction, 1-10 SHOW FAR_SYNC, 7-65
Data Guard command-line interface (DGMGRL), SHOW FAST_START FAILOVER, 7-67
6-1 SHOW INSTANCE, 7-68
banners from output, 7-1 SHUTDOWN, 7-74
commands SQL, 7-76
ADD DATABASE, 7-10 START OBSERVER, 7-77
ADD FAR_SYNC, 7-11 STARTUP, 7-82
CONVERT DATABASE, 7-14 STOP OBSERVER, 7-83
CREATE CONFIGURATION, 7-15 SWITCHOVER, 6-21, 7-85
DISABLE CONFIGURATION, 7-17 VALIDATE DATABASE, 7-88
DISABLE DATABASE, 7-17 VALIDATE FAR_SYNC, 7-96
DISABLE FAR_SYNC, 7-15, 7-18 creating a configuration, 6-2
DISABLE FAST_START FAILOVER, DG_BROKER_START initialization
7-18 parameter, 7-6
DISABLE FAST_START FAILOVER enabling the configuration, 6-7
CONDITION, 7-19 monitoring broker configurations, 6-30
EDIT CONFIGURATION (property), 7-20 performing routine management tasks, 6-15
EDIT CONFIGURATION (protection prerequisites, 6-1
mode), 7-21 setting critical database properties, 6-5
EDIT CONFIGURATION (RENAME), setting up standby redo log files, 4-27
7-15, 7-23 single command mode, 7-1
EDIT CONFIGURATION RESET starting, 7-1
(Property), 7-15, 7-24 stopping, 7-8
EDIT DATABASE (Property), 7-15, 7-24 string values, 7-7
EDIT DATABASE (rename), 7-26 summary of commands, 7-3
EDIT DATABASE (state), 7-26 suppressing command prompts, 7-1
EDIT DATABASE RESET (Property), Data Guard configuration file
7-27 for an Oracle RAC database, 3-5
EDIT FAR_SYNC, 7-28 in a CFS area, 3-6
EDIT FAR_SYNC RESET (Property), inconsistent values from server parameter
7-28 file, 8-15
EDIT INSTANCE (AUTO PFILE), 7-29 relationship to DMON process, 1-10
EDIT INSTANCE (property), 7-30, 7-31 setting up, 3-4
EDIT INSTANCE RESET (Property), Data Guard configurations
7-31 automated creation of, 1-6
ENABLE CONFIGURATION, 7-35 background, 3-1
ENABLE DATABASE, 7-36 Data Guard monitor (DMON), 1-10
ENABLE FAR_SYNC, 7-37 interaction with the Oracle database, 1-10
ENABLE FAST_START FAILOVER, managing objects, 3-2, 3-8, 6-7
7-37 Oracle database background processes,
ENABLE FAST_START FAILOVER 1-10
CONDITION, 7-39 overview, 1-10
EXIT, 7-41 two-way network communication, 1-10
FAILOVER, 6-26 data protection modes
HELP, 7-44 See protection modes
QUIT, 7-49 database resources
REINSTATE DATABASE, 7-49 monitoring, 1-8
3
Index
database status DISABLE FAST_START FAILOVER command,

querying, 4-38 7-18
databases DISABLE FAST_START FAILOVER
changing the state of, 6-15 CONDITION command, 7-19
creating and adding to a broker configuration, disabling, 7-17
1-9 broker configuration, 6-16, 7-17
dependencies, 4-1 broker management of standby database,
disabling management of, 7-17 7-17
during databases, 6-17
fast-start failover, 5-16 fast-start failover, 5-37, 7-18
manual failover, 5-8 on a standby database, 5-38
switchover, 5-4 disaster protection
enabling, 6-7 benefits, 1-5
health, 4-37 displaying
installation for broker management, 2-2 configuration information, 7-58
monitorable properties, 4-7 help for DGMGRL commands, 7-44
network setup, 1-10, 2-2 distributed management framework, 1-2
properties, 1-9, 4-7 DMON
property management, 1-12 See Data Guard monitor (DMON)
reenabling after a role transition, 5-14 downgrading
restarting Data Guard, A-4
after fast-start failover, 5-55 Oracle Enterprise Manager, A-4
shutting down protection mode, 4-29
effect on fast-start failover, 5-28, 5-31 drc* log files
states, 4-1 broker diagnostic information, 9-1
dependencies, 4-1 during reinstatement, 5-35
transitions, 4-3 recording failed reinstatement, 5-55
status, 4-37
DBA_LOGSTDBY_EVENTS table E
managing, 4-21
DbFileNameConvert property, 8-28 e-mail
DBMS_DG package reporting events, 1-9
using to direct fast-start failover, 5-32 EDIT CONFIGURATION (Property) command,
delaying 7-20
application of redo data with DelayMins EDIT CONFIGURATION (protection mode)
property, 4-19 command, 7-21
DelayMins property, 8-29 EDIT CONFIGURATION (RENAME) command,
destinations 7-15, 7-23
archived redo log file parameters, 3-1 EDIT CONFIGURATION RESET (Property)
viewing the LogXptStatus property, 8-15 command, 7-15, 7-24
DG_BROKER_CONFIG_FILEn file, 3-5 EDIT DATABASE (property) command
in a CFS area, 3-6 example, 6-15
DG_BROKER_START initialization parameter, EDIT DATABASE (Property) command, 7-15,
2-2, 6-1, 7-6 7-24
DGConnectIdentifier property, 8-30 EDIT DATABASE (rename) command, 7-26
DGMGRL EDIT DATABASE (state) command, 7-26
reinstating a database, 5-15 example, 6-16
diagnostic information EDIT DATABASE RESET (Property) command,
sources, 9-1 7-27
DISABLE CONFIGURATION command, 7-17 EDIT FAR_SYNC command, 7-28
example, 6-17 EDIT FAR_SYNC RESET (Property) command,
DISABLE DATABASE command, 7-17 7-28
example, 6-17 EDIT INSTANCE (AUTO PFILE) command, 7-29
DISABLE FAR_SYNC command, 7-15, 7-18 EDIT INSTANCE (property) command, 7-30,
7-31
Index-4
Index
EDIT INSTANCE RESET (Property) command, failovers (continued)

7-31 manual (continued)
editing complete option, 5-8
configurable properties, 7-20 effect on data protection mode, 5-11
database instance, 7-29–7-31 immediate option, 5-8
database name, 7-26 reenabling disabled databases after, 5-12
database state, 7-26 starting manually, 5-9
protection modes, 7-21 using DGMGRL, 6-26
ENABLE CONFIGURATION command, 6-7, 7-35 failures
ENABLE DATABASE command, 7-36 observer, 5-46
ENABLE FAR_SYNC command, 7-37 far sync instances
ENABLE FAST_START FAILOVER command, managing, 4-32
7-37 fast-start failover
ENABLE FAST_START FAILOVER CONDITION configuration information in the fsfo.dat file,
command, 7-39 5-49
enabling, 7-37 defined, 5-16
broker configuration, 3-8, 6-7 DGMGRL client as the observer, 1-10
Enterprise Edition database directed from an application, 5-32
installation, 2-1 disabling, 5-37, 5-38
Enterprise Manager to perform manual failover, 5-39
Fast-Start Failover wizard enabling, 7-37
disabling fast-start failover, 5-37 instance failures, 5-28
wizards monitoring by the observer, 5-28
automate standby database creation, 1-3 observer overview, 5-16
error messages performing manual failovers when enabled,
ORA-16795, 5-14 5-31
error status, 3-12 performing switchover when enabled, 5-31
events querying V$DATABASE, 5-31
managing reinstating the former primary database, 5-53
in a logical standby database, 4-21 restarting databases after shut down, 5-55
monitoring with Oracle Enterprise Manager, setting the FastStartFailoverThreshold
1-3 property, 5-22
Oracle Enterprise Manager, 1-8 shutdown abort, 5-28, 5-31
reporting, 1-9 to Oracle RAC database instances, 5-29
responding to, 1-8 tuning, 4-34
EXIT command, 7-41, 7-49 unobserved, 5-46
See also QUIT command viewing failover configuration statistics, 5-35
FastStartFailoverAutoReinstate property, 8-7
F FastStartFailoverLagLimit property, 8-7
FastStartFailoverPmyShutdown property, 8-8
failover FastStartFailoverTarget property, 8-31
failing over to a standby database, 7-41 FastStartFailoverThreshold property, 8-9
Oracle Enterprise Manager, 1-9 setting, 5-22
FAILOVER command, 6-26, 7-41 FASTSYNC redo transport mode, 8-38
failovers FASTSYNC redo transport service, 4-10
benefits, 1-5 files
broker tasks, 5-12 naming the server parameter file, 1-12
choosing a target standby database, 5-2 Flashback Database
complete, 5-12 reinstating databases, 5-15
fast-start failover, 5-31 use after failover, 5-12
immediate, 5-13 flashback logs
managing, 5-1 reinstating a failed primary database, 5-15
fast-start, 5-16 FORCE option
manual, 5-8 performing a manual failover, 5-39
manual FS_FAILOVER_OBSERVER_HOST column
5
Index
FS_FAILOVER_OBSERVER_HOST column (continued) log apply services

of V$DATABASE view, 5-44 and apply instance failover, 4-21
FS_FAILOVER_OBSERVER_PRESENT column and parallel apply, 4-19
of V$DATABASE view, 5-45 apply instance, 4-21
FS_FAILOVER_STATUS column configuring, 1-9
of V$DATABASE view Data Guard configuration, 3-1
failed reinstatement, 5-35 delayed application of redo data, 4-19
FSFO.DAT file delaying, 8-29
overview, 5-49 in an Oracle RAC database, 4-21
managing, 4-18
selecting the apply instance, 4-22
H verifying, 1-7
health check, 1-8 log files
monitoring, 1-10 broker, 5-55
on primary database, 4-37 LogArchiveFormat property, 8-33
on standby database, 4-37 LogArchiveMaxProcesses property, 8-34
revealed by configuration status, 3-12 LogArchiveMinSucceedDest property, 8-34
HELP command, 7-44 LogArchiveTrace property, 8-35
high availability LogFileNameConvert property, 8-36
benefits, 1-5 logical standby databases
levels of data protection, 4-25, 8-37 managing events, 4-21
LogXptMode property, 8-37 SQL Apply, 4-21
restoring after fast-start failover, 5-53 state transitions, 4-3
switchover to the primary role, 5-5
LogShipping property, 8-37
I LogXptMode property, 8-37
immediate failover, 5-8, 7-41 LogXptStatus property, 8-15
InconsistenLogXptProps property, 8-14 LsbyFailedTxnInfo property, 8-16
InconsistentProperties property, 8-15 LsbyMaxEventsRecorded property, 8-39
increased scalability LsbyMaxServers property, 8-39
benefits, 1-5 LsbyMaxSga property, 8-40
initialization parameters LsbyParameters property, 8-17
database configurable properties, 4-7 LsbyPreserveCommitOrder property, 8-40
DG_BROKER_CONFIG_FILEn, 3-5 LsbyRecordAppliedDdl property, 8-41
DG_BROKER_START, 2-2, 6-1 LsbyRecordSkipDdl property, 8-41
dynamic, 4-8 LsbyRecordSkipErrors property, 8-42
static, 4-8
installation M
ARCHIVELOG mode setup, 2-2
Data Guard, 2-1 management
Oracle Enterprise Manager, 2-1 benefits, 1-5
Oracle Instant Client, 2-1, 7-77 Oracle Enterprise Manager, 1-9
prerequisites, 2-2 managing
InstanceName property, 8-32 a broker configuration, 6-1
instances broker configurations, 3-1
failures, 5-28 databases, 4-1
removing, 7-19, 7-39 DBA_LOGSTDBY_EVENTS table, 4-21
shutting down, 7-74 events
starting, 7-82 in a logical standby database, 4-21
intended state fast-start failover, 5-16
configuration health check, 3-12 local operations, 1-2
log apply services, 4-18
manual failover, 5-8
L parallel apply in a physical standby database,
life cycle of a broker configuration, 3-8 4-19
Index-6
Index
managing (continued) normal status, 3-12

remote operations, 1-2
roles, 5-1
fast-start failover, 5-16
O
manual failover, 5-8 objects
switchover, 5-4 broker configuration, 3-2
switchover, 5-4 disabling, 6-16
manual failover, 1-7, 5-1 observer, 5-16
complete option, 5-8 and FastStartFailoverThreshold property,
effect on protection modes, 4-30 5-22
immediate option, 5-8 connecting to the configuration, 6-13
performing when fast-start failover is connection to the local computer, 5-45
enabled, 5-31, 5-39 detecting
starting, 5-9 database shutdown, 5-28, 5-31
manual role changes instance failures, 5-28
performing when fast-start failover is failures, 5-46
enabled, 5-31 finding host machine name, 5-44
MaxConnections property, 8-42 installing Oracle Instant Client kit, 2-1, 7-77
MaxFailure property, 8-43 lost connection, 5-46
maximize availability, 1-7, 8-37 maintaining fast-start failover configuration
maximize data protection, 1-7, 8-37 information, 5-49
maximize performance, 1-7, 8-37 monitoring, 5-28
maximum availability using Oracle Wallet for connection
data protection mode, 4-25 credentials, 7-14
maximum performance ObserverConnectIdentifier property, 8-44
data protection mode, 4-25 ObserverOverride property, 8-9
maximum protection ObserverReconnect property, 8-10
data protection mode, 4-25 OnlineAlternateLocation property, 8-45
monitorable properties, 4-5, 4-7, 8-14 OnlineArchiveLocation property, 8-46
InconsistentLogXptProps, 8-14 operations
InconsistentProperties, 8-15 complete failover, 7-41
LogXptStatus, 8-15 disable broker management
LsbyFailedTxnInfo, 8-16 effect on protection modes, 4-30
LsbyParameters, 8-17 downgrade
RecvQEntries, 8-17 effect on protection modes, 4-29
SendQEntries, 8-18 effect on protection modes, 4-28
TopWaitEvents, 8-20 enable broker management
monitoring effect on protection modes, 4-31
broker configurations, 1-10, 6-1, 6-30 failover, 6-26
broker processes, 1-10 immediate failover, 7-41
local and remote databases, 1-8 manual failover
Oracle Enterprise Manager performance effect on protection modes, 4-30
page, 3-8 removing a database from the configuration
through the command-line interface, 1-10 effect on protection modes, 4-31
multitenant container databases OperationTimeout property, 8-10
See CDBs, 1-4 ORA-16661 message
reinstating a database, 5-14, 5-15
N ORA-16795 message
re-creating a database, 5-14
NetTimeout property, 8-44 Oracle Clusterware, 1-5
network configurations and instances of an Oracle RAC database,
validating before role changes, 4-40 1-5
networks integration with Data Guard broker, 1-5
Data Guard configuration, 3-1 recover failed instances, 1-5
two-way communication, 1-10 Oracle Enterprise Manager, 1-9
7
Index
Oracle Enterprise Manager (continued) primary database

Add Standby Database wizard, 1-9 ARCHIVELOG mode, 2-2
database property pages, 1-9 constructing a standby database, 3-8, 6-1
downgrading, A-4 Data Guard configuration, 3-1
event management system, 1-8 during failover, 1-9
integration, 1-9 during switchover, 5-7
integration with the Data Guard monitor, 1-9 Flashback Database, 5-15
introduction, 1-2, 1-8 health check, 4-37
making Oracle Net Services configuration preparing for switchover, 5-5
changes, 1-6, 1-9 reinstating after a fast-start failover, 5-53
monitoring events, 1-3 state transitions, 4-3
performance tools and graphs, 1-9 switching over to the standby role, 7-85
upgrading, A-1 PrimaryLostWriteAction property, 8-12
wizards processes
creating standby databases, 1-9 DMON, 1-10
Oracle Instant Client Oracle database, 1-10
installing, 2-1, 7-77 properties, 4-7
Oracle Net Services configurable, 4-5
configuration changes, 1-6, 1-9 database, 4-5
supported configuration, 3-1 managing, 1-12
two-way communication, 1-10 monitorable, 4-5
Oracle RAC One Node setting, 3-8, 6-5
supported by Oracle Data Guard broker, 1-1 in server parameter file, 1-12, 2-2
Oracle Real Application Clusters showing values for, 7-58
and log apply services, 4-21 property pages
and redo transport services, 4-15 database, 1-9
and setting the apply instance, 4-22 protection modes, 5-11
availability of instances with Oracle after a failover, 4-30, 5-11
Clusterware, 1-5 benefits, 1-7
benefits, 1-5 configuration, 7-21, 7-23, 7-24
fast-start failover, 5-29 downgrading, 4-29
observer behavior in, 5-29 redo transport services setup, 8-37
observer connection to instances, 5-45 setting for a broker configuration, 4-25
Oracle Clusterware, 1-5 updating, 3-8
Oracle Universal Installer upgrading, 4-29
installing Oracle Instant Client, 2-1, 7-77
Oracle Wallet
starting the observer, 7-14
Q
QUIT command, 7-41, 7-49
See also EXIT command
P
parallel apply R
and log apply services, 4-19
managing in a physical standby database, RecvQEntries property, 8-17
4-19 Redo Apply, 3-2
performance redo transport services
Oracle Enterprise Manager tools, 1-9 ASYNC mode, 4-10
physical standby databases configuring, 1-9
managing parallel apply, 4-19 data protection modes, 8-37
state transitions, 4-3 Data Guard configuration, 3-1
switchover to the primary role, 5-5 FASTSYNC mode, 4-10, 8-38
PreferredApplyInstance property, 8-46 in an Oracle RAC environment, 4-15
prerequisites managing, 4-9
installation, 2-2 SYNC mode, 4-10
switchover, 5-5 tuning, 4-15
Index-8
Index
redo transport services (continued) setting

turning off, 4-14 configuration protection mode, 4-25
turning on, 4-13 database properties, 6-5
verifying, 1-7 log apply services, 4-14
RedoCompression property, 8-48 redo transport services, 4-15
RedoRoutes property, 8-49 SGA memory
REINSTATE DATABASE command, 7-49 and SQL Apply, 4-21
reinstatement, 5-53 SHOW ALL command, 7-58
failure logged in broker drc* log files, 5-35 SHOW CONFIGURATION command, 6-8, 7-58,
Flashback Database requirement, 5-15 7-61
flashback logs requirement, 5-15 SHOW DATABASE command, 7-62
how to, 5-15 SHOW FAR_SYNC command, 7-65
logged in broker log files, 5-55 SHOW FAST_START FAILOVER command,
ORA-16661 message, 5-14, 5-15 7-67
using DGMGRL, 5-15 SHOW INSTANCE command, 7-68
using Enterprise Manager, 5-15 showing
REMOVE CONFIGURATION command, 7-50 See each SHOW command
example, 6-21 shutdown abort, 5-28
REMOVE DATABASE command, 7-51 effect on fast-start failover, 5-31
REMOVE FAR_SYNC command, 7-52 SHUTDOWN command, 7-74
REMOVE INSTANCE command, 7-53 shutting down an Oracle instance, 7-74
removing, 7-50 single command mode
a standby database, 4-31 for Data Guard command-line interface, 7-1
See also each REMOVE command SQL Apply, 3-2
ReopenSecs property, 8-52 and logical standby databases, 4-21
requests SQL command, 7-76
passing between sites, 1-10 SQL statements
restarting executing from DGMGRL command line,
databases 7-76
when fast-start failover is enabled, 5-55 standby databases
role transitions choosing a target standby database, 5-2
changing, 3-8 constructing from backups, 3-8, 6-1
managing, 5-1 creating, 1-9
fast-start failover, 5-16 health check, 4-37
manual failover, 5-8 not involved in a switchover, 5-7
switchover, 5-4 reenabling after failover, 5-12
removing, 4-31
specifying the location of archived redo logs,
S 4-14
scripts switching over to the primary role, 7-85
using Data Guard command-line interface standby redo log files
(DGMGRL), 7-1 setting up with DGMGRL, 4-27
selecting the apply instance, 4-22 StandbyAlternateLocation property, 8-53
SendQEntries property, 8-18 setting log apply services, 4-14
server parameter file StandbyArchiveLocation property, 8-53
broker property management, 1-12, 2-2 setting log apply services, 4-14
filenames, 1-12 StandbyFileManagement property, 8-54
inconsistent values from Data Guard START OBSERVER command
configuration file, 8-15 fast-start failover configuration file (fsfo.dat),
server parameter files 5-49
validating before role changes, 4-40 starting, 7-1
server-side software, 1-10 Data Guard command-line interface
SET ECHO command, 7-55 (DGMGRL), 6-2
SET STATE command Data Guard monitor (DMON), 3-7
and setting the apply instance, 4-22 manual failover, 5-9
9
Index
starting (continued) switchovers (continued)

Oracle instance, 7-82 using the DGMGRL SWITCHOVER
switchover, 5-7 command, 7-85
STARTUP command, 7-82 SYNC redo transport mode, 4-10
state transitions SYSDBA privileges
effect on database states, 4-3 to connect to the database, 7-7
logical standby database, 4-3
physical standby database, 4-3
primary database, 4-3
T
states, 3-11 target standby database
changing, 6-15 choosing, 5-2
database, 4-1 disabling fast-start failover on, 5-38
database transitions, 4-3 TopWaitEvents property, 8-20
static connect identifiers TraceLevel property, 8-13
validating, 7-99 transaction commit order
validating before role changes, 4-40 controlling, 4-21
StaticConnectIdentifier property, 8-55 transport lag, 4-16
status TRANSPORT-ON state
configuration, 3-12 setting LogShipping property, 8-37
health check on primary database, 4-37 TransportDisconnectedThreshold property, 8-56
health check on standby database, 4-37 TransportLagThreshold property, 8-56
health of the database, 4-37 troubleshooting
intended state of a configuration, 3-12 Data Guard, 9-1
status messages diagnostics logged in broker drc* log files,
ORA-16661, 5-14 9-1
ORA-16795, 5-14 tuning
STOP OBSERVER command, 7-77, 7-83 redo transport services, 4-15
string values tuning fast-start failover, 4-34
Data Guard command-line interface, 7-7 two-way communication channel, 1-10
SWITCHOVER command, 6-21, 7-85
switchovers
benefits, 1-5 U
broker tasks, 5-7 unobserved configuration, 5-46
choosing a target standby database, 5-2 updating configuration properties, 4-5
DGMGRL SWITCHOVER command, 6-21 upgrading
effect on Data Guard, A-1, A-2
database startup, 7-86 Oracle Enterprise Manager, A-1
primary database, 5-7 protection mode, 4-29
protection modes, 4-29 user interfaces
standby databases not involved in the overview, 1-9
switchover, 5-7
managing, 5-1, 5-4
overview, 5-1 V
Oracle Enterprise Manager, 1-9
V$DATABASE view
performing when fast-start failover is
fast-start failover columns, 5-31
enabled, 5-31
FS_FAILOVER_OBSERVER_HOST column,
preparing the primary database, 5-5
5-44
prerequisites, 5-5
FS_FAILOVER_OBSERVER_PRESENT
reenabling disabled standby databases, 5-14
column, 5-45
starting, 5-7
viewing
transitioning
fast-start failover statistics, 5-35
a logical standby database to the primary
V$DATAGUARD_PROCESS
role, 5-5
using to monitor broker processes, 1-10
a physical standby database to the
V$FS_FAILOVER_STATS view, 5-37
primary role, 5-5
VALIDATE DATABASE command, 7-88
Index-10
Index
VALIDATE DATABASE SPFILE command, 4-40,

7-95
VALIDATE FAR_SYNC command, 7-96
W
VALIDATE NETWORK CONFIGURATION warning status, 3-12
command, 4-40, 7-98 wizards
VALIDATE STATIC CONNECT IDENTIFIER Add Standby Database, 1-9
command, 4-40, 7-99
11

Data Guard Broker PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Data Guard Broker PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Data Guard Broker PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Oracle® Data Guard

Primary Author: Kathy Rich

Changes in This Release for Oracle Data Guard Broker

1 Oracle Data Guard Broker Concepts

2 Oracle Data Guard Installation

4 Managing the Members of a Broker Configuration

5 Switchover and Failover Operations

6 Scenarios Using the DGMGRL Command-Line Interface

7 Oracle Data Guard Command-Line Interface Reference

8 Oracle Data Guard Broker Properties

9 Troubleshooting Oracle Data Guard

A Oracle Data Guard Broker Upgrading and Downgrading

Access to Oracle Support

Changes in Oracle Database Release 18c, Version 18.1

1.1 Overview of Oracle Data Guard and the Broker

Oracle Data Guard and Oracle RAC One Node

1.1.1 Oracle Data Guard Configurations and Broker Configurations

1.1.2 Oracle Data Guard Broker

Table 1-1 Configuration Management With and Without the Broker

Tasks With the Broker Without the Broker

Tasks With the Broker Without the Broker

1.1.3 Oracle Data Guard Broker and CDBs

Keep the following in mind:

• Oracle Database Concepts for more information about CDBs

Managing Broker Configurations in a GDS Pool

Managing Individual Configuration Databases When They Are Part of a GDS

• Oracle Database Global Data Services Concepts and Administration Guide

1.2 Benefits of Oracle Data Guard Broker

Support for Oracle RAC One Node:

Automated creation of an Oracle Data Guard configuration:

Easy configuration of additional standbys:

Simplified, centralized, and extended management:

Simplified switchover and failover operations:

Built-in monitoring and alert and control mechanisms:

1.3 Oracle Data Guard Broker Components

Figure 1-1 Oracle Data Guard Broker

Oracle Enterprise Manager

Data Guard Command-Line Interface (DGMGRL)

1.4 Oracle Data Guard Broker User Interfaces

1.4.1 Oracle Enterprise Manager Cloud Control

1.4.2 Oracle Data Guard Command-Line Interface (DGMGRL)

1.5 Oracle Data Guard Monitor

1.5.1 Oracle Data Guard Monitor (DMON) Process

Figure 1-2 Databases With Broker (DMON) Processes

Oracle Database Instance

System Data Database Log

Oracle Database Instance

Monitoring Data Guard Broker Processes

• ROLE — broker monitor

• PID — operating system process identifier of the process

• Oracle Database Reference for more information about the

1.5.2 Configuration Management

Whenever you add databases to a broker configuration, or make a change to an

1.5.3 Database Property Management

2.1 Oracle Data Guard Installation

• In a broker configuration, you use the DGConnectIdentifer property to specify a

• To enable DGMGRL to restart instances during the course of broker operations, a

– See Oracle Database Net Services Administrator's Guide for more

• The primary database must be opened in ARCHIVELOG mode.